You are on page 1of 466

3GPP2 TSG-C

Date: October 15, 2001

Signaling Conformance Tests for cdma2000


Spread Spectrum Systems

Ballot Resolution Version

C.S0031-0 version 2.0

COPYRIGHT

3GPP2 and its Organizational Partners claim copyright in this document and individual

Organizational Partners may copyright and issue documents or standards publications in

individual Organizational Partner's name based on this document. Requests for reproduction

of this document should be directed to the 3GPP2 Secretariat at secretariat@3gpp2.org.

Requests to reproduce individual Organizational Partner's documents should be directed to

that Organizational Partner. See www.3gpp2.org for more information.


Copyright © 2001 3GPP2.
TSG-C42 Page i

CONTENTS

1
2 FOREWORD........................................................................................................................... xviii
3 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ xviii
4 Testing Objective................................................................................................................. xviii
5 Execution Strategy................................................................................................................ xix
6 Acronyms and Abbreviations .............................................................................................. xxiii
7 Supplementary Terms and Definitions................................................................................ xxix
8 CDMA Equations ............................................................................................................... xlviii
9 Tolerances.................................................................................................................................l
10 Normative Document References ..............................................................................................l
11 1 Miscellaneous Air Iterface Tests ........................................................................................ 1-1
12 1.1 Pilot PN Offset ............................................................................................................... 1-1
13 1.2 Hashing CDMA Channels, Paging Channels, and Paging Slot....................................... 1-2
14 1.3 Idle Ping Pong with Quick Paging Channel CCI............................................................. 1-4
15 1.4 Quick Paging Indicator.................................................................................................. 1-6
16 1.5 Mobile Station Processing of the Access Parameters Message ....................................... 1-8
17 1.6 Mobile Station Processing of MIN_P_REV .................................................................... 1-10
18 1.7 Mobile Station Response to Status Request Message .................................................. 1-11
19 1.8 Protocol Discriminator (PD) Test and Link Access Control (LAC) PDU Format Test on the
20 Access Channel........................................................................................................... 1-12
21 1.9 Logging Tests .............................................................................................................. 1-15
22 1.10 SYNC Channel Support ............................................................................................. 1-26
23 2 POTS Tests........................................................................................................................ 2-1
24 2.1 Mobile Station Originated Call ...................................................................................... 2-3
25 2.2 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Radio Link Failure During Conversation - Reverse Link2-6
26 2.3 Mobile Station to Land Party, Radio Link Failure During Conversation - Forward Link 2-6
27 2.4 Mobile Station Originated Call, Test Service Options .................................................... 2-7
28 2.5 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Busy Tone ............................................................... 2-8
29 2.6 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, No Traffic Channel Resources Available .................. 2-8
30 2.7 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Reverse Link Failure During Call Setup .................. 2-9
31 2.8 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Forward Link Failure During Call Setup ................. 2-9
32 2.9 Mobile Station Terminated Call................................................................................... 2-10
33 2.10 Mobile Station terminated Call, Test Service Options................................................ 2-12
34 2.11 Land Party to Mobile Station Call, Mobile Operating in Slotted Mode........................ 2-13

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page ii

CONTENTS

1 2.12 MSID, MCC, and IMSI ............................................................................................... 2-14


2 2.13 TMSI Assignment ...................................................................................................... 2-17
3 2.14 TMSI Expiration Time................................................................................................ 2-17
4 2.15 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, DTMF .................................................................. 2-18
5 2.16 Forward Traffic Channel DTMF Tone Signaling ......................................................... 2-21
6 2.17 Enhanced DTMF Signaling ........................................................................................ 2-22
7 2.18 Channel Assignment from CDMA to AMPS................................................................ 2-22
8 2.19 PACA Origination, User Terminates While Still In Queue .......................................... 2-23
9 2.20 PACA Origination, Idle Handoff While in Queue ........................................................ 2-24
10 2.21 PACA Origination, Traffic Channel Becomes Available .............................................. 2-26
11 2.22 PACA Origination, Features Interaction..................................................................... 2-26
12 2.23 PACA Origination, Permanent Invocation .................................................................. 2-27
13 2.24 PACA Origination, PACA Disabled for Mobile Station ................................................ 2-28
14 2.25 True IMSI Support..................................................................................................... 2-29
15 2.26 Initial Service Configuration and Negotiation ............................................................ 2-31
16 2.27 Base Station Requested Service Negotiation (Successful Scenarios) .......................... 2-35
17 2.28 Base Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation ......................................... 2-37
18 2.29 Mobile Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation ...................................... 2-40
19 2.30 Service Negotiation Completion via General Handoff Direction Message and Universal
20 Handoff Direction Message .......................................................................................... 2-41
21 2.31 SCR without NN-SCR and NN-SCR without SCR in General Handoff Direction Message
22 and Universal Handoff Direction Message.................................................................... 2-42
23 2.32 Base Station Request Overrides the Mobile Station Request ..................................... 2-44
24 2.33 Service Negotiation Involving Partial SCR and/or Partial NN-SCR............................. 2-45
25 2.34 Quasi-Orthogonal Functions (QOF) assignment........................................................ 2-46
26 2.35 Release Order on Access Channel ............................................................................. 2-47

27 3 Handoff Tests .................................................................................................................... 3-1


28 3.1 Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold........................................................................... 3-1
29 3.2 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in the Same Band Class ....................................... 3-7
30 3.3 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS............................................................................... 3-9
31 3.4 Soft Handoff in Fading ................................................................................................ 3-10
32 3.5 Hard Handoff in Fading .............................................................................................. 3-14
33 3.6 Hard Handoff Between Different Band Classes ........................................................... 3-16
34 3.7 Hard Handoff with and without Return on Failure...................................................... 3-17
35 3.8 Search Window Size and Offset Per Neighbor.............................................................. 3-19

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page iii

CONTENTS

1 3.9 Access Handoffs .......................................................................................................... 3-25


2 3.10 Traffic Channel Preamble during Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in same band 3-32
3 3.11 Hopping Pilot Beacon ................................................................................................ 3-33
4 3.12 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Radio Configurations.................. 3-35
5 3.13 Handoff on Same Frequency with Different Radio Configurations............................. 3-36
6 3.14 Hard Handoff while in the Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate .................... 3-38
7 3.15 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to CDMA) ...................................................... 3-39
8 3.16 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to AMPS) ....................................................... 3-41
9 3.17 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Protocol Revisions....................... 3-43

10 4 Power Control Tests .......................................................................................................... 4-1


11 4.1 Forward Traffic Channel Power Control ........................................................................ 4-1
12 4.2 Mobile Station Response to Power Up Function (PUF) Message ..................................... 4-4
13 4.3 Fast Forward Power Control (FFPC) .............................................................................. 4-8
14 5 Registration Tests.............................................................................................................. 5-1
15 5.1 Power-Up Registration .................................................................................................. 5-1
16 5.2 Power-Down Registration .............................................................................................. 5-2
17 5.3 Timer-Based Registration.............................................................................................. 5-4
18 5.4 Distance-Based Registration ......................................................................................... 5-5
19 5.5 Zone-Based Registration ............................................................................................... 5-9
20 5.6 Parameter-Change Registration .................................................................................. 5-11
21 5.7 Registration Under Various Settings of MOB_TERM ................................................... 5-13
22 6 Authentication Tests ......................................................................................................... 6-1
23 6.1 Shared Secret Data Initialized to Zero........................................................................... 6-1
24 6.2 Shared Secret Data Update on the Paging/Access Channels ........................................ 6-3
25 6.3 Shared Secret Data Update on the Forward/Reverse Traffic Channels ......................... 6-4
26 6.4 Mismatched A-Keys....................................................................................................... 6-5
27 6.5 Activating Voice Privacy on Call Setup .......................................................................... 6-6
28 6.6 Activating Voice Privacy at the Mobile Station When a Call Is Active ............................ 6-7
29 6.7 Signaling Message Encryption on Forward Traffic Channel (Alert with Information
30 Message) ....................................................................................................................... 6-8
31 6.8 Signaling Message Encryption on Reverse Traffic Channel (Burst DTMF Message) ....... 6-9
32 6.9 Hard Handoffs between Base Stations with SME Active................................................ 6-9
33 6.10 Signaling Message Encryption Mobile Terminated SMS (Data Burst Message) .......... 6-11
34 6.11 Authentication Upon Originations............................................................................. 6-12
35 6.12 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS with SME Active ................................................ 6-13

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page iv

CONTENTS

1 7 Service Redirection............................................................................................................ 7-1


2 7.1 Global Service Redirection Tests ................................................................................... 7-1
3 7.2 Network Directed System Selection and Normal Service Redirection Tests ................... 7-6
4 7.3 Extended Global Service Redirection Tests ................................................................. 7-11
5 8 Short Message Service (SMS)............................................................................................. 8-1
6 8.1 Mobile Station Terminated SMS Tests........................................................................... 8-2
7 8.2 Mobile Station Originated SMS Tests ............................................................................ 8-9
8 8.3 Broadcast SMS Tests .................................................................................................. 8-14

9 9 Subscriber Calling Features Tests..................................................................................... 9-1


10 9.1 Call Forwarding............................................................................................................. 9-1
11 9.2 Three-Way Calling......................................................................................................... 9-4
12 9.3 Land Party to Mobile Station Caller ID.......................................................................... 9-6
13 9.4 Call Waiting .................................................................................................................. 9-8
14 9.5 Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) .................................................................................. 9-9
15 9.6 Land Party to Mobile Station Calling Name Presentation ............................................ 9-11
16 9.7 Display Records .......................................................................................................... 9-14
17 9.8 TTY/TDD .................................................................................................................... 9-17
18 9.9 Answer Holding........................................................................................................... 9-19
19 9.10 User Selective Call Forwarding .................................................................................. 9-21
20 10 Asynchronous Data and Fax Services ............................................................................. 10-1
21 10.1 Send/Receive Fax...................................................................................................... 10-3
22 10.2 Upload/Download Binary File ................................................................................... 10-4
23 10.3 Simultaneous Two-way File Transfer/Carrier Detect................................................. 10-4
24 10.4 Compound AT Command, Initialization and Connection Delay ................................. 10-6
25 10.5 Escaping to Command Mode ..................................................................................... 10-6
26 10.6 Air Interface Data Compression................................................................................. 10-7
27 10.7 RLP Operation in a Poor RF Environment ................................................................. 10-8
28 10.8 RLP Abort and TCP Retransmit Test........................................................................ 10-10
29 10.9 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Requests/Replies ................................... 10-12
30 10.10 Reflection of AT Command Parameters ............................................................... 10-13
31 11 Packet Data Services Tests.............................................................................................. 11-1
32 11.1 Terminal Session with Remote Host .......................................................................... 11-3
33 11.2 File Transfer .............................................................................................................. 11-3
34 11.3 IP Address Negotiation............................................................................................... 11-4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page v

CONTENTS

1 11.4 V-J Header Compression........................................................................................... 11-4


2 11.5 Aynchronous Control Character Mapping (ACCM) Negotiation.................................. 11-5
3 11.6 PPP Field Compression.............................................................................................. 11-5
4 11.7 Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) ................................................................................... 11-6
5 11.8 Mobile Station Inactivity Timer.................................................................................. 11-6
6 11.9 IWF Inactivity Timer .................................................................................................. 11-7
7 11.10 Radio Link Protocol (RLP) Operation in Rayleigh Fading ....................................... 11-7
8 11.11 RLP Abort and Upper Layer Retransmit ................................................................ 11-9
9 11.12 RLP Encryption Negotiation ................................................................................ 11-11
10 11.13 Hardware Flow Control ....................................................................................... 11-12
11 11.14 Re-connect after Hard Handoff............................................................................ 11-13
12 11.15 Zone-Based Registration for Packet Data Mobile Stations................................... 11-13
13 12 Medium-Speed Packet Data ............................................................................................ 12-1
14 12.1 Forward File Transfer with Fundamental and Supplemental Code Channels............ 12-1
15 12.2 Forward File Transfer with Variable Supplemental Code Channels........................... 12-3
16 12.3 MSPD Call Setup, No Negotiation .............................................................................. 12-4
17 12.4 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to a Different MSPD Service Option ........................... 12-5
18 12.5 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to LSPD...................................................................... 12-6
19 12.6 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile Station Maximum Multiplex Option Less than Base Station
20 Maximum Multiplex Option ........................................................................................ 12-8
21 12.7 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile station Maximum Multiplex Option Greater than Base Station
22 Maximum Multiplex Option ........................................................................................ 12-8
23 12.8 Allocation/De-allocation of Supplemental Code Channels ........................................ 12-9
24 12.9 No Transmission on Supplemental Code Channels ................................................. 12-11
25 12.10 Soft Handoff with Supplemental Code Channels................................................. 12-12
26 12.11 Adding Supplemental Code Channels during Soft Handoff ................................. 12-13
27 12.12 Hard Handoff to an MSPD-Capable System ........................................................ 12-14
28 12.13 RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment ................................................. 12-16
29 12.14 RLP Operation with Severely Degraded Channel................................................. 12-18
30 12.15 Bi-Directional File Transfers with Forward Supplemental Code Channels.......... 12-19
31 12.16 Rм Interface Flow Control .................................................................................... 12-19
32 12.17 Dormant Timer ................................................................................................... 12-20
33 12.18 Packet Zone ID.................................................................................................... 12-21
34 13 High Speed Packet Data.................................................................................................. 13-1
35 13.1 Forward File Transfer ................................................................................................ 13-2

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page vi

CONTENTS

1 13.2 Reverse File Transfer ................................................................................................. 13-4


2 13.3 Bi-directional File Transfer........................................................................................ 13-6
3 13.4 Basic Supplemental Channel Configuration Setting and Single Assignment............. 13-7
4 13.5 Supplemental Channel Multiple Assignments ......................................................... 13-12
5 13.6 Turbo Coding on Supplemental Channel................................................................. 13-21
6 13.7 Correct Walsh Cover................................................................................................ 13-22
7 13.8 Supplemental Channel Discontinuous Transmission.............................................. 13-23
8 13.9 Slotted Timer........................................................................................................... 13-25
9 13.10 Retry Order and Delay for Origination Message................................................... 13-27
10 13.11 Retry Order and Delay for Supplemental Channel Request Messages................. 13-29
11 13.12 Retry Order and Delay for Resource Request Messages....................................... 13-30
12 13.13 Base Station Initiated Active to Control Hold Mode Transitions.......................... 13-32
13 13.14 Mobile Station Initiated Active to Control Hold Mode Transitions ....................... 13-34
14 13.15 Base Station Initiated Control Hold to Active Mode Transitions.......................... 13-36
15 13.16 Mobile Station Initiated Control Hold to Active Mode Transitions ....................... 13-37
16 13.17 Base Station Ignores Mobile Station Requested Mode Transitions ...................... 13-39
17 13.18 Mobile station Multiplex Option different from Base Station Multiplex Option ... 13-40
18 13.19 Soft Handoff of Fundamental Channel and Supplemental Channels .................. 13-41
19 13.20 Soft Handoff of Fundamental Channel only ........................................................ 13-43
20 13.21 Adding Supplemental Channels during Soft Handoff.......................................... 13-44
21 13.22 Hard Handoff to HSPD-capable system............................................................... 13-45
22 13.23 Hard Handoff from MSPD to HSPD ..................................................................... 13-46
23 13.24 Hard Handoff from LSPD to HSPD ...................................................................... 13-47
24 13.25 Hard Handoff to a different RC............................................................................ 13-49
25 13.26 Mobile Station Aborts R-SCH .............................................................................. 13-50
26 13.27 RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment ................................................. 13-52
27 13.28 RLP Operation in Severely Degraded Channel..................................................... 13-54
28 13.29 Mobile Station Originated Short Data Burst ....................................................... 13-55
29 13.30 Mobile Station Terminated Short Data Burst...................................................... 13-57
30 13.31 Mobile Assisted Burst Operation Parameters Message Test ................................ 13-58
31 13.32 Mobile Station and Base Station Operating in Different States........................... 13-60
32 Data Services Tests Annex .................................................................................................. 13-63

33 14 Over-The-Air Services...................................................................................................... 14-1


34 14.1 OTASP Service Request Processing............................................................................ 14-1
35 14.2 OTAPA Service Request Processing for a Mobile Station in Mobile Station Idle State . 14-4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page vii

CONTENTS

1 14.3 OTAPA Service Request Processing for a Mobile Station in Conversation Substate ... 14-6
2 14.4 OTAPA Service Request Processing Interrupted by User Action................................. 14-8
3 15 System Selection for Preferred Roaming.......................................................................... 15-1
4 15.1 OTASP Service Provisioning For System Selection and Preferred Roaming................ 15-1
5 15.2 Non-Acquisition of a System on Negative Preferred Roaming List (PRL)..................... 15-3
6 15.3 Emergency Call On a System that is Negative on PRL or SID List ............................. 15-4
7 15.4 OTASP For System Selection and Preferred Roaming - Oversize PRL ........................ 15-5
8 15.5 OTAPA Service Provisioning for System Selection and Preferred Roaming for a Mobile
9 Station in Mobile Station Idle State .............................................................................. 15-7

10 16 Message Driven Indicators .............................................................................................. 16-1


11 16.1 Enhanced Roaming Indicator .................................................................................... 16-1
12 17 Forward Compatibility Tests ........................................................................................... 17-1
13 17.1 Sync Channel ............................................................................................................ 17-1
14 17.2 Paging Channel ......................................................................................................... 17-2
15 17.3 Traffic Channel.......................................................................................................... 17-3

16 Annex A: Power Ratios for Common and Traffic Channels ...................................................... A-1
17 Annex B: Tables of Logging Counters...................................................................................... B-1
18 Annex C: TTY/TDD Test Examples ......................................................................................... C-1
19 Annex D: Information Records ................................................................................................D-1
20

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page viii

FIGURES

1 Figure 1.1.2-1 Basic Setup for Air Interface Tests, Single Base Station .................................. 1-2
2 Figure 1.4.1-1 Reference Call Flow for QPI Testing ................................................................. 1-7
3 Figure 1.8.1-1 Reference Call Flow for LAC Testing .............................................................. 1-13
4 Figure 1.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Initial FCH, DCCH, SCCH, and SCH counters.......... 1-16
5 Figure 1.9.2.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving FCH/DCCH Logging Parameters
6 ............................................................................................................................................. 1-18
7 Figure 1.9.4.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving SCCH Logging Parameters . 1-22
8 Figure 1.9.5.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving SCH Logging Parameters.... 1-24
9 Figure 1.10.2-1 Basic Setup for Air Interface Tests, Single Base Station .............................. 1-27
10 Figure 2.1.1-1 Reference Call Flow for mobile station Originated Voice Call from a Land Party
11 Call ......................................................................................................................................... 2-3
12 Figure 2.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Mobile Station Originated Voice Call to a Land Party Call
13 Test......................................................................................................................................... 2-4
14 Figure 2.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Mobile Station Terminated Voice Call from a Land Party
15 Call ....................................................................................................................................... 2-11
16 Figure 2.15.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Mobile Station-Initiated DTMF Tones............. 2-19
17 Figure 2.18.2-1 Functional Setup for Redirection from CDMA to AMPS ............................... 2-23

18 Figure 2.20.2-1 Functional Setup for Idle Handoff PACA Test .............................................. 2-25
19 Figure 2.26.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Initial Service Configuration and Negotiation.......... 2-32
20 Figure 2.27.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Base Station Requested Service Negotiation ........... 2-36
21 Figure 2.28.1 Reference Call Flow for Base Station Reject Scenarios.................................... 2-38
22 Figure 2.29.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Mobile Station Reject Scenarios.............................. 2-40
23 Figure 2.30.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Using GHDM/UHDM instead of SCM ..................... 2-41
24 Figure 3.1.2-1 Functional Test Setup for Testing Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold........ 3-3
25 Figure 3.4.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Soft Handoff in Fading ..................................... 3-11
26 Figure 3.8.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Search Window per Neighbor ........................... 3-20

27 Figure 3.9.2.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Access Probe Handoffs.................................. 3-27
28 Figure 4.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Forward TCH Power Control .............................. 4-2
29 Figure 4.2.2.1-1 Mobile station TX Power Response to Power Up Function Parameters, Nominal
30 Power ...................................................................................................................................... 4-6
31 Figure 4.2.2.2-1 Mobile Station TX Power Response to Power-up Function Parameters,
32 Maximum Power ..................................................................................................................... 4-7

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page ix

FIGURES

1 Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Fast Forward Power Control ........................ 4-9
2 Figure 4.3.3.2. 1-1 Functional Setup for Testing FFPC in Handoff ....................................... 4-22
3 Figure 4.3.5.1.1-1 Reverse Pilot Gating with no Transmission on the Reverse Dedicated Control
4 Channel [1] 2.1.3.2.3 ............................................................................................................ 4-31
5 Figure 4.3.5.1.1-2 Reverse Pilot Gating during Reverse Dedicated Control Channel
6 Transmission [1] 2.1.3.2.3 .................................................................................................... 4-32
7 Figure 4.3.5.2.1-1 Gating with the R-FCH ............................................................................ 4-34
8 Figure 5.1.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Power-up Registration..................................... 5-2

9 Figure 5.4.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Distance-Based Registration........................... 5-7


10 Figure 6.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Authentication Tests ...................................................... 6-2
11 Figure 6.9.2-1 Functional Setup for Hard Handoffs between Base Stations with SME Active6-11

12 Figure 7.1.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Service Redirection Tests............................................. 7-2


13 Figure 8-1 SMS Reference Model ............................................................................................ 8-2
14 Figure 8.3.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Broadcast SMS Tests ................................................ 8-15

15 Figure 9.1.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Call Forwarding .............................................. 9-2
16 Figure 9.2.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Three-Way Calling.............................................. 9-5
17 Figure 9.8.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing TTY/TDD ......................................................... 9-18
18 Figure 9.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Answer Holding......................................................... 9-20
19 Figure 10-1. Asynchronous Data Services Reference Model.................................................. 10-1
20 Figure 10.7.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Poor RF Environment Test Parameters ..... 10-9
21 Figure 10.8.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Forward Link ................................................. 10-10
22 Figure 10.8.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Reverse Link .................................................. 10-11
23 Figure 11-1 Packet Data Services Reference Model............................................................... 11-2

24 Figure 11.10.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading in Forward Link ............ 11-8
25 Figure 11.10.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading in Reverse Link ............. 11-8
26 Figure 11.11.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Forward Link ............................................... 11-10

27 Figure 11.11.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Reverse Link ................................................ 11-11
28 Figure 13.1.2-1 Functional Setup for HSPD Throughput Tests............................................. 13-2
29 Figure 13.4.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Supplemental Channel Request and Assignment ... 13-8
30 Figure 13.5.2-1 Supplemental Channel Assignments for overlapped burst period.............. 13-13
31 Figure 13.5.2-2 Supplemental Channel Assignments for disjoint burst periods ................. 13-14

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page x

FIGURES

1 Figure 13.5.2-3 Supplemental Channel Assignments for assignment overwrite.................. 13-14


2 Figure 13.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Slotted Timer Testing............................................ 13-25
3 Figure 13.10.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Retry Order and Delay Test (Origination Message) .. 13-
4 27
5 Figure 13.11.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Retry Order and Delay Test (Supplemental Channel
6 Request Messages) .............................................................................................................. 13-29
7 Figure 13.12.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Retry Order and Delay Test (Resource Request
8 Messages) ........................................................................................................................... 13-31
9 Figure 13.13.1-1 Reference Call Flow for base station initiated Active to Control Hold Transition
10 ........................................................................................................................................... 13-33
11 Figure 13.14.1-1 Reference Call Flow for mobile station initiated Active to Control Hold
12 Transition ........................................................................................................................... 13-35
13 Figure 13.15.1-1 Reference Call Flow for base station initiated Control Hold to Active Transition
14 ........................................................................................................................................... 13-36

15 Figure 13.16.1-1 Reference Call Flow for mobile station initiated Control Hold to Active
16 Transition ........................................................................................................................... 13-38
17 Figure 13.19.2-1 Functional Test Setup for Soft Handoff of Fundamental Channel and
18 Supplemental Channels...................................................................................................... 13-42
19 Figure 13.27.2-1 Functional Test Setup for RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment. 13-
20 53
21 Figure 14.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing OTASP............................................................ 14-1
22 Figure 15.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing System Selection and Preferred Roaming....... 15-2
23 Figure 16.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Enhanced Roaming Indicator......................... 16-1
24 Figure 17.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Forward Compatibility ................................... 17-2
25
26

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xi

FIGURES

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xii

TABLES

1 CDMA Base Station Protocol Revisions .................................................................................. xviii


2 CDMA Mobile Station Protocol Revisions ............................................................................... xviii
3 Extended Handoff Direction Message/General Handoff Direction Message/ Universal Handoff
4 Direction Message......................................................................................................................xx
5 Analog Handoff Direction Message ............................................................................................xx
6 System Parameters Message ....................................................................................................xxi
7 Extended System Parameters Message.....................................................................................xxi
8 Access Parameters Message ....................................................................................................xxii
9 Values for Time Limits and Constants ....................................................................................xxii
10 Table 1-1 Miscellaneous Tests ................................................................................................ 1-1
11 Table 1.3.2-1 Test Parameters for Extended System Parameters Message .............................. 1-5
12 Table 1.3.2-2. Test Parameters for Slotted Mode Idle Handoff................................................. 1-5
13 Table 1.5.2-1 Test Parameters for Mobile Station Response to Access Parameters Message Tests
14 ............................................................................................................................................... 1-8

15 Table 1.5.2-2 Access Parameters Message Values for Mobile Station Response to Access
16 Parameters Message Tests ...................................................................................................... 1-9
17 Table 1.9.4.2-1...................................................................................................................... 1-23
18 Table 1.9.5.2-1...................................................................................................................... 1-25
19 Table 1.9.5.2-2...................................................................................................................... 1-26
20 Table 2-1 POTS Tests.............................................................................................................. 2-1
21 Table 2.1.2-1 Call Setup Test Signal Channel Levels .............................................................. 2-4
22 Table 2.11.3-1 Slot Cycle Length Versus Various Values of MAX_SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX and
23 SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX ............................................................................................................ 2-14
24 Table 2.13.2-1 Extended System Parameters Message Values for TMSI Tests....................... 2-17
25 Table 2.15.3.1-1 DTMF Assigned Frequencies ...................................................................... 2-20
26 Table 2.15.3.3-1 Cumulative Binomial Distribution Function For 99.95% DTMF Success Rate2-
27 20
28 Table 2.15.3.3-2 DTMF Pass/Fail Criteria ............................................................................ 2-20
29 Table 2.34.2-1 ECAM Parameters ......................................................................................... 2-46

30 Table 3-1 Handoff Tests .......................................................................................................... 3-1


31 Table 3.1.2-1 Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold Test Parameters - T_ADD, T_DROP,
32 T_TDROP, ADD_INTERCEPTs, DROP_INTERCEPTs, SOFT_SLOPEs ........................................ 3-3

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xiii

TABLES

1 Table 3.1.2-2 Dynamic Add Test – One Pilot ........................................................................... 3-4


2 Table 3.1.2-3 Dynamic Add Test – Two Pilots ......................................................................... 3-4
3 Table 3.1.2-4 Dynamic Drop Test - Three Pilots...................................................................... 3-4
4 Table 3.1.2-5 Dynamic Drop Test - Two Pilots ........................................................................ 3-5
5 Table 3.2.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters .......................................................................... 3-7
6 Table 3.2.3-1 Limits of Audio Dropouts During Hard Handoff ................................................ 3-9
7 Table 3.3.2-1 Hard Handoff to AMPS, CDMA Test Parameters................................................ 3-9
8 Table 3.3.2-2 Hard Handoff to AMPS, Analog Test Parameters ............................................. 3-10
9 Table 3.4.2-1 Faded Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_ADD ................................................. 3-11
10 Table 3.4.2-2 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_DROP ......................................................... 3-12
11 Table 3.4.2-3 Soft Handoff Levels.......................................................................................... 3-13
12 Table 3.4.2-4 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - 100 km/hr ..................................................... 3-14
13 Table 3.5.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ........................................................................ 3-15
14 Table 3.5.2-2 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ........................................................................ 3-16

15 Table 3.6.2-1 Hard Handoff: CDMA 800 to CDMA 1900 ....................................................... 3-17
16 Table 3.7.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ........................................................................ 3-18
17 Table 3.8.2-1 Test Parameters for Search Window per Neighbor........................................... 3-21
18 Table 3.9.2.2-1 Access Probe Handoff Test Parameters......................................................... 3-28
19 Table 3.9.4.2-1 Channel Assignment into Soft Handoff Test Parameters .............................. 3-31
20 Table 3.10.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ...................................................................... 3-32
21 Table 3.10.3-1 Reverse Traffic Channel Preamble Length ..................................................... 3-33
22 Table 3.11.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ...................................................................... 3-34
23 Table 3.12.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ...................................................................... 3-36
24 Table 3.13.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ...................................................................... 3-37
25 Table 3.16.2-2 Test Parameter for Inter-Frequency Handoff (Channel 2) .............................. 3-42
26 Table 3.x.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters ........................................................................ 3-44
27 Table 4-1 Power Control Tests ................................................................................................ 4-1
28 Table 4.1.2-1 Test Parameters for Forward Power Control Tests............................................. 4-3
29 Table 4.2.2.1-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters, Nominal Power...... 4-5

30 Table 4.2.2.2-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters, Maximum Power... 4-6
31 Table 4.2.2.3-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters ............................... 4-7

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xiv

TABLES

1 Table 4.3.1.2-1 Reverse Power Control Subchannel Configurations........................................ 4-9


2 Table 4.3.1.3.1-4 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ........................................ 4-9
3 Table 4.3.1.4.1-4 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-11
4 Table 4.3.1.5.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-12
5 Table 4.3.1.6.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-13
6 Table 4.3.1.7.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-15
7 Table 4.3.1.8.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-16
8 Table 4.3.2.2-1 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ......................................... 4-18
9 Table 4.3.3.2.1-1 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-22
10 Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control ...................................... 4-24
11 Table 4.3.6.1.2-3 Test Parameters for EIB test ..................................................................... 4-36
12 Table 5-1 Registration Tests.................................................................................................... 5-1
13 Table 5.4.2.1-1 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_ADD........................................................... 5-7
14 Table 6-1 Authentication Tests ............................................................................................... 6-1

15 Table 7-1 Service Redirection Tests......................................................................................... 7-1


16 Table 8-1 Short Message Service Tests ................................................................................... 8-1
17 Figure 8.1.6.2-1 Functional Setup for Voice Mail Notification................................................. 8-8
18 Table 8.3.1.2-1 Broadcast Messages and Priority ................................................................. 8-15
19 Table 9-1 Subscriber Calling Features Tests........................................................................... 9-1
20 Table 10-1 Asynchronous Data and Fax Services Tests........................................................ 10-1
21 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 10-1
22 Table 10.6.2-1 Compression Test Configurations ................................................................. 10-8
23 Table 11-1 Packet Data Services Tests.................................................................................. 11-1
24 Table 11.12.2 -1 RLP Encryption Configurations................................................................ 11-12
25 Table 12-1 Medium-Speed Packet Data Tests ....................................................................... 12-1
26 Table 12.13.2-1 MSPD Test Parameters - 100 km/hr ......................................................... 12-17
27 Table 13.1.2-1 SCH Data Rate .............................................................................................. 13-3
28 Table 13.1.3-1 RLP Payloads................................................................................................. 13-4
29 Table 13.26.2-1 Test Parameters ........................................................................................ 13-51

30 Table 13.27.2-1 HSPD Test Parameters - 100 km/hr ......................................................... 13-54


31 Table 13.31.2-1 Test Parameters ........................................................................................ 13-59

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xv

TABLES

1 Table D-1 Test files to be used corresponding to tested rates. ............................................ 13-65
2 Table 14-1 Over-the-Air Services Tests ................................................................................. 14-1
3 Table 14.1.2-1 Activation Code Assignments ........................................................................ 14-2
4 Table 15-1 SSPR Tests.......................................................................................................... 15-1
5 Table 15.1.2-1 Activation Code Assignments ........................................................................ 15-2
6 Table 16-1 Message Driven Indicator Tests........................................................................... 16-1
7 Table 17-1 Forward Compatibility Tests ............................................................................... 17-1
8 Table A-1 Power Ratios for Common Channels................................................................. A-1
9 Table A-2 Test Parameters for Forward Fundamental Channel (Radio Configurations 1,3 and 4)
10 ............................................................................................................................................... A-1
11 Table A-3 Test Parameters for Forward Fundamental Channel (Radio Configurations 2 and 5) A-
12 2
13 Table A-4 Test Parameters for Forward Dedicated Control Channel (Radio Configurations 3 and
14 4)............................................................................................................................................. A-2
15 Table A-5 Test Parameters for Forward Dedicated Control Channel (Radio Configurations 5) A-2
16 Table A-6 Test Parameters for Forward Supplemental Code Channel (Radio Configurations 1) A-
17 3
18 Table A-7 Test Parameters for Forward Supplemental Code Channel (Radio Configurations 2) A-
19 4
20 Table A-8 Test Parameters for Forward Supplemental Channel with 100% Frame Activity in
21 AWGN with Convolutional Coding (for Radio Configurations 3, 4) .......................................... A-4
22 Table A-9 Test Parameters for Forward Supplemental Channel with 100% Frame Activity in
23 AWGN with Convolutional Coding (for Radio Configuration 5) ................................................ A-4
24 Table B-1 FCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1 ...........................................B-1
25 Table B-2 FCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1 .................................................B-1
26 Table B-3 FCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2 ...........................................B-3
27 Table B-4 FCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2 .................................................B-4
28 Table B-5 DCCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1 ........................................B-5
29 Table B-6 DCCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1 ..............................................B-6
30 Table B-7 DCCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2 ........................................B-7
31 Table B-8 DCCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2 ..............................................B-8
32 Table B-9 SCCH Transmission Counters ................................................................................B-9
33 Table B-10 SCCH Reception Counters ..................................................................................B-10

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xvi

TABLES

1 Table B-11 SCH Transmission Counters...............................................................................B-11


2 Table B-12 SCH Reception Counters ....................................................................................B-11
3
4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xvii

TABLES

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xviii

1 FOREWORD

2 Introduction
3 This document facilitates interoperability testing between CDMA infrastructure and CDMA
4 mobile station manufacturers. It is applicable to P_REV_IN_USE equal to six.
5 Mobile station/manufacturers in the context of this entire document, refers to a subscriber
6 terminal and/or wireless local loop (WLL) unit. WLL units should be tested as if the WLL unit
7 were a mobile station.
8 The following tables specify CDMA Base Station Protocol Revisions and CDMA Mobile Station
9 Protocol Revisions for Band Class 0 and Band Class 1. They are included as a reference to
10 clarify P_REV and MOB_P_REV for backward/forward compatibility testing. . For the tests on
11 the band classes other than Band Class 0 and Band Class 1, the P_REV of the base station and
12 MOB_P_REV of the base station shall be set to six.
13
14 CDMA Base Station Protocol Revisions

P_REV Band Class 0 (Cellular) Band Class 1 (PCS)


1 IS-95 J-STD-008C
2 IS-95A N/A
3 IS-95A+ TSB74 N/A
4 N/A N/A
5 IS-95B IS-95B
6 IS-2000 IS-2000
7 IS-2000A IS-2000A
15
16 CDMA Mobile Station Protocol Revisions

MOB_P_REV Band Class 0 (Cellular) Band Class 1 (PCS)


1 IS-95 J-STD-008C
2 IS-95A N/A
3 IS-95A + TSB74 N/A
4 IS-95B Phase I IS-95B Phase I
5 IS-95B Phase II IS-95B Phase II
6 IS-2000 IS-2000
7 IS-2000A IS-2000A
17

18 Testing Objective
19 The objective of testing contained herein is to demonstrate mobile station/base station standard
20 (MS-BSS) interoperability of all functionality, including messaging and protocol requirements,
21 in a cabled environment.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xix

1 Execution Strategy
2 IS-2000 mobile stations should be compatibility tested in IS-95-A and TIA/EIA-95-B networks.
3 All features supported by the infrastructure such as Signaling Message Encryption,
4 Authentication, Voice Privacy, etc. should be enabled.
5 During signal conformance testing all applicable tests should be executed for all supported band
6 classes and radio configurations.
7 The following general comments apply to all tests:
8 a. Whenever common channels and/or traffic channels are required to perform a test,
9 and their power ratios are not specified in the test, the power ratios specified in
10 Annex A should be used. Adjust the Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator (OCNS)
11 gain such that power ratios (Ec/Ior) of all specified forward channels add up to one.
12 If OCNS is not available, the levels of code channels and attenuators should be
13 adjusted to maintain proper test parameters.
14 b. During handoff tests between sectors of the same cell, Channel 2 from the beta
15 sector shall have a maximum relative offset of 1 µs from Channel 1 of the alpha
16 sector at the mobile station antenna connector.
17 c. During soft and intersector handoff tests, the neighbor list of the base station in the
18 test shall include PN offsets of the other base station in the test.
19 d. Pilot PN sequence offsets are denoted by Pi (i=1, 2, 3, ...). The following are assumed
20 unless otherwise specified:
21 • 0 <= Pi <= 511
22 • Pi not equal to Pj if i not equal to j
23 • Pi mod PILOT_INC = 0

24 e. Base stations should be configured for normal operation as specified in IS-2000


25 unless otherwise specified in a specific test.
26 f. Unless otherwise specified, the Reverse Traffic Channel should be operated at a
27 sufficiently high Eb/No to ensure insignificant (for example, less than 1%) frame
28 error rate (FER).
29 g. Overhead message fields should be those required for normal operation of the base
30 station unless otherwise specified in the following tables or in a specific test.
31

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xx

1 Extended Handoff Direction Message/General Handoff Direction Message/


2 Universal Handoff Direction Message

Field Value Value


(With Hard Handoff) (Without Hard Handoff)
T_ADD 28 (-14 dB) 28 (-14 dB)
T_DROP 32 (-16 dB) 32 (-16 dB)
T_COMP 5 (2.5 dB) 5 (2.5 dB)
T_TDROP 3 (4 sec) 3 (4 sec)
HARD_INCLUDED 1 N/A
(EHDM)/
EXTRA_PARMS
(GHDM/UHDM)
FRAME_OFFSET 0 N/A
PRIVATE_LCM 0 N/A
RESET_L2 1 N/A
RESET_FPC 1 N/A
SERV_NEG_TYPE 1 N/A
ENCRYPT_MODE 0 N/A
NOM_PWR_EXT 0 N/A
NOM_PWR 0 N/A
NUM_PREAMBLE 0 N/A
BAND_CLASS (user specify) N/A
CDMA_FREQ F2 N/A
PILOT_PN user specify N/A
PWR_COMB_IND 0 N/A
CODE_CHAN 1 to 63 (user specify) N/A
3
4 Analog Handoff Direction Message

Field Value
SID Use appropriate number for AMPS system.
VMAC 3
ANALOG_CHAN Use appropriate AMPS channel of choice.
SCC Use one of three SAT Color Code (0, 1 or 2).
MEM 0
AN_CHAN_TYPE 0
DSCC_MSB 0
5

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxi

1 System Parameters Message

Field Value
(Physical Meaning)
SRCH_WIN_A 8 (60 chips)
SRCH_WIN_N 8 (60 chips)
SRCH_WIN_R 8 (60 chips)
NGHBR_MAX_AGE 0 (minimum amount)
PWR_THRESH_ENABLE 0 (threshold reporting off)
PWR_PERIOD_ENABLE 0 (periodic reporting off)
T_ADD 28 (-14 dB Ec/Io)

T_DROP 32 (-16 dB Ec/Io)

T_COMP 5 (2.5 dB)


T_TDROP 3 (4 sec)
QPCH_SUPPORTED 0 (QPCH disabled)
2
3 Extended System Parameters Message

Field Value (Decimal)


SOFT_SLOPE 0 (0)
RLGAIN_TRAFFIC_PILOT 0 (0 dB)
4
5

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxii

1 Access Parameters Message

Field Value (Decimal)


NOM_PWR 0 (0 dB)
INIT_PWR 0 (0 dB)
PWR_STEP 1 (1 dB)
NUM_STEP 4 (5 probes/sequence)
NOM_PWR_EXT 0 (0 dB)
2
3 h. Values of time limits and other constants should be as specified in IS-2000.
4 Selected values are listed in the following table.
5
6 Values for Time Limits and Constants

Constant Value Unit


N1m 9 frames

N2m 12 frames

N3m 2 frames

N11m 1 frame

T1b 1.28 seconds

T5m 5 seconds

T31m 600 seconds

T40m 3 seconds

T56m 0.2 seconds

T61m 0.08 seconds


7

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxiii

1 Acronyms and Abbreviations


2 Acronyms and abbreviations presented in this document, are defined as follows:
3
Acronym or Description
Abbreviation
AC Authentication Center
ACCM Asynchronous Control Character Map
ACCOLC Access Overload Class
AMPS Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS)
AT Attention (condition in modem control)
AWGN Additive White Gaussian Noise
BPS Bits per Second
BS Base Station
CC Channel Configuration
CCI Base-station Configuration Change Indicator (sent on the
QPCH)
CDG Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Development Group
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data
CFSReqM Candidate Frequency Search Request Message
CMT Cellular Messaging Teleservice
CNA Calling Party Name
CNAP Calling Name Presentation
CFNA Call Forwarding No Answer
CNI Calling Number Identification
CPN Calling Party Number
CPT Cellular Paging Teleservice
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code
CSC Customer Service Center
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DCMS Display Capable Mobile Station
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
DTX Discontinuous Transmission
ECAM Extended Channel Assignment Message
EHDM Extended Handoff Direction Message
EM Escape Mode

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxiv

ENLUM Extended Neighbor List Update Message


ESCAM Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
ESN Electronic Serial Number
ESPM Extended System Parameter Message
FCS Frame Check Sequence
f-csch Forward Common Signaling (Logical) Channel
F-DCCH Forward Dedicated Control Channel
f-dsch Forward Dedicated Signaling (Logical) Channel
FER Frame Error Rate
F-FCH Forward Fundamental Channel
FFPC Fast Forward Power Control
FO Frame Offset
FPC Forward Power Control
F-PICH Forward Pilot Channel
FSCAMM Forward Supplemental Channel Assignment Mini Message
F-SCCH Forward Supplemental Code Channel
F-SCH Forward Supplemental Channel
F-SCH0 Forward Supplemental Channel Number 0
F-SCH1 Forward Supplemental Channel Number 1
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GHDM General Handoff Direction Message
GNLM General Neighbor List Message
HO Handoff
IMSI_M MIN based IMSI
IMSI_T True IMSI
IMSI_T_11_12 Mobile Country Code of IMSI_T
IMSI_T_S Supplement of the MIN-based IMSI
ITU International Telecommunication Union
IWF Inter-Working Function
LAC Link Access Control
MABO Mobile Assisted Burst Operation
MAC Medium Access Control
MC Message Center
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCC_M MIN based Mobile Country Code
MDR Medium Data Rate

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxv

MIN/MSIN Mobile Station Identification Number


MO Multiplex Option
MRU (Data) Maximum Receive Unit
MS Mobile Station
MSS Maximum Segment Size
MT Mobile Terminal
MWI Message Waiting Indicator
NAK Negative Acknowledgement.
NAM Number Assignment Module
NDSS Network Directed System Selection
NID Network Identifier
NNSCR Non-Negotiable Service Configuration Record
OA&M Operation, Administration, and Maintenance
OCNS Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator
OLPC Outer Loop Power Control
ORM Origination Message
OOK On/Off Keying
OTAF Over-the-air Function
OTAPA Over-the-air Parameter Administration
OTASP Over-the-air Service Provisioning
OTD Orthogonal Transmit Diversity
OUNS Other User Noise Simulator
P_REV_IN_USE Protocol revision level in use
PACA Priority Access and Channel Assignment
PCF Packet Control Function
PD Protocol Discriminator
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PI Paging Indicator
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLC Private Long Code
PM Privacy Mode
PN Pseudo-random Noise
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service
PPDN Public Packet Data Network
PPP Point-To-Point Protocol
PRM Page Response Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxvi

PS Pilot Strength
PSAP Public Service Answering Point
PSTN Public Switching Telephone Network
PUF Power Up Function
QOF Quasi-Orthogonal Function
QPCH Quick Paging Channel
R-ACH Reverse Access Channel
RC Radio configuration
r-csch Reverse Common Signaling Channel
R-DCCH Reverse Dedicated Control Channel
r-dsch Reverse Dedicated Signaling (Logical) Channel
R-FCH Reverse Fundamental Channel
RLP Radio Link Protocol
RND Redirecting Name Delivery
RPC Reverse Power Control
R-PCSCH Reverse Power Control Subchannel
R-PICH Reverse Pilot Channel
RSCAMM Reverse Supplemental Channel Assignment Mini Message
R-SCCH Reverse Supplemental Code Channel
R-SCH Reverse Supplemental Channel
R-SCH0 Reverse Supplemental Channel Number 0
R-SCH1 Reverse Supplemental Channel Number 1
SAC Subscriber Access Control
SCM Station Class Mark
SCCLT Supplemental Channel Code List Table
SCM Station Class Mark
SCR Service Configuration Record
SCRM Supplemental Channel Request Message
SCRMM Supplemental Channel Request Mini Message
SDB Short Data Burst
SDU Service Data Unit
SME Signaling Message Encryption
SMS Short Message Service
SO Service Option
SPASM Subscriber Parameter Administration Security
Mechanism

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxvii

SR Service Redirection
SRQM Service Request Message
SSD Shared Secret Data
SSPR System Selection for Preferred Roaming
STS Space Time Spreading
TCH Traffic Channel
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TDSO Test Data Service Option
TE Terminal Equipment
TE2L Terminal Equipment at land connection point
TE2M Terminal Equipment at mobile connection point
TMSI Temporary Mobile Station Identity
TSB Technical Service Bulletin
UHDM Universal Handoff Direction Message
UI User Interface
V.42 ITU-T recommended error correction protocol
VCAS Valid Configuration Attribute Selection
VJ Van Jacobson (compression protocol)
VMN Voice Mail Notification
VMNI Voice Mail Notification Indicator
WC Walsh Code
WLL Wireless Local Loop
1

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxviii

2
3

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxix

2 Supplementary Terms and Definitions


3 Abbreviated Alert - An abbreviated alert is used to remind the mobile station user that
4 previously selected alternative routing features are still active.
5 AC - See Authentication Center.
6 Access Attempt - A sequence of one or more access probe sequences on the Access Channel
7 containing the same message. See also Access Probe and Access Probe Sequence.
8 Access Channel - A Reverse CDMA Channel used by mobile stations for communicating to the
9 base station. The Access Channel is used for short signaling message exchanges such as call
10 originations, responses to pages, and registrations. The Access Channel is a slotted random
11 access channel.
12 Access Channel Message - The information part of an access probe consisting of the message
13 body, length field, and CRC.
14 Access Channel Message Capsule - An Access Channel message plus the padding.
15 Access Channel Preamble - The preamble of an access probe consisting of a sequence of all-
16 zero frames that are sent at the 4800 bps rate.
17 Access Channel Request Message - An Access Channel message that is autonomously generated
18 by the mobile station. See also Access Channel Response Message.
19 Access Channel Response Message - A message on the Access Channel generated to reply to a
20 message received from the base station.
21 Access Channel Slot - The assigned time interval for an access probe. An Access Channel slot
22 consists of an integer number of frames. The transmission of an access probe is performed within
23 the boundaries of an Access Channel slot.
24 Access Entry Handoff - The act of transferring reception of the Paging Channel from one base
25 station to another, when the mobile station is transitioning from the Mobile Station Idle State to
26 the System Access State.
27 Access Handoff - The act of transferring reception of the Paging Channel from one base station
28 to another, when the mobile station is in the System Access State after an Access Attempt.
29 Access Overload Class - See Overload Class.
30 Access Probe - One Access Channel transmission consisting of a preamble and a message. The
31 transmission is an integer number of frames in length and transmits one Access Channel
32 message. See also Access Probe Sequence and Access Attempt.
33 Access Probe Handoff - A handoff that occurs while the mobile station is performing an Access
34 Attempt in the System Access State.
35 Access Probe Sequence - A sequence of one or more access probes on the Access Channel. The
36 same Access Channel message is transmitted in every access probe of an access attempt. See also
37 Access Probe and Access Attempt.
38 Access Sub-attempt - A sequence of one or more access probe sequences on the Access
39 Channel transmitted to one pilot, containing the same message content other than the reported
40 pilot information. See also Access Probe, Access Probe Sequence, and Access Attempt.
41 Acknowledgment - A Layer 2 response by the mobile station or the base station confirming that
42 a signaling message was received correctly.
43 Action Time - The time at which the action implied by a message should take effect.
44 Active Set - The set of pilots associated with the CDMA Channels containing Forward Traffic
45 Channels assigned to a particular mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxx

1 Active User Zone - A user zone in which the mobile station makes its presence known via an
2 explicit registration in order to activate tiered service features. See also CDMA Tiered Services,
3 User Zone, and Passive User Zone.
4 Aging - A mechanism through which the mobile station maintains in its Neighbor Set the pilots
5 that have been recently sent to it from the base station and the pilots whose handoff drop timers
6 have recently expired.
7 A-key - A secret, 64-bit pattern stored in the mobile station and HLR/AC. It is used to
8 generate/update the mobile station’s Shared Secret Data.
9 Assured Mode - Mode of delivery that guarantees (if a loss of channel is not declared) that a
10 PDU will be delivered to the peer. A PDU sent in assured mode is retransmitted by the LAC
11 sublayer, up to a maximum number of retransmissions, until the LAC entity at the sender
12 receives an acknowledgement for the PDU. See also Confirmation of Delivery.
13 Authentication - A procedure used by a base station to validate a mobile station’s identity.
14 Authentication Center (AC) - An entity that manages the authentication information related to
15 the mobile station.
16 Authentication Response (AUTHR) - An 18-bit output of the authentication algorithm. It is
17 used, for example, to validate mobile station registrations, originations and terminations.
18 Autonomous Registration - A method of registration in which the mobile station registers
19 without an explicit command from the base station.
20 Auxiliary Pilot Channel - A non-data-bearing, direct-sequence spread spectrum signal
21 optionally transmitted by a CDMA base station.
22 Auxiliary Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel. - A pilot channel, counterpart to an Auxiliary
23 Pilot Channel, that is transmitted by a CDMA base station from the non-primary antenna when
24 orthogonal transmit diversity is employed.
25 AWGN - Additive White Gaussian Noise.
26 Bad Frames - Frames classified as insufficient frame quality or as 9600 bps primary traffic only,
27 with bit errors.
28 Band Class - A set of frequency channels and a numbering scheme for these channels.
29 Base Station - A fixed station used for communicating with mobile stations. In this document,
30 the term base station refers to the entire cellular system infrastructure including transceiver
31 equipment and Mobile Switching Center.
32 Base Station Authentication Response (AUTHBS) - An 18-bit pattern generated by the
33 authentication algorithm. AUTHBS is used to confirm the validity of base station orders to
34 update the Shared Secret Data.
35 Base Station Random Variable (RANDBS) - A 32-bit random number generated by the mobile
36 station for authenticating base station orders to update the Shared Secret Data.
37 Blank-and-Burst - The preemption of an entire Traffic Channel frame’s primary traffic by
38 signaling traffic or secondary traffic. Blank-and-burst is performed on a frame-by-frame basis.
39 BLOB - Block of Bits.
40 bps - Bits per second.
41 Broadcast User Zone - A user zone that is identified to the mobile station by means of
42 broadcast messages. It corresponds to the RF coverage area of a particular set of cells and
43 sectors. See also CDMA Tiered Services and Mobile-Specific User Zone.
44 Call Disconnect - The process that releases the resources handling a particular call. The
45 disconnect process begins either when the mobile station user indicates the end of the call by

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxi

1 generating an on-hook condition or other call-release mechanism, or when the base station
2 initiates a release.
3 Call History Parameter (COUNT) - A modulo-64 event counter maintained by the mobile
4 station and Authentication Center that is used for clone detection.
5 Candidate Frequency - The frequency for which the base station specifies a search set, when
6 searching on other frequencies while performing mobile-assisted handoffs.
7 Candidate Set - The set of pilots that have been received with sufficient strength by the mobile
8 station to be successfully demodulated, but have not been placed in the Active Set by the base
9 station. See also Active Set, Neighbor Set, and Remaining Set.
10 CDMA - See Code Division Multiple Access.
11 CDMA Candidate Frequency - The Candidate Frequency specified for a search of CDMA
12 pilots.
13 CDMA Cellular System - The entire system supporting Domestic Public Cellular Service
14 operation as addressed by this Standard.
15 CDMA Channel - The set of channels transmitted between the base station and the mobile
16 stations within a given CDMA frequency assignment. See also Forward CDMA Channel and
17 Reverse CDMA Channel.
18 CDMA Channel Number - A number corresponding to the center of the CDMA frequency
19 assignment.
20 CDMA Frequency Assignment - A 1.23 MHz segment of spectrum. The center of a CDMA
21 frequency assignment is given by a CDMA Channel Number.
22 CDMA Preferred Set - The set of CDMA channel numbers in a CDMA system corresponding
23 to Frequency Assignments that a mobile station will normally search to acquire a CDMA Pilot
24 Channel. For CDMA cellular systems, the primary and secondary channels comprise the CDMA
25 Preferred Set.
26 CDMA Tiered Services - System features and services that are based on location, potentially
27 including private networks. User zones establish the availability of services. See also User Zone,
28 Broadcast User Zone, Mobile-Specific User Zone, Active User Zone, and Passive User Zone.
29 Chip - See PN Chip.
30 Chip Rate - Equivalent to the spreading rate of the channel. It is either 1.2288 Mcps or 3.6864
31 Mcps.
32 CLNP - Connectionless Network Protocol (see ISO 8473-1988).
33 Code Channel - A subchannel of a Forward CDMA Channel. A Forward CDMA Channel
34 contains 64 code channels. Code channel zero is assigned to the Pilot Channel. Code channels 1
35 through 7 may be assigned either to the Paging Channels or to the Traffic Channels. Code
36 channel 32 may be assigned either to a Sync Channel or to a Traffic Channel. The remaining
37 code channels may be assigned to Traffic Channels.
38 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) - A technique for spread-spectrum multiple-access
39 digital communications that creates channels through the use of unique code sequences.
40 Code Symbol - The output of an error-correcting encoder. Information bits are input to the
41 encoder and code symbols are output from the encoder. See Convolutional Code.
42 Configuration Change Indicator - A one-bit datum, sent on the Quick Paging Channel.
43 Appearance of the Configuration Change Indicator in the Quick Paging Channel serves to alert a
44 slotted mode mobile station, operating in the Mobile Station Idle State, that, after performing an
45 idle handoff, it should monitor the Paging Channel, in order to determine if it should update its
46 stored parameters.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxii

1 Confirmation of Delivery - A notification sent by the LAC sublayer to Layer 3 at the sender,
2 when the LAC entity at the sender receives the acknowledgment for a specific PDU sent in
3 assured mode.
4 Convolutional Code - A type of error-correcting code. A code symbol can be considered as
5 modulo 2 the convolution of the input data sequence with the impulse response of a generator
6 function.
7 CRC - See Cyclic Redundancy Code.
8 Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) - A class of linear error detecting codes which generate parity
9 check bits by finding the remainder of a polynomial division.
10 Data Block - A unit of information exchanged between the mux sublayer and a service or an
11 upper layer signaling.
12 dBc - Ratio of the sideband power to carrier power as referenced to the carrier. For CDMA, the
13 total in-band power of the signal is measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth around the center
14 frequency of the CDMA signal.
15 dBm - A measure of power expressed in terms of its ratio to one milliwatt.
16 dBm/Hz - A measure of power spectral density. The ratio, dBm/Hz, is the power in one Hertz of
17 bandwidth, where power is expressed in units of dBm.
18 dBW - A measure of power expressed in terms of its ratio (in dB) to one watt.
19 Dedicated Control Channel - A portion of a Traffic Channel (Forward or Reverse) that carries
20 a combination of user data, signaling, and power control information.
21 Deinterleaving - The process of unpermuting the symbols that were permuted by the interleaver.
22 Deinterleaving is performed on received symbols prior to decoding.
23 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) - A mode of operation in which a base station or a mobile
24 station switches on and off its transmitter on a particular code channel autonomously. For the
25 case of DTX operation on the Forward Dedicated Control Channel, the Forward Power Control
26 Subchannel is still transmitted.
27 Distance-Based Registration - An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station
28 registers whenever it enters a cell whose distance from the cell in which the mobile station last
29 registered exceeds a given threshold.
30 DTMF - See Dual-Tone Multifrequency.
31 Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) - Signaling by the simultaneous transmission of two tones,
32 one from a group of low frequencies and another from a group of high frequencies. Each group
33 of frequencies consists of four frequencies.
34 Eb - Average energy per information bit for the Sync Channel, Paging Channel, or Forward
35 Traffic Channel at the mobile station antenna connector.
36 Eb/No - Energy-per-bit-to noise-per-hertz ratio.
37 Eb/Nt - The ratio of the combined received energy per bit to the effective noise power spectral
38 density for the Sync Channel, Paging Channel, or Forward Traffic Channel at the mobile station
39 antenna connector.
40 Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the Pilot Channel, Sync Channel, Paging Channel, Forward
41 Traffic Channel, power control subchannel, or OCNS.
42 Ec/Io - A notation used to represent a dimensionless ratio of the average power of some code-
43 distinguished CDMA signal channel, typically a pilot, to the total power comprised of signal plus
44 interference, within the signal bandwidth. It is usually expressed in dB units.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxiii

1 Ec/Ior - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Pilot Channel, Sync
2 Channel, Paging Channel, Forward Traffic Channel, power control subchannel, or OCNS to the
3 total transmit power spectral density.
4 Effective Radiated Power (ERP) - The product of the power supplied to the antenna and the
5 antenna gain relative to a half-wave dipole in a given direction.
6 EIRP - See Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power.
7 Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) - The product of the power supplied to the
8 antenna and the antenna gain in a direction relative to an isotropic antenna.
9 Erasure Indicator Bit - A bit used in the Rate Set 2 Reverse Traffic Channel frame structure to
10 indicate an erased Forward Fundamental Code Channel or Forward Dedicated Control Channel
11 frame.
12 ERP - See Effective Radiated Power.
13 ESN - Electronic Serial Number.
14 f-csch - Forward common signaling logical channel.
15 f-dsch - Forward dedicated signaling logical channel.
16 Fade Timer - A timer kept by the mobile station as a measure of Forward Traffic Channel
17 continuity. If the fade timer expires, the mobile station drops the call.
18 FER - Frame Error Rate of Forward Traffic Channel. The value of FER may be estimated by
19 using Service Option 2, 9, 30, or 31 (see TIA/EIA-126-C).
20 Flash - An indication sent on the CDMA Channel indicating that the receiver is to invoke special
21 processing.
22 Foreign NID Roamer - A mobile station operating in the same system (SID) but in a different
23 network (NID) from the one in which service was subscribed. See also Foreign SID Roamer and
24 Roamer.
25 Foreign SID Roamer - A mobile station operating in a system (SID) other than the one from
26 which service was subscribed. See also Foreign NID Roamer and Roamer.
27 Forward CDMA Channel - A CDMA Channel from a base station to mobile stations. The
28 Forward CDMA Channel contains one or more code channels that are transmitted on a CDMA
29 frequency assignment using a particular pilot PN offset. The code channels are associated with
30 the Pilot Channel, Sync Channel, Paging Channels, and Traffic Channels. The Forward CDMA
31 Channel always carries a Pilot Channel and may carry up to one Sync Channel, up to seven
32 Paging Channels, and up to 63 Traffic Channels, as long as the total number of channels,
33 including the Pilot Channel, is no greater than 64.
34 Forward Dedicated Control Channel - A portion of a Forward Traffic Channel that can carry a
35 combination of primary data, secondary data, signaling, and power control information.
36 Forward Fundamental Channel - A portion of a Forward Traffic Channel that can carry a
37 combination of primary data, secondary data, signaling, and power control information.
38 Forward Pilot Channel - A non-data-bearing direct-sequence spread spectrum signal
39 transmitted continuously by each CDMA base station. The Forward Pilot Channel allows a
40 mobile station to acquire the timing of the Forward CDMA Channel, provides a phase reference
41 for coherent demodulation, and provides a means for signal strength comparisons between base
42 stations for determining when to handoff. Different base stations are identified by different pilot
43 PN sequence time phases. See also Pilot PN Sequence, Pilot PN Sequence Offset.
44 Forward Supplemental Channel - An optional portion of a Forward Traffic Channel (Radio
45 Configurations 3 and above) that operates in conjunction with a Fundamental Channel and or the

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxiv

1 Dedicated Control Channel in that Traffic Channel, and (optionally) with other Supplemental
2 Channels to provide higher data rate services.
3 Forward Supplemental Code Channel - An optional portion of a Forward Traffic Channel
4 (Radio Configurations 1 and 2) that operates in conjunction with a Fundamental Channel in that
5 Traffic Channel, and (optionally) with other Supplemental Code Channels to provide higher data
6 rate services.
7 Forward Traffic Channel - A code channel used to transport user and signaling traffic from a
8 base station to a mobile station.
9 Forward Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel - A pilot channel transmitted by a CDMA base
10 station from the non-primary antenna when orthogonal transmit diversity is employed.
11 Frame - A basic timing interval in the system. For the Access Channel and Paging Channel a
12 frame is 20 ms long. For the Traffic Channel, the frame may be 20 ms or 5 ms long. For the Sync
13 Channel, a frame is 26.666... ms long.
14 Frame Category - A classification of a received Traffic Channel frame based upon transmission
15 data rate, the frame contents (primary traffic, secondary traffic, or signaling traffic), and whether
16 there are detected errors in the frame.
17 Frame Offset - A time skewing of Traffic Channel frames from System Time in integer
18 multiples of 1.25 ms. The maximum frame offset is 18.75 ms.
19 Frame Quality Indicator - The CRC check applied to the 9600 bps and 4800 bps frames of
20 Rate Set 1 and all frames of Rate Set 2.
21 Full TMSI - The combination of TMSI_ZONE and TMSI_CODE. The full TMSI is a globally
22 unique address for the mobile station.
23 Fundamental Data Block - A data block that is transmitted by the mobile station/base station in
24 every 20 ms time interval on the Fundamental Channel.
25 Fundamental RLP Frame - An RLP frame carried in a fundamental data block.
26 Gating Rate Set - This specifies the set of supported reverse pilot gating rates. The base station
27 and the mobile station may support one or more gating rates.
28 GHz - Gigahertz (109 Hertz).
29 Global Positioning System (GPS) - A US government satellite system that provides location
30 and time information to users. See Navstar GPS Space Segment / Navigation User Interfaces
31 ICD-GPS-200 for specifications.
32 Good Frames - Frames not classified as bad frames. See also Bad Frames.
33 Good Message - A received message is declared a good message if it is received with a correct
34 CRC.
35 GPS See Global Positioning System.
36 Handoff - The act of transferring communication with a mobile station from one base station to
37 another.
38 Hard Handoff - A handoff characterized by a temporary disconnection of the Traffic Channel.
39 Hard handoffs occur when the mobile station is transferred between disjoint Active Sets, the
40 CDMA frequency assignment changes, the frame offset changes, or the mobile station is directed
41 from a CDMA Traffic Channel to an AMPS voice channel. See also Soft Handoff.
42 Hash Function - A function used by the mobile station to select one out of N available
43 resources. The hash function distributes the available resources uniformly among a random
44 sample of mobile stations.
45 HLR - See Home Location Register.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxv

1 Home Location Register (HLR) - The location register to which a MIN/IMSI is assigned for
2 record purposes such as subscriber information.
3 Home System - The cellular or PCS system in which the mobile station subscribes for service.
4 Hopping Pilot Beacon - A pilot beacon that changes CDMA Frequency periodically to simulate
5 multiple base stations operating on different frequencies. The transmission of the hopping pilot
6 beacon is discontinuous on any CDMA Channel.
7 Idle Handoff - The act of transferring reception of the Paging Channel from one base station to
8 another, when the mobile station is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
9 Implicit Registration - A registration achieved by a successful transmission of an origination or
10 page response on the Access Channel.
11 IMSI - See International Mobile Station Identity.
12 IMSI_M - MIN-based IMSI using the lower 10 digits to store the MIN.
13 IMSI_O - Operational value of IMSI used by the mobile station for operation with the base
14 station.
15 IMSI_T - True IMSI not associated with MIN. This could be 15 digits or fewer.
16 Interleaving - The process of permuting a sequence of symbols.
17 International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI) - A method of identifying stations in the land
18 mobile service as specified in ITU-T Recommendation E.212.
19 Io - The total received power spectral density, including signal and interference, as measured at
20 the mobile station antenna connector.
21 Ioc - The power spectral density of a band-limited white noise source (simulating interference
22 from other cells) as measured at the mobile station antenna connector.
23 Ior - The total transmit power spectral density of the Forward CDMA Channel at the base station
24 antenna connector.
25 Îor - The received power spectral density of the Forward CDMA Channel as measured at the
26 mobile station antenna connector.
27 kHz - Kilohertz (103 Hertz).
28 ksps - Kilo-symbols per second (103 symbols per second).
29 L2 Acknowledgment - A Layer 2 response by the mobile station or the base station confirming
30 that a signaling message was received correctly.
31 Layering - A method of organization for communication protocols in which the transmitted or
32 received information is transferred in pipeline fashion, within each station, in well-defined
33 encapsulated data units between otherwise decoupled processing entities (“layers”). A layer is
34 defined in terms of its communication protocol to a peer layer in another entity and the services
35 it offers to the next higher layer in its own entity.
36 Layer 1 - Layer 1 provides for the transmission and reception of radio signals between the base
37 station and the mobile station. Also see Physical Layer.
38 Layer 2 - Layer 2 provides for the correct transmission and reception of signaling messages,
39 including partial duplicate detection. Layer 2 makes use of the services provided by Layer 1.
40 Layer 3 - Layer 3 provides the control messaging for the cellular or PCS telephone system.
41 Layer 3 originates and terminates signaling messages according to the semantics and timing of
42 the communication protocol between the base station and the mobile station. Layer 3 makes use
43 of the services provided by Layer 2.
44 Local Control - An optional mobile station feature used to perform manufacturer-specific
45 functions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxvi

1 Logical Channel - A communication path between the mobile station and the base station,
2 described in terms of the intended use of, and access to, the transferred data, and direction of
3 transfer. A logical channel can be “mapped” to and from one or more physical channels.
4 Logical-to-physical Mapping - The technique for forming associations between logical and
5 physical channels.
6 Long Code - A PN sequence with period (242) - 1 that is used for scrambling on the Forward
7 CDMA Channel and spreading on the Reverse CDMA Channel. The long code uniquely
8 identifies a mobile station on both the Reverse Traffic Channel and the Forward Traffic Channel.
9 The long code provides limited privacy. The long code also separates multiple Access Channels
10 on the same CDMA Channel. See also Public Long Code and Private Long Code.
11 Long Code Mask - A 42-bit binary number that creates the unique identity of the long code. See
12 also Public Long Code, Private Long Code, Public Long Code Mask, and Private Long Code
13 Mask.
14 LSB - Least significant bit.
15 Maximal Length Sequence (m-Sequence). A binary sequence of period 2n - 1, n being a
16 positive integer, with no internal periodicities. A maximal length sequence can be generated by a
17 tapped n-bit shift register with linear feedback.
18 MCC - See Mobile Country Code.
19 Mcps - Megachips per second (106 chips per second).
20 MCSB - See Message Control and Status Block.
21 Mean Input Power - The total received calorimetric power measured in a specified bandwidth
22 at the antenna connector, including all internal and external signal and noise sources.
23 Mean Output Power - The total transmitted calorimetric power measured in a specified
24 bandwidth at the antenna connector when the transmitter is active.
Number of good messages received
25 MER - Message Error Rate. MER = 1 - .
Number of messages transmitted
26 Message Body - The part of the message contained between the length field (MSG_LENGTH)
27 and the CRC field.
28 Message Capsule - A sequence of bits comprising a single message and padding. The padding
29 always follows the message and may be of zero length.
30
31 Message CRC - The CRC check associated with a message. See also Cyclic Redundancy Code.
32 Message Field - A basic named element in a message. A message field may consist of zero or
33 more bits.
34 Message Record - An entry in a message consisting of one or more fields that repeats in the
35 message.
36 MHz - Megahertz (106 Hertz).
37 MIN - See Mobile Identification Number.
38 MNC - See Mobile Network Code.
39 MOB_P_REV – Protocol revision number supported by a mobile station.
40 Mobile Country Code (MCC) - A part of the E.212 IMSI identifying the home country. See
41 ITU-T Recommendation E.212.
42 Mobile Directory Number - A dialable directory number that is not necessarily the same as the
43 mobile station’s air interface identification, i.e., MIN, IMSI_M or IMSI_T.
44 Mobile Identification Number (MIN) - The 34-bit number that is a digital representation of the
45 10-digit number assigned to a mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxvii

1 Mobile Network Code (MNC) - A part of the E.212 IMSI identifying the home network within
2 the home country. See ITU-T Recommendation E.212.
3 Mobile Protocol Capability Indicator (MPCI) - A 2-bit field used to indicate the mobile
4 station’s capabilities.
5 Mobile-Specific User Zone - A user zone that is identified by the mobile station. The mobile
6 station may consider parameters such as the identity of the serving system, cell, and sector, and
7 the geographic location of that station in making the determination. See also CDMA Tiered
8 Services, User Zone, Broadcast User Zone, Active User Zone, and Passive User Zone.
9 Mobile Station - A station that communicates with a base station while in motion or during halts
10 at unspecified points.
11 Mobile Station Class - A classification of mobile stations based on characteristics such as
12 slotted operation and transmission power. See Table 2.3.3-1 of TIA/EIA-553-A and Table 2.3.3-
13 1 of this document.
14 Mobile Station Identification Number (MSIN) - A part of the E.212 IMSI identifying the
15 mobile station within its home network. See ITU-T Recommendation E.212.
16 Mobile Station Originated Call - A call originating from a mobile station.
17 Mobile Station Terminated Call - A call received by a mobile station (not to be confused with
18 a disconnect or call release).
19 ms - Millisecond (10-3 second).
20 MSB - Most significant bit.
21 MSC - See Mobile Switching Center.
22 MSIN - See Mobile Station Identification Number.
23 Mobile Switching Center (MSC) - A configuration of equipment that provides radiotelephone
24 service. Also called the Mobile Telephone Switching Office (MTSO).
25 Multiplex Sublayer - One of the conceptual layers of the system that multiplexes and
26 demultiplexes signaling traffic and various connected user traffic.
27 NAM - See Number Assignment Module.
28 National Mobile Station Identity (NMSI) - A part of the E.212 IMSI identifying the mobile
29 station within its home country. The NMSI consists of the MNC and the MSIN. See ITU-T
30 Recommendation E.212.
31 NDSS - See Network Directed System Selection.
32 Neighbor Set - The set of pilots associated with the CDMA Channels that are probable
33 candidates for handoff. Normally, the Neighbor Set consists of the pilots associated with CDMA
34 Channels that cover geographical areas near the mobile station. See also Active Set, Candidate
35 Set, Remaining Set, and Private Neighbor Set.
36 Network - A network is a subset of a cellular or PCS system, such as an area-wide cellular
37 network, a private group of base stations, or a group of base stations set up to handle a special
38 requirement. A network can be as small or as large as needed, as long as it is fully contained
39 within a system. See also System.
40 Network Directed System Selection (NDSS) - A feature that allows the mobile station to
41 automatically register with a preferred system while roaming, or to be automatically directed by
42 a service provider, typically the home service provider, to a suggested system, regardless of the
43 frequency band class, cellular band, or PCS frequency block.
44 Network Identification (NID) - A number that uniquely identifies a network within a cellular or
45 PCS system. See also System Identification.
46 NID - See Network Identification.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxviii

1 NMSI - See National Mobile Station Identity.


2 Non-Autonomous Registration - A registration method in which the base station initiates
3 registration. See also Autonomous Registration.
4 Non-Slotted Mode - An operation mode of the mobile station in which the mobile station
5 continuously monitors the Paging Channel.
6 ns - Nanosecond (10-9 second).
7 Nt - The effective noise power spectral density at the mobile station antenna connector.
8 NULL - Any value that is not in the specified range of a field.
9 Null Traffic Channel Data - One or more frames of a specified data sequence sent at the lowest
10 agreed-upon rate of the negotiated rate set. Null Traffic Channel data is sent when there is no
11 primary, secondary, or signaling traffic available. Null Traffic Channel data serves to maintain
12 the connectivity between the mobile station and the base station.
13 Number Assignment Module (NAM) - A set of MIN/IMSI-related parameters stored in the
14 mobile station.
15 Numeric Information - Numeric information consists of parameters that appear as numeric
16 fields in messages exchanged by the base station and the mobile station and information used to
17 describe the operation of the mobile station.
18 OCNS Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the OCNS.
OCNS Ec
19 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the OCNS to the total
Ior
20 transmit power spectral density.
21 Optional Field - A field defined within a message structure that is optionally transmitted to the
22 message recipient.
23 Order- A type of message that contains control codes for either the mobile station or the base
24 station.
25 Ordered Registration - A registration method in which the base station orders the mobile
26 station to send registration related parameters.
27 Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator (OCNS) - A hardware mechanism used to simulate the
28 users on the other orthogonal channels of a Forward CDMA Channel.
29 OTD - See Orthogonal Transmit Diversity
30 Overhead Message - A message sent by the base station on the Paging Channel to communicate
31 base-station-specific and system-wide information to mobile stations.
32 Overload Class (OLC) - The means used to control system access by mobile stations, typically
33 in emergency or other overloaded conditions. Mobile stations are assigned one (or more) of
34 sixteen overload classes. Access to the CDMA system can then be controlled on a per class basis
35 by persistence values transmitted by the base station.
36 P_REV – Protocol revision level supported by a base station.
37 P_REV_IN_USE – Protocol revision level currently in use by a mobile station.
38 PACA - Priority Access and Channel Assignment. See PACA Call.
39 PACA Call - A priority mobile station originated call for which no traffic channel or voice
40 channel was immediately available, and which has been queued for a priority access channel
41 assignment.
42 Packet - The unit of information exchanged between the service option applications of the base
43 station and the mobile station.
44 Padding - A sequence of bits used to fill from the end of a message to the end of a message
45 capsule, typically to the end of the frame or half frame. All bits in the padding are ‘0’.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xxxix

1 Paging The act of seeking a mobile station when a call has been placed to that mobile station.
2 Paging Channel - A code channel in a CDMA channel used for transmission of control
3 information and pages from a base station to a mobile station.
4 Paging Channel Slot - An 80 ms interval on the Paging Channel. Mobile stations operating in
5 the slotted mode are assigned specific slots in which they monitor messages from the base
6 station.
7 Paging_Chip_Bit - Number of PN chips per Paging Channel bit, equal to 128 x v where v
8 equals 1 when the data rate is 9600 bps and v equals 2 when the data rate is 4800 bps.
9 Paging Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the Paging Channel.
Paging Ec
10 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Paging Channel to the
Ior
11 total transmit power spectral density.
12 Paging Indicator - A one-bit datum, sent on the Quick Paging Channel. Quick paging indicators
13 are associated with mobile stations, in pairs, via a hashing algorithm. Appearance of both of its
14 indicators in its assigned Quick Paging Channel slot serves to alert a slotted mode mobile station,
15 operating in the Mobile Station Idle State, that it should monitor the Paging Channel starting in
16 the next slot. See also Quick Paging Channel.
17 Parameter-Change Registration - A registration method in which the mobile station registers
18 when certain of its stored parameters change.
19 Parity Check Bits - Bits added to a sequence of information bits to provide error detection,
20 correction, or both.
21 Passive User Zone - A user zone in which the implicit registration that takes place at call setup
22 is sufficient to trigger a change in tiered service features. See also CDMA Tiered Services, User
23 Zone, and Active User Zone.
24 PCI - See Protocol Control Information.
25 PCS - See Personal Communications Services.
26 PCSC - See Personal Communications Switching Center.
27 PCS System - See Personal Communications Services System.
28 PDU - See Protocol Data Unit.
29 Permanent Memory - Power-off does not affect the information. This type of memory can not
30 be altered.
31 Personal Communications Services (PCS) - A family of mobile and portable radio
32 communications services for individuals and businesses that may be integrated with a variety of
33 competing networks. Broadcasting is prohibited and fixed operations are to be ancillary to
34 mobile operations.
35 Personal Communication Services System - A configuration of equipment that provides PCS
36 radiotelephone services.
37 Personal Communications Switching Center (PCSC) - See Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
38 Physical Channel - A communication path between stations, described in terms of the RF
39 characteristics such as coding, power control policies, etc.
40 Physical Layer - The part of the communication protocol between the mobile station and the
41 base station that is responsible for the transmission and reception of data. The physical layer in
42 the transmitting station is presented a frame by the multiplex sublayer and transforms it into an
43 over-the-air waveform. The physical layer in the receiving station transforms the waveform back
44 into a frame and presents it to the multiplex sublayer above it.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xl

1 Piece-wise Linear FER Curve - An FER-versus-Eb/Nt curve in which the FER vertical axis is
2 in log scale and the Eb/Nt horizontal axis is in linear scale expressed in dB, obtained by
3 interpolating adjacent test data samples with straight lines.
4 Piece-wise Linear MER Curve - An MER-versus-Eb/Nt curve in which the MER vertical axis
5 is in log scale and the Eb/Nt horizontal axis is in linear scale expressed in dB, obtained by
6 interpolating adjacent test data samples with straight lines.
7 Pilot Beacon - A transmit-only base station that broadcasts a Pilot Channel, a Sync Channel,
8 optionally a Paging Channel, but no Forward Traffic Channels. The mobile station measures the
9 pilot beacon to assist in CDMA hard handoffs and inter-frequency idle-mode handoffs.
10 Pilot Channel - An unmodulated, direct-sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted
11 continuously by each CDMA base station. The Pilot Channel allows a mobile station to acquire
12 the timing of the Forward CDMA Channel, provides a phase reference for coherent
13 demodulation, and provides a means for signal strength comparisons between base stations for
14 determining when to handoff.
15 Pilot Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the Pilot Channel.
Ec
16 Pilot - The ratio of the combined pilot energy per chip, Ec, to the total received power
Io
17 spectral density (noise and signals), Io, of at most K usable multipath components at the mobile
18 station antenna connector (see 1.4). K is the number of demodulating elements supported by the
19 mobile station.
Pilot Ec
20 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Pilot Channel to the total
Ior
21 transmit power spectral density.
22
23 Pilot PN Chip - One bit, or bit pair, of a pilot PN sequence, or the time interval corresponding
24 thereto.
15
25 Pilot PN Sequence - A pair of modified maximal length PN sequences with period 2 PN chips
26 used to spread the Forward CDMA Channel and the Reverse CDMA Channel. Different base
27 stations are identified by different pilot PN sequence offsets.
28 Pilot PN Sequence Offset - The time offset of a Forward Pilot Channel from CDMA System
29 time, as transmitted by the base station, expressed modulo the pilot period.
30 Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index - The pilot PN sequence offset in units of 64 PN chips of a
31 Forward Pilot Channel, relative to the zero offset pilot PN sequence.
32 Pilot Strength - The ratio of pilot power to total power in the signal bandwidth of a CDMA
33 Forward or Reverse Channel. See also Ec/Io.
34 PN - Pseudonoise.
35 PN Chip - One bit in a PN sequence, or the time duration of such a bit. It corresponds to the
36 smallest modulation interval in a CDMA system.
37 PN Sequence – Pseudo-random noise sequence. A deterministic, periodic binary sequence
38 having limited statistical similarity to a Bernoulli (coin-tossing).
39 Power Control Bit - A bit sent in every 1.25 ms interval on the Forward Traffic Channel that
40 signals the mobile station to increase or decrease its transmit power.
41 Power Control Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the power control subchannel. For the case
42 when the power control sub-channel is assumed to be transmitted at the same power level that is
43 used for the 9600 bps or 14400 bps data rate, the following equations apply: For Rate Set 1, it is

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xli

v
1 equal to x (total Forward Traffic Channel energy per PN chip), where v equals 1 for 9600
11 + v
2 bps, v equals 2 for 4800 bps, v equals 4 for 2400 bps, and v equals 8 for 1200 bps traffic data
v
3 rate. For Rate Set 2, it is equal to x (total Forward Traffic Channel energy per PN chip),
23 + v
4 where v equals 1 for 14400 bps, v equals 2 for 7200 bps, v equals 4 for 3600 bps, and v equals 8
5 for 1800 bps traffic data rate. The total Forward Traffic Channel is comprised of traffic data and
6 a power control sub-channel.
Power Control E c
7 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the power control
Ior
8 subchannel to the total transmit power spectral density.
9 Power Control Group - A 1.25 ms interval on the Forward Traffic Channel and the Reverse
10 Traffic Channel. See also Power Control Bit.
11 Power-Down Registration - An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station
12 registers on power-down.
13 Power Up Function - A method by which the mobile station increases its output power to
14 support location services.
15 Power-Up Registration - An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station
16 registers on power-up.
17 PPM - Parts per million.
18 Preamble - See Access Channel Preamble and Traffic Channel Preamble.
19 Primary CDMA Channel - A pre-assigned channel in a CDMA Cellular System used by the
20 mobile station for initial acquisition. See also Secondary CDMA Channel.
21 Primary Paging Channel (CDMA) - The default code channel (code channel 1) assigned for
22 paging on a CDMA Channel.
23 Primary Traffic - The main traffic stream carried between the mobile station and the base
24 station on the Traffic Channel. See also Secondary Traffic and Signaling Traffic.
25 Primitive - An atomic, well-defined method of transferring data and control information
26 between two adjacent layers and sublayers. Conventionally represented as a function invocation
27 with the data and/or control information as parameters.
28 Private Long Code - The long code characterized by the private long code mask. See also Long
29 Code.
30 Private Long Code Mask - The long code mask used to form the private long code. See also
31 Public Long Code Mask and Long Code.
32 Private Neighbor Set - The set of pilots associated with the private system base stations that are
33 probable candidates for idle handoff. See also Active Set, Neighbor Set, Remaining Set, and
34 CDMA Tiered Services.
35 Protocol Control Information (PCI) - Data passed between adjacent layers in the protocol
36 stack, together with the SDU, to assist a layer to properly encapsulate/decapsulate the SDU.
37 Examples of PCI in this document are the MCSB and the PCSB.
38 Protocol Data Unit - Encapsulated data communicated between peer layers on the mobile
39 station and base station. Unless specified otherwise, in this document PDU refers to the Layer 3
40 protocol data unit transferred at the interface between layer 3 and layer 2.
41 Protocol Stack - Conceptual model of the layered architecture for communication protocols (see
42 Layering) in which layers within a station are represented in the order of their numeric
43 designation and requiring that transferred data be processed sequentially by each layer, in the

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlii

1 order of their representation. Graphically, the “stack” is drawn vertically, with the layer having
2 the lowest numeric designation at the base.
3 PS - Pilot Strength. Also see Pilot Ec/I0.
4 Public Long Code - The long code characterized by the public long code mask.
5 Public Long Code Mask. The long code mask used to form the public long code. The mask
6 contains a permutation of the bits of the ESN, and also includes the channel number when used
7 for a Supplemental Code Channel. See also Private Long Code Mask and Long Code.
8 PUF - See Power Up Function.
9 PUF Attempt. A sequence of PUF probes sent by the mobile station in response to a Power Up
10 Function Message.
11 PUF Probe - One or more consecutive frames on the Reverse Traffic Channel within which the
12 mobile station transmits the PUF pulse.
13 PUF Pulse - Portion of PUF probe that may be transmitted at elevated output power.
14 PUF Target Frequency - The CDMA frequency assignment to which the base station directs a
15 mobile station for transmitting the PUF probe.
16 Punctured Code - An error-correcting code generated from another error-correcting code by
17 deleting (i.e., puncturing) code symbols from the coder output.
18 Quick Paging - A feature that permits mobile stations to further conserve battery power beyond
19 the savings achieved by slotted mode operation. See also Paging Indicator and Configuration
20 Change Indicator.
21 Quick_Paging_Chip_Bit - Number of PN chips per Quick Paging Channel bit. For Spreading
22 Rate 1, Quick Paging_Chip_Bit is equal to 256 x v where v equals 1 when the data rate is 4800
23 bps and v equals 2 when the data rate is 2400 bps. For Spreading Rate 3, Quick Paging_Chip_Bit
24 is equal to 768 x v where v equals 1 when the data rate is 4800 bps and v equals 2 when the data
25 rate is 2400 bps.
26 Quick Paging Channel - An uncoded, on-off-keyed (OOK) spread spectrum signal sent by base
27 stations to inform slotted mode mobile stations, operating in the Mobile Station Idle State,
28 whether to monitor the Paging Channel. See also Quick Paging, Paging Indicator, and
29 Configuration Change Indicator.
30 Quick Paging Channel Slot - An 80 ms interval on the Quick Paging Channel. See also Paging
31 Indicator and Configuration Change Indicator.
32 Quick Repeats - Additional transmissions of identical copies of a message within a short
33 interval to increase the probability that the message is received correctly.
34 r-csch - Reverse common signaling logical channel.
35 r-dsch - Reverse dedicated signaling logical channel.
36 Radio Configuration - A set of Forward Traffic Channel and Reverse Traffic Channel
37 transmission formats that are characterized by physical layer parameters such as transmission
38 rates, modulation characteristics and spreading rate.
39 Radio Configuration Class - A group of radio configurations. All radio configurations, for the
40 Forward Traffic Channel and the Reverse Traffic Channel, are divided into three classes by the
41 types of pre-spreading symbols (BPSK and QPSK) and spreading rates. RC Class 1 consists of
42 RC 1 and RC 2 for the Forward Traffic Channel and the Reverse Traffic Channel. RC Class 2
43 consists of RC 3 and RC 4 of the Reverse Traffic Channel, and RC 3, RC 4 and RC 5 of the
44 Forward Traffic Channel. RC Class 3 consists of RC 5 and RC 6 of the Reverse Traffic Channel,
45 and RC 6, RC 7, RC 8, and RC 9 of the Forward Traffic Channel.
46 RC - See Radio configuration.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xliii

1 Registration - The process by which a mobile station identifies its location and parameters to a
2 base station.
3 Registration Zone - A collection of one or more base stations treated as a unit when determining
4 whether a mobile station should perform zone-based registration. See also User Zone, with
5 which it should not be confused.
6 Release - A process that the mobile station and base station use to inform each other of call
7 disconnect.
8 Remaining Set - The set of all allowable pilot offsets as determined by PILOT_INC, excluding
9 the pilot offsets of the pilots in the Active Set, Candidate Set, and Neighbor Set. See also Active
10 Set, Candidate Set, and Neighbor Set.
11 Request - A layer 3 message generated by either the mobile station or the base station to retrieve
12 information, ask for service, or command an action.
13 Response - A layer 3 message generated as a result of another message, typically a request.
14 Reverse CDMA Channel - The CDMA Channel from the mobile station to the base station.
15 From the base station’s perspective, the Reverse CDMA Channel is the sum of all mobile station
16 transmissions on a CDMA frequency assignment.
17 Reverse Dedicated Control Channel - A portion of a Reverse Traffic Channel that can carry a
18 combination of primary data, secondary data, signaling, and power control information.
19 Reverse Fundamental Code Channel - A portion of a Reverse Traffic Channel that can carry a
20 combination of primary data, secondary data, signaling, and power control information.
21 Reverse Pilot Channel - A non-data-bearing direct-sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted
22 by each CDMA mobile station whenever the Enhanced Access Channel, Reverse Common
23 Control Channel, or Reverse Traffic Channel is enabled. The Reverse Pilot Channel allows a
24 base station to acquire the timing of the Reverse CDMA Channel and provides a phase reference
25 for coherent demodulation. The Reverse Pilot Channel may be transmitted either continuously or
26 in gated mode.
27 Reverse Supplemental Channel - An optional portion of a Reverse Traffic Channel (Radio
28 Configurations 3 and above) that operates in conjunction with a Fundamental Channel and or the
29 Dedicated Control Channel in that Traffic Channel, and (optionally) with other Supplemental
30 Channels to provide higher data rate services.
31 Reverse Supplemental Code Channel - An optional portion of a Reverse Traffic Channel
32 (Radio Configurations 1 and 2) that operates in conjunction with a Fundamental Channel in that
33 Traffic Channel, and (optionally) with other Supplemental Code Channels to provide higher data
34 rate services.
35 Reverse Traffic Channel. A Traffic Channel on which data and signaling are transmitted from a
36 mobile station to a base station. The Reverse Traffic Channel is composed of one Reverse
37 Fundamental Code Channel and zero to seven Reverse Supplemental Code Channels, zero to two
38 Reverse Supplemental Channels, and zero or one Reverse Dedicated Control Channel
39 Semi-Permanent Memory - Power-off does not affect the information. Also known as non-
40 volatile memory.
41 Roamer - A mobile station operating in a cellular system (or network) other than the one from
42 which service was subscribed. See also Foreign NID Roamer and Foreign SID Roamer.
43 SAP - See Service Access Point.
44 SCI - See Synchronized Capsule Indicator Bit.
45 SDU - See Service Data Unit.
46 Search Window - The range of PN sequence offsets that a mobile station searches for a pilot.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xliv

1 Search Window Offset - PN sequence offset used by the mobile station to position the search
2 window when searching for a pilot.
3 Secondary CDMA Channel - A pre-assigned channel in a CDMA Cellular System used by the
4 mobile station for initial acquisition. See also Primary CDMA Channel.
5 Secondary Traffic - An additional traffic stream that can be carried between the mobile station
6 and the base station on the Traffic Channel. See also Primary Traffic and Signaling Traffic.
7 Service Access Point - Conceptual point at the interface between two adjacent layers where
8 services are provided to the upper layer and data and protocol information is exchanged between
9 layers.
10 Service Configuration - The common attributes used by the mobile station and the base station
11 to build and interpret Traffic Channel frames. A service configuration consists of Forward and
12 Reverse Traffic Channel multiplex options, Forward and Reverse Traffic Channel transmission
13 rates, and service option connections. Service Configuration is signaled via the Service
14 Configuration information record and the Non-Negotiable Service Configuration information
15 record.
16 Service Data Unit - Data transferred between adjacent layers in the protocol stack. Unless
17 specified otherwise in this document SDU refers to the Layer 3 service data unit being
18 transferred to/from Layer 2.
19 Service Negotiation - The procedures used by the mobile station and base station to establish a
20 service configuration. See also Service Option Negotiation.
21 Service Option - A service compatibility of the system. Service options may be applications
22 such as voice, data, or facsimile. See (17).
23 Service Option Connection - A particular instance or session in which the service defined by a
24 service option is used. Associated with a service option connection are a reference, which is used
25 for uniquely identifying the service option connection, a service option, which specifies the
26 particular type of service in use, a Forward Traffic Channel traffic type, which specifies what
27 type of Forward Traffic Channel traffic is used to support the service option connection, and a
28 Reverse Traffic Channel traffic type, which specifies what type of Reverse Traffic Channel
29 traffic is used by the service option connection.
30 Service Option Connection Reference - A designator used by the base station and mobile
31 station to uniquely identify a particular service option connection.
32 Service Option Negotiation - The procedures used by the mobile station and base station to
33 establish a service configuration. Service option negotiation is similar to service negotiation, but
34 allows less flexibility for specifying the attributes of the service configuration. See also Service
35 Negotiation.
36 Service Redirection - The process by which the base station alters the system selection made by
37 a mobile station. It can be used temporarily during maintenance and testing to divert subscribers
38 to an alternate system.
39 Serving Frequency - The CDMA frequency on which a mobile station is currently
40 communicating with one or more base stations.
41 Shared Secret Data (SSD) - A 128-bit pattern stored in the mobile station (in semi-permanent
42 memory) and known by the base station. SSD is a concatenation of two 64-bit subsets: SSD_A,
43 which is used to support the authentication procedures, and SSD_B, which serves as one of the
44 inputs to the process generating the encryption mask and private long code.
45 Short Message Services (SMS) - A suite of services such as SMS Text Delivery, Digital Paging
46 (i.e., Call Back Number - CBN), and Voice Mail Notification (VMN).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlv

1 SID - See System Identification.


2 Signaling Traffic - Control messages that are carried between the mobile station and the base
3 station on the Traffic Channel. See also Primary Traffic and Secondary Traffic.
4 Slotted Mode - An operation mode of the mobile station in which the mobile station monitors
5 only selected slots on the Paging Channel.
6 Soft Handoff - A handoff occurring while the mobile station is in the Mobile Station Control on
7 the Traffic Channel State. This handoff is characterized by commencing communications with a
8 new base station on the same CDMA frequency assignment before terminating communications
9 with the old base station. See Hard Handoff.
10 SOM - Start-of-Message bit.
11 sps - Symbols per second.
12 SSD - See Shared Secret Data.
13 Station Class Mark (SCM) - An identification of certain characteristics of a mobile station.
14 Classes are defined in Table 2.3.3-1 of TIA/EIA-553-A and Table 6.3.3-1 of [4].
15 Status Information - The following status information is used to describe mobile station
16 operation when using the analog system:
17 • Serving-System Status. Indicates whether a mobile station is tuned to channels
18 associated with System A or System B.
19 • First Registration ID Status. A status variable used by the mobile station in association
20 with its processing of received Registration ID messages.
21 • First Location Area ID Status. A status variable used by the mobile station in
22 association with its processing of received Location Area ID messages.
23 • Location Registration ID Status. A status variable used by the mobile station in
24 association with its processing of power-up registrations and location-based
25 registrations.
26 • First Idle ID Status. A status variable used by the mobile station in association with its
27 processing of the Idle Task.
28 • Local Control Status. Indicates whether a mobile station must respond to local control
29 messages.
30 • Roam Status. Indicates whether a mobile station is in its home system.
31 • Termination Status. Indicates whether a mobile station must terminate the call when it
32 is on an analog voice channel.
33 • Update Protocol Capability Status. Indicates whether the mobile station should report
34 its protocol capability to the serving system.
35 Supplemental_Chip_Bit - The number of PN chips per Supplemental Code Channel bit, equal
36 to 128 for Radio configuration 1 and 85.33... for Radio configuration 2.
37 Supplemental Code Channel - An optional portion of a Traffic Channel (Forward or Reverse)
38 which operates in conjunction with a Fundamental Channel in that Traffic Channel, and
39 (optionally) with other Supplemental Code Channels to provide higher data rate services. On this
40 channel a combination of primary data, secondary data, or both (but never signaling information)
41 are transmitted.
42 Supplemental Data Block - A data block that is transmitted by the mobile station/base station in
43 a 20 ms time interval on a Supplemental Code Channel.
44 Supplemental Ec - Average energy per PN chip for one Forward Supplemental Code Channel.
Ec
45 Supplemental - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for one Forward
Ior
46 Supplemental to the total transmit power spectral density.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlvi

1 Supplemental RLP Frame - An RLP frame carried in a supplemental data block.


2 Symbol - See Code Symbol and Modulation Symbol.
3 Sync Channel - Code channel 32 in the Forward CDMA Channel, which transports the
4 synchronization message to the mobile station.
5 Sync_Chip_Bit - Number of PN chips per Sync Channel bit, equal to 1024.
6 Sync Channel Superframe - An 80 ms interval consisting of three Sync Channel frames (each
7 26.666... ms in length).
8 Sync Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the Sync Channel.
Sync Ec
9 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Sync Channel to the
Ior
10 total transmit power spectral density.
11 Synchronized Capsule Indicator Bit (SCI) - The first bit in any Paging Channel half frame,
12 which indicates whether a synchronized message capsule immediately follows.
13 System. A system is a cellular telephone service or personal communications service that covers
14 a geographic area such as a city, metropolitan region, county, or group of counties. See also
15 Network.
16 System Identification (SID) - A number uniquely identifying a cellular or PCS system.
17 System Time - The time reference used by the system. System Time is synchronous to UTC
18 time (except for leap seconds) and uses the same time origin as GPS time. All base stations use
19 the same System Time (within a small error). Mobile stations use the same System Time, offset
20 by the propagation delay from the base station to the mobile station. See also Universal
21 Coordinated Time.
22 Target Frequency - The CDMA frequency assignment to which the base station directs a
23 mobile station in a handoff using an Extended Handoff Direction Message, a General Handoff
24 Direction Message, or a Universal Handoff Direction Message.
25 Temporary Memory - Information is lost when power is gone. Also known as volatile memory.
26 Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI) - A temporary mobile station identification
27 assigned by the base station.
28 Timer-Based Registration - A registration method in which the mobile station registers
29 whenever a counter reaches a predetermined value. The counter is incremented an average of
30 once per 80 ms period.
31 Time Reference - A reference established by the mobile station that is synchronous with the
32 earliest arriving multipath component used for demodulation.
33 TMSI - See Temporary Mobile Station Identity.
34 TMSI Zone - The administrative zone that allows the TMSI to be reused. The TMSI_CODE has
35 to be unique within a TMSI zone but may be reused in a different TMSI zone. The TMSI zone is
36 identified by the field TMSI_ZONE.
37 Traffic Channel - A communication path between a mobile station and a base station used for
38 user and signaling traffic. The term Traffic Channel implies a Forward Traffic Channel and
39 Reverse Traffic Channel pair. See also Forward Traffic Channel and Reverse Traffic Channel.
40 Traffic Channel Preamble - A sequence of all-zero frames that is sent by the mobile station on
41 the Reverse Traffic Channel as an aid to Traffic Channel acquisition.
42 Traffic_Chip_Bit - The number of PN chips per Traffic Channel bit, equal to 1228800/rb for
43 Spreading Rate 1 and 3686400/rb for Spreading Rate 3, where rb is the data rate.
44

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlvii

1 Traffic Ec - Average energy per PN chip for the Forward Fundamental Channel. For the case
2 when the power control sub-channel is assumed to be transmitted at the same power level used
3 for the 9600 bps or 14400 bps data rate, the following equations apply: For Rate Set 1, it is equal
11
4 to x (total Forward Fundamental Channel energy per PN chip), where v equals 1 for 9600
11 + v
5 bps, v equals 2 for 4800 bps, v equals 4 for 2400 bps, and v equals 8 for 1200 bps traffic data
23
6 rate. For Rate Set 2, it is equal to x (total Forward Fundamental Channel energy per PN
23 + v
7 chip), where v equals 1 for 14400 bps, v equals 2 for 7200 bps, v equals 4 for 3600 bps, and v
8 equals 8 for 1800 bps traffic data rate. The total Forward Fundamental Channel is comprised of
9 traffic data and a power control sub-channel.
Traffic Ec
10 - The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Forward Traffic
Ior
11 Channel to the total transmit power spectral density.
12 Unassured Mode - Mode of delivery that does not guarantee that a PDU will be delivered to the
13 peer. The LAC entity at the receiver does not acknowledge a PDU sent in unassured mode.
14 Unique Challenge-Response Procedure - An exchange of information between a mobile
15 station and a base station for the purpose of confirming the mobile station’s identity. The
16 procedure is initiated by the base station and is characterized by the use of a challenge- specific
17 random number (i.e., RANDU) instead of the random variable broadcast globally (RAND).
18 Unique Random Variable (RANDU) - A 24-bit random number generated by the base station
19 in support of the Unique Challenge-Response procedure.
20 Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) - An internationally agreed-upon time scale maintained by
21 the Bureau International de l’Heure (BIH) used as the time reference by nearly all commonly
22 available time and frequency distribution systems i.e., WWV, WWVH, LORAN-C, Transit,
23 Omega, and GPS.
24 User Zone - An area within which CDMA Tiered Services may be provided. It may correspond
25 to an RF coverage area, or it may be established independent of RF topology. User Zones are
26 classified as broadcast versus mobile-specific, and as active versus passive. See Broadcast User
27 Zone, Mobile-Specific User Zone, Active User Zone, and Passive User Zone. See also
28 Registration Zone, with which it should not be confused.
29 User Zone Registration - An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station
30 registers when it selects an active user zone while in the Mobile Station Idle State. See also
31 Zone-Based Registration, with which it should not be confused.
32 Upper Layers - General reference to Layer 3 and the layers above it.
33 User Zone Exit parameter - A parameter used by the mobile station to determine if it should
34 exit a User Zone.
35 UTC - Universal Temps Coordiné. See Universal Coordinated Time.
36 Valid Power Control Bit - A valid power control bit is sent on the Forward Traffic Channel in
37 the second power control group following the corresponding Reverse Traffic Channel power
38 control group which was not gated off and in which the signal strength was estimated. See
39 3.1.3.1.10 of [1].
40 Voice Privacy - The process by which user voice transmitted over a CDMA Traffic Channel is
41 afforded a modest degree of protection against eavesdropping over the air.
42 Walsh Chip - The shortest identifiable component of a Walsh function. There are 2N Walsh
43 chips in one Walsh function where N is the order of the Walsh function. On the Forward CDMA

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlviii

1 Channel, one Walsh chip equals 1/1.2288 MHz, or 813.802 ns. On the Reverse CDMA Channel,
2 one Walsh chip equals 4/1.2288 MHz, or 3.255 µs.
3 Walsh Function - One of 2N time orthogonal binary functions (note that the functions are
4 orthogonal after mapping ‘0’ to 1 and ‘1’ to -1).
5 Zone-Based Registration - An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station
6 registers whenever it enters a zone that is not in the mobile station’s zone list. See also User
7 Zone Registration, with which it should not be confused.
8 Zone Timer - A timer used by the mobile station to remove outdated entries from its list of
9 zones in which it has previously registered.
10 µs - Microsecond (10-6 second).

11 CDMA Equations
12 The following equations describe the relationship between various test parameters under
13 different conditions.

14 Transmit Power of the Base Station

Pilot E c Sync E c Quick Paging E c Paging E c Traffic E c


15 + + + + +
I or I or I or I or I or
Power Control E c Supplemental E c OCNS E c
16 + + =1
I or I or I or

17 In the tests defined in this document, the following values are usually used:
Pilot E c
18 = -7 dB
I or

Sync E c
19 = -16 dB
I or

Paging E c
20 = -12 dB
I or

21
Traffic E c
22 Therefore, if = -16 dB at 9600 bps data rate, then
I or

Power Control E c
23 = -26.41 dB
I or

OCNS E c
24 = -1.64 dB
I or

Traffic E c
25 Otherwise, if = -16 dB at 1200 bps data rate, then
I or

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page xlix

Power Control E c
1 = -17.38 dB
I or

OCNS E c
2 = -1.75 dB
I or

3 Received Signal Strength for Mobile Station Not in Handoff

Pilot E c
E I or
4 Pilot c =
I0 I oc + 1
Îor

5 Single-Path Case

Sync E c
× Sync _ Chip _ Bit
E I or
6 Sync b =
Nt I oc
Î or

Quick Paging E c
× Quick _ Paging _ Chip _ Bit
E I or
7 Quick Paging b =
Nt I oc
Îor

Paging E c
× Paging _ Chip _ Bit
Eb I or
8 Paging =
Nt I oc
Î or

Traffic E c
× Traffic _ Chip _ Bit
Eb I or
9 Traffic =
Nt I oc
Î or

Supplemental E c
× Supplemental _ Chip _ Bit
Eb I or
10 Supplemental =
Nt I oc
Î or

11 Two-Path Case
12 According to Channel Simulator Configuration 1 and 2 (see 6.4.1.1), these two paths have the
13 same average power.
Eb Traffic E c 1
14 Traffic = × Traffic_Chip_Bit ×
Nt I or I oc + 1
Îor 2

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page l

1 Three-Path Case
2 According to Channel Simulator Configuration 4 (see 6.4.1.1), the first two paths have the same
3 average power and the third path has half the average power of the first one.
2 1
4 Traffic
Eb
Nt
=
Traffic E c
I or
(
× Traffic_Chip_Bit × 2 × 5
I oc 3
+ 5
I oc 4
)
+ +
Îor 5 Îor 5

5 Received Signal Strength for Mobile Station in Two-Way Handoff


6 According to Channel Simulator Configuration 2 (see 6.4.1.1), which is used in the tests of the
7 Forward Traffic Channel in two-way handoff, there are two paths from each cell and the power
8 received from each cell is Îor.
Pilot E c
E I or
9 Pilot c (for each pilot) =
I0 I oc
+2
Î or

3
Eb Traffic E c 2
10 Traffic = × Traffic_Chip_Bit ×
Nt I or I oc 3
+
Îor 2

11 Generally, if the power received from cell 1 and cell 2 are Îor1 and Îor2, respectively, then
Pilot Ec
1
Ec Ior
12 Pilot 1 =
I0 Ioc Î
+ or 2 + 1
Îor1 Îor1

13 Tolerances

14 CDMA System Parameter Tolerances


15 CDMA parameters are specified in IS-2000 (2). All parameters indicated are exact unless
16 otherwise specified.

17 Measurement Tolerances
18 Unless otherwise specified, a measurement tolerance, including the tolerance of the measurement
19 equipment, of ±10% is assumed.
20 Unless otherwise specified, the Ior/Ioc value shall be within ±0.1 dB of the value specified, and
21 the Ioc value shall be within ±5 dB of the value specified.

22 Normative Document References


23 The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
24 provisions of this document. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
25 standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this Standard are
26 encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page li

1 indicated below. ANSI and TIA maintain registers of currently valid national standards
2 published by them.
3
1. 3GPP2 C.S0002, Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems,
1999.
2. 3GPP2 C.S0003, Medium Access Control (MAC) Standard for cdma2000 Spread
Spectrum Systems, 1999.
3. 3GPP2 C.S0004, Signaling Link Access Control (LAC) Standard for cdma2000 Spread
Spectrum Systems, 1999.
4. 3GPP2 C.S0005, Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for cdma2000 Spread
Spectrum Systems, 1999.
5. 3GPP2 C.S0010-A, Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000
Spread Spectrum Base Stations, 2000.
6. 3GPP2 C.S0011-A, Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000
Spread Spectrum Mobile Stations, 2000.
7. 3GPP2 C.P9005, Test Data Service Option (TDSO) for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum
Systems.
8. 3GPP2 C.P9006, Markov Service Option (MSO) for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems.
9. 3GPP2 C.S0013-A, Loopback Service Options (LSO) for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum
Systems.
10. CDG Document # 45, MDM Minimum Requirements Specification.
11. CDG Document # 53, CDG Stage 2 Interoperability Test Specification (95-B version)
12. TIA/EIA/IS-127-1, Enhanced Variable Rate Codec, Speech Service Option 3 for
Wideband Spread Spectrum Digital Systems
13. TIA/EIA/IS-637-A, Short Message Services for Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular
Systems, 1995
14. TIA/EIA/IS-683-A, Over-the-Air Service Provisioning of Mobile Stations in Spread
Spectrum Systems
15. TIA/EIA/IS-707-A, Data Service Options for Wideband Spread Spectrum Systems
4
5

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page lii

1
16. TIA/EIA/TSB-50, Telecommunications Systems Bulletin: User Interface for
Authentication Key Entry
17. TSB-58, Administration of Parameter Value Assignment for TIA/EIA Spread Spectrum
Standards
18 TIA/EIA/IS-127-2, Enhanced Variable Rate Codec, Speech Service Option 3 for
Wideband Spread Spectrum Digital Systems Addendum 2
19 TIA/EIA/IS-733-1, High Rate Speech Service Option 17 for Wideband Spread Spectrum
Communications Systems Addendum 1
20 TTY Forum. Seeking Solutions to TTY/TDD Through Wireless Digital Systems. TTY/TDD
FORUM-13. Final. November 19, 1999
21 TIA/EIA/95B Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode
Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Systems
22 TIA/EIA-664 Cellular Features Description December 1, 2000

2
3

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page liii

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-1

1 1 MISCELLANEOUS AIR ITERFACE TESTS


2 Table 1-1 lists miscellaneous air interface tests.
3 Table 1-1 Miscellaneous Tests

Test No. Title

1.1 Pilot PN Offset

1.2 Hashing CDMA Channels, Paging Channels, and Paging Slot

1.3 Idle Ping Pong with Quick Paging Channel CCI

1.4 Quick Paging Indicator

1.5 Mobile Station Response to the Access Parameters Message

1.6 Mobile Station Response to MIN_P_REV

1.7 Status Request Message

1.8 Protocol Discriminator (PD) Test and Link Access Control (LAC) PDU Format Test
on the Access Channel.

1.9 Logging Tests

1.10 SYNC Channel Support

4 1.1 Pilot PN Offset

5 1.1.1 Definition
6 This test verifies the mobile station is able to determine PN offset of the base station. This test
7 will be performed for the following Pilot PN offsets (in order): 304, 511, and 0.
8 Traceability: (See [4] );
9 2.6.6.2.4 Pilot PN Phase

10 1.1.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1. Set pilot
12 PN sequence offset increment (i.e. PILOT_INC) to 1.
13

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-2

1
2 Figure 1.1.2-1 Basic Setup for Air Interface Tests, Single Base Station
3 b. At the base station, set Pilot PN offset to 304.
4 c. Verify that the mobile station detects and acquires the new base station.
5 d. Setup a mobile station originated call.
6 e. Verify user data in both directions.
7 f. End the call at the mobile station.
8 g. Change the Pilot PN offset to 511 and repeat steps c through f.
9 h. Change the Pilot PN offset to 0 and repeat steps c through f.

10 1.1.3 Minimum Standard


11 The mobile station shall correctly detect the base station Pilot PN offset and acquire the new base
12 station. All calls shall be established successfully.

13 1.2 Hashing CDMA Channels, Paging Channels, and Paging Slot

14 1.2.1 Definition
15 This test verifies that the mobile station hashes to the correct CDMA Channel, CDMA Paging
16 Channel, and CDMA Paging Slot. The effect of IMSI on hashed CDMA channel, paging
17 channel, and slot is also verified.
18 Traceability: (See [4] );
19 3.6.2.1.1, CDMA Channel Determination
20 3.6.2.1.2, Paging Channel Determination
21 3.6.2.1.3 Paging Slot Determination
22 2.6.7.1, Hash Function

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-3

1 1.2.2 Methods of Measurement

2 1.2.2.1 CDMA Channel Number Hashing

3 a. Connect the base station and the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1, and
4 configure the base station for multiple CDMA channel assignment capability.
5 b. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station and verify the mobile
6 station responds with a Registration Message. Note that some equivalent method
7 may be employed to verify that the mobile station has hashed to the correct CDMA
8 channel.

9 c. Change the IMSI (phone number) in the mobile station so that the hashing
10 operation selects a different CDMA channel number assignment, and repeat steps a
11 and b.

12 1.2.2.2 Paging Channel Number Hashing


13 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1, and
14 configure the base station system with multiple Paging Channels.
15 b. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station and verify the mobile
16 station responds with a Registration Message. Note that some equivalent method
17 may be employed to verify that the mobile station has hashed to the correct Paging
18 Channel.
19 c. Change the IMSI (phone number) in the mobile station so that the hashing
20 operation selects a different Paging Channel number assignment, and repeat steps a
21 and b.

22 1.2.2.3 Paging Slot Number Hashing


23 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1, configure
24 the base station system with slotted mode capability, and verify the mobile station
25 goes into slotted mode.
26 b. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station and verify the mobile
27 station responds with a Registration Message. Note that some equivalent method
28 may be employed to verify that the mobile station has hashed to the correct Paging
29 Channel Slot and receives messages in that slot.
30 c. Change the IMSI (phone number) in the mobile station so that the hashing
31 operation selects a different Paging Channel Slot number assignment, and repeat
32 steps a and b.

33 1.2.3 Minimum Standard


34 For all tests, the mobile station shall hash to the correct CDMA Channel, CDMA Paging
35 Channel, and CDMA Paging Channel Slot.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-4

1 1.3 Idle Ping Pong with Quick Paging Channel CCI

2 1.3.1 Definition
3 For mobile stations that support the Quick Paging Channel, this test will verify the following: A
4 mobile station using the Quick Paging Channel ‘configuration change indicator’ (CCI) can
5 perform multiple idle handoffs, back and forth (idle ping pong), between base stations, and
6 remain in slotted mode when CCI is set to OFF.
7 A diagnostic monitor may be used to check whether the mobile station is in slotted or non-slotted
8 mode. Alternately, the base station can send a message to the mobile station on the Paging
9 Channel, but configure the Quick Paging Channel paging indicator (PI) bits to OFF, and observe
10 that the mobile station does not act on the message.
11 With the Quick Paging Channel CCI feature available on the mobile station and base station, it is
12 assumed the base station communicates its CCI capability to the mobile station so that the
13 mobile station uses the feature.
14 In slotted mode, an idle mobile station monitors the Quick Paging Channel for pages or updated
15 overhead information, but also searches for the strongest pilot. A mobile station determines that
16 it should ‘idle handoff’ to a pilot that is sufficiently stronger (i.e. 3 dB) than the pilot of its
17 current demodulation.
18 Traceability: (See [4] );
19 2.6.2.1.1.3, Slotted Mode Requirements
20 2.6.2.1.2, Quick Paging Channel Monitoring Procedures
21 2.6.2.1.4, Idle Handoff
22 2.6.7.1, Hash Function
23 3.6.2.5, Quick Paging Channel Processing
24 3.7.2.3.2.13, Extended System Parameters Message
25 3.7.2.3.2.14, Extended Neighbor List Message

26 1.3.2 Method of Measurement


27 a. Connect two base stations to the mobile station, with the ability to transition either
28 base station power Ior 5 dB above the other, to induce idle handoff from one to the
29 other and back again.
30 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
31 P1 and is called Channel 1.
32 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
33 P2 and called Channel 2.
34 • Set the Extended System Parameter Message in both base stations as specified
35 in Table 1.3.2-1.
36

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-5

1 Table 1.3.2-1 Test Parameters for Extended System Parameters Message

Fields Values

QPCH_SUPPORTED '1' (QPCH is supported)

NUM_QPCH '01' (Number of the QPCH)

QPCH_RATE (indicator rate) '0' (QPCH indicator rate is 4800 bps)

QPCH_POWER_LEVEL_PAGE '101' (same as pilot channel)

QPCH_CCI_SUPPORTED '1' [configuration change indicators supported]

QPCH_POWER_LEVEL_CONFIG '101' (same as pilot channel)

2
3 b. Set NGHBR_PN for the Extended Neighbor List Message, Neighbor List Message or
4 General Neighbor List Message in both base stations to include the other base
5 station PN.
6 c. Set the Paging Channel data rate for Channels 1 and 2 to 4800 bps.
7 d. Setup Channel 1 and Channel 2 per Table 1.3.2-2.
8 Table 1.3.2-2. Test Parameters for Slotted Mode Idle Handoff

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dB 0 -5

Pilot E c dB -7 -7
I or

Quick Paging E c dB -7 -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

9
10 e. Slowly (over a period of several seconds, but not more than T31m = 600 seconds
11 round trip) transpose power levels of channel 1 and 2. That is, raise Channel 2
12 power by 5 dB (to Îor/Ioc = 0 dB), and lower Channel 1 power by 5 dB (to Îor/Ioc = -
13 5 dB). This should provoke an idle handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2.
14 f. Verify the mobile station has performed an idle handoff to Channel 2. On first idle
15 handoff the mobile station may exit slotted mode, but after some time, resume
16 operating in slotted mode.
17 g. Slowly return power of Channel 1 and Channel 2 to the original levels (make
18 Channel 1 dominant pilot by 5 dB).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-6

1 h. Verify the mobile station has performed an idle handoff back to Channel 1 and
2 stayed in slotted mode.

3 i. Place a call to the mobile station, and verify it completes, then returns to slotted
4 mode.
5 j. Repeat idle handoffs, back and forth, between Channel 1 and Channel 2, at least
6 twice. Verify the mobile station remains in slotted mode. Verify that a call can be
7 completed to the mobile station after each idle handoff.
8 k. While the mobile station is idle on Channel 2, instruct the base station #1 to modify
9 an overhead message, thus causing the CCI bits on Channel 1 Quick Paging
10 Channel to be set to ON.
11 l. Cause an idle handoff from Channel 2 to Channel 1. Verify that the mobile station
12 does not go to slotted mode until it has updated its overhead configuration.
13 m. Repeat steps a through l with the QPCH_RATE (indicator rate) set to 1 (9600 rate).

14 1.3.3 Minimum Standard


15 When the mobile station idle handoffs to a Quick Paging Channel whose CCI bits are set to OFF,
16 except for the first idle handoff, the mobile station shall stay in the slotted mode, and will
17 complete calls made to it, then return to slotted mode. When the mobile station idle handoffs to a
18 Quick Paging Channel whose CCI bits are set to ON, the mobile station shall go into non-slotted
19 mode to update its overhead configuration after idle handoff.

20 1.4 Quick Paging Indicator

21 1.4.1 Definition
22 For mobile stations that support the Quick Paging Channel, this test will verify the following:
23 • The mobile station will hash to the right Quick Paging indicator positions.
24 • The mobile station will monitor the following Paging Slot if the Quick Paging Indicators
25 are set to ON by the base station.
26 • The mobile station will not monitor the following Paging Slot if the Quick Paging
27 Indicators are set to OFF by the base station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-7

MS BS

Common Common
Channels Channels
Turn on/off PI on Quick Paging Channel
The MS hash to QPI
for the MS assigned QPCH Slot
positions and detect its
QPI on in the Assigned
QPCH Slot. Then the MS
start receiving on its
assigned PCH slots
Registration Request order

Registration Message

1
2 Figure 1.4.1-1 Reference Call Flow for QPI Testing

3 Traceability: (See [4] );


4 2.6.2.1.2 Quick Paging Channel Monitoring Procedures.
5 2.6.7.1 Hash Function
6 2.7.1.3.2.1 Registration Message
7 3.7.2.3.2.13 Extended System Parameters Message
8 Method of Measurement
9 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
10 b. Set the values in the Extended System Parameters Message as follows:
11
Fields Values

QPCH_SUPPORTED '1' (QPCH is supported)

NUM_QPCH '01' (Number of the QPCH)

QPCH_RATE '0' (4800 bps QPCH data rate)

QPCH_POWER_LEVEL_PAGE '101' (same as pilot channel)

12
13 c. Set the corresponding Quick Paging Indicators corresponding to the mobile station
14 Paging Channel slot to ON, and those for all other slots to OFF.
15 d. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station at expected Paging Channel
16 slot, and verify that the mobile station responds with a Registration Message. Note
17 that some equivalent method may be employed to verify that the mobile station
18 receives and processes messages on its assigned slot.
19 e. Set the Quick Paging Indicators corresponding to the mobile station Quick Paging
20 slot to OFF, and those for all other slots to ON.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-8

1 f. Send a Registration Request Order at expected Paging Channel slot on the Paging
2 Channel , and verify that the mobile station DOES NOT respond with a Registration
3 Message. Note that some equivalent method may be employed to verify that the
4 mobile station does not receive and process messages on its assigned slot.
5 g. Repeat steps b through f with the QPCH_RATE set to 1 (9600 bps).

6 1.4.2 Minimum Standard


7 When the Quick Paging Channel is supported, a mobile station shall receive and process
8 messages on its assigned Paging Channel slot when the corresponding Quick Paging Indicators
9 are set to ON.

10 1.5 Mobile Station Processing of the Access Parameters Message

11 1.5.1 Definition
12 This test verifies correct interpretation and functionality of the Access Parameters Message. In
13 addition, proper operation of the TA timer is verified.
14 Traceability: (See [3]);
15 [3] 2.1.1.2.2.2 Requirement for Transmission and Retransmission Procedures
16 (See [4]);
17 [4] 2.6.2.2.2, Access Parameters Message
18 [4] 2.6.3.1.1, Access Attempts

19 1.5.2 Method of Measurement


20 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
21 b. Set forward link parameters as specified in Table 1.5.2-1, and Access Parameters
22 Message as specified in table 1.5.2-2, for Test 1.
23
24 Table 1.5.2-1 Test Parameters for Mobile Station Response to
25 Access Parameters Message Tests

Parameter Units Test 1 Test 2 Test 3

Forward Link dBm/1.23 MHz -74 -74 -74


Power Ior

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -11

26
27 c. Ensure mobile station has been previously registered, then disable all forms of
28 registration (to ensure that the registration access probes do not interfere with this
29 test).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-9

1 d. Disable the reverse link to allow the mobile station to exhaust all its access probes.
2 This may be accomplished by instructing the base station to not acknowledge the
3 probes.
4 e. Attempt a mobile station originated call, and verify the mobile station uses the
5 access parameters specified in Table 1.5.2-2.
6 f. Attempt a mobile station terminated call, and verify the mobile station uses access
7 parameters specified in Table 1.5.2-2.
8 g. Repeat steps b through f for Test 2 and Test 3 as shown in Tables 1.5.2-1 and 1.5.2-
9 2.
10
11 Table 1.5.2-2 Access Parameters Message Values for Mobile Station Response to Access
12 Parameters Message Tests

Parameter Test 1 Test 2 Test 3

NUM_STEP 7 3 7

PWR_STEP 1 3 0

INIT_PWR 0 -6 4

NOM_PWR 0 0 0

ACC_TMO 2 4 1

MAX_REQ_SEQ 2 1 1

MAX_RSP_SEQ 1 2 1

13 1.5.3 Minimum Standard


14 Test 1:
15 • The mobile station shall produce 2 sets of 8 probes for the mobile station originated
16 call, and 1 set of 8 probes for the mobile station terminated call.
17 • Output power of each probe shall be greater than the previous probe by 1 ±1 dB.
18 • The interval between two consecutive, unacknowledged access probes shall be at least
19 320 ms.
20 Test 2:
21 • The mobile station shall produce 1 set of 4 probes for the mobile station originated call
22 and 2 sets of 4 probes for the mobile station terminated call.

23 • Output power of the first probe shall be 6 ±1 dB lower than the first probe produced in
24 Test 1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-10

1 • Output power of each probe shall be greater than the previous probe by 3±1 dB.
2 • The interval between two consecutive, unacknowledged access probes shall be at least
3 480 ms.
4 Test 3:
5 • The mobile station shall produce 1 set of 8 probes for both the mobile station
6 originated, and mobile station terminated calls.
7 • Output power of the first probe shall be 4 ±1 dB higher than the first probe produced in
8 Test 1.

9 • Output power of all probes shall be within ±1 dB of each other.


10 • The interval between two consecutive, unacknowledged access probes shall be at least
11 240 ms.
12 1.6 Mobile Station Processing of MIN_P_REV

13 1.6.1 Definition
14 This test verifies the mobile station shall not access the CDMA system if the mobile station's
15 protocol revision (MOB_P_REVp) is less than the minimum protocol revision permitted to
16 access the CDMA system (MIN_P_REV). This test should be performed only if the base station
17 supports a protocol revision greater than that supported by the mobile station, or if the base
18 station can be configured to send arbitrary protocol revision numbers in the Sync Channel
19 Message.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.6.1.3 Sync Channel Acquisition Substate
22 3.4.1 Access Channel

23 1.6.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
25 b. Configure the base station to send values for P_REV and MIN_P_REV in the Sync
26 Channel Message greater than the value of MOB_P_REVp in the mobile station.

27 c. Power on the mobile station.


28 d. Verify the mobile station does not indicate CDMA service is available.

29 Note: If the base station and mobile station are both dual-mode, the mobile station
30 may acquire the AMPS signal and indicate AMPS service is available.
31 e. Attempt to setup a mobile station originated call. Verify the mobile station does not
32 send any messages on the CDMA Access Channel.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-11

1 1.6.3 Minimum Standard


2 When the mobile station's protocol revision is less than the minimum protocol revision permitted
3 by the base station, the mobile station shall not indicate CDMA service is available and shall not
4 originate a call on this system.

5 1.7 Mobile Station Response to Status Request Message

6 1.7.1 Definition
7 This test verifies that that mobile station responds to the Status Request Message with an
8 Extended Status Response Message or Status Response Message with the correct information
9 record(s).
10 Traceabilities (See [4] );
11 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
12 2.6.4.1.2 (MS) Service Configuration and Negotiation
13 2.6.4.1.14 Processing the Service Configuration Record
14 2.6.4.1.15 Processing the Non-Negotiable Service Configuration Record
15 2.6.4.2 Traffic Channel Initialization Substate
16 2.7.1.3.2.4 Origination Message
17 2.7.1.3.2.5 Page Response Message
18 2.7.1.3.2.10 Extended Status Response Message
19 2.7.2.3.2.14 (MS) Service Connect Completion Message
20 2.7.2.3.2.16 Status Response Message
21 3.6.3.5 Response to Origination Message
22 3.6.4.1.2 (BS) Service Configuration and Negotiation
23 3.7.2.3.2.15 Status Request Message
24 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
25 3.7.3.3.2.20 (BS) Service Connect Message
26 3.7.5.7 (BS) Service Configuration
27 3.7.5.20 (BS) Non-Negotiable Service Configuration
28 Annex D Information Records

29 1.7.2 Method of Measurement


30 a. Instruct the mobile station to send an Origination Message.
31 b. Upon receiving the Origination Message, instruct the base station to send a Status
32 Request Message on the f-csch to request one or more of the information records
33 listed in Annex D of [4].

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-12

1 c. Verify the mobile station responds with an Extended Status Response Message if
2 P_REV_IN_USE is greater than 3 or Status Response Message if P_REV_IN_USE is
3 less than or equal to 3 on the r-csch with the correct record type and correct
4 information
5 d. Instruct the base station to assign the dedicated channels to the mobile station.
6 Verify the call completes and that user traffic is present.
7 e. Steps b through d may be repeated for one or more of the Mobile Station
8 Information Records supported.
9 f. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
10 g. Instruct the base station to send a Status Request Message on the f-dsch to request
11 one or more of the information records listed in Annex D of [4].

12 h. Verify the mobile station responds with a Status Response Message on the r-dsch
13 with the correct record type and correct information.
14 i. Instruct the base station to assign the dedicated channels to the mobile station.
15 Verify the call completes and user traffic is present.
16 j. Steps g through i may be repeated for one or more of the Mobile Station Information
17 Records supported.

18 1.7.3 Minimum Standard


19 The mobile station shall respond to the Status Request Message with:
20 • Extended Status Response Message (if P_REV_IN_USE is greater than 3) or Status
21 Response Message (if P_REV_IN_USE is less than or equal to 3) on the r-csch when
22 the Status Request Message is received on the f-csch with the correct record type.
23 The information in the Mobile Station Record shall accurately represent the mobile
24 station features/capabilities.
25 • Status Response Message on the r-dsch when the Status Request Message is
26 received on the f-dsch. The information in the Mobile Station Record shall
27 accurately represent the mobile station features/capabilities.

28 1.8 Protocol Discriminator (PD) Test and Link Access Control (LAC) PDU Format Test
29 on the Access Channel

30 1.8.1 Definition
31 This test will verify the following:
32 • If P_REV_IN_USEs is less than six, the mobile station shall set the PD field in the LAC
33 Utility sublayer to ‘00’; if P_REV_IN_USEs is equal to six, the mobile station shall set the
34 PD field in the LAC Utility sublayer to ‘01’.
35 • The format of the LAC PDU sent on the r-csch is as defined for the corresponding value
36 of P_REV_IN_USE.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-13

MS BS

Common Common
Channels Channels
Set P_REV to 3, 5, or 6 on ESPM

Registration Request order

Registration Message

1
2 Figure 1.8.1-1 Reference Call Flow for LAC Testing

3 Traceability: (See [3] );


4 2.1.1.4.1.1: (r-csch) Message Type fields
5 2.1.1.4.2: Procedures (PDU Format for the different P_REV_IN_USE).
6 (See [4] );
7 2.7.1.3.2.1 Registration Message
8 3.7.2.3.2.13, Extended System Parameters Message

9 1.8.2 Method of Measurement


10 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1-1.
11 b. Set P_REV to '0000011' (if operating on Band Class 0) in the Extended System
12 Parameters Message, or set P_REV to '0000001' (if operating on Band Class 1) in the
13 Extended System Parameters Message.
14 c. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station.
15 d. Verify the mobile station responds with a Registration Message with the LAC/L3
16 fields included in the order as given below and the Protocol Discriminator field is set
17 to '00'.
18

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-14

Parameter

Message Type Fields

ARQ Fields

Addressing Fields

Authentication Fields

SDU

PDU Padding Field

1
2 e. Set P_REV to '0000101' and PILOT_REPORT to '1' in the Extended System
3 Parameters Message.
4 f. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station.
5 g. Verify the mobile station responds with a Registration Message with the LAC/L3
6 fields included in the order as given below and the Protocol Discriminator field is set
7 to '00'.
8
Parameter

Message Type Fields

ARQ Fields

Addressing Fields

Authentication Fields

SDU

Radio Environment Report Fields

PDU Padding Field

9
10 h. Set P_REV to '0000110' and PILOT_REPORT to '1' in the Extended System
11 Parameters Message.
12 i. Send a Registration Request Order from the base station.
13 j. Verify the mobile station responds with a Registration Message with the LAC/L3
14 fields included in the order as given below and the Protocol Discriminator field is set
15 to '01'.
16

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-15

Parameter

Message Type Fields

LAC Length Field

ARQ Fields

Addressing Fields

Authentication Fields

LAC Padding Field

Radio Environment Report Fields

SDU

PDU Padding Field

2 1.8.3 Minimum Standard


3 • If P_REV_IN_USEs is less than six, the mobile station shall set the PD field to ‘00’.
4 • If P_REV_IN_USEs is equal to six, the mobile station shall set the PD field to ‘01’.

5 • The LAC PDU format shall be set to the appropriate format according to the
6 P_REV_IN_USEs.

7
8

9 1.9 Logging Tests

10 1.9.1 Initial Values of Logging Parameters


11 1.9.1.1 Definition
12 This test verifies that the mobile station resets the counters related to the Fundamental Channel,
13 Dedicated Control Channel, Supplemental Code Channel, and Supplemental Channel upon
14 power-up.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-16

MS BS

Power-up

Dedicated Dedicated
Channel Channel

Retrieve Parameters Message


(all relevant counters)

Parameters Response Message


(requested counters)

1
2 Figure 1.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Initial FCH, DCCH, SCCH, and SCH counters
3 Traceability: (See [4] );
4 Annex E: CDMA Retrievable and Settable Parameters
5 (See ( [2] );
6 Section 2.2.2.2: Mux and QoS sublayer
7 Table 49: Received MuxPDU Type 1 Categories and Formats for the FCH and DCCH
8 Table 50: Received MuxPDU Type 2 Categories and Formats for the FCH and DCCH
9 Table 51: Received MuxPDU Type 4 Categories and Formats for the FCH and DCCH
10 Section 2.2.3: Supervisory Procedures
11 Table 60: FCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1
12 Table 61: FCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2
13 Table 62: DCCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1
14 Table 63: DCCH Transmission Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2
15 Table 64. SCCH Transmission Counters
16 Table 65. SCH Transmission Counters
17 Table 66: FCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1
18 Table 67: FCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2
19 Table 68: DCCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x1
20 Table 69: DCCH Reception Counters for Multiplex Option 0x2
21 Table 70. SCCH Reception Counters
22 Table 71. SCH Reception Counters

23 1.9.1.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
25 b. Power-off and then power-up the mobile station.
26 c. Set up a call using the Fundamental Channel.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-17

1 d. Upon mobile station entering the Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State,
2 instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
3 mobile station for all the counters listed in Tables B-6 (or B-8), B-10 and B-12 (i.e.
4 counters associated with DCCH, SCCH, and SCH reception) in Annex B.
5 e. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify all
6 queried counters have a value of zero.
7 f. End the call.
8 g. Set up a call using the Dedicated Control Channel.
9 h. Upon mobile station entering the Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State,
10 instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
11 mobile station for all the counters listed in Tables B-2 (or B-4), B-10 and B-12 (i.e.
12 counters associated with FCH, SCCH, and SCH reception) in Annex B.
13 i. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify all
14 queried counters have a value of zero.
15 j. End the call.

16 1.9.1.3 Minimum Requirements


17 Mobile station correctly resets all the FCH, DCCH, SCCH, and SCH related counters to zero
18 upon powering up.

19 1.9.2 Logging of Fundamental Channel Related Parameters

20 1.9.2.1 Definition
21 This test verifies that the mobile station correctly updates the Fundamental Channel related
22 counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-18

MS BS

Traffic Traffic

Service Connect Message


(SCR)

Set Parameters Message


(set all relevant counters to zero)

User Traffic

Retrieve Parameters Message


(all relevant counters)

Parameters Response Message


(requested counters)

1
2 Figure 1.9.2.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving
3 FCH/DCCH Logging Parameters
4 Traceability: See Test 1.9.1

5 1.9.2.2 Method of Measurement


6 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
7 b. Setup a call using the Fundamental Channel.
8 c. Instruct the base station to direct the mobile station to use a service configuration
9 with the following values for both forward and reverse traffic channel: multiplex
10 option 1, the service connected as Primary traffic, and 20ms frame size only.
11 d. Instruct the base station to send a Set Parameters Message, with all of the counters
12 included in Tables F-1 through F-8 reset to zero.
13 e. Ensure user communication on both the forward and reverse traffic channel
14 proceeds for a sufficient duration. During this period, record at the base station the
15 number of frames of each type sent by the base station and received by the base
16 station.
17 f. Instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
18 mobile station for the all counters included in Tables F-1 through F-8.
19 g. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify the
20 following:
21 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
22 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
23 MUX1_FOR_FCH_1 through MUX1_FOR_FCH_10.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-19

1 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
2 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
3 MUX1_REV_FCH_1 through MUX1_REV_FCH_8.
4 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.
5 h. End the call.
6 i. Set up a data call using the Fundamental Channel.
7 j. Repeat steps c through g, instructing the base station to direct the mobile station to
8 use a service configuration with multiplex option 2 instead of multiplex option 1.
9 The expected results are as follows:
10 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
11 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
12 MUX2_FOR_FCH_1 through MUX2_FOR_FCH_5, MUX2_FOR_FCH_11 through
13 MUX2_FOR_FCH_14, MUX2_FOR_FCH_19 through MUX2_FOR_FCH_21,
14 MUX2_FOR_FCH_24, and MUX2_FOR_FCH_26.
15 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
16 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
17 MUX2_REV_FCH_1 through MUX2_REV_FCH_5, MUX2_REV_FCH_11 through
18 MUX2_REV_FCH_14, MUX2_REV_FCH_19 through MUX2_REV_FCH_21, and
19 MUX2_REV_FCH_24.
20 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.
21 k. Repeat steps c through h, with the service connected as Secondary traffic instead of
22 Primary traffic. The expected results for multiplex option 1 are as follows:
23 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
24 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
25 MUX1_FOR_FCH_1, MUX1_FOR_FCH_5 through MUX1_FOR_FCH_10, and
26 FCH_FOR_FCH_14.
27 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
28 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
29 MUX1_REV_FCH_1, MUX1_REV_FCH_5 through MUX1_REV_FCH_8, and
30 FCH_REV_FCH_14.
31 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.
32 l. The expected results for multiplex option 2 are as follows:

33 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
34 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
35 MUX2_FOR_FCH_1, MUX2_FOR_FCH_5, MUX2_FOR_FCH_9, MUX2_FOR_FCH_11,
36 MUX2_FOR_FCH_14, MUX2_FOR_FCH_17, MUX2_FOR_FCH_19,
37 MUX2_FOR_FCH_21, MUX2_FOR_FCH_23 through MUX2_FOR_FCH_26.
38 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
39 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
40 MUX2_REV_FCH_1, MUX2_REV_FCH_5, MUX2_REV_FCH_9, MUX2_REV_FCH_11,

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-20

1 MUX2_REV_FCH_14, MUX2_REV_FCH_17, MUX2_REV_FCH_19,


2 MUX2_REV_FCH_21, MUX2_REV_FCH_23 through MUX2_REV_FCH_25.

3 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.

4 1.9.2.3 Minimum Requirements


5 The mobile station shall correctly update all the expected Fundamental Channel related counters
6 for both the forward and reverse traffic channel. Furthermore, the parameters not expected to be
7 updated have value of zero upon being retrieved by the base station.

8 Note: The expected numbers may not exactly match numbers received from the mobile
9 station due to frame errors over the air, which will cause the frame to be logged under
10 a different category than the transmitted category. The extent of this discrepancy can
11 be reduced by reducing the FER.

12 1.9.3 Logging of Dedicated Control Channel Related Parameters

13 1.9.3.1 Definition
14 This test verifies the mobile station correctly updates the Dedicated Control Channel related
15 counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel.
16 Traceability: See Test 1.9.1.

17 1.9.3.2 Method of Measurement

18 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
19 b. Setup a call, using the Dedicated Control Channel.
20 c. Instruct the base station to direct the mobile station to use a service configuration
21 with the following values for both forward and reverse traffic channel: multiplex
22 option 1, the service connected as Primary traffic, 20ms frame size only.
23 d. Instruct the base station to send a Set Parameters Message, with all of the counters
24 included in Tables F-1 through F-8 reset to zero.
25 e. Ensure user communication on both the forward and reverse traffic channel
26 proceeds for a sufficient duration. During this period, record at the base station the
27 number of frames of each type sent by the base station and received by the base
28 station.
29 f. Instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
30 mobile station for all of the counters included in Tables F-1 through F-8.
31 g. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify the
32 following:
33 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
34 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
35 MUX1_FOR_DCCH_1 through MUX1_FOR_DCCH_5, MUX1_FOR_DCCH_10, and
36 MUX1_FOR_DCCH_15.
37 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
38 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-21

1 MUX1_REV_DCCH_1 through MUX1_REV_DCCH_5, MUX1_FOR_DCCH_10, and


2 MUX1_REV_DCCH_15.

3 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.


4 h. Repeat steps c through g, instructing the base station to direct the mobile station to
5 use a service configuration with multiplex option 2 instead of multiplex option 1.
6 The expected results are as follows:
7 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
8 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
9 MUX2_FOR_DCCH_1 through MUX2_FOR_DCCH_5, and MUX2_FOR_DCCH_26
10 through MUX2_FOR_DCCH_27.
11 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
12 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
13 MUX2_REV_DCCH_1 through MUX2_REV_DCCH_5, and MUX2_REV_DCCH_27.
14 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.
15 i. Repeat steps c through h, with the service connected as Secondary traffic instead of
16 Primary traffic. The expected results for multiplex option 1 are as follows:
17 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
18 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
19 MUX1_FOR_DCCH_5, MUX1_FOR_DCCH_10, and MUX1_FOR_DCCH_14,
20 MUX1_FOR_DCCH_15.
21 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
22 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
23 MUX1_REV_DCCH_5, MUX1_REV_DCCH_10, and MUX1_REV_DCCH_14,
24 MUX1_REV_DCCH_15.
25 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.
26 j. The expected results for multiplex option 2 are as follows:

27 1) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
28 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
29 MUX2_FOR_DCCH_5, MUX2_FOR_DCCH_9, MUX2_FOR_DCCH_26, and
30 MUX2_FOR_DCCH_27.
31 2) One or more of the following parameters are set to a value larger than
32 zero and their value matches those recorded by the base station:
33 MUX2_REV_DCCH_5, MUX2_REV_DCCH_9, and MUX2_REV_DCCH_27.
34 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.

35 1.9.3.3 Minimum Requirements


36 The mobile station shall correctly update all expected Dedicated Control Channel related
37 counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel. Furthermore, the parameters not
38 expected to be updated have a value of zero upon being retrieved by the base station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-22

1 Note: The expected numbers may not exactly match the numbers received from the mobile
2 station due to frame errors over the air, which will cause the frame to be logged under
3 a different category than the transmitted category. The extent of this discrepancy can
4 be reduced by reducing the FER.

5 1.9.4 Logging of Supplemental Code Channel Related Parameters

6 1.9.4.1 Definition
7 This test verifies that the mobile station correctly updates the Supplemental Code Channel
8 related counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel.
MS BS

Traffic Traffic

Service Connect Message


(SCR)

Set Parameters Message


(set all relevant counters to zero)

Supplemental Channel Assignment Message

User Traffic

Retrieve Parameters Message


(all relevant counters)

Parameters Response Message


(requested counters)

9
10 Figure 1.9.4.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving
11 SCCH Logging Parameters

12 Traceability: see Test 1.9.1.

13 1.9.4.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
15 b. Setup a call.
16 c. Instruct the base station to direct the mobile station to use a service configuration
17 with the following values for both the forward and reverse traffic channel: multiplex
18 option 0x3 for SCCH and the service connected as Primary traffic.

19 d. Instruct the base station to send a Set Parameters Message, with all of the counters
20 included in Tables F-9 through F-12 reset to zero.
21 e. Instruct the base station to send a Supplemental Channel Assignment Message to
22 the mobile station with the following: assign maximum number of forward and

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-23

1 reverse Supplemental Code Channels allowed by the multiplex option (specified in


2 step c) as shown in Table 1.9.4.2-1, infinite duration, and REV_DTX_DURATION set
3 to ‘1111’.
4
5 Table 1.9.4.2-1

Maximum Multiplex Option


Number of
SCCHs Rate Set 1 Rate Set 2
1 0x3 0x4
2 0x5 0x6
3 0x7 0x8
4 0x9 0xa
5 0xb 0xc
6 0xd 0xe
7 0xf 0x10
6
7 f. Ensure user communication in both direction proceeds for a sufficient duration,
8 with sufficient user traffic flow to utilize all of the assigned SCCHs. During this
9 period, record at the base station the number of frames of each type sent by the
10 base station and received by the base station.
11 g. Instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
12 mobile station for all of the counters listed in Tables F-9 through F-12.
13 h. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify the
14 following:
15 1) SCCH1_FOR_P and SCCH1_REV_P are set to a value larger than zero
16 and their value matches those recorded by the base station.

17 2) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.


18 i. Repeat steps c through h for various allowed multiplex options (for both rate set 1
19 and rate set 2) to provide different number of SCCHs as shown in Table 1.9.4.2-1,
20 also instructing the base station to assign the maximum number of SCCHs allowed
21 by the multiplex option assigned. The expected results are as follows:
22 1) SCCH1_FOR_P through SCCHi_FOR_P are set to a value larger than zero
23 and their value matches those recorded by the base station, and if i < 7,
24 SCCHi+1_FOR_P through SCCH7_FOR_P are set to a value of zero, where i is the
25 number of SCCHs assigned by the Supplemental Channel Assignment Message.

26 2) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.


27 j. Repeat steps c through i with the service connected as Secondary traffic instead of
28 as Primary Traffic. The expected results are as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-24

1 1) SCCH1_FOR_S through SCCHi_FOR_S are set to a value larger than zero


2 and their value matches those recorded by the base station, and if i < 7,
3 SCCHi+1_FOR_S through SCCH7_FOR_S are set to a value of zero, where i is the
4 number of SCCHs assigned by the Supplemental Channel Assignment Message.
5 2) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.

6 1.9.4.3 Minimum Requirements


7 The mobile station shall correctly update all expected Supplemental Code Channel related
8 counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel. Furthermore, the parameters not
9 expected to be updated shall have values of zero upon being retrieved by the base station.

10 1.9.5 Logging of Supplemental Channel Related Parameters

11 1.9.5.1 Definition
12 This test verifies the mobile station correctly updates the Supplemental Channel related counters
13 for both the forward and reverse traffic channel.
MS BS

Traffic Traffic

Service Connect Message


(SCR)

Set Parameters Message


(set all relevant counters to zero)

Extended Supplemental Channel


Assignment Message

User Traffic

Retrieve Parameters Message


(all relevant counters)

Parameters Response Message


(requested counters)

14
15 Figure 1.9.5.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Setting and Retrieving SCH Logging Parameters
16 Traceability: see Test 1.9.1.

17 1.9.5.2 Method of Measurement


18 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 1.1.2-1.
19 b. Setup a call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-25

1 c. Instruct the base station to direct the mobile station to use a service configuration
2 with the following values for both the forward and reverse traffic channel: multiplex
3 option 0x3 for SCH_0 and the service connected as Primary traffic.
4 d. Instruct the base station to send a Set Parameters Message, with all of the counters
5 included in Tables F-9 through F-12 reset to zero.
6 e. Instruct the base station to send an Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
7 Message to the mobile station with the following setup: assign forward and reverse
8 SCH0 with the maximum rate allowed by the multiplex option (specified in step c) as
9 shown in Table 1.9.5.2-1, infinite duration, and REV_SCH_DTX_DURATION set to
10 ‘1111’.
11 Table 1.9.5.2-1

SCH Data Rate


Multiplex Option
(kbps)
Rate Rate
Rate Set 1 Rate Set 2
Set 1 Set 2

MuxPDU MuxPDU Type 3 MuxPDU MuxPDU Type 3


Type 1 single double Type 2 single double
1x 9.6 14.4 0x03 0x04
2x 19.2 28.8 0x809 0x905 0x80a 0x906
4x 38.4 57.6 0x811 0x909 0x812 0x90a
8x 76.8 115.2 0x821 0x911 0x822 0x912
16x 153.6 230.4 0x921 0x922
12
13 f. Ensure user communication in both the forward and reverse traffic channel
14 proceeds for a sufficient duration, with sufficient user traffic flow to utilize
15 maximum assigned rate of the SCH_0. During this period, record at the base station
16 the number of frames of each type sent by the base station and received by the base
17 station.
18 g. Instruct the base station to send a Retrieve Parameters Message and query the
19 mobile station for all of the counters included in Tables F-9 through F-12.
20 h. Upon receiving the Parameter Response Message from the mobile station, verify the
21 following:
22 1) SCH1_FOR_1X and SCH1_REV_1X are set to a value larger than zero
23 and their value matches those recorded by the base station.

24 2) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.


25 i. Repeat steps c through h for various allowed multiplex options (for both rate set 1
26 and rate set 2) for SCH_0 to provide different maximum data rates as shown in
27 Table 1.9.5.2-1. The expected results are as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-26

1 1) SCH1_FOR_iX and SCH1_REV_iX are set to a value larger than zero and
2 their value matches those recorded by the base station, where i corresponds to 2, 4,
3 8, or 16 based on whether the maximum allowed rate is 2X, 4X, 8X, or 16X.
4 2) The counters SCH1_FOR_LTU and SCH1_REV_LTU are set to a value
5 that is a multiple of the corresponding SCH1_FOR_iX and SCH1_REV_iX,
6 respectively, counter value as per Table 1.9.5.2-2.
7 Table 1.9.5.2-2

SCH Rate Number of LTUs in the SDU


1X 0
2X 0
4X 2
8X 4
16X 8

8 3) All other parameters queried have a value of zero.


9 j. Repeat steps c through i for SCH_1 assigned instead of SCH_0. The expected results
10 are as given in step h and i with the following modifications:
11 1) The expected values for SCH_1 counters are as given for SCH_0 in steps
12 h and i
13 2) The expected values for SCH_0 counters are as given for SCH_1 in steps
14 h and i.
15 k. Repeat steps c through i for both SCH_0 and SCH_1 assigned simultaneously. The
16 expected results are as given in step h and i with the following modifications:
17 1) The expected values for SCH_1 counters are as given for SCH_0 in steps
18 h and i.
19 l. Steps c through k can be repeated with the service connected as Secondary Traffic
20 instead of as Primary Traffic. The expected results are exactly as given in step h, i, j,
21 and k.

22 1.9.5.3 Minimum Requirements


23 • The mobile station shall correctly update all expected Supplemental Channel related
24 counters for both the forward and reverse traffic channel.
25 • The parameters not expected to be updated have value of zero upon being retrieved by
26 the base station.
27

28 1.10 SYNC Channel Support

29 1.10.1 Definition
30

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-27

1 This test verifies that the mobile station of MOB_P_REV=6 is able to respond correctly to the
2 EXT_CDMA_FREQ field of SYNC Channel Message sent by the base station if any and tune to
3 appropriate CDMA channel and acquire the system successfully.

4 Traceability: (See [4]);


5 2.6.1.3 Sync Channel Acquisition Substate
6 3.7.2.3.2.26 Sync Channel Message

7 1.10.2 Method of Measurement

8 1.10.2.1 MS (MOB_P_REV = 6, neither QPCH nor RC > 2 is supported)


9

10 1.10.2.1.1BS (P_REV<6)
11 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
12 PILOT_INC to 1.

13
14 Figure 1.10.2-1 Basic Setup for Air Interface Tests, Single Base Station
15 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to a certain value.

16 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message withCDMA_FREQ set to
17 CDMA Channel 1.
18 d. Verify that the mobile station stays on CDMA channel 1.

19 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
20 f. End the call.
21

22 1.10.2.1.2 BS (P_REV=6, neither QPCH nor RC>2 is supported)


23 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
24 PILOT_INC to 1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-28

1 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to an arbitrary value.


2 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message with CDMA_FREQ set
3 to CDMA Channel 1 and EXT_CDMA_FREQ set to CDMA Channel 2 (a different
4 frequency than CDMA channel 1).
5 d. Verify that the mobile station stays on CDMA channel 1.
6 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
7 f. End the call.
8

9 1.10.2.1.3 BS (P_REV=6, QPCH or RC>2 (or both) is supported)


10 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
11 PILOT_INC to 1.
12 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to an arbitrary value.
13 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message with CDMA_FREQ set
14 to CDMA Channel 1 and EXT_CDMA_FREQ set to CDMA Channel 2 (a different
15 frequency than CDMA channel 1).
16 d. Verify that the mobile station stays on CDMA channel 1.
17 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
18 f. End the call.
19

20 1.10.2.2 Case 2: MS (MOB_P_REV = 6, either QPCH or RC>2 (or both) is supported)


21

22 1.10.2.2.1Case 2.1: BS (P_REV<6)


23 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
24 PILOT_INC to 1.
25 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to an arbitrary value.
26 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message with CDMA_FREQ set
27 to CDMA Channel 1.
28 d. Verify that the mobile station stays on CDMA channel 1.
29 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
30 f. End the call.
31

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 1-29

1 1.10.2.2.2 BS (P_REV=6, neither QPCH nor RC>2 is supported)


2 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
3 PILOT_INC to 1.
4 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to an arbitrary value.
5 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message withCDMA_FREQ set to
6 CDMA Channel 1 and EXT_CDMA_FREQ set to CDMA Channel 2 (a different
7 frequency than CDMA channel 1).
8 d. Verify that the mobile station stays on CDMA channel 1.

9 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
10 f. End the call.
11

12 1.10.2.2.3 BS (P_REV=6, QPCH or RC>2 is supported)


13 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 1.10.2-1. Set
14 PILOT_INC to 1.
15 b. At the base station, Set Pilot PN offset to an arbitrary value.
16 c. Configure the base station to send a Sync Channel Message with CDMA_FREQ set
17 to CDMA Channel 1 and EXT_CDMA_FREQ set to CDMA Channel 2 (a frequency
18 where QPCH or RC>2 is supported - whichever feature is supported by the mobile
19 station).
20 d. Verify that the mobile station tunes to CDMA channel 2 and acquire the system.
21 e. Set up a mobile station originated voice call and verify audio in both directions.
22 f. End the call.
23

24 1.10.3 Minimum Standard


25 The mobile station shall tune to the correct CDMA channel as specified in the
26 EXT_CDMA_FREQ field of the Sync Channel Message if applicable.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-1

1 2 POTS TESTS
2 Table 2-1 lists POTS tests.
3 Table 2-1 POTS Tests

Test Title
No.
2.1 Mobile station originated call
2.2 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Radio Link Failure During Conversation - Reverse
Link
2.3 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Radio Link Failure During Conversation - Forward
Link
2.4 Mobile station originated call, Test Service Options
2.5 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Busy Tone
2.6 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, No TCH Resources Available
2.7 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Reverse Link Failure During Call Setup
2.8 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Forward Link Failure During Call Setup
2.9 Mobile Station Terminated Call
2.10 Mobile Station terminated Call, Test Service Options
2.11 Land Party to Mobile Station Call, Mobile Operating in Slotted Mode
2.12 MSID, MCC, and IMSI
2.13 TMSI Assignment
2.14 TMSI Expiration Time (CDMA 1900)
2.15 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, DTMF
2.16 Forward Traffic Channel DTMF Tone Signaling
2.17 Enhanced DTMF Signaling
2.18 Channel Assignment from CDMA to AMPS
2.19 PACA Origination, User Terminates While Still in Queue
2.20 PACA Origination, Idle Handoff While in Queue
2.21 PACA Origination, Traffic Channel Becomes Available
2.22 PACA Origination, Features Interaction
2.23 PACA Origination, Permanent Invocation
2.24 PACA Origination, PACA Disabled for Mobile Station
2.25 True IMSI Support
2.26 Initial Service Configuration and Negotiation
2.27 Base Station Requested Service Negotiation (Successful Scenarios)
4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-2

1 Table 2-1 POTS Tests Continued


2
2.28 Base Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation
2.29 Mobile Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation
2.30 Service Negotiation Completion via General Handoff Direction Message and Universal
Handoff Direction Message
2.31 SCR without NN-SCR and NN-SCR without SCR in General Handoff Direction Message
and Universal Handoff Direction Message
2.32 Base Station Request Overrides the Mobile Station Request
2.33 Service Negotiation Involving Partial SCR and/or Partial NN-SCR
2.34 Quasi-Orthogonal Functions (QOF) assignment
2.35 Release Order on Access Channel

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-3

1 2.1 Mobile Station Originated Call

2 2.1.1 Definition
3 This test verifies that the mobile station can initiate a call to a land party, using a combination of
4 forward and reverse radio configurations (RC), listed as follows:
5
Forward Channel Reverse Channel
RC1 RC1
RC2 RC2
RC 3 RC 3
RC 4 RC 3
RC 5 RC 4

6 Once user traffic is present in both directions, the called party shall initiate release of the call.
MS BS

Origination Message
Initiate a call
Begin sending Null
Extended Channel Assignment Message Traffic on F-FCH

Preamble

Aquire preamble
BS ACK Order
Begin sending Null
Traffic on R-FCH Service Connect Message

Service Connect Completion Message

Applies ring back tone in audio path or AWI Message


Answer Call
Removes ring back tone from audio path or AWI Message

Conversation

Disconnect the call


Release Order

Release Order

7
8 Figure 2.1.1-1 Reference Call Flow for mobile station Originated Voice Call from a Land
9 Party Call
10

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-4

1
2 Traceability: (See [4] );
3 2.2.6.2.5 Mobile Station Origination Operation
4 2.6.3 System Access State
5 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
6 2.6.4 Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State
7 2.7.1.3.2.4 Origination Message
8 2.7.2.3.2.15 Service Option Control Message
9 2.7.3 Orders
10 3.6.3.5 Response to Origination Message
11 3.6.4 Traffic Channel Processing
12 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
13 3.7.3.3.2.3 Alert With Information Message
14 3.7.3.3.2.20 Service Connect Message
15 3.7.4 Orders
16 3.7.5.5 Signal

17 2.1.2 Method of Measurement


18 Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the test
19 parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
20

21
22 Figure 2.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Mobile Station Originated
23 Voice Call to a Land Party Call Test
24
25 Table 2.1.2-1 Call Setup Test Signal Channel Levels

POTS Signal Channel Forward Channel Level Forward Channel Level


(RC 1, 3, 4) (RC 2, 5)
Îor -75 dBm/1.23 MHz -75 dBm/1.23 MHz
Pilot Ec/Ior -7 dB -7 dB

Traffic Ec/Ior -15.6 dB -12.3 dB


26

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-5

1 Setup a mobile station originated call with RC1 on both the forward and reverse links.
2 Note that for calls with RC3 or greater the parameters of the Origination Message shall
3 be set as follows:
4
Fields Parameters Setting
ENHANCED_RC ‘1’ (Support of enhanced RC)
FOR _RC_PREF ‘011’ (RC 3)

REV_ RC_PREF ‘011’ (RC 3)

5
6 Instruct the base station to accept the call and assign a traffic channel with RC1 on both
7 forward link and reverse link.
8 Note for RC3 and greater, verify the base station sends the Extended Channel
9 Assignment Message with the following parameters set as follows:
10
Field Parameters Setting
ASSIGN_MODE ‘000’ (Traffic Channel Assignment) or ‘100’ (
Enhanced Traffic Channel Assignment)
FOR_FCH_RC or ‘011’ (RC 3)
FOR_RC

REV_FCH_RC or ‘011’(RC 3)
FCH_RC
11
12 When ring back tone is applied to the audio path, if applicable, instruct the called party to go
13 off hook.
14 Verify that the RC1 is used on both forward link and reverse link and verify the user traffic (Ex.
15 audio) on the both directions.

16 Instruct the called party to terminate the call.


17 Repeat steps b through f with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC2 on both the
18 forward and reverse links.
19 Repeat steps b through f with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC3 on both the
20 forward and reverse links.
21 Repeat steps b through f with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC4 on the
22 forward link and replace RC1 with RC3 on the reverse link.
23 Repeat steps b through f with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC5 on the
24 forward link and replace RC1 with RC4 on the reverse link.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-6

1 2.1.3 Minimum Standard


2 The call shall be established with user traffic in both directions, by using the radio configurations
3 specified in 2.1.2. Upon the called party terminating the call, the call shall be terminated.
4

5 2.2 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Radio Link Failure During Conversation -
6 Reverse Link

7 2.2.1 Definition
8 This test will verify if the reverse radio link is disconnected while a mobile station originated call
9 is active, the base station will detect loss of the reverse link and release the call.
10 Traceability: IS-2000 3.4.2,3.6.4, 3.6.4.4

11 2.2.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
13 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.
14 c. Verify user data in both directions.
15 d. Attenuate the reverse RF link (Attenuator 2 in Figure 2.1.2-1) to cause a loss of the
16 reverse link.
17 e. Verify the following:
18 1. The base station shall send a Release Order to the mobile station and release all
19 forward traffic channel resources.
20 2. The mobile station shall enter the System Determination Substate.
21

22 2.2.3 Minimum Standard


23 The base station shall send a Release Order to the mobile station and release all forward traffic
24 channel resources. The mobile station shall enter the System Determination Substate.

25 2.3 Mobile Station to Land Party, Radio Link Failure During Conversation - Forward
26 Link

27 2.3.1 Definition
28 This test will verify if the forward radio link is disabled while a mobile station originated call is
29 active, the mobile station will detect loss of the forward link and release the call.
30 Traceability: (See [4] ), 2.6.4.5

31 2.3.2 Method of Measurement

32 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
33 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.
34 c. Verify user data in both directions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-7

1 d. Attenuate the forward RF link (Attenuator 1 in Figure 2.1.2-1) to cause a loss of the
2 forward link.

3 e. Verify the following:


4 1. The mobile station shall disable its transmitter upon receiving a period of (N2m x
5 20) ms with insufficient signal quality (e.g. bad frames).
6 2. Upon expiration of the fade timer (i.e. within 5 seconds of loss of the forward
7 link), the mobile station shall declare loss of the forward link and shall enter the
8 System Determination Substate.
9

10 2.3.3 Minimum Standard


11 The call shall be established with audio in both directions. The mobile station shall disable its
12 transmitter and enter the System Determination Substate within five seconds of detecting loss of
13 the forward link.

14 2.4 Mobile Station Originated Call, Test Service Options

15 2.4.1 Definition
16 This test will verify the mobile station can initiate a call to the land party using each of
17 the supported Test Service Options and that FER on the reverse channel does not exceed
18 a specified value.
19 Traceability: (See [4] ) 2.6.4.1.2, 3.6.4.1.2, IS-126-A

20 2.4.2 Method of Measurement


21 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
22 b. Set test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
23 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using the first supported Test Service Option
24 from Table 2.4.2.1.
25
Service
Option Description

2 Mobile Station Rate Set 1 Loopback Service Option


9 Mobile Station Rate Set 2 Loopback Service Option
55 Loopback Service Option (LSO)
32798 Mobile Station Rate Set 1 Markov Service Option
32799 Mobile Station Rate Set 2 Markov Service Option
54 Markov Service Option (MSO)

26 Table 2.4.2.1 Test Service Options

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-8

1 d. Measure FER on the reverse channel.


2 e. Repeat steps c and d using each Test Service Option supported.

3 2.4.3 Minimum Standard


4 For each Test Service Option supported, the mobile station shall originate a call. . FER on the
5 reverse channel shall not exceed the base station FER set point.

6 2.5 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Busy Tone

7 2.5.1 Definition
8 This test will verify the mobile station successfully receives a busy tone on a call initiated to a
9 busy land party.
10 Traceability: (See [4] ) 2.6.4.4, 3.6.4.3, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.5-3

11 2.5.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
13 b. Setup a mobile station originated call to a busy land party.
14 c. Verify the following:
15 1. mobile station receives a Flash With Information Message or in-band tone
16 indicating “called-party busy”.
17 2. Mobile Station plays a busy tone to the user.
18 d. End call at the mobile station.

19 2.5.3 Minimum Standard


20 A busy tone shall be played to the user by the mobile station.

21 2.6 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, No Traffic Channel Resources Available

22 2.6.1 Definition
23 This test will verify that if there are no traffic channel (FCH or DCCH) resources available to
24 assign the call, the base station will send a Reorder Order or a Release Order to the mobile
25 station.
26 Traceability: (See [4] ) 3.6.3.5, 3.6.2.3, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.5-3

27 2.6.2 Method of Measurement


28 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.

29 b. Take all voice (TCH) resources out of service or configure the base station to behave
30 in a similar fashion.
31 c. Setup a mobile station originated call.
32 d. Verify the following:
33 1. The base station sends a Reorder Order or Release Order to the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-9

1 2. If the base station sends a Reorder Order, the reorder tone sounds as a 480 Hz
2 tone added to a 620 Hz tone repeated in a 250 ms on, 250 ms off cycle. And the
3 mobile station shall enter the Mobile Station Idle State.
4 3. If the base station sends a Release Order, the mobile station shall enter the
5 Mobile Station Idle State or the System Determination Substate.

6 2.6.3 Minimum Standard


7 The base station shall send a Reorder Order or a Release Order instead of a (Extended) Channel
8 Assignment Message and the mobile station shall behave as stated in step d of 2.6.2.

9 2.7 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Reverse Link Failure During Call Setup

10 2.7.1 Definition
11 This test will verify that if the reverse radio link is disabled before a mobile station originated
12 call has reached the traffic channel, the base station will fail to acquire the reverse traffic channel
13 and will release the call.
14 Traceability: (See [4] ) 3.4.1, 3.6.4.2, 2.6.4.2, 2.6.1.1

15 2.7.2 Method of Measurement


16 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
17 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.
18 c. Before the base station sends the (Extended)Channel Assignment Message,
19 attenuate the reverse link (Attenuator 2 in Figure 2.1.2-1) to cause loss of the
20 reverse link.
21 d. Verify the following:
22 1. The reverse link transmission is not received by the base station.
23 2. The base station shall release all traffic channel resources allocated for this call.

24 2.7.3 Minimum Standard


25 Upon detecting loss of reverse link from the mobile station, the base station shall release all
26 traffic channel resources.

27 2.8 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, Forward Link Failure During Call Setup

28 2.8.1 Definition
29 This test verifies that if the forward link is disabled before a mobile station originated call has
30 reached the traffic channel, the mobile station will detect loss of the paging channel, the call will
31 be released, and the mobile station returns to the Mobile Station Idle State.
32 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.4.3, 2.4.4, 2.6.3.4

33 2.8.2 Method of Measurement


34 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-10

1 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.


2 c. Before the base station sends the (Extended) Channel Assignment Message,
3 attenuate the forward link (Attenuator 1 in Figure 2.1.2-1) to cause loss of the
4 forward link.
5 d. Verify the following:
6 1. The forward link transmission is not received by the mobile station.
7 2. Upon declaring loss of the Paging Channel, the mobile station shall disable its
8 transmitter and enter the System Determination Substate.
9

10 2.8.3 Minimum Standard


11 Following attenuation of the forward link, the mobile station shall not receive the (Extended)
12 Channel Assignment Message. The mobile station shall disable its transmitter and enter the
13 System Determination Substate.

14 2.9 Mobile Station Terminated Call

15 2.9.1 Definition
16 This test verifies that the mobile station can receive a call, using a combination of forward and
17 reverse radio configurations (RC), listed as follows:
18
Forward Channel Reverse Channel
RC1 RC1
RC2 RC2
RC 3 RC 3
RC 4 RC 3
RC 5 RC 4
19
20 Once the user traffic is present on the both directions, the calling party will initiate release of the
21 call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-11

MS BS

General Page Message


Initiate a call

Page Response Message


Begin sending Null
Extended Channel Assignment Message Traffic on F-FCH

Receive N5m*20ms
sufficient signal on F-FCH
and begin sending preamble
on Reverse Pilot Channel Preamble

Aquire preamble
Order Message (BS ACK)
Begin sending Null
Traffic on R-FCH
Service Connect Message

Service Connect Completion Message

AWI Message (ringing applied)

Answers Call
Connect Order

Conversation

Disconnect the call


Release Order

Release Order

1
2 Figure 2.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Mobile Station Terminated Voice Call from a Land
3 Party Call
4 Traceability: (See [4] );
5 2.6.2.3 Mobile Station Page Match Operation
6 2.6.3 System Access State
7 2.6.3.3 Page Response Substate
8 2.6.4 Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State
9 2.7.1.3.2.5 Page Response Message
10 2.7.2.3.2.15 Service Option Control Message
11 2.7.3 Orders
12 3.6.3.3 Response to Page Response Message
13 3.6.4 Traffic Channel Processing
14 3.7.2.3.2.17 General Page Message
15 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
16 3.7.3.3.2.3 Alert With Information Message
17 3.7.3.3.2.20 Service Connect Message
18 3.7.4 Orders
19 3.7.5.5 Signal

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-12

1 2.9.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
3 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
4 b. Setup a mobile station terminated call. Instruct the base station to assign a traffic
5 channel with RC1 on the both forward link and reverse links.
6 Note for RC3 and greater verify the base station sends the Extended Channel
7 Assignment Message with the following parameters set as follows:
8
Field Parameters Setting
ASSIGN_MODE ‘000’ (Traffic Channel Assignment) or ‘100’ (
Enhanced Traffic Channel Assignment)
FOR_FCH_RC or ‘011’ (RC 3)
FOR_RC

REV_FCH_RC or ‘011’ (RC 3)


REV_RC
9
10 c. When ring back tone is applied to the audio path, if applicable, instruct the mobile
11 station party to answer the call.
12 d. Verify that the RC1 is used on the both forward link and reverse links and verify the
13 user traffic (Ex. Audio) on the both directions.
14 e. Instruct the calling party to terminate the call.
15 f. Repeat steps b through e with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC3 on
16 both the forward and reverse links.
17 g. Repeat steps b through e with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC4 on
18 forward link and replace RC1 with RC3 on the reverse link.

19 h. Repeat steps b through e with the following modifications: Replace RC1 with RC5 on
20 the forward link and replace RC1 with RC4 on the reverse link.

21 2.9.3 Minimum Standard


22 The call shall be established with user traffic present on the both directions, by using the radio
23 configurations specified in 2.9.1. Upon the calling party terminating the call, the call shall be
24 terminated.

25 2.10 Mobile Station terminated Call, Test Service Options

26 2.10.1 Definition
27 This test will verify the mobile station can respond to a call initiated using each of the supported
28 Test Service Options and that FER on the reverse channel does not exceed a specified value.
29 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 3.6.4.1.2, IS-126-A

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-13

1 2.10.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.

3 b. Set test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.


4 c. Originate a call to the mobile station using the first supported Test Service Option
5 from Table 2.4.2.1.

6 d. Measure FER on the reverse channel.


7 e. Repeat steps c and d using each Test Service Option supported.

8 2.10.3 Minimum Standard


9 The mobile station shall successfully terminate (complete) a call on each Test Service Option
10 supported. FER on the reverse channel shall not exceed the base station FER set point.
11 2.11 Land Party to Mobile Station Call, Mobile Operating in Slotted Mode

12 2.11.1 Definition
13 This test verifies the mobile station can operate in slotted mode, uses the correct slot cycle, and
14 responds to General Page Message from the base station received in its assigned slot. This test
15 will verify the base station can determine the assigned Paging Channel slots for a mobile station
16 and send a General Page Message in the assigned Paging Channel slot for that mobile station.
17 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.2.1.1, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.4.2, 2.6.4.4, 3.6.2.1.3, 3.6.2.3, 3.6.3.3,
18 3.6.4.2, 3.6.4.3, 3.6.4.4

19 2.11.2 Method of Measurement


20 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
21 b. Enable Parameter Change registration.
22 c. Disable all other forms of registration.
23 d. Set the MAX_SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX of the base station to 2.
24 e. Set the SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX of the mobile station to 0.
25 f. Wait for Parameter Change registration to occur.
26 g. Setup a mobile station terminated call with the mobile station in slotted mode.
27 Verify that the base station pages the mobile in the assigned slot of the mobile
28 station, per Table 2.11.3-1.
29 h. Verify user data in both directions.
30 i. End call at the mobile station.
31 j. Set the mobile station SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX to 1, and repeat steps f through i.
32 k. Set the mobile station SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX to 2, and repeat steps f through i.
33 l. Set the mobile station SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX to 3, and repeat steps f through i.
34 m. Set the base station MAX_SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX to 3, and repeat steps f through g.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-14

1 2.11.3 Minimum Standard


2 The base station pages the mobile station in the appropriate slot and the call shall be established
3 with audio in both directions in all cases.
4
5 Table 2.11.3-1 Slot Cycle Length Versus Various Values of
6 MAX_SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX and SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX

Step MAX_SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX Slot Slot Cycle


(Base Station) (Mobile Station) Cycle Length
Index (seconds)
Used
e 2 0 0 1.28
j 2 1 1 2.56
k 2 2 2 5.12
l 2 3 2 5.12
m 3 3 3 10.24
7

8 2.12 MSID, MCC, and IMSI

9 2.12.1 Definition
10 These tests verify the protocol of the Mobile Station Identifier number (MSID or
11 MSIN), Mobile Country Code (MCC), and International Mobile Station Identity
12 (IMSI). In each test, certain fields of the Extended System Parameters Message
13 are set at the base station, and/or some corresponding parameters are
14 programmed into the mobile station. Then a call is made, either mobile
15 origination or mobile termination. Finally, the layer 3 messaging log (MDM or
16 base station) is examined for proper Origination Message or Page Response
17 Message.
18
19 Three instances of PREF_MSID_TYPE are checked. Checks are also made to ensure that the
20 base station uses a valid addressing form for the cases when the MCC and IMSI_11_12 of the
21 mobile station and base station match, do not match or are wildcard values.
22 Traceability:
23 [4] 3.7.2.3.2.13 Extended System Parameters Message
24 [4] 2.6.2.2.5 Extended System Parameters Message
25 [4] 2.6.2.3 Mobile Station Page Match Operation
26 [4] 2.3.1 Mobile Station Identification Number
27 [4] 2.3.1.1 Encoding of IMSI_M_S and IMSI_T_S 11
28 [4] Table 3.7.2.3.2.13-1. Preferred MSID Types
29 [4] 3.6.2.2 Overhead Information

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-15

1 2.12.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1, so that
3 the mobile registers and enters the Mobile Station Idle State.
4 b. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘00’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
5 Parameters Message and make a mobile station originated call and mobile station
6 terminated call (Test 1).
7 c. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘10’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
8 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same values of MCC and
9 IMSI_11_12 sent in the Extended System Parameters Message by the base station.
10 Make a mobile station originated call and mobile station terminated call (Test 2).
11 d. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘10’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
12 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same value of IMSI_11_12
13 but with a different value of MCC sent in the Extended System Parameters Message
14 by the base station. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated call (Test
15 3).
16 e. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘10’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
17 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same value of MCC but
18 with a different value of IMSI_11_12 sent in the Extended System Parameters
19 Message by the base station. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated
20 call (Test 4).
21 f. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘10’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
22 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with different values of MCC and
23 IMSI_11_12 than those sent in the Extended System Parameters Message by the
24 base station. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated call (Test 5).
25 g. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘11’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
26 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same values of MCC and
27 IMSI_11_12 sent in the Extended System Parameters Message by the base station.
28 Make a mobile station originated call and mobile station terminated call (Test 6).
29 h. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘11’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
30 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same value of IMSI_11_12
31 used in the base station but with a different value of MCC. Make a mobile originated
32 call and mobile terminated call (Test 7).
33 i. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘11’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
34 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with the same value of MCC but
35 with a different value of IMSI_11_12 sent in the Extended System Parameters
36 Message by the base station. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated
37 call (Test 8).
38 j. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘11’ and USE_TMSI to ‘0’ in the Extended System
39 Parameters Message. Program the mobile station with different values of MCC and
40 IMSI_11_12 than those sent in the Extended System Parameters Message by the
41 base station. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated call (Test 9).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-16

1 k. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘10’, USE_TMSI to ‘0’, MCC to ‘1111111111’(wildcard), and


2 IMSI_11_12 to ‘1111111’(wildcard) in the Extended System Parameters Message.
3 Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated call (Test 10).
4 l. Set PREF_MSID_TYPE to ‘11’, USE_TMSI to ‘0’, MCC to ‘1111111111’ (wildcard),
5 and IMSI_11_12 to ‘1111111’ (wildcard) in the Extended System Parameters
6 Message. Make a mobile originated call and mobile terminated call (Test 11).
7

8 2.12.3 Minimum Standard


9
10 For all tests, the call shall complete normally with audio in each direction.
11
12 For Test 1, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘000’ and send IMSI_S
13 and ESN in the Origination Message and Page Response Message.
14 For Test 2, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘010’ and shall send
15 IMSI_S (shall not send MCC and IMSI_11_12) in the Origination Message and
16 Page Response Message.
17 For Test 3, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘010’ and shall send
18 MCC and IMSI_S (shall not send IMSI_11_12) in the Origination Message and
19 Page Response Message.
20 For Test 4, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘010’ and shall send
21 IMSI_11_12 and IMSI_S (shall not send MCC) in the Origination Message and
22 Page Response Message.
23 For Test 5, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘010’ and shall send
24 MCC, IMSI_11_12 and IMSI_S in the Origination Message and Page Response
25 Message.
26 For Test 6, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘011’ and shall send
27 IMSI_S and ESN (shall not send MCC and IMSI_11_12) in the Origination
28 Message and Page Response Message.
29 For Test 7, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘011’ and shall send
30 MCC and IMSI_S and ESN (shall not send IMSI_11_12) in the Origination
31 Message and Page Response Message.
32 For Test 8, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘011’ and shall send
33 IMSI_11_12, IMSI_S and ESN (shall not send MCC) in the Origination Message
34 and Page Response Message.
35 For Test 9, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘011’ and shall send
36 MCC, IMSI_11_12 and IMSI_S and ESN in the Origination Message and Page
37 Response Message.
38 For Test 10, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘010’ and shall send
39 IMSI_S (but should not send MCC and IMSI_11_12) in the Origination Message
40 and Page Response Message.
41 For Test 11, the mobile station shall set its MSID_TYPE to ‘011’ and shall send
42 IMSI_S and ESN (but should not send MCC and IMSI_11_12) in the Origination
43 Message and Page Response Message.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-17

1 2.13 TMSI Assignment

2 2.13.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the base station can assign a Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI) to the
4 mobile station, and that mobile-originated and mobile-terminated calls can be performed using
5 the TMSI.
6 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.3.15,2.6.2.3, 2.6.3.1.5, 2.7.1.3.2.8, 2.7.2.3.2.19

7 2.13.2 Method of Measurement


8 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
9 b. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
10 values as shown in Table 2.13.2-1.
11
12 Table 2.13.2-1 Extended System Parameters Message Values for TMSI Tests

Field Value
PREF_MSID_TYPE
'10'
USE_TMSI
'1'
13
14 c. Enable power on registration. Configure the base station to assign TMSIs.
15 d. Power on the mobile station and wait for power on registration to occur.
16 e. Instruct the base station to send a TMSI Assignment Message to the mobile station
17 with a TMSI Assignment. Verify that the mobile station responds with a TMSI
18 Assignment Completion Message within T56m seconds.

19 f. Setup a mobile station originated call. Upon receiving the Origination Message at the
20 base station, verify the mobile station includes the correct TMSI in the message.
21 g. End call.
22 h. Setup a call from a land party to the mobile station. Log the General Page Message
23 and verify that the base station includes the correct TMSI in the message.
24 i. End call.

25 2.13.3 Minimum Standard


26 Both calls shall be successful. The Origination Message in step f and the General Page Message
27 in step h shall contain the TMSI that was assigned in step e.

28 2.14 TMSI Expiration Time

29 2.14.1 Definition
30 This test will verify that the mobile station operates properly in conjunction with various TMSI
31 Expiration Times.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-18

1 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.2.4, 3.7.2.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.22

2 2.14.2 Method of Measurement

3 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
4 b. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
5 values as shown in Table 2.13.2-1.

6 c. Configure the base station to assign TMSI and enable power-up registration.
7 d. Configure the base station TMSI_EXP_TIME. The base station shall set this field in
8 the TMSI Assignment Message to the System Time in units of 80ms x 212 when the
9 TMSI is to expire.
10 e. Power on the mobile station and wait for power-up registration to occur.
11 f. Instruct for the base station to send a TMSI Assignment Message to the mobile
12 station with a TMSI assignment. Verify that the mobile station responds with a TMSI
13 Assignment Completion Message within T56m seconds.

14 g. Setup a mobile station originated call.


15 h. Log the Origination Message at the base station and verify the mobile station
16 includes the correct TMSI in the message.
17 i. End call.
18 j. Wait for the TMSI expiration timer to expire. Upon expiration, setup another call.
19 Upon receiving the Origination Message at the base station, verify that the TMSI is
20 no longer included in the message.
21 k. Power down the mobile station.
22 l. Repeat steps e. through i. with a call from a land party to the mobile station. Upon
23 receiving the General Page Message at the base station, verify that the TMSI is no
24 longer included in the message.

25 2.14.3 Minimum Standard


26 Each call in the test shall be successful. The Origination Message and General Page Message
27 shall include the correct TMSI prior to expiration of the TMSI timer. Following the expiration of
28 the TMSI timer, the TMSI shall no longer be included in the messaging.

29 2.15 Mobile Station to Land Party Call, DTMF

30 2.15.1 Definition
31 This test will verify mobile station-initiated DTMF tones operate properly during a CDMA call.
32 DTMF tones should be recorded for playback at a later time to verify time on, time off, power
33 level, frequency, and repeatability.
34 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-19

1 2.15.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station as shown in Figure 2.15.2-1.

3
4 Figure 2.15.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Mobile Station-Initiated DTMF Tones
5
6 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.
7 c. Direct the mobile station to send 0123456789#* as burst DTMF digits while
8 recording the resulting tones. Perform at various speeds/modes and randomize the
9 digit order. Note the order of digits to verify sequential order.
10 d. Record DTMF on length, off length, and digit fields of Send Burst DTMF Message
11 received at the base station.
12 e. If the mobile station supports various values for DTMF on and off lengths, repeat
13 steps b through d for the shortest and longest values.

14 2.15.3 Minimum Standard


15 The mobile station shall not send subsequent tone messages until the previous message is
16 acknowledged by the base station.
17 2.15.4 Frequency
18 Tone frequencies shall be ±1.5% of assigned frequencies shown in Table 2.15.3.1-1

19 2.15.4.1.1 Timing
20 The recorded pulse width shall be within 10% of the recommended pulse width for each
21 DTMF_ON_LENGTH tested.
22 The recorded inter-digit interval shall be within 10% of the recommended minimum inter-digit
23 interval for each DTMF_OFF_LENGTH tested.

24 2.15.4.1.2 Repeatability
25 The cumulative binary distribution function is used in Table 2.15.3.3-1 to show various sample
26 levels versus the number of failures expected. Pass/fail criteria are shown in Table 2.15.3.3-2.
27

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-20

1 Table 2.15.3.1-1 DTMF Assigned Frequencies

Digit Low Group (Hz) High Group (Hz)


1 697 1209
2 697 1336
3 697 1477
4 770 1209
5 770 1336
6 770 1477
7 852 1209
8 852 1336
9 852 1477
* 941 1209
0 941 1336
# 941 1477
2
3 Table 2.15.3.3-1 Cumulative Binomial Distribution Function
4 For 99.95% DTMF Success Rate

Number of DTMF Tone Samples


n 100 250 500 750 1000
0 95.12% 88.25% 77.88% 68.72% 60.65%
1 99.88% 99.28% 97.35% 94.51% 90.98%
2 100.00% 99.97% 99.78% 99.34% 98.56%
3 100.00% 100.00% 99.99% 99.94% 99.83%
4 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 99.98%
5 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%
2 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%
5
6 Table 2.15.3.3-2 DTMF Pass/Fail Criteria

Number of DTMF Number of Failures Number of Failures


Tone Samples Pass Criteria Fail Criteria
100 ≤2 >2
250 ≤3 >3
500 ≤4 >4
1000 ≤5 >5
7

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-21

1 2.16 Forward Traffic Channel DTMF Tone Signaling

2 2.16.1 Definition
3 The purpose of this test is to verify land party initiated DTMF tones operate properly during a
4 CDMA call. It also ensures sequencing and tone duration of the Send Burst DTMF Message and
5 the Continuous DTMF Tone Order are preserved on the Forward Traffic Channel.
6 Traceability: (See [4] ); 3.7.3.3.2.9, 3.7.4-1

7 2.16.2 Method of Measurement


8 a. Connect the mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
9 b. Setup a call between the mobile station and the land party DTMF source.
10 c. At the DTMF source, perform the following steps in rapid succession:
11 1) Press and hold any number key for approximately 5 seconds.
12 2) Send characters 0123456789#* as burst DTMF messages. Perform at
13 various speeds/modes and randomize the digit order. Note the order of digits to
14 verify sequential order.
15 3) Press and hold any number key on the keypad for approximately 5
16 seconds.

17 4) Again press and hold any number key on the keypad for approximately 5
18 seconds.
19 d. Using a DTMF detector, verify DTMF tones received at the output of the mobile
20 station.
21 e. If the mobile station supports various values for DTMF on and off lengths, repeat
22 steps b through d for the shortest and longest values.

23 f. Repeat this test for all rate sets supported by the mobile station.

24 2.16.3 Minimum Standard


25 a. The base station shall send no subsequent tone message until the previous message
26 was acknowledged by the mobile station.
27 b. The base station shall send a Continuous Tone Order (Start) and a Continuous Tone
28 Order (Stop) for each of the three 5 second key presses.
29 c. The mobile station shall generate the tones in the order and approximate duration
30 transmitted by the base station.
31 Frequency
32 Tone frequencies shall be +/-1.5% of assigned frequencies shown in table 2.15.3.1-1.
33 Timing
34 DTMF_ON_LENGTH shall be within 10% of tolerance but more than 95 ms.

35 DTMF_OFF_LENGTH shall be within 10% of tolerance but not less than 60 ms.
36 Repeatability
37 Pass/fail criteria are shown in Table 2.15.3.3-2.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-22

1 2.17 Enhanced DTMF Signaling

2 2.17.1 Definition
3 The purpose of this test is to verify that sequencing and tone duration of the Send Burst DTMF
4 Message and the Continuous DTMF Tone Order are preserved.
5 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.4

6 2.17.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Connect the mobile station as shown in figure 2.15.2-1

8 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.


9 c. Direct the mobile station to perform the following steps in rapid succession:
10 1) Press and hold any number key on the keypad for approximately 5
11 seconds.
12 2) Direct mobile station to send characters 0123456789#* as a burst DTMF
13 message.
14 3) Press and hold any number key on the keypad for approximately 5
15 seconds.
16 4) Again press and hold any number key on the keypad for approximately 5
17 seconds.
18 d Record the tones produced at the terminated side.

19 2.17.3 Minimum Standard


20 a. The mobile station shall send no subsequent tone message until the previous
21 message was acknowledged by the base station.
22 b. The mobile station shall send a Continuous Tone Order (Start) and a Continuous Tone
23 Order (Stop) for each of the three 5 second key presses.
24 c. The base station shall generate the tones in the order and approximate duration
25 transmitted by the mobile station.

26 2.18 Channel Assignment from CDMA to AMPS

27 2.18.1 Definition
28 This test will verify that a base station assigns a mobile station to AMPS when no CDMA traffic
29 channels are available.
30 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.1.1.2, 2.6.3.5

31 2.18.2 Method of Measurement


32 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.18.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-23

2
3 Figure 2.18.2-1 Functional Setup for Redirection from CDMA to AMPS
4
5
6 b. Take all CDMA traffic channel radio resources out of service or configure the base
7 station to behave in a similar fashion.
8 c. Setup a mobile station originated call.
9 d. Verify that the base station sends a Channel Assignment Message with
10 ASSIGN_MODE=‘011’ to assign the mobile station an analog voice channel or with
11 ASSIGN_MODE=‘010’ to acquire the analog system.
12 e. Verify the mobile station acquires the AMPS system.
13 f. Verify user data in both directions.
14 g. End call.

15 2.18.3 Minimum Standard


16 The mobile station shall be assigned to AMPS when no CDMA traffic channels are available.

17 2.19 PACA Origination, User Terminates While Still In Queue

18 2.19.1 Definition
19 This test verifies that a PACA-capable mobile station, upon failure to originate a call due to lack
20 of available voice/traffic channels, shall re-attempt the origination using the PACA feature code.
21 It verifies that a currently queued mobile station properly informs base station when user aborts
22 waiting for traffic channel.
23 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.2, 2.6.2.8, 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

24 2.19.2 Method of Measurement


25 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-24

1 b. At base station, enable PACA feature for mobile station, assign a PACA priority level
2 to the mobile station, and disable Permanent Invocation PACA for the mobile
3 station.
4 c. If the mobile station is capable of Slotted Mode, verify that the mobile station is
5 operating in the Slotted Mode.
6 d. Ensure PACA is enabled on base station.
7 e. Configure the base station to make all traffic channels busy.
8 f. Setup a mobile station originated call.

9 g. Verify the following:


10 1) Mobile station originates call with PACA_REORIG bit='0' in Origination Message.
11 2) Base station replies with Reorder Order.
12 3) Mobile station retries the origination with the PACA_REORIG bit='1' in the
13 Origination Message.
14 4) Base station sends PACA Message with PURPOSE='0000' and the mobile
15 station’s Queue Position (Q_POS).
16 5) Mobile station acknowledges PACA Message.
17 h. The mobile station user interface should indicate the origination has been
18 successfully queued.
19 i. Verify the mobile station remains in non-slotted mode.
20 j. End call to terminate queued origination. Verify that the mobile station sends a
21 PACA Cancel Message to the base station.
22 k. Verify the mobile station enters slotted mode if applicable.

23 2.19.3 Minimum Standard


24 The mobile station user interface should indicate to the user that the call has been ended. Upon
25 failure of first origination, mobile station shall attempt a second origination with PACA feature
26 code. When successfully entered in the PACA queue, mobile station shall indicate this state to
27 the user via user interface. The mobile station shall inform the base station via a PACA Cancel
28 Message when the user manually terminates queuing wait. Verify the mobile station sends PACA
29 Cancel Message to the base station.

30 2.20 PACA Origination, Idle Handoff While in Queue

31 2.20.1 Definition
32 This test verifies that a PACA-capable mobile station already in a PACA queue shall reoriginate
33 the PACA request when the mobile station performs an idle handoff.
34 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.2.1.4.2, 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

35 2.20.2 Method of Measurement


36 a. Connect the base stations and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
37

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-25

1
2 Figure 2.20.2-1 Functional Setup for Idle Handoff PACA Test

3 b. At the base station, enable PACA feature for mobile station, assign a PACA priority
4 level to mobile station, and disable Permanent Invocation PACA for mobile station.
5 c. Ensure PACA is enabled on both base stations.
6 d. Configure both base stations to make all traffic channels busy.
7 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.

8 f. The mobile station user interface should indicate origination successfully queued.
9 g. Force an idle handoff from base station #1 to base station #2.
10 h. Verify the mobile station reoriginates the PACA request with PACA_REORIG='1'.
11 i. Verify a PACA Message is received from base station #2 indicating the mobile
12 station’s position in the PACA queue of base station #2.
13 j. On the mobile station, originate a new call while still queued.
14 k. The mobile station user interface should indicate to the user that the first PACA call
15 has been cancelled.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-26

1 2.20.3 Minimum Standard


2 After the idle handoff, the mobile station shall send an Origination Message with the
3 PACA_REORIG bit='1'. When the user originates a second call while currently queued for the
4 first call, the mobile station should indicate to the user that the first queued PACA call has been
5 cancelled.

6 2.21 PACA Origination, Traffic Channel Becomes Available

7 2.21.1 Definition
8 This test verifies that a currently PACA queued mobile station, when notified by the base station
9 of an available traffic channel, should properly alert the user that the origination can now be
10 completed.
11 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

12 2.21.2 Method of Measurement


13 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
14 b. At the base station, enable PACA feature for mobile station, assign a PACA priority
15 level to the mobile station, and disable Permanent Invocation PACA for the mobile
16 station.
17 c. Ensure PACA is enabled on base station.
18 d. Configure the base station to make all traffic channels busy.
19 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
20 f. If supported by the mobile station, verify that the mobile station user interface
21 indicates that an origination has been successfully queued.
22 g. Make at least one traffic channel available on base station.
23 h. The base station shall page the mobile station, and the mobile station should
24 indicate to the user that the PACA call is proceeding.
25 i. Verify the call is completed and audio is present in both directions.
26 j. End call.

27 2.21.3 Minimum Standard


28 Upon a page from the base station due to a traffic channel becoming available, the mobile station
29 should alert the user that the origination can now be completed. The call shall be completed.

30 2.22 PACA Origination, Features Interaction

31 2.22.1 Definition
32 This test verifies that specific paging channel features, such as SMS and MWI, are delivered to
33 the mobile station while the mobile station is currently in a PACA queue.
34 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-27

1 2.22.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.

3 b. At the base station, enable PACA feature for mobile station, assign a PACA priority
4 level to the mobile station, and disable Permanent Invocation PACA for the mobile
5 station.
6 c. Ensure PACA is enabled on base station.
7 d. Configure the base station to make all traffic channels busy.
8 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
9 f. Verify the mobile station user interface indicates that an origination has been
10 successfully queued.
11 g. Send an SMS message over the Paging Channel to the mobile station. Verify the
12 message is received properly by the mobile station.
13 h. Configure base station to send MWI to the mobile station. Verify MWI is displayed
14 by the mobile station.
15 i. End call.

16 2.22.3 Minimum Standard


17 While in a PACA queue, the mobile station shall properly receive SMS messages over the
18 Paging Channel, as well as receive and display the MWI.

19 2.23 PACA Origination, Permanent Invocation

20 2.23.1 Definition
21 This test verifies that a PACA-capable mobile station with Permanent Invocation feature enabled
22 shall be placed in PACA queue even if PACA is not requested in Origination Message.
23 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

24 2.23.2 Method of Measurement


25 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
26 b. At the base station, enable PACA feature for mobile station, assign a PACA priority
27 level to the mobile station, and enabled Permanent Invocation PACA for the mobile
28 station.
29 c. Ensure PACA is enabled on the base station.
30 d. Configure the base station to make all traffic channels busy.
31 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
32 f. Verify the following:
33 1) Mobile station originates call with PACA_REORIG bit='0' in Origination Message.
34 2) Due to Permanent Invocation, base station sends PACA Message with
35 PURPOSE='0000' and the mobile station's Queue Position (Q_POS).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-28

1 3) Mobile station acknowledges PACA Message.


2 g. The mobile station user interface should indicate origination successfully queued.

3 h. Make at least one traffic channel available on the base station.


4 i. The base station shall page the mobile station, and the mobile station should
5 indicate to the user that the PACA call is proceeding.

6 j. Verify call completes and audio is present in both directions.


7 k. End call.

8 2.23.3 Minimum Standard


9 A mobile station origination shall be placed in the PACA queue even though PACA is not
10 requested in Origination Message due to the base station having rights to Permanent Invocation
11 of PACA.

12 2.24 PACA Origination, PACA Disabled for Mobile Station

13 2.24.1 Definition
14 This test verifies that when a mobile station disabled for PACA attempts a PACA Origination,
15 the call shall fail.
16 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.3.5, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.9, 3.7.2.3.2.20

17 2.24.2 Method of Measurement


18 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
19 b. Ensure PACA is enabled on base station.
20 c. At the base station, disable PACA feature for mobile station.
21 d. Configure the base station to make all traffic channels busy.
22 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
23 f. Verify the following:
24 1) Mobile station originates call with PACA_REORIG bit=0 in Origination
25 Message.
26 2) Due to lack of available channels, base station replies with a Reorder
27 Order.
28 3) Mobile station retries the origination with the PACA_REORIG bit = '1' in
29 the Origination Message.
30 4) A second call re-origination attempt is denied by the base station and a
31 reorder tone is generated at the mobile station.

32 2.24.3 Minimum Standard


33 The base station shall reject a request for PACA from a mobile station not authorized for PACA.
34 The mobile station shall generate a reorder tone.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-29

1 2.25 True IMSI Support

2 2.25.1 Land Party to Mobile Station Call, Matching MCC and IMSI_11_12

3 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.1.3, 2.31, 2.6.2.2.5, 2.7.4.24, 3.7.2.3.2.13

4 2.25.1.1 True IMSI addressing supported by the base station and mobile station.

5 2.25.1.1.1Definition
6 This test verifies that the base station pages the mobile station with True IMSI addressing
7 supported by the base station and mobile station when the MCC and IMSI_11_12 of the mobile
8 station match those sent by the base station in the Extended System Parameters Message.

9 2.25.1.1.2 Method of Measurement


10 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1
11 b. Ensure the mobile station is programmed with the same values of MCC and
12 IMSI_11_12 used in the base station. Do not use MCC (wild card) value in the base
13 station or mobile station Escape Code.
14 c. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
15 the value IMSI_T_SUPPORTED=1.
16 d. Enable power on registration.
17 e. Enable authentication. Configure the base station to disallow mobile station
18 terminated calls if authentication fails.
19 f. Power on the mobile station and wait for power on registration to occur.
20 g. Initiate a land party to mobile station call.
21 h. Verify user data in both directions and end call at the mobile station.

22 2.25.1.1.3 Minimum Standard


23 The call shall be successfully established using the IMSI_T address form.

24 2.25.1.2 True IMSI addressing supported by the base station with MIN-based
25 addressing supported by the mobile station.

26 2.25.1.2.1 Definition
27 This test verifies that the base station pages the mobile station with True IMSI addressing
28 supported by the base station and MIN-based addressing supported by the mobile station when
29 the MCC and IMSI_11_12 of the mobile station match those sent by the base station in the
30 Extended System Parameter Message.

31 2.25.1.2.2 Method of Measurement

32 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
33 b. Ensure the mobile station is programmed with values of MCC set to “310” [for the
34 United States, or other suitable value] or “000” and IMSI_11_12 set to “00”.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-30

1 c. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
2 the value IMSI_T_SUPPORTED=1.

3 d. Enable power on registration.


4 e. Enable authentication. Configure the base station to disallow mobile terminated
5 calls if authentication fails.
6 f. Power on the mobile station and wait for power on registration to occur.
7 g. Initiate a land party call to the mobile station.
8 h. Verify user data and end call at the mobile station.

9 2.25.1.2.3 Minimum Standard


10 The call shall be successfully established using the IMSI_M address form.

11 2.25.1.3 True IMSI addressing not supported by the base station or the mobile
12 station

13 2.25.1.3.1 Definition
14 This test will verify the base station pages the mobile station when True IMSI addressing is not
15 supported by the base station, when the MCC and IMSI_11_12 of the mobile station match those
16 sent by the base station in the Extended System Parameters Message.

17 2.25.1.3.2 Method of Measurement


18 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.20.2-1.
19 b. Ensure the mobile station is programmed with the same values of MCC and
20 IMSI_11_12 used in the base station. Do not use MCC (wild card) value in the base
21 station or mobile station Escape Code.
22 c. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
23 the value IMSI_T_SUPPORTED=0.
24 d. Enable power on registration.
25 e. Enable authentication. Configure the base station to disallow mobile terminated
26 calls if authentication fails.
27 f. Power on the mobile station and wait for power on registration to occur.
28 g. Initiate a land party call to the mobile station.
29 h. Verify user data and end call at the mobile station.

30 2.25.1.3.3 Minimum Standard


31 The call shall be successfully established using IMSI_M address form.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-31

1 2.25.2 Land Party to Mobile Station Call, Different MCC and IMSI_11_12

2 2.25.2.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the base station selects one of the valid forms of paging channel address when
4 neither the MCC nor the IMSI_11_12 of the mobile station being addressed match those being
5 sent by the base station in the Extended System Parameters Message.

6 2.25.2.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown on Figure 2.20.2-1.
8 b. Ensure the mobile station is programmed with different values of MCC and
9 IMSI_11_12 than those used in the base station. Do not use MCC (wild card) value
10 in the base station or mobile station Escape Code.
11 c. Configure the base station to send the Extended System Parameters Message with
12 the value IMSI_T_SUPPORTED=1.
13 d. Enable power on registration.

14 e. Enable authentication. Configure the base station to disallow mobile terminated


15 calls if authentication fails.
16 f. Power on the mobile station and wait for power on registration to occur.
17 g. Initiate a land party call to the mobile station.
18 h. Verify user data and end call at the mobile station.

19 2.25.2.3 Minimum Standard


20 The call shall be successfully established using IMSI_T address form.

21 2.26 Initial Service Configuration and Negotiation

22 2.26.1 Definition
23 This test verifies that the initial service configuration in effect is according to the value specified
24 via the GRANTED_MODE field of the Extended Channel Assignment Message.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-32

MS BS

Common Common
Channels Channels
Origination Message /
Page Response Message
(SO)

Extended Channel Assignment Message


(GRANTED_MODE)

Dedicated Dedicated
Channels Channels

Initial service Service Request Message


configuration
in effect

New service
Service Connect Message
configuration
(SCR_new, NN-SCR_new)
takes effect

Service Connect Completion Message

1
2 Figure 2.26.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Initial Service Configuration and Negotiation

3 Traceability: (See [4] );


4 2.6.4.1.2 MS Service Configuration and Negotiation procedures
5 2.6.4.1.14 Processing the Service Configuration Record
6 2.6.4.1.15 Processing the Non-Negotiable Service Configuration Record
7 2.6.4.2 Traffic Channel Initialization Substate
8 2.7.1.3.2.4 Origination Message
9 2.7.1.3.2.5 Page Response Message
10 2.7.2.3.2.12 (MS) Service Request Message
11 2.7.2.3.2.13 (MS) Service Response Message
12 2.7.2.3.2.14 (MS) Service Connect Completion Message
13 2.7.4.18 Service Configuration information record
14 3.6.4.1.2 BS Service Configuration and Negotiation procedures
15 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
16 3.7.3.3.2.18 (BS) Service Request Message
17 3.7.3.3.2.19 (BS) Service Response Message
18 3.7.3.3.2.20 (BS) Service Connect Message
19 3.7.3.3.2.31 General Handoff Direction Message
20 3.7.3.3.2.36 Universal Handoff Direction Message
21 3.7.5.7 (BS) Service Configuration information record
22 3.7.5.20 (BS) Non-Negotiable Service Configuration information record

23 2.26.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
25 b Initiate a mobile station originated call.
26 c Upon receiving an Origination Message, configure the base station to send an
27 Extended Channel Assignment Message to the mobile station, with the following
28 fields set as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-33

1
Field Value
ASSIGN_MODE '000' or '100'
GRANTED_MODE '00'
DEFAULT_CONFIG '000', '001', '010', '011', or
'100'
2
3 d. Upon establishing dedicated channels, instruct the mobile station to initiate service
4 negotiation to request for a new service configuration. Verify that the mobile station
5 sends a Service Request Message with REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’.
6 e. Instruct the base station to send a Service Connect Message, with a valid and
7 acceptable Service Configuration Information Record (SCR) and Non-Negotiable
8 Service Configuration Information Record (NN-SCR) to the mobile station. The
9 parameters of SCR and NN-SCR should be set based on the known capabilities of
10 the mobile station under test, such that it is guaranteed the mobile station will
11 accept the service configuration specified by these two information records.
12 f. Verify the following:
13 1) Prior to the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect
14 Message takes effect, verify the following:
15 • The service configuration in use is the one jointly specified by the
16 DEFAULT_CONFIG value sent in the Extended Channel Assignment Message
17 and the default Non-Negotiable part of the service configuration parameters
18 specified in the Traffic Channel Initialization substate.
19 2) When the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect Message
20 takes effect, verify the following:
21 • The service configuration in use is the one specified by SCR and NN-SCR in the
22 Service Connect Message sent by the base station.
23 • Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
24 3) The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the
25 mobile station.

26 g. Repeat steps a through e, but with the following modifications:


27 1) In step c, instruct the base station to send an Extended Channel
28 Assignment Message to the mobile station, with the following fields set as follows:
29
Field Value
ASSIGN_MODE '000' or '100'
GRANTED_MODE '01'
30
31 h. Verify the following:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-34

1 1) Prior to the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect


2 Message takes effect, verify the following:
3 • The service configuration in use is the one jointly specified by the default
4 multiplex option and transmission rates corresponding to the service option
5 requested by the mobile station in the Origination Message and the default Non-
6 Negotiable part of the service configuration parameters specified in the Traffic
7 Channel Initialization substate.
8 2) When the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect Message
9 takes effect, verify the following:
10 • The service configuration in use is the one specified by SCR and NN-SCR in the
11 Service Connect Message sent by the base station.
12 • Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
13 3) The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the
14 mobile station.
15 i. Repeat steps a through e, but with the following modifications:

16 1) In step c, instruct the base station to send an Extended Channel


17 Assignment Message to the mobile station, with the following fields set as follows:
18
Field Value
ASSIGN_MODE '000' or '100'
GRANTED_MODE '10'
19
20 j. Verify the following:
21 1) In step c, when the mobile station is instructed to initiate service
22 negotiation to request for a new service configuration, verify that the mobile station
23 does not send a Service Request Message to the base station until a Service Connect
24 Message is received from the base station.
25 2) Prior to the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect
26 Message takes effect, verify the following:
27 • The service configuration in use is the one jointly specified by the default
28 multiplex option and transmission rates corresponding to the service option
29 requested by the mobile station in the Origination Message and the default Non-
30 Negotiable part of the service configuration parameters specified in the Traffic
31 Channel Initialization substate.

32 3) When the new service configuration sent in the Service Connect Message
33 takes effect, verify the following:
34 • The service configuration in use is the one specified by SCR and NN-SCR in the
35 Service Connect Message sent by the base station.
36 • Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
37 4) The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the
38 mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-35

1 k. Repeat steps a through j for mobile station terminated calls. In this case, Origination
2 Message is replaced by Page Response Message.

3 l. Repeat steps a though k for various values of DEFAULT_CONFIG and various values
4 of default multiplex option and transmission rates corresponding to the service
5 option requested by the mobile station either in the Origination Message or Page
6 Response Message.

7 2.26.3 Minimum Standard


8 The initial service configuration in effect, i.e. upon establishing dedicated channels and until a
9 Service Connect Message shall be received from the base station, shall comply with the value
10 specified by the GRANTED_MODE received in the Extended Channel Assignment Message.
11 For GRANTED_MODE = 10, the mobile station shall not initiate service negotiation until the
12 Service Connect Message is received from the base station. When the new service configuration
13 specified by the Service Connect Message takes effect, user communications (Ex. Audio) shall
14 proceed without interruptions in both directions.

15 2.27 Base Station Requested Service Negotiation (Successful Scenarios)

16 2.27.1 Definition
17 This test verifies that the base station can request a valid new service configuration during traffic
18 channel operation via service negotiation procedures and this new configuration takes effect
19 upon being accepted by the mobile station. It also verifies that sending a Service Connect
20 Message by the base station, without involving Service Request Message/Service Response
21 Message sequence, for instructing the mobile station to use a new service configuration
22 succeeds.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-36

MS BS

Dedicated Dedicated
Channels Channels

Conversation
SCR_new/
Service Connect Message
NN-SCR_new
(SCR_new, NN-SCR_new)
takes effect

Service Connect Completion Message

Service Request Message


(REQ_PURPOSE=0010,
SCR_new_2)

Service Response Message


(RESP_PURPOSE=0000)

CR_new_2/ Service Connect Message


-SCR_new_2 (SCR_new_2, NN-SCR_new_2)
takes effect

Service Connect Completion Message

1
2 Figure 2.27.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Base Station Requested Service Negotiation
3 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,
4 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
5 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

6 2.27.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
8 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
9 b. Setup a mobile station terminated call and establish a service configuration as
10 specified in 2.26.2. Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
11 c. Instruct the base station send a Service Connect Message to the mobile station with
12 a valid and acceptable SCR/NN-SCR.
13 d. Verify the following:
14 • The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the mobile
15 station.
16 • When the new service configuration takes effect, verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on
17 both directions.
18 e. Instruct the base station to initiate service negotiation by sending a Service Request
19 Message, proposing a valid and acceptable service configuration. Verify that the
20 base station sends a Service Request Message with REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’ to
21 the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-37

1 f. Instruct the mobile station to accept this service configuration. Verify that, upon
2 receiving the Service Request Message, the mobile station sends a Service Response
3 Message with RESP_PURPOSE set to ‘0000’ to accept this service configuration.
4 g. Instruct the base station to accept this service configuration by using a Service
5 Connect Message. Verify that, upon receiving the Service Response Message, the
6 base station sends a Service Connect Message to the mobile station with the
7 accepted SCR and a valid and acceptable NN-SCR.
8 h. Verify the following:
9 • The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the
10 mobile station.
11 • When the new service configuration takes effect, verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on
12 both directions.

13 2.27.3 Minimum Standard


14 When the new service configuration takes effect, user communications (Ex. Audio) proceeds
15 without interruptions in both directions. Furthermore, when base station sends a Service Connect
16 Message directly to specify a new service configuration, without involving any Service Request
17 Message/Service Response Message sequence, it is considered a valid service negotiation
18 procedure and it succeeds.

19 2.28 Base Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation

20 2.28.1 Definition
21 This test verifies that when the base station rejects a service configuration proposed by the
22 mobile station, the mobile station terminates the service negotiation session and the previously in
23 use service configuration remains in effect.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-38

MS BS

Dedicated Dedicated
Channels Channels

Conversation

Service Request Message


(SCR_new, REQ_PURPOSE=0010)

Service Response Message


MS terminates this (RESP_PURPOSE=0001) BS terminates this
service negotiation service negotiation
session session

1
2 Figure 2.28.1 Reference Call Flow for Base Station Reject Scenarios
3 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,
4 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
5 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

6 2.28.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
8 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
9 b. Setup a mobile station terminated call. Upon establishing dedicated channels,
10 instruct the mobile station to initiate service negotiation to request for a new service
11 configuration. Verify that the mobile station sends a Service Request Message with
12 REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’.
13
14 c. Configure the base station to reject this proposed service configuration and not
15 propose another new service configuration. Verify that, upon receiving the Service
16 Request Message, the base station sends a Service Response Message with
17 RESP_PURPOSE set to ‘0001’.
18
19
20
21 d. Verify the following:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-39

1 1) Upon receiving this message, the mobile station terminates this service
2 negotiation session. This can be verified by the following conditions:
3 • The mobile station does not a send a Service Connect Completion Message to the
4 base station,
5 • The mobile station does not send a Service Response Message to the base
6 station, and
7 • The mobile station does not send a Service Request Message to the base station
8 with the same SERV_REQ_SEQ sent in the rejected Service Request Message.
9 2) The service configuration previously in use (i.e. default service configuration)
10 continues to be in effect without any interruptions.
11 e. Instruct the base station to initiate service negotiation by using a Service Request
12 Message. Verify that the base station sends a Service Request Message with
13 REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’ to mobile station to request for a new service
14 configuration.
15 f. Instruct the mobile station to propose the alternative service configuration. Verify
16 that, upon receiving the Service Request Message, the mobile station sends a Service
17 Response Message with RESP_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’ to the base station.
18 g. Instruct the base station to reject this service configuration and not propose another
19 service configuration. Verify that, upon receiving the Service Request Message, the
20 base station sends a Service Request Message with REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0001’ to
21 reject the service configuration.
22 h. Verify the following:
23 1) Upon receiving the Service Request Message from the base station, the mobile
24 station terminates this service negotiation session. This can be verified by the
25 following conditions:
26 • The mobile station does not a send a Service Connect Completion Message to the
27 base station, and
28 • The mobile station does not send a Service Response Message to the base
29 station.
30 • The base station does not send a Service Request Message to the mobile station
31 with the same SERV_REQ_SEQ sent in the rejected Service Request Message.
32 2) The service configuration previously in use continues to be in effect without any
33 interruptions.

34 2.28.3 Minimum Standard


35 If the service configuration is rejected by the base station, both mobile station and base station
36 shall terminate the service negotiation session and the service configuration previously in use
37 shall remain in effect.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-40

1 2.29 Mobile Station Reject Scenarios during Service Negotiation

2 2.29.1 Definition
3 This test verifies that when the mobile station rejects a service configuration specified by the
4 base station, the mobile station sends expected signaling messages and the previously in use
5 service configuration remains in effect.
MS BS

Dedicated Dedicated
Channels Channels

Conversation

Service Connect Message


(SCR_new, NN-SCR_new)

MS Reject Order
MS terminates this (ORDQ=00000111) BS terminates this
service negotiation service negotiation
session session

6
7 Figure 2.29.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Mobile Station Reject Scenarios
8 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,
9 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
10 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

11 2.29.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
13 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
14 b. Setup a mobile station originated call and establish a service configuration as
15 specified in 2.26.2. Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
16 c. Instruct the base station to send a Service Connect Message to the mobile station
17 with a valid service configuration that is guaranteed to be unacceptable to the
18 mobile station based on mobile station capability.
19 d. Verify the following:
20 1) Upon receiving this message, the mobile station sends a Mobile Station
21 Reject Order with ORDQ set to ‘00000111’.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-41

1 2) The mobile station does not send a Service Connect Completion Message.
2 3) The mobile station does not send a Service Request Message with
3 REQ_PURPOSE set to either ‘0000’ or ‘0001’.
4 4) The mobile station does not send a Service Response Message with
5 RESP_PURPOSE set to either ‘0000’ or ‘0001’.
6 5) The service configuration previously in use continues to be in effect
7 without any interruptions. Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.

8 2.29.3 Minimum Standard


9 If the service configuration is rejected by the mobile station, both mobile station and base station
10 shall terminate the service negotiation session. User communication (Ex. Audio) shall proceed
11 without interruptions in both directions.

12 2.30 Service Negotiation Completion via General Handoff Direction Message and
13 Universal Handoff Direction Message

14 2.30.1 Definition
15 This test verifies that in the service negotiation procedures the Service Connect Message can be
16 replaced with a General Handoff Direction Message or a Universal Handoff Direction Message
17 without any change in the outcome of service negotiation.
MS BS

Dedicated Dedicated
Channels Channels

Conversation

Service Request Message


(SCR_new, REQ_PURPOSE=0010)

Service Response Message


(RESP_PURPOSE=0000)

General Handoff Direction Message/


Universal Handoff Direction Message
New service New service
configuration takes (SCR_INCLUDED, SCR_new, configuration takes
NN-SCR_INCLUDED, NN-SCR_new)
effect effect

Handoff Completion Message

18
19 Figure 2.30.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Using GHDM/UHDM instead of SCM

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-42

1 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,


2 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
3 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

4 2.30.2 Method of Measurement


5 a. Repeat one or more of the tests in section 2.27.2 with the following modifications: In
6 those steps where the base station is sending a Service Connect Message, instead
7 instruct the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message, with both the
8 SCR and NN-SCR included in the message.
9 b. Verify the following:
10 1) The base station receives a Handoff Completion Message from the mobile
11 station, instead of a Service Connect Completion Message.
12 2) When the new service configuration takes effect, verify user traffic (Ex.
13 Audio) on both directions.
14 c. Repeat one or more of the tests in section 2.29.2 with the following modifications: In
15 those steps where the base station is sending a Service Connect Message, instead
16 instruct the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message, with both the
17 SCR and NN-SCR included in the message.
18 d. Verify the following:
19 1) Verify the base station receives a Mobile Station Reject Order with ORDQ set to
20 ‘00000111’.
21 2) Verify that the base station does not receive a Handoff Completion Message from
22 the mobile station.
23 e. Repeat steps a though d with the following modifications: Instead of sending a
24 General Handoff Direction Message, instruct the base station to send a Universal
25 Handoff Direction Message.
26 f. Verify that all the outcomes are identical to the outcomes when the General Handoff
27 Direction Message was used.

28 2.30.3 Minimum Standard


29 Usage of the Universal Handoff Direction Message and General Handoff Direction Message
30 instead of the Service Connect Message shall not change the outcome of service negotiation
31 procedures and the same service configuration shall take effect upon completion of service
32 negotiation procedures.

33 2.31 SCR without NN-SCR and NN-SCR without SCR in General Handoff Direction
34 Message and Universal Handoff Direction Message

35 2.31.1 Definition
36 Partial service configuration information (SCR alone or NN-SCR alone) shall be sent in the
37 General Handoff Direction Message and Universal Handoff Direction Message and the expected
38 service configuration takes effect.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-43

1 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,


2 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
3 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

4 2.31.2 Method of Measurement


5 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
6 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
7 b. Setup a mobile station originated call and establish a service configuration as
8 specified in 2.26.2. Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.

9 c. Instruct the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
10 station with a valid and acceptable SCR included (SCR_INCLUDED=1) and not
11 including a NN-SCR (NNSCR_INCLUDED=0) in the message.
12 d. Once the new service configuration takes effect, verify the following:
13 1) The part of the service configuration specified by the new SCR takes effect.
14 2) The part of the service configuration specified by the NN-SCR remains
15 unchanged.
16 3) Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
17 e. Instruct the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
18 station with a valid and acceptable NN-SCR included (NNSCR_INCLUDED=1) and
19 not including a SCR (SCR_INCLUDED=0) in the message.
20 f. Once the new service configuration takes effect, verify the following:
21 1) The part of the service configuration specified by the new NN-SCR takes
22 effect.
23 2) The part of the service configuration specified by the SCR remains
24 unchanged.
25 2) Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.
26 g. Repeat steps a through f with the following modifications: Instead of sending a
27 General Handoff Direction Message, instruct the base station to send a Universal
28 Handoff Direction Message.
29 h. Verify that all the outcomes are identical to the case when the General Handoff
30 Direction Message was sent.

31 2.31.3 Minimum Standard


32 Partial service configuration information (SCR alone or NN-SCR alone) can be sent in the
33 General Handoff Direction Message or Universal Handoff Direction Message. If the General
34 Handoff Direction Message or Universal Handoff Direction Message does not contain SCR,
35 SCR shall remain unchanged. If the General Handoff Direction Message or Universal Handoff
36 Direction Message does not contain NN-SCR, NN-SCR shall remain unchanged.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-44

1 2.32 Base Station Request Overrides the Mobile Station Request

2 2.32.1 Definition
3 This test verifies that when there is a race-condition between mobile station initiated service
4 negotiation and base station initiated service negotiation, the base station request overrides the
5 mobile station request.
6 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,
7 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
8 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

9 2.32.2 Method of Measurement


10 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
11 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
12 b. Setup a mobile station originated call
13 c. Upon receiving an Origination Message, configure the base station to send an
14 Extended Channel Assignment Message to the mobile station, with the following
15 fields set as follows:
16
Field Value
ASSIGN_MODE ‘000’ (Traffic Channel Assignment or
‘100’ (Enhanced Traffic Channel
Assignment )
GRANTED_MODE ‘00’ (MOBILE STATION is to use an
initial service configuration specified
by the DEFAULT_CONFIG field and
service negotiation may take place
before the base station sends the first
Service Connect Message)
17
18 d. Upon establishing the traffic channel, instruct the mobile station to initiate service
19 negotiation. Verify that the mobile station sends a Service Request Message with
20 REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’ to the base station to propose a new service
21 configuration.
22 e. Instruct the base station to ignore this request and instead initiate a new service
23 negotiation session by sending a Service Request Message. Verify that the base
24 station sends a Service Request Message with REQ_PURPOSE set to ‘0010’.
25 f. Verify that, upon receiving the Service Request Message, the mobile station
26 terminates the service negotiation that it initiated and instead takes part in the
27 service negotiation initiated by the base station, as follows:
28 1) Verify that the mobile station sends a Service Response Message to the
29 base station to accept, reject, or counter-propose the service configuration.
30 2) Verify that the mobile station does not send a Service Request Message to
31 the base station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-45

1 2.32.3 Minimum Standard


2 When there is a race-condition between mobile station initiated service negotiation and base
3 station initiated service negotiation, the base station request shall override the mobile station
4 request. The mobile station initiated service negotiation session shall terminate and the base
5 station initiated service negotiation session shall proceed normally.

6 2.33 Service Negotiation Involving Partial SCR and/or Partial NN-SCR

7 2.33.1 Definition
8 This test verifies that service negotiation can be carried out with only a partial SCR and/or partial
9 NN-SCR and the expected service configuration takes effect.
10 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.14, 2.6.4.1.15, 2.6.4.2, 2.7.1.3.2.4, 2.7.1.3.2.5,
11 2.7.2.3.2.12, 2.7.2.3.2.13, 2.7.2.3.2.14, 2.7.4.18, 3.6.4.1.2, 3.7.2.3.2.21, 3.7.3.3.2.18,
12 3.7.3.3.2.19, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.3.3.2.31, 3.7.3.3.2.36, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20

13 2.33.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1. Set the
15 test parameters as shown in Table 2.1.2-1.
16 b. Setup a call and establish a service configuration as specified in 2.26.2. Verify user
17 traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.

18 c. Instruct the base station to initiate service negotiation to change only a subset of
19 service configuration parameters. Verify the following:
20 1) The base station sends a Service Request Message with REQ_PURPOSE set to
21 ‘0010’ to the mobile station to propose a new service configuration.
22 2) The service configuration parameters not to be changed are not included in the
23 SCR (Ex. If DCCH related parameters are not to be changed, then
24 DCCH_CC_INCL should be set to ‘0’ and FOR_DCCH_RC, REV_DCCH_RC, and
25 DCCH_FRAME_SIZE will not be included).
26 d. Instruct the mobile station to accept this service configuration. Verify that, upon
27 receiving the Service Request Message, the mobile station sends a Service Response
28 Message with RESP_PURPOSE set to ‘0000’.
29 e. Instruct the base station to accept this service configuration and to send a NN-SCR
30 with only a subset of parameters modified. Verify that, upon receiving the Service
31 Response Message, the base station sends a Service Connect Message with an SCR
32 which contains only the parameters included in SCR sent by the base station (ex.
33 DCCH_CC_INCL=0) and an NN-SCR that only includes a subset of parameters.
34 f. Verify the following:
35 1) The base station receives a Service Connect Completion Message from the mobile
36 station.
37
38 2) When the new service configuration takes effect, verify that for those service
39 configuration parameters not included in the final SCR (Ex. DCCH_CC_INCL=0)

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-46

1 and NN-SCR sent by the base station their previously in use value continues to
2 be in effect. Verify user traffic (Ex. Audio) on both directions.

3 g. Repeat steps c through f for various combinations of subset of SCR and NN-SCR
4 parameters.

5 2.33.3 Minimum Standard


6 Service negotiation can be carried out with only a partial SCR and/or partial NN-SCR and the
7 service configuration parameters which are not included in SCR or NN-SCR shall remain
8 unchanged when the new service configuration takes effect.

9 2.34 Quasi-Orthogonal Functions (QOF) assignment

10 2.34.1 Definition
11 This test will verify that the base station will assign Quasi-Orthogonal Functions from the
12 Extended Channel Assignment Message.
13 Traceability: (See [4] )-2; 3.1.3.1.12, TIA/EIA/(See [4] ); 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3,
14 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21

15 2.34.2 Method of Measurement


16 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.
17 b. Set up a mobile station originated call.
18 c. Instruct the base station to accept the call and assign a traffic channel with RC3 on
19 both the forward and reverse link. Verify the base station sends the Extended
20 Channel Assignment Message with the following parameters set as shown in Table
21 2.34.2-1.
22
23 Table 2.34.2-1 ECAM Parameters

Field Parameters Setting


ASSIGN_MODE ‘100’ (Enhanced Traffic Channel
Assignment)
CH_IND ‘01’ (Indicating FCH Assignment)
PILOT_REC_TYPE ‘000’ (Transmit Diversity Pilot)
QOF_MASK_ID_FCH ‘00’ through ‘11’ (QOF Masks)
FOR_RC ‘011’ (RC 3) through ‘101’ (RC 5)
REV_RC ‘011’(RC 3) through ‘101’ (RC 5)
24
25
26 d. Verify user data is present in both directions.
27 e. End the call.
28 f. Repeat steps b through d for various QOF assignments and radio configurations.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-47

1 2.34.3 Minimum Standard


2 Each call in the test shall be successful. The Extended Channel Assignment Message shall
3 successfully configure QOF mask in the mobile station for the fundamental channel.

4 2.35 Release Order on Access Channel

5 2.35.1 Definition
6 This test verifies that the mobile station can send a Release Order on the Access Channel, and
7 that the base station acknowledges it. The Release Order is sent when the mobile station user hits
8 the END key while waiting for a call to connect, but has not been assigned a dedicated channel
9 yet.
10 Traceability:
11
12 [4] 3.6.3 Access Channel Processing
13 [4] 3.6.3.4 Response to Orders
14 [4] 2.6.3 System Access State
15 [4] 2.6.3.1.4 System Access State Exit Procedures
16 [4] 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
17 [3] 2.1.1.2.2.1 Overview of Transmission and Retransmission Procedures

18 2.35.2 Method of Measurement


19 a. Connect the mobile station and base station in the simple configuration of figure
20 2.1.2-1, and allow the mobile station to register and prepare for a normal call.
21 b. Power up the mobile station and wait for registration to occur
22 c. Configure the base station to not send a Channel Assignment Message or Extended
23 Channel Assignment Message, after receiving an Origination Message from a mobile
24 station.
25 d. Attempt a mobile station originated call. After the mobile station has sent its
26 Origination Message and while it is waiting in the Mobile Station Origination
27 Attempt Substate, hit the END button, or otherwise cause the mobile station to
28 send a Release Order.
29 2.35.3 Minimum Standard
30 After the Origination Message is sent but before a Channel Assignment Message or Extended
31 Channel Assignment Message is received, the mobile station shall send a Release Order on the
32 Access Channel. The base station shall acknowledge the message and shall not send a (Extended)
33 Channel Assignment Message.
34

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 2-48

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-1

1 3 HANDOFF TESTS
2 Table 3-1 lists handoff tests.
3 Table 3-1 Handoff Tests

Test No. Title


3.1 Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold
3.2 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in the Same Band Class
3.3 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS
3.4 Soft Handoff in Fading
3.5 Hard Handoff in Fading
3.6 Hard Handoff Between Different Band Classes
3.7 Hard Handoff with and without Return on Failure
3.8 Search Window per Neighbor
3.9 Access Handoffs
3.10 Traffic Channel Preamble during Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in the Same
Band Class
3.11 Hopping Pilot Beacon
3.12 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Radio Configurations
3.13 Handoff on Same Frequency with Different Radio Configurations
3.14 Hard Handoff while in the Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate
3.15 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to CDMA)
3.16 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to AMPS)
3.17 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Protocol Revisions
4
5 3.1 Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold

6 3.1.1 Definition
7 This test verifies the mobile station and base station perform soft handoff. Soft handoff with and
8 without dynamic thresholds is verified. This test verifies both adding pilot to and dropping pilot
9 from the soft handoff Active Set.
10 Traceability: (See [4] )
11 2.6.2.2.5: Extended System Parameters Message
12 2.6.4.1.4: Processing the In-Traffic System Parameters Message
13 2.6.6.2.3: Handoff Drop Timer
14 2.6.6.2.5.1: Processing of Forward Traffic Channel Handoff Messages
15 2.6.6.2.5.2: Processing of Reverse Traffic Channel Handoff Messages
16 2.6.6.2.6.2: Maintenance of the Candidate Set
17 2.6.6.2.6.3: Maintenance of the Neighbor Set
18 2.6.6.2.8.2.1: Restoring the Configuration
19 2.6.6.3: Examples

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-2

1 2.7.2.3.2.5: Pilot Strength Measurement Message


2 3.6.6.2.1.1: System Parameters
3 3.7.2.3.2.13: Extended System Parameters Message
4 3.7.3.3.2.7: In-Traffic System Parameters Message
5 3.7.3.3.2.31: General Handoff Direction Message

6 3.1.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.
8 • The Forward Channel from sector α of base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
9 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.
10 • The Forward Channel from sector ß of base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
11 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.
12 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
13 P3 and is called Channel 3.

14 b. Set the test parameters for Test 1 as specified in Table 3.1.2-1 and Table 3.1.2-2.
15 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
16 (approximately 90 dB).
17 d. Setup a mobile station originated call.
18 e. Verify user data in both directions. Verify only Channel 1 is in the active set.
19 f. Raise the level of Channel 2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of five seconds after
20 each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement
21 Message. Record the level of Channel 2. Verify this occurs when Channel 2 Pilot
22 Ec/Io is approximately -11 dB and Îor2/Ioc is approximately 3 dB.

23 g. Verify the following:


24 • The base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General
25 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
26 station.
27 • Channel 1 and Channel 2 are in the active set at the action time of the
28 message.
29 • The mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base
30 station.
31 h. Set test parameters as specified in Table 3.1.2-3 while Channel 1 and Channel 2 are
32 in soft handoff. Raise the level of Channel 3 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of five
33 seconds after each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength
34 Measurement Message. Record the level of Channel 3. Verify this occurs when
35 Channel 3 Pilot Ec/Io is approximately –11 dB and Îor3/Ioc is approximately 6 dB.
36

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-3

1
2 Figure 3.1.2-1 Functional Test Setup for Testing Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold
3
4 Table 3.1.2-1 Soft Handoff with Dynamic Threshold Test Parameters - T_ADD, T_DROP,
5 T_TDROP, ADD_INTERCEPTs, DROP_INTERCEPTs, SOFT_SLOPEs

Parameter Test 1 Test 2


SOFT_SLOPE ‘010000’ (2) ‘000000’ (0)
ADD_INTERCEPT ‘000110’ (3 dB) ‘000000’ (0 dB)
DROP_INTERCEPT ‘000010’ (1 dB) ‘000000’ (0 dB)
T_ADD ‘100000’ (-16 dB) ‘011100’ (-14 dB)
T_DROP ‘100100’ (-18 dB) ‘100000’ (-16 dB)
T_TDROP ‘0011’ (4s) ‘0011’ (4s)
6

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-4

1 Table 3.1.2-2 Dynamic Add Test – One Pilot

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3


Îor/Ioc dB 7 -20 -20

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -5 -5 -5

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 -75


MHz
Pilot Ec/Io dB -5.8 -33 -33
2
3 Table 3.1.2-3 Dynamic Add Test – Two Pilots

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3


Îor/Ioc dB 7 7 -20

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -5 -5 -5

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -8.4 -8.4 -35


4
5 i. Verify the following:
6 • The base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General
7 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message.
8 • Channel 1, Channel 2, and Channel 3 are in the active set at the action
9 time of the message.

10 • The mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base


11 station.
12 Table 3.1.2-4 Dynamic Drop Test - Three Pilots

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

Îor/Ioc dB 7 7 7

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -5 -5 -5

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10.1 -10.1 -10.1


13
14 j. Set the test parameters in Table 3.1.2-4 while Channel 1, Channel 2, and Channel 3
15 are in soft handoff. Lower the level of Channel 3 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of
16 30 seconds until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-5

1 Message. Record the level of Channel 3. Verify this occurs when channel 3 Pilot
2 Ec/Io is approximately -13.0 dB and Îor3/Ioc is approximately 4 dB.

3 k. Verify the following:


4 • The base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General
5 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message.
6 • Channel 1 and Channel 2 are in the active set at the action time of the
7 message.
8 • The mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base
9 station.
10 l. Set test parameters as specified in Table 3.1.2-5. Lower level of Channel 2 in steps
11 of 1 dB with a dwell time of 30 seconds after each step until the mobile station has
12 generated the Pilot Strength Measurement Message. Record the level of Channel 2.
13 Verify this occurs when channel 2 Pilot Ec/Io is approximately –13 dB and Îor2/Ioc
14 is approximately 0 dB.
15 m. Verify the following:
16 • Base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff
17 Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message.
18 • Only Channel 1 is in the active set at the action time of the message.
19 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
20 Table 3.1.2-5 Dynamic Drop Test - Two Pilots

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3


Îor/Ioc dB 7 7 -20

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -5 -5 -5

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -8.4 -8.4 -35

21 n. End call.
22 o. Set the test parameters for Test 2 as specified in Table 3.1.2-1 and Table 3.1.2-2.
23 p. Setup a mobile station originated call and Repeat steps e thru n. The expected
24 results should be identical to the results above except in steps f, h, j, & l the Pilot
25 Ec/Io level at which point the mobile station generates a Pilot Strength Measurement
26 Message will be per the requirements of “no dynamic thresholds”.
27 q. Steps f through p can be repeated for various P_REV_IN_USE values. The expected
28 results should be identical to the results above with the following differences:
29 • When P_REV_IN_USE is less than 4, test 1 (dynamic thresholds) is not
30 applicable.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-6

1 • When P_REV_IN_USE is less than 6, in steps g, i, k, & m: Universal


2 Handoff Direction Message is not generated.

3 3.1.3 Minimum Standard


4 The mobile station shall send an autonomous Pilot Strength Measurement Message as a message
5 requiring an acknowledgment and containing measurements consistent with the event whenever
6 any of the following events occur:
7 • If P_REV_IN_USEs is greater than three and SOFT_SLOPEs is not equal to ‘000000’,
8 then in step f, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement
9 Message when the level of channel 2 is at a level between –10 dB and –13 dB. The
10 base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff
11 Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft handoff
12 with channel 2.
13 In step h, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
14 the level of channel 3 is at a level between –10 dB and –13 dB . The base station
15 shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction
16 Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft handoff with
17 channel 3.
18 In step j, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
19 the level of channel 3 is at a level between –12 dB and –16 dB for a period of
20 T_TDROP.
21 The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff
22 Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to drop channel 3
23 from the active set.
24 In step l, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
25 the level of channel 2 is at a level of –11 dB and –14 dB for a period of T_TDROP.
26 The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal
27 Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to drop
28 channel 2 from the active set.
29 • If P_REV_IN_USEs is less than or equal to three or SOFT_SLOPEs is equal to
30 ‘000000’, then in step f, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength
31 Measurement Message when the level of channel 2 is at a level between T_ADD and
32 T_ADD +2 dB. The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message,
33 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to
34 initiate soft handoff with channel 2.
35 In step h, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
36 the level of channel 3 is at a level between T_ADD and T_ADD +2 dB. The base
37 station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff
38 Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft handoff
39 with channel 3.
40 In step j, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
41 the level of channel 3 is at a level between T_DROP and T_DROP –3 dB for a period
42 of T_TDROP. The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message,

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-7

1 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to


2 drop channel 3 from the active set.

3 In step l, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when
4 the level of channel 2 is at a level of T_DROP and T_DROP –3 dB for a period of
5 T_TDROP. The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message,
6 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message to
7 drop channel 2 from the active set.

8 3.2 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in the Same Band Class

9 3.2.1 Definition
10 This test verifies the mobile station and base station perform hard handoff between different
11 CDMA channels in the same band class.
12 Traceability: (See [4] );
13 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
14 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
15 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
16 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
17 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff

18 3.2.2 Method of Measurement


19 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.
20 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
21 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

22 • Setup base station #2 to be on a different CDMA channel than base


23 station #1, but within the same band class. The Forward Channel from base station
24 #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

25 • The AWGN source should be on the frequency of Channel 2. (It is


26 advisable to achieve the maximum possible difference in frequency separation
27 between Channel 1 and Channel 2).
28 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.2.2-1.
29 Table 3.2.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2


30

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-8

1 c. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approximately 90
2 dB).

3 d. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.


4 e. Verify user data in both directions.
5 f. Instruct base station #1 to initiate handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2. Verify base
6 station #1 sends a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction
7 Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to
8 tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2.
9 g. Upon receiving a Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff Direction
10 Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message at the mobile station, verify the
11 following:

12 • Only Channel 2 is in the active set at the action time of the message.
13 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
14 h. Monitor calls and record the length of any audio dropouts present. Verify that any
15 audio dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
16 i. This test can be repeated for the case where it is a hard handoff to soft handoff on
17 the same frequency with the following setup (see Figure 3.1.2-1: one base station
18 configured with two sectors active):
19 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
20 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

21 • The Forward Channel from sector α of base station #2 has an arbitrary


22 pilot PN offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

23 • The Forward Channel from sector ß of base station #2 has an arbitrary


24 pilot PN offset index P3 and is called Channel 3.

25 j. The expected results are as given for the previous test.

26 3.2.3 Minimum Standard


27 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the hard handoffs. Any audio
28 dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-9

1 Table 3.2.3-1 Limits of Audio Dropouts During Hard Handoff

Handoff Type Maximum Typical


Duration (ms) Duration (ms)
CDMA to AMPS 350 250
CDMA-CDMA, different 440 260
frequency, same base
station
CDMA-CDMA, different 460 320
frequency, different base
station
CDMA-CDMA, same 400 280
frequency
2
3 3.3 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS

4 3.3.1 Definition
5 This test verifies the mobile station and base station perform hard hand off from a CDMA system
6 to an AMPS system.
7 Traceability: (See [4] );
8 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
9 2.6.6.2.9: CDMA-to-Analog Handoff
10 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
11 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff

12 3.3.2 Method of Measurement


13 a. Connect two base stations and an AWGN source to the mobile station as shown in
14 Figure 3.1.2-1. For the purpose of this test, Channel 1 is CDMA and Channel 2 is
15 AMPS.

16 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Tables 3.3.2-1 and 3.3.2-2.


17 Table 3.3.2-1 Hard Handoff to AMPS, CDMA Test Parameters

CDMA Parameter Unit Channel 1


Îor/Ioc dB 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75


18

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-10

1 Table 3.3.2-2 Hard Handoff to AMPS, Analog Test Parameters

Analog Parameter Unit Channel 2


Voice Channel dBm -73
Co-Channel Interference dB -18
2
3 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
4 (approximately 90 dB).
5 d. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
6 e. Verify user data in both directions.

7 f. Instruct the CDMA base station to initiate handoff to AMPS. Verify the CDMA base
8 station sends an Analog Handoff Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to
9 tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff to AMPS.
10 g. Monitor calls and record the length of any audio dropouts present on handoff. Any
11 audio dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
12 h. Verify the mobile station is no longer present in the CDMA system.

13 3.3.3 Minimum Standard


14 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoff transition. Any audio
15 dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.4.3-1.
16 3.4 Soft Handoff in Fading

17 3.4.1 Definition
18 This test verifies soft handoff under various fading conditions:
19 • 1 Ray Rayleigh fading at 30 km/hr
20 • 3 Ray Rayleigh fading at 100 km/hr
21 • 1 Ray Rayleigh fading at 3 km/hr
22 Traceability: (See [4] );
23 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
24 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
25 2.6.6.2.7: Soft Handoff
26 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
27 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
28 3.6.6.2.4: Soft Handoff

29 3.4.2 Method of Measurement


30 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.4.2-1.
31 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
32 P1 and is called Channel 1.
33 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
34 P2 and is called Channel 2.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-11

1
2 Figure 3.4.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Soft Handoff in Fading
3
4 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.4.2-1.
5 Table 3.4.2-1 Faded Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_ADD

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dB 0 -10

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10.2 -20.2

6 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
7 (approximately 90 dB).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-12

1 d. Set both channel simulators to one Ray Rayleigh, 30 km/hr.


2 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1. Monitor two-way audio and
3 note anomalies throughout the test.
4 f. Raise the level of Channel 2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds after
5 each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement
6 Message. Verify the following:
7 • Pilot Strength Measurement Message is generated when the channel 2
8 Pilot Ec/Io is at a level above T_ADD.

9 • Base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General


10 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
11 station.

12 • Channel 1 and Channel 2 are in the active set at the action time of the
13 message.
14 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
15 g. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.4.2-2 without dropping the call.
16
17 Table 3.4.2-2 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_DROP

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dB 0 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -11.8 -11.8


18
19 h. Lower the level of Channel 1 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 8 seconds after
20 each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement
21 Message. Verify the following:
22 • Pilot Strength Measurement Message is generated when Channel 1 is at a
23 Pilot Ec/Io level below T_DROP for a period of TT_DROP.

24 • Base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General


25 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
26 station.
27 • Only Channel 2 is in the active set at the action time of the message.
28 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
29 i. Set the levels as specified in Table 3.4.2-3.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-13

1 Table 3.4.2-3 Soft Handoff Levels

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dB -10 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -20.2 -10.2


2
3 j. Raise the level of Channel 1 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds after
4 each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement
5 Message. Verify the following:
6 • Pilot Strength Measurement Message is generated when the channel 1
7 Pilot Ec/Io is at a level above T_ADD.

8 • Base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General


9 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
10 station.
11 • Channel 1 and Channel 2 are in the active set at the action time of the
12 message.
13 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
14 k. Set the levels as specified in Table 3.4.2-4.
15 l. Lower the level of Channel 2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 8 seconds after
16 each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength Measurement
17 Message. Verify the following:
18 • Pilot Strength Measurement Message is generated when the Channel 2 is
19 at a Pilot Ec/Io level below T_DROP for a period of TT_DROP.

20 • Base station sends an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General


21 Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message to the mobile
22 station.
23 • Only Channel 1 is in the active set at the action time of the message.
24 • Mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base station.
25 m. Repeat steps a through l under 3 Ray Rayleigh fading at 100 km/hr fading condition
26 as specified in table 3.4.2-4.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-14

1 Table 3.4.2-4 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - 100 km/hr

Parameter Unit Value


Vehicle Speed km/hr 100
Number of Paths # 3
Path 2 Power dB 0
(Relative to Path 1)
Path 3 Power dB -3
(Relative to Path 1)
Delay from Path 1 to Input µs 0
Delay from Path 2 to Input µs 2
Delay from Path 3 to Input µs 14.5
2
3 n. Repeat steps a through l under 1 Ray Rayleigh fading at 3 km/hr fading condition.

4 3.4.3 Minimum Standard


5 The mobile station shall generate the Pilot Strength Measurement Message at the appropriate
6 time as specified in steps f, h, j, and l and the handoff shall be completed successfully.
7 3.5 Hard Handoff in Fading

8 3.5.1 Definition
9 This test verifies hard handoff under various fading conditions:
10 • 1 Ray Rayleigh fading at 30 km/hr
11 • 3 Ray Rayleigh fading at 100 km/hr
12 • 1 Ray Rayleigh fading at 3 km/hr
13 • Under various deployment scenarios:
14 - Between frequencies
15 - On the same frequency
16 Traceability: (See [4] );
17 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
18 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
19 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
20 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
21 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
22

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-15

1 3.5.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.4.2-1.
3 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 on frequency F1, has an
4 arbitrary pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.
5 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 on frequency F2, has an
6 arbitrary pilot PN offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

7 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.5.2-1.


8
9 Table 3.5.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dB 0 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10 -10


10
11 c. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
12 d. Set the channel simulators for 1 Ray Rayleigh fading, 30 km/hr.
13 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
14 f. Verify user data in both directions.
15 g. Instruct base station #1 to initiate handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2. Verify base
16 station #1 sends a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction
17 Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to
18 tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from base station #1 to base station #2.
19 Monitor calls and record the length of any audio dropouts present on handoff. Verify
20 that any audio dropouts shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.

21 h. Upon receiving an Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff Direction


22 Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message at the mobile station, verify the
23 following:
24 • Only Channel 2 is in the active set at the action time of the message.
25 • The mobile station sends a Handoff Completion Message to the base
26 station.
27 i. Repeat steps a through h, with the channel simulators set to 3 Ray Rayleigh at 100
28 km/hr in step d. Use the setup shown in Table 3.4.2-4. The expected results are as
29 given above for the previous test.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-16

1 j Repeat steps a through h, with the channel simulators set to 1 Ray Rayleigh at 3
2 km/hr in step d. The expected results are as given above for the previous test.

3 k. Repeat steps c through j for the scenario where the hard handoff is performed
4 between two CDMA channels on the same frequency, with the setup test as shown
5 in Figure 3.8.2-1:
6 • Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset
7 index P1 and is called Channel 1.

8 • Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset


9 index P2 and is called Channel 2.

10 • Test parameters set as shown in Table 3.5.2-2.


11
12 Table 3.5.2-2 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dB 0 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -11.8 -11.8

13 Note that in this case a hard handoff can be forced by excluding P1 from the active set.

14 3.5.3 Minimum Standard


15 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the hard handoff transitions. Any
16 audio dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.4.3-1.
17 3.6 Hard Handoff Between Different Band Classes

18 3.6.1 Definition
19 This test verifies hard handoff between two different band classes.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
22 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
23 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
24 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
25 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff

26 3.6.2 Method of Measurement

27 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.


28 • The Forward Channel from the CDMA 800 base station #1 has an
29 arbitrary pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-17

1 • The Forward Channel from the CDMA 1900 base station #2 has an
2 arbitrary pilot PN offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

3 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.6.2-1


4 Table 3.6.2-1 Hard Handoff: CDMA 800 to CDMA 1900

Parameter Unit CDMA 800 CDMA 1900


Îor/Ioc dB -5 -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -13.2 -13.2


5
6 c. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
7 d. Setup a CDMA 800 call.
8 e. Verify user data in both directions.
9 f. Instruct the CDMA 800 base station to initiate handoff to the CDMA 1900 system.
10 Verify the base station sends a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal
11 Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message with proper
12 parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff. Monitor calls and record
13 the length of any audio dropouts present on handoff. Any audio dropouts present
14 should not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
15 g. Instruct the CDMA 1900 base station to initiate handoff to the CDMA 800 system.
16 Verify that the base station sends a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal
17 Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message with proper
18 parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff. Monitor calls and record
19 the length of any audio dropouts present on handoff. Any audio dropouts present
20 should not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
21 h. This test can be repeated for other handoffs between other band classes.

22 3.6.3 Minimum Standard


23 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoff. Any audio dropouts
24 present should not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
25 3.7 Hard Handoff with and without Return on Failure

26 3.7.1 Definition
27 This test verifies the mobile station behavior when hard handoff fails and:
28 • return on failure is allowed.
29 • return on failure is disallowed.

30 Traceability: (See [4] );


31 2.6.4.2: Traffic Channel Initialization Substate

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-18

1 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff


2 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
3 2.6.6.2.8.2: Hard Handoff With Return On Failure
4 2.6.6.2.8.2.1: Restoring the Configuration
5 3.6.6.1: Overview
6 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
7 3.7.3.3.2.31: General Handoff Direction Message

8 3.7.2 Method of Measurement


9 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1. The Forward Channel from base station #1
10 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel 1. The Forward
11 Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index P2 and is called
12 Channel 2.
13 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.7.2-1.
14 Table 3.7.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dB -5 -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 <-20 (or none)

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -13.2 -12

15 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
16 (approximately 90 dB).
17 d. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
18 e. Verify user data in both directions.
19 f. Instruct the base station to initiate a handoff and allow for return on failure. Verify
20 that the base station sends a General Handoff Direction Message or a Universal
21 Handoff Direction Message with the following values:
22
RETURN_IF_HANDOFF_FAIL ‘1’
23
24 g. Instruct the mobile station to attempt the hard handoff, but not complete it, and
25 declare a hard handoff failure. Verify the following:
26 • Mobile station restores the previous configuration
27 • Mobile station returns to Channel 1.
28 • Mobile station sends a Candidate Frequency Search Report Message to
29 the base station within T56m seconds.
30 h. Repeat steps a through h with the difference that the base station disallows return
31 on failure. The results are as given above but with the following modifications:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-19

1 • In step f, verify that the base station sends a General Handoff Direction
2 Message or a Universal Handoff Direction Message with the following values:
3
RETURN_IF_HANDOFF_FAIL ‘0’

4 • In step g, verify the mobile station does not restore the previous
5 configuration, does not return to Channel 1, but sends a Handoff Completion
6 Message within T73m.
7 i. Steps d through i can be repeated for the case of hard handoff between different
8 band classes.

9 3.7.3 Minimum Standard


10 When return on failure is allowed, the mobile station shall return to normal Channel 1 voice
11 operation within 1.2 seconds of receiving the message to hard handoff. The Candidate
12 Frequency Search Report Message shall indicate the hard handoff failed. When return on failure
13 is not allowed, the mobile station does not return to previous channel.
14 3.8 Search Window Size and Offset Per Neighbor

15 3.8.1 Definition
16 A CDMA call is established on sector α of sectored base station #1. Delay is applied to sector ß
17 and base station #2. The level of sector ß is raised sufficiently high to ensure intersector handoff
18 is possible. The level of base station #2 is raised sufficiently high to ensure soft handoff is
19 possible. The test is performed with three different settings of delay. The Pilot Strength
20 Measurements of base station #2 and sector ß are checked against the search window size and
21 search window offset settings for each of the Neighbor Pilots. If the delay is greater than the
22 search window size for the Neighbor Pilot then the mobile station shall not send a Pilot Strength
23 Measurement.

24 3.8.1.1 Formulas

25 Neighbor_Chip_Offset = PILOT_PN_PHASE mod 64


26 Num_Chips = Set_Chip_Offset - Sim_Chip_Offset
Num_chip x 244m
27 Chip_Delay (µs) =
300m/υ0
28 PILOT_PN_PHASE is the pilot PN phase obtained from the mobile station log file in units of
29 chips. Set_Chip_Offset is the desired number of chip offsets for a particular test case.
30 Sim_Chip_Offset is the inherent delay for a pilot due to the time alignment/calibration of the
31 equipment. Chip_Delay is the actual delay in usec the tester should vary with the fader to
32 achieve the proper Set_Chip_Offset (this includes the inherent delay measured for
33 Sim_Chip_Offset.
34 Traceability: (See [4] );
35 2.6.6: Handoff Procedures
36 2.6.6.2.1: Pilot Search
37 3.6.6: Handoff Procedures
38 3.7.2.3.2.22: General Neighbor List Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-20

1
2

3 3.8.2 Method of Measurement


4 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.8.2-1.
5 1) The Forward Channel from sector α of base station #1 has an arbitrary
6 pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.
7 2) The Forward Channel from sector ß of base station #1 has an arbitrary
8 pilot PN offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.
9 3) The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN
10 offset index P3 and is called Channel 3.

11 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.8.2-1.


12 c. The Reverse Link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
13 (approximately 90 dB).
14

15
16 Figure 3.8.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Search Window per Neighbor

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-21

1
2 Table 3.8.2-1 Test Parameters for Search Window per Neighbor

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

Îor/Ioc dB 0 -20 -20

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10 -30 -30

3 Note: The Pilot Ec/I0 value is calculated from the parameters set in the table. It is not a
4 settable parameter itself.
5 d. Set the following values in the General Neighbor List Message:
6
NGHBR_CONFIG_PN_INCL 1

NGHBR_SRCH_MODE 10

SRCH_OFFSET_INCL 1
7
Neighbor Setting for P2
NGHBR_PN P2
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 7 (40 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 0 (no offset)

8
Neighbor Setting for P3
NGHBR_PN P3
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 9 (80 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 0 (no offset)
9
10 e. Determine the inherent delay of the channel simulator as follows:.
11 1) Set the delay on Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to 0.0 µs.
12 2) Setup a CDMA originated call.
13 3) Verify user data in both directions.
14 4) Generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message by raising the level of
15 Channel 2 to Îor/Ioc = +1 dB without dropping the call.
16
17
18

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-22

1 5) Use the PILOT_PN_PHASE of the pilot PN offset index P2 recorded in the


2 Pilot Strength Measurement Message to calculate the Neighbor_Chip_OffsetP2.
3 Sim_Chip_OffsetP2 is equal to the same value of Neighbor_Chip_OffsetP2.
4 Sim_Chip_Offset represents the inherent delay produced by the channel simulator
5 and will be used to calculate the delay setting for the remainder of the test case.
6 6) Generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message by raising the level of
7 Channel 3 to Îor/Ioc = +1 dB without dropping the call.

8 7) Use the PILOT_PN_PHASE of the pilot PN offset index P3 recorded in the


9 Pilot Strength Measurement Message to calculate the Neighbor_Chip_OffsetP3.
10 Sim_Chip_OffsetP3 is equal to the value of Neighbor_Chip_OffsetP3.
11 Sim_Chip_Offset represents the inherent delay produced by the channel simulator
12 and will be used to calculate the delay setting for the remainder of the test case.
13 8) Example, given:
14 SRCH_WIN_NGHBR = 9 [80 chips] PILOT_PN_PHASE = 2052
15 Set_Chip_Offset = (SRCH_WIN_NGHBR)/4 = 20 chips
16 Therefore:
17 Neighbor_Chip_Offset = 4
18 Sim_Chip_Offset = Neighbor_Chip_Offset = 4
19 Num_Chips = Set_Chip_Offset - Sim_Chip_Offset = 16
20 Chip_Delay = (Num_Chips x 244m)/(300 m/µs) = 13.01 µs
21 f. Set the delay on both Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to the Chip_Delay with
22 Set_Chip_Offset =(SRCH_WIN_NGHBR of P3)/4 + SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR of P3.

23 g. Reset the test parameters as specified in Table 3.8.2-1.


24 h. Setup a mobile station originated call.
25 i. Verify user data in both directions.
26 j. Generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message by raising the level of Channel 2 to
27 Îor/Ioc = +1 dB without dropping the call.

28 k. Use the PILOT_PN_PHASE of the pilot PN offset index P2 recorded in the Pilot
29 Strength Measurement Message to calculate the Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P2.

30 l. Generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message by raising the level of Channel 3 to


31 Îor/Ioc = +1 dB without dropping the call.
32 m. End the call.

33 n. Use the PILOT_PN_PHASE of the pilot PN offset index P3 recorded in the Pilot
34 Strength Measurement Message to calculate the Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P3.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-23

1 o. Set the delay on Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to Chip_Delay of P3 with


2 Set_Chip_Offset = (SRCH_WIN_NGHBR of P3)/2 + SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR of P3.

3 p. Repeat steps g through n.

4 q. Set the delay on Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to Chip_Delay of P3 with


5 Set_Chip_Offset = (SRCH_WIN_NGHBR of P3)/2 + SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR of P3 +
6 10 chips.
7 r. Repeat steps g through n.
8 s. Set the following values in the General Neighbor List Message:
9
NGHBR_CONFIG_PN_INCL 1

NGHBR_SRCH_MODE 10

SRCH_OFFSET_INCL 1
10
Neighbor Setting for P2
NGHBR_PN P2
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 7 (40 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 0 (no offset)
11
Neighbor Setting for P3
NGHBR_PN P3
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 7 (40 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 1 (window_size/2)
12
13 t. Set the delay on both Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to the Chip_Delay with
14 Set_Chip_Offset =(SRCH_WIN_NGHBR of P3)/2 + SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR of P3.

15 u. Repeat steps g through n.


16 v. Set the following values in the General Neighbor List Message:
17
NGHBR_CONFIG_PN_INCL 1

NGHBR_SRCH_MODE 10

SRCH_OFFSET_INCL 1
18

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-24

Neighbor Setting for P2


NGHBR_PN P2
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 7 (40 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 0 (no offset)
1
Neighbor Setting for P3
NGHBR_PN P3
SRCH_WIN_NGHBR 7 (40 chips)
SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR 4 (-window_size/2)
2
3 w. Set the delay on both Channel 2 and on Channel 3 to the Chip_Delay with
4 Set_Chip_Offset =(SRCH_WIN_NGHBR of P3)/2.

5 x. Repeat steps g through n.

6 3.8.3 Minimum Standard


7 a. For the delay setup in step f, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength
8 Measurement Message when the channel 2 Pilot is added. The base station shall
9 generate a General Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft handoff. The
10 Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P2 shall equal the Set_Chip_Offset of P2. The mobile station
11 shall generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when the channel 3 Pilot is
12 added. The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message to
13 initiate soft handoff. The Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P3 shall equal the Set_Chip_Offset
14 of P3.
15 b. For the delay setup in step o, the mobile station shall not generate a Pilot Strength
16 Measurement Message when the channel 2 Pilot is added. The mobile station shall
17 generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when the channel 3 Pilot is added.
18 The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft
19 handoff. The Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P3 shall equal the Set_Chip_Offset of P3.
20 c. For the delay setup in step q, the mobile station shall not generate a Pilot Strength
21 Measurement Message when the channel 2 and channel 3 Pilots are added.
22 d. For the delay setup in step t, the mobile station shall not generate a Pilot Strength
23 Measurement Message when the channel 2 Pilot is added. The mobile station shall
24 generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when the channel 3 Pilot is added.
25 The base station shall generate a General Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft
26 handoff. The Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P3 shall equal the Set_Chip_Offset of P3.
27 e. For the delay setup in step t, the mobile station shall generate a Pilot Strength
28 Measurement Message when the channel 2 Pilot is added. The base station shall
29 generate a General Handoff Direction Message to initiate soft handoff. The
30 Neighbor_Chip_Offset of P2 shall equal the Set_Chip_Offset of P2. The mobile station

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-25

1 shall not generate a Pilot Strength Measurement Message when the channel 3 Pilot is
2 added.

3 3.9 Access Handoffs


4 There are 3 types of Access Handoffs. ‘Access Entry Handoff’ may occur after receiving a
5 General Page but before the mobile station has sent any access probes in response. ‘Access
6 Probe’ handoff may occur during an access probe transmission. ‘Access Handoff’ may occur
7 after an initial mobile station access attempt, but before a Channel Assignment Message or an
8 Extended Channel Assignment Message is sent. These features are intended to save a call in any
9 of its brief vulnerable intervals during origination, where some access failures occur.

10 3.9.1 Access Entry Handoff

11 3.9.1.1 Definition
12 A mobile station is permitted to perform an ‘Access Entry Handoff’ to a neighboring base station
13 after receiving a General Page directed to it, but before transmitting any access probes.
14 Traceability:
15 [4] 2.6.2.1.4 Idle Handoff
16 [4] 2.6.2.3 Mobile Station Page Match Operation
17 [4] 2.6.3 System Access State
18 [4]2.6.6 Handoff Procedures
19 [4] 3.6.6 Handoff Procedures

20 3.9.1.2 Method of Measurement


21 This interoperability test can be difficult to perform due to timing constraints required to
22 simulate the real world condition of sudden pilot loss directly after receipt of a call page. The
23 transition of base station powers must be synchronized to the sending of the General Page. The
24 mobile station determines that it should perform an idle handoff after it has declared a page
25 match.
26 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in figure 3.9.2.2-1. Setup
27 the test parameters as shown in table 3.9.4.2-1.
28 • Base station #1 has a PN offset of P1 and frequency of ƒ1.
29 • Base station #2 has a PN offset of P2 and frequency of ƒ1.

30 b. Configure base stations one and two to allow Access Entry Handoffs using the
31 following parameters in the Extended System Parameter Message:
32

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-26

Field Value
NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO '1'
ACC_ENT_HO_ORDER '1'
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO '0'
NGHBR_SET_SIZE Number of pilots included in the
Neighbor List Message, Extended
Neighbor List Message, or General
Neighbor List Message
ACCESS_ENTRY_HO '1'
(Set per neighbor)
1
2 c. Ensure the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base
3 station #1 and allow sufficient idle time so that the mobile station meets the
4 conditions defined in [4] 2.6.2.3, regarding stored message sequences.
5 d. Page the mobile station.
6 e. After the mobile station receives the General Page from base station #1, increase
7 attenuation for base station #1 to cause the mobile station to transmit access
8 probes on base station #2 after an Access Entry Handoff.
9 f. Verify the call completes.

10 3.9.1.3 Minimum Standard


11 The mobile shall receive a General Page from base station #1, and transmit its first access
12 probes to base station #2. The call shall complete on base station #2.

13 3.9.2 Access Probe Handoff

14 3.9.2.1 Definition
15 A call is initiated by the mobile station currently on base station #1. The reverse link of base
16 station #1 is disabled to cause the mobile station to send multiple probes on the access channel.
17 While the mobile station is sending access probes, the level of base station #2 is raised
18 sufficiently high to ensure idle handoff is possible. The mobile station performs an idle handoff
19 to base station #2 while in the access sub-state. All other forms of access handoff are disabled at
20 the base station.
21 Traceability: (See [4] );
22 2.6.3.1.3.3: Access Probe Handoff
23 2.6.3.3: Page Response Substate
24 2.6.3.5: Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
25 2.6.6: Handoff Procedures
26 3.6.6: Handoff Procedures

27 3.9.2.2 Method of Measurement


28 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.9.2.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-27

1 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN


2 offset index P called Channel 1.
1

3 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN


4 offset index P2 called Channel 2.

5 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.9.2.2-1.


6 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
7 (approximately 90 dB). Disable the Reverse link of Channel 1.
8 d. Include the pilot PN of Channel 2 in the Neighbor List Message, Extended Neighbor
9 List Message, and/or General Neighbor List Message of Channel 1.
10

11
12 Figure 3.9.2.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Access Probe Handoffs
13

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-28

1 Table 3.9.2.2-1 Access Probe Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dB 0 -20 for S1
+10 for S2
Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -10 for S1 -30 for S1
-17.8 for S2 -7.8 for S2

2 Note: S1 and S2 indicate the two states of the power levels.


3
4 e. Setup the following values in the Extended System Parameters Message of Channel
5 1:
6
NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO = 0 ACCESS_HO_MSG_RSP = 0
ACC_ENT_HO_ORDER = 0 ACCESS_PROBE_HO = 1
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO = 1 MAX_NUM_PROBE_HO = 0
ACCESS_HO = 0 N/A
ACCESS_ENTRY_HO = 0 ACCESS_HO_ALLOWED = 1
(Set per Neighbor) (Set per Neighbor)
7
8 f. Set following values in the Access Parameters Message for Channel 1 and Channel
9 2:
10
NUM_STEP = 7 PWR_STEP = 1
INIT_PWR = 0 NOM_PWR = 0
MAX_REQ_SEQ = 2 PROBE_BKOFF = 1
BKOFF = 1 N/A
11
12 g. Setup a mobile station originated call.

13 h. Verify user data in both directions.


14 i. Immediately raise the level of Channel 2 to Îor/Ioc = +10 dB to cause a loss of
15 paging channel on Channel 1 to ensure an idle handoff can be triggered.

16 3.9.2.3 Minimum Standard

17 a. The mobile station shall update the overhead messages and send an Origination
18 Message on Channel 1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-29

1 b. While in the Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate, the mobile station shall
2 update the overhead messages to that of Channel 2 then send access probes on
3 Channel 2 using the appropriate coding for base station #2.
4 c. The call shall be completed on Channel 2.

5 3.9.3 Access Handoff

6 3.9.3.1 Definition
7 The mobile station is permitted to perform an ‘Access Handoff’ when waiting for a response
8 from the base station or before sending a response to the base station. An access handoff is
9 permitted after an access attempt while the mobile station is in the Page Response Substate or the
10 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate.
11 Traceability:
12 (6) 3.2.3.2 Access Handoff Test
13 [4] 2.6.3.1.3.2 Access Handoff
14 [4] 2.6.3.3 Page Response Substate
15 [4] 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
16 [4] 2.6.6 Handoff Procedures
17 [4] 3.6.6 Handoff Procedures

18 3.9.3.2 Method of Measurement


19 This interoperability test can be difficult to perform due to the timing constraints required to
20 simulate real world condition of sudden pilot loss, or a network delay. However, if the base
21 station can be configured to hold off sending a Channel Assignment Message or an Extended
22 Channel Assignment for some time, the tester can transition the base station powers and induce
23 the Access Handoff. .
24 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in figure 3.9.2.2-1. Setup
25 the test parameters as shown in table 3.9.4.2-1.
26 • Base station #1 has a PN offset of P1 and frequency of ƒ1.

27 • Base station #2 has a PN offset of P2 and frequency of ƒ1.


28 b. Configure base stations one and two to allow Access Handoffs by using the following
29 parameters in the Extended System Parameters Message:
30

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-30

Field Value
NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO '0'
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO '1'
ACCESS_HO '1'
ACCESS_HO_MSG_RSP '1'
ACCESS_PROBE_HO '0'
NGHBR_SET_SIZE Number of pilots included in the Neighbor
List Message, Extended Neighbor List
Message, or General Neighbor List
Message
ACCESS_HO_ALLOWED '1'
(Set per neighbor)
1
2 c. Ensure the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base
3 station #1.
4 d. Attempt a mobile station originated call on base station #1.
5 e. Before base station #1 sends a Channel Assignment Message or an Extended
6 Channel Assignment Message, increase the attenuation on base station #1 to cause
7 an Access Handoff to base station #2.
8 f. Verify the mobile station receives a Channel Assignment Message or an Extended
9 Channel Assignment Message from base station #2.
10 g. Verify the call completes and user traffic is present (i.e. audio)

11 3.9.3.3 Minimum Standard


12 The mobile station shall perform ‘Access Handoff’, receive a Channel Assignment Message or
13 an Extended Channel Assignment Message on base station #2, and complete the call.

14 3.9.4 Channel Assignment into Soft Handoff

15 3.9.4.1 Definition
16 The levels of base station #1 and base station #2 are above T_ADD. A call is initiated on either
17 base station by the mobile station. The mobile station is assigned channels on base station #1 and
18 base station #2 in the Extended Channel Assignment Message. All other forms of access handoff
19 are disabled at the base station.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.6.3.1.3.2: Access Handoff
22 2.6.3.3: Page Response Substate
23 2.6.3.5: Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
24 2.6.6: Handoff Procedures
25 3.6.6: Handoff Procedures

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-31

1 3.9.4.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.9.2.2-1.
3 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
4 P1 and is called Channel 1.
5 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN offset index
6 P2 and is called Channel 2.

7 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.9.4.2-1.


8 Table 3.9.4.2-1 Channel Assignment into Soft Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dB +5 +2

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -9.6 -12.6

9 Note: Pilot Ec/I0 value is calculated from parameters set in the table. It is not a settable
10 parameter itself.

11 c. Reverse link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
12 (approximately 90 dB).
13 d. Setup the following values in the Extended System Parameters Message for Channel
14 1 and Channel 2.
15
NGHBR_SET_ENTRY_INFO = 0 ACCESS_HO_MSG_RSP = 0
ACC_ENT_HO_ORDER = 0 ACCESS_PROBE_HO = 0
NGHBR_SET_ACCESS_INFO = 1 MAX_NUM_PROBE_HO = 0
ACCESS_HO = 0 PILOT_REPORT = 1
ACCESS_ENTRY_HO = 0 ACCESS_HO_ALLOWED = 1
(Set per Neighbor) (Set per Neighbor)
16
17 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
18 f. Verify user data in both directions.

19 3.9.4.3 Minimum Standard


20 The mobile station shall update the overhead messages of the channel it is monitoring prior to
21 sending the Origination Message. Verify that pilot strength for the channel not used for
22 origination, is reported above T_ADD in the Origination Message. Verify the base station sends
23 the Extended Channel Assignment Message assigning both Channel 1 and Channel 2 as Active
24 Set pilots, with associated traffic channel resources. The mobile station shall complete service
25 negotiation while in soft handoff on Channel 1 and Channel 2.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-32

1 3.10 Traffic Channel Preamble during Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in same band

2 3.10.1 Definition
3 The mobile station is transitioned between base stations with different CDMA frequency
4 (channel) assignments in the same band class. The Traffic Channel Preamble is a sequence of all-
5 zero frames that is sent by the mobile station on the Reverse Traffic Channel as an aid to Traffic
6 Channel acquisition.
7 Traceability: (See [4] );
8 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
9 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
10 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
11 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
12 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
13 (See [4] );
14 2.1.3.2.4: Reverse Pilot Channel Operation during RTC Preamble
15 2.1.3.6.2.3: Reverse Traffic Channel Preamble

16 3.10.2 Method of Measurement


17 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.
18 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
19 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.
20 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN
21 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.
22 • The AWGN source should be on the frequency of Channel 2. (It is
23 advisable to achieve the maximum possible difference in frequency separation
24 between Channel 1 and Channel 2)
25 b. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.10.2-1.
26 Table 3.10.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2

27 c. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
28 d. Configure base station #1 and base station #2 for RC1 or RC2.
29 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.

30 f. Verify user data in both directions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-33

1 g. Send from base station #1 a General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff
2 Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction Message with NUM_PREAMBLE
3 = 0 and proper parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from
4 Channel 1 to Channel 2. Monitor calls and record the length of any audio dropouts
5 present on handoff.
6 h. Verify the correct NUM_PREAMBLE value in the General Handoff Direction Message,
7 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or Extended Handoff Direction Message. Verify
8 the Reverse Traffic Channel preamble length.
9 i. Wait 20 seconds then send from base station #2 a General Handoff Direction
10 Message, Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff Direction
11 Message with NUM_PREAMBLE = 4 and the proper parameters (refer to tables in
12 Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 2 to Channel 1.
13 j. Verify the correct NUM_PREAMBLE value in the General Handoff Direction Message,
14 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or Extended Handoff Direction Message. Verify
15 the Reverse Traffic Channel preamble length.
16 k. Configure base station #1 and base station #2 for RC3 or RC5.
17 l. Repeat steps e through j.

18 3.10.3 Minimum Standard


19 • The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoffs. Any audio
20 dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
21 • Verify the correct NUM_PREAMBLE value in the General Handoff Direction Message,
22 Universal Handoff Direction Message, or Extended Handoff Direction Message.
23 • Verify the Reverse Traffic Channel preamble length as follows:
24
25 Table 3.10.3-1 Reverse Traffic Channel Preamble Length

NUM_PREAMBLE RC1, RC2 RC>2


Preamble Length in 20 ms Preamble Length in 1.25 ms
Increments:(Total Time) Increments:(Total Time)
0 0 (0 ms) 0 (0 ms)
4 4 (80 ms) 8 (10 ms)
26

27 3.11 Hopping Pilot Beacon

28 3.11.1 Definition
29 The mobile station is transitioned between base stations with different CDMA frequency
30 (channel) assignments in the same band class.
31 The Hopping Pilot Beacon is a pilot beacon that changes CDMA Frequency periodically to
32 simulate multiple base stations operating on different frequencies. The transmission of the
33 hopping pilot beacon is discontinuous on any CDMA Channel.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-34

1 Traceability: (See [4] );


2 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
3 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
4 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
5 2.7.4.25: Capability Information
6 3.6.1.2: Pilot Channel Operation
7 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
8 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
9 3.7.2.3.2.22: General Neighbor List Message
10 3.7.2.3.2.26: Sync Channel Message
11 (See [1] );
12 3.1.3.2.5: Hopping Pilot Beacon

13 3.11.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Configure base station for hopping pilot beacon.
15 b. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.

16 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN


17 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

18 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN


19 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

20 • The AWGN source should be on the frequency of Channel 2. (It is


21 advisable to achieve the maximum possible difference in frequency separation
22 between Channel 1 and Channel 2)
23 c. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.11.2-1.
24
25 Table 3.11.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2
26
27 d. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
28 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
29 f. Verify user data in both directions.
30 g. Verify hopping pilot beacon settings in the General Neighbor List Message or
31 Extended Neighbor List Message. Send from base station #1 a General Handoff
32 Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an Extended Handoff

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-35

1 Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to initiate


2 handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2.

3 h. Monitor calls and record the length of any audio dropouts present on handoff.
4 i. Verify hopping pilot beacon settings in the General Neighbor List Message or
5 Extended Neighbor List Message. Wait 20 seconds then send from base station #2 a
6 General Handoff Direction Message, Universal Handoff Direction Message, or an
7 Extended Handoff Direction Message with the proper parameters (refer to tables in
8 Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 2 to Channel 1.

9 3.11.3 Minimum Standard


10 • The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoffs. Any audio
11 dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.
12 • Verify hopping pilot beacon settings in the General Neighbor List Message or Extended
13 Neighbor List Message.

14 3.12 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Radio Configurations

15 3.12.1 Definition
16 The mobile station is transitioned between base stations with different CDMA frequency
17 (channel) assignments in the same band class and different radio configurations.
18 Traceability: (See [4] );
19 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
20 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
21 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
22 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
23 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
24 (See [1] );
25 2.1.3.1: Reverse CDMA Channel Signals
26 3.1.3.1: Forward CDMA Channel Signals

27 3.12.2 Method of Measurement

28 a. Configure base station #1 for RC3 or RC5. Configure base station #2 for RC1 or RC2
29 .
30 b. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.

31 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN


32 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

33 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN


34 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

35 • The AWGN source should be on the frequency of Channel 2. (It is


36 advisable to achieve the maximum possible difference in frequency separation
37 between Channel 1 and Channel 2)
38 c. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.12.2-1.
39

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-36

1 Table 3.12.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2


2
3 d. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
4 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
5 f. Verify user data in both directions.
6 g. Send from base station #1 a General Handoff Direction Message, or Universal
7 Handoff Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to
8 initiate handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2. Monitor calls and record the length of
9 any audio dropouts present on handoff.
10 h. Wait 20 seconds then send from base station #2 a General Handoff Direction
11 Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message with the proper parameters (refer
12 to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 2 to Channel 1.
13 i. Configure base station #1 for RC1 or RC2. Configure base station #2 for RC3 or RC5
14 and repeat steps b through h.
15 j. Configure base station #1 for RC3. Configure base station #2 for RC4 and repeat
16 steps b through h.

17 3.12.3 Minimum Standard


18 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoffs. Any audio dropouts
19 present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.

20 3.13 Handoff on Same Frequency with Different Radio Configurations

21 3.13.1 Definition
22 The mobile station is transitioned between base stations with the same CDMA frequency
23 (channel) assignments in the same band class and different radio configurations.
24 When the active set membership before and after the handoff are disjoint, the handoff is
25 performed as a hard handoff; when the active set membership before and after handoff is not
26 disjoint except for the value of the radio configuration, the handoff is performed as a soft
27 handoff.
28 Traceability: (See [4] );
29 2.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff
30 2.6.6.2.5: Handoff Messages
31 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-37

1 3.6.6.1.1: Types of Handoff


2 3.6.6.2.2: Call Processing During Handoff
3 (See [1] );
4 2.1.3.1: Reverse CDMA Channel Signals
5 3.1.3.1: Forward CDMA Channel Signals

6 3.13.2 Method of Measurement


7 a. Configure base station #1 for RC4 or RC5. Configure base station #2 for RC1 or
8 RC2.
9 b. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.
10 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has an arbitrary pilot PN
11 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

12 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has an arbitrary pilot PN


13 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

14 • The AWGN source should be added to both Channels.


15 c. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.13.2-1.
16
17 Table 3.13.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2
18
19 d. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
20 e. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
21 f. Verify user data in both directions.
22 g. Send from base station #1 a General Handoff Direction Message, or Universal
23 Handoff Direction Message with proper parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to
24 initiate handoff from Channel 1 to Channel 2. Monitor calls and record the length of
25 any audio dropouts present on handoff.
26 h. Wait 20 seconds then send from base station #2 a General Handoff Direction
27 Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message with the proper parameters (refer
28 to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 2 to Channel 1.
29 i. Configure base station #1 for RC1 or RC2. Configure base station #2 for RC4 or RC5
30 and repeat steps b through h.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-38

1 j. Configure base station #1 for RC3. Configure base station #2 for RC4 and repeat
2 steps b through h.

3 k. Repeat steps a through j but with the following exception: Only base station 1 is used
4 for this test. The handoff messages are sent from base station 1 without changing the
5 active set, but changing the radio configuration. Thus the handoff messages simply
6 assign a new radio configuration from the same base station.
7 l. Verify that the handoff is performed as a soft handoff.
8

9 3.13.3 Minimum Standard


10 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoffs. Any audio dropouts
11 present shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 3.2.3-1.

12 3.14 Hard Handoff while in the Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate

13 3.14.1 Definition
14 This test verifies that if a hard handoff occurs while the mobile station is in the Waiting for
15 Mobile Station Answer Substate, the hard handoff will be completed successfully and the mobile
16 station shall enter the Conversation Substate on the new channel.
17 Traceabilities (see [4] unless otherwise noted)
18 2.6.4 Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State
19 2.6.4.3.2 Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate
20 2.6.4.4 Conversation Substate
21 2.6.6.2.5.1 Processing of the Forward Traffic Channel Handoff Messages
22 2.6.6.2.8 CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff
23 3.6.4.3.1 Waiting for Order Substate
24 3.6.6.2.2 Call Processing during Handoff
25 3.7.3.3.2.17 Extended Handoff Direction Message
26 3.7.3.3.2.31 General Handoff Direction Message
27 3.7.3.3.2.36 Universal Handoff Direction Message
28 Table D-1 Time Constants
29 3.1 Standard Service Option Number Assignments (see [17])
30 3.2 Proprietary Service Option Number Assignments (see [17])

31 3.14.2 Method of Measurement


32 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in figure 3.1.2-1 and set
33 the test parameters as specified in table 3.2.2-1
34 • Base station #1 is a CDMA base station with frequency ƒ1, PN offset P1
35 and is referred to as Channel 1.
36 • Base station #2 is a CDMA base station with frequency ƒ2, PN offset P2
37 and is referred to as Channel 2.
38 b. Ensure the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on Channel 1.
39 c. Page the mobile station with a supported service option.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-39

1 d. After receiving the Page Response Message, instruct the base station to send an
2 Extended Channel Assignment Message with the following parameters:
3
Field Value
ASSIGN_MODE '000' or '100'
BYPASS_ALERT_ANSWER '0'
4
5 e. While the mobile station is in the Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate (i.e.
6 ringing), instruct the base station to send an Extended Handoff Direction Message,
7 General Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message directing
8 the mobile station to Channel 2.
9 f. After the hard handoff has been completed and before T53m (65 seconds), has
10 expired direct the user to answer the call.
11 g. Verify the mobile station enters the Conversation Substate and user traffic is
12 present in both directions (i.e. audio).
13 h. End the call.
14 i. Repeat steps b through h using different service options and radio configurations
15 supported by the mobile station and base station.
16 j. Repeat steps b through i, changing Channel 2 to a band class that is different from
17 Channel 1 but is supported by the mobile station.

18 3.14.3 Minimum Standard


19 The hard handoff shall be completed while the mobile station is in the Waiting for Mobile
20 Station Answer Substate. After the handoff is completed, the mobile station shall enter the
21 Conversation Substate on the new channel and user traffic in both directions shall be present.

22 3.15 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to CDMA)

23 3.15.1 Definition
24 In an Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff test (also known as the Mobile Assisted Hard Handoff
25 test), when the mobile station is directed by the base station to perform a search on a
26 Candidate Frequency, the mobile station will search for a pilot in the Candidate Frequency
27 Neighbor Set. The mobile station will report back to the base station any pilot detected in the
28 Candidate Frequency Neighbor Set with a pilot Ec/Io above the value defined by CF_T_ADD.
29 The base station should then direct the mobile station to the Candidate Frequency and
30 completes the hard handoff.
31
32 Traceability [4]
33
34 2.6.6.2.5 Handoff Messages
35 2.6.6.2.8 CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
36 2.7.2.3.2.20 Candidate Frequency Search Report Message
37 3.6.6.2.2 Call Processing During Handoff

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-40

1 3.7.7.3.3.2.27 Candidate Frequency Search Request Message


2

3 3.15.2 Method of Measurement


4 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.4.2-1.
5 • The Forward Channel from base station #1 has a CDMA frequency assignment
6 F1 (any valid value), an arbitrary pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel
7 1.
8 • The Forward Channel from base station #2 has a CDMA frequency assignment
9 F2 (any valid value other than f1 in the same band class), an arbitrary pilot PN
10 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

11 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 3.15.2-1.


12
13 Table 3.15.2-1. Test Parameters for Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to CDMA)
14
Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2
Îor/Ioc dB 2.9 2.9

Pilot E c dB -7 -7
I or

Traffic E c dB -7 N/A
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Pilot E c dB -11.0 -11.0


I0

15
16 c. Reverse Link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links.
17 d. Set up a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
18 e. Send from base station #1 a Candidate Frequency Search Request Message to the
19 mobile station to set an explicit action time with the following parameters:
20

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-41

Parameters Value (Decimal)


USE_TIME 1 (use action time)
SEARCH_TYPE 1 (single search)
SEARCH_MODE 0 (CDMA)
CDMA_FREQ F2
SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH 31 (disabled)
SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH 31 (disabled)
CF_SRCH_WIN_N 8 (60 chips)
CF_T_ADD 28 (-14 dB)
NUM_PILOTS 1 (1 pilot)
CF_NGHBR_SRCH_MODE 0 (no search priorities or
search windows specified)
NGHBR_PN P2

1
2 f. Verify that the mobile station responds with a Candidate Frequency Search Report
3 Message.
4 g. Verify that base station #1 sends a General Handoff Direction Message, an Extended
5 Handoff Direction Message or a Universal Handoff Direction Message to initiate
6 handoff from base station #1 to base station #2.
7 h. Verify user data in both directions.

8 3.15.3 Minimum Standard


9 The mobile station and the base station shall successfully execute the handoff
10 transitions. Any audio dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in
11 Table 3.2.3-1.
12

13 3.16 Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (CDMA to AMPS)

14 3.16.1 Definition
15 In an Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff test (also known as the Mobile Assisted Hard Handoff
16 test), when the mobile station is directed by the base station to perform a search on a
17 Candidate Frequency, the mobile station will search for an analog channel in the Candidate
18 Frequency Analog Search Set and shall measure the mean input power on the analog
19 frequency. The mobile station will report back to the base station the signal strength of the
20 analog channel searched. The base station should then direct the mobile station to the Analog
21 Channel and completes the hard handoff.
22

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-42

1 Traceability [4]
2
3 2.6.6.2.5 Handoff Messages
4 2.6.6.2.8 CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
5 2.6.6.10.2 Candidate Frequency Analog Search Set
6 2.7.2.3.2.21 Candidate Frequency Search Report Message
7 3.6.6.2.2 Call Processing During Handoff
8 3.7.7.3.3.2.27 Candidate Frequency Search Request Message
9

10 3.16.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.
12 •The Forward Channel from base station #1 has a CDMA frequency assignment F1 (any
13 valid value), an arbitrary pilot PN offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

14 •The Forward Channel from base station #2 uses an AMPS frequency called Channel 2.
15 b. Set the test parameters as specified in Tables 3.16.2-1 and 3.16.2-2
16
17 Table 3.16.2-1. Test Parameters for Inter-Frequency Hard Handoff (Channel 1)
18
CDMA Parameter Unit Channel 1

Îor/Ioc dB 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -10

19 Table 3.16.2-2 Test Parameter for Inter-Frequency Handoff (Channel 2)


20
Analog Parameter Unit Channel 2
Voice Channel dBm -73
Co-Channel Interference dB -18
21
22
23 c. Reverse Link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links.
24 d. Set up a mobile station originated voice call on Channel 1.
25 e. Send from base station #1 a Candidate Frequency Search Request Message to the
26 mobile station to set an explicit action time with the following parameters:
27

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-43

Parameters Value (Decimal)


USE_TIME 1 (use action time)
SEARCH_TYPE 1 (single search)
SEARCH_MODE 1 (search for analog channels)
SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH 31 (disabled)
SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH 31 (disabled)
NUM_ANALOG_FREQS 1
ANALOG_FREQ Channel 2

1
2 e. Verify that the mobile station responds with a Candidate Frequency Search Report
3 Message.
4 f. Verify that base station #1 sends an Analog Handoff Direction Message to initiate
5 handoff from base station #1 to base station #2.
6 g. Verify audio in both directions.

7 3.16.3 Minimum Standard


8 The mobile station and the base station shall successfully execute the handoff
9 transitions. Any audio dropouts present shall not exceed the limits specified in
10 Table 3.2.3-1.
11

12 3.17 Hard Handoff Between Frequencies with Different Protocol Revisions

13 3.17.1 Definition
14 This test verifies the mobile station is able perform a hard handoff between base stations
15 supporting using different protocol revisions (P_REV).
16 Traceability: (See [4] );
17 2.6.6.1.1 Types of Handoff
18 2.6.6.2.5 Handoff Messages
19 2.6.6.2.8 CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
20 3.6.6.1.1 Types of Handoff
21 3.6.6.2.2 Call Processing During Handoff
22 3.7.3.3.2.31 General Handoff Direction Message
23 3.7.3.3.2.36 Universal Handoff Direction Message

24 3.17.2 Method of Measurement


25 a. Configure base station one and base station two with different protocol revisions.
26 b. Verify the mobile station supports the protocol revisions on each base station.
27 c. Setup test as shown in Figure 3.1.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 3-44

1 • The Forward Channel from base station one has an arbitrary pilot PN
2 offset index P1 and is called Channel 1.

3 • The Forward Channel from base station two has an arbitrary pilot PN
4 offset index P2 and is called Channel 2.

5 • The AWGN source should be on the frequency of Channel 2. (It is


6 advisable to achieve the maximum possible difference in frequency separation
7 between Channel 1 and Channel 2)
8 d. Set the test parameters as shown in Table 3.x.2-1.
9
10 Table 3.x.2-1 Hard Handoff Test Parameters

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dBm N/A -5

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz N/A -75


Pilot Ec/Io dB -7 -13.2
11
12 e. Set reverse link attenuation to balance forward and reverse links (approx. 90 dB).
13 f. Setup a mobile station originated call on Channel 1.
14 g. Verify user traffic in both directions.
15 h. Send a General Handoff Direction Message or Universal Handoff Direction Message with
16 proper parameters (refer to tables in Foreword) to initiate handoff from Channel 1 to
17 Channel 2.
18 i. Verify the P_REV in the General Handoff Direction Message or Universal Handoff
19 Direction Message sent from base station one is equal to the P_REV of base station two.
20 j. Verify the handoff is successful and user traffic is present in both directions.

21 3.17.3 Minimum Standard


22 The mobile station and base stations shall successfully execute the handoff.
23

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-1

1 4 POWER CONTROL TESTS


2 Table 4-1 lists power control tests.
3 Table 4-1 Power Control Tests

Test No. Title


4.1 Forward TCH Power Control
4.2 Mobile Station Response to Power Up Function (PUF) Message
4.3 Fast Forward Power Control (FFPC)

4 4.1 Forward Traffic Channel Power Control

5 4.1.1 Definition
6 This test verifies that the mobile station reports frame error rate statistics at specified intervals if
7 the base station enables periodic reporting, and verifies that the mobile station reports frame
8 error rate statistics when the frame error rate reaches a specified threshold if the base station
9 enables threshold reporting.
10 Traceability: (See [4] )
11 2.6.4.1.1 Forward Traffic Channel Power Control
12 2.7.2.3.2.6 Power Measurement Report Message
13 3.6.4.1.1 Forward Traffic Channel Power Control
14 3.7.3.3.2.10 Power Control Parameters Message
15 Applicability: Forward Link: RC 1 through RC 5; Reverse Link: RC 1 through RC 4

16 4.1.2 Method of Measurement


17 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 4.1.2-1.
18 b. Setup a mobile station originated call using the test parameters for Test 1 as
19 specified in Table 4.1.2-1.
20 c. Set the AWGN source power so the forward link average FER is between 0.5 and
21 1.0%.
22 d. Instruct the base station to send the Power Control Parameters Message to enable
23 the threshold reporting and disable the periodic reporting according to the base
24 station manufacturer's forward power control algorithm.
25
WR_THRESH_ENABLE 1’ (Enable threshold reporting)
WR_PERIOD_ENABLE 0’ (Disable periodic reporting)
26
27 e. Using Attenuator 1, alternately increase and decrease AWGN source output power
28 by 5 dB from the original power set in step c.
29 f. Monitor forward traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power increases and decreases
30 corresponding to noise power from the AWGN source.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-2

1 g. Monitor forward link FER at the mobile station.

2
3 Figure 4.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Forward TCH Power Control
4

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-3

1 Table 4.1.2-1 Test Parameters for Forward Power Control Tests

Test Forward Reverse Threshold/ Service Channels Forward


Number RC RC Periodic Option Link Power
[dBm/
1.23 MHz]

1 1 1 Threshold 2, 54, 55, or F-FCH -65


32798
2 1 1 Periodic 2, 54, 55, or F-FCH -65
32798
3 2 2 Threshold 9, 54, 55, or F-FCH -62
32799
4 2 2 Periodic 9, 54, 55, or F-FCH -62
32799
5 3 3 Threshold 54, or 55 F-FCH -65
6 3 3 Periodic 54, or 55 F-FCH -65
7 3 3 Threshold 54, or 55 F-DCCH -65
8 3 3 Periodic 54, or 55 F-DCCH -65
9 4 3 Threshold 54, or 55 F-FCH -65
10 4 3 Periodic 54, or 55 F-FCH -65
11 4 3 Threshold 54, or 55 F-DCCH -65
12 4 3 Periodic 54, or 55 F-DCCH -65
13 5 4 Threshold 54, or 55 F-FCH -62
14 5 4 Periodic 54, or 55 F-FCH -62
15 5 4 Threshold 54, or 55 F-DCCH -62
16 5 4 Periodic 54, or 55 F-DCCH -62
17 3 3 N/A 54, or 55 F-FCH/F-SCH -65
18 4 3 N/A 54, or 55 F-FCH/F-SCH -65
19 5 4 N/A 54, or 55 F-FCH/F-SCH -62
20 3 3 N/A 54, or 55 F-DCCH/F- -65
SCH
21 4 3 N/A 54, or 55 F-DCCH/F- -65
SCH
22 5 4 N/A 54, or 55 F-DCCH/F- -62
SCH

2 Note: All tests should be performed at full data rate or at a variable rate. Tests involving the
3 Forward Supplemental Channels should only include 1 Forward Supplemental
4 Channel.
5
6 h. Verify the MS to send the Power Measurement Report Message when the bad frames
7 received by the mobile station reaches the specified threshold.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-4

1 i. End the call.


2 j. Setup a mobile station originated call using the test parameters for Test 2 as
3 specified in Table 4.1.2-1.
4 k. Instruct the base station to send the Power Control Parameters Message to enable
5 the periodic reporting and disable the threshold reporting according to the base
6 station manufacturer's forward power control algorithm.
7
PWR_THRESH_ENABLE ‘0’ (Disable threshold reporting)
PWR_PERIOD_ENABLE ‘1’ (Enable periodic reporting)
8
9 l. Repeat the steps e through g.
10 m. Verify the mobile station sends the Power Measurement Report Message when the
11 total frames received by the mobile station reach the specified report period.
12 n. End the call.
13 o. Repeat steps b through n except for using the test parameters for Tests 3 to 16 as
14 specified in Table 4.1.2-1.
15 p. Repeat steps b through c except for using the test parameters for Test 17 to Test 22
16 as specified in Table 4.1.2-1.
17 q. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
18 Message including a Forward Supplemental Channel assignment and setting
19 FOR_SCH_FER_REP to ‘1’.
20 r. Repeat the steps e through g.
21 s. Verify the mobile station sends the Power Measurement Report Message at the end
22 of the burst.
23 t. End the call.

24 4.1.3 Minimum Standard


25 The base station should alternately increase and decrease the forward traffic channel power
26 according to the base station manufacturer's forward power control algorithm. Forward link FER
27 measured at the mobile station should be within the target value and the mobile station shall
28 report frame error rate statistics. There shall not be any dropped calls.

29 4.2 Mobile Station Response to Power Up Function (PUF) Message

30 4.2.1 Definition
31 This test verifies that both mobile station and base station which are capable of PUF feature
32 correct interpretation and functionality of the Power Up Function Message, Mobile Station
33 Reject Order Message, and the Power Up Function Completion Message.
34 Traceability: IS-2000;
35 [1] 2.1.2.2.2.4 Gated Output Power During a Serving Frequency PUF Probe
36 [1] 2.1.2.3.1 Estimated Open Loop Output Power

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-5

1 [1] 2.1.2.3.2 Closed Loop Output Power


2 [1] 2.1.3.1.10.3 Gating During a PUF Probe
3 [4] 2.6.4.1.7 Power Up Function (PUF)
4 [4] 3.7.3.3.2.29 Power Up Function Message
5 [4] 3.7.3.3.2.30 Power Up Function Completion Message
6 Applicability: RC 1 and greater, MOB_P_REV = 5 and greater

7 4.2.2 Method of Measurement


8 a. Connect the base station to the mobile station as shown in Figure 4.2.2-1.
9 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.2.2-1 Test 4.
10 c. Disable all forms of registration.
11 d. Disable power control.

12 4.2.2.1 Power Up Function at Nominal Power


13 a. Set values shown in Table 4.2.2.1-1 in the Power Up Function Message:
14
15 Table 4.2.2.1-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters, Nominal Power

PUF_INIT_PWR = 20 dB PUF_PWR_STEP = 2 dB
PUF_PULSE_SIZE = 17.5 ms PUF_SETUP_SIZE = 1.25 ms
PUF_INTERVAL = 50 frames (1 second) TOTAL_PUF_PROBES = 4
PUF_FREQ_INCL = 1 MAX_PWR_PUF = 2
PUF_CDMA_FREQ = {Target CDMA PUF_BAND_CLASS = {Serving CDMA band
frequency} class}
16
17 b. Setup a mobile station originated voice call.
18 c. Verify audio in both directions.
19 d. Send from the base station the Power Up Function Message of Table 4.2.2.1-1.
20 e. Note where the mobile transmit power level is before a PUF probe is sent by the
21 mobile station. After each PUF probe, ensure the mobile station returns to the initial
22 power level before the PUF probe was sent.
23 f. Monitor mobile station transmit power transitions to ensure the mobile station uses
24 PUF parameters (Figure 4.2.2.1-1) as sent to the mobile station in the Power Up
25 Function Message.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-6

Mobile Station Tx Power (dBm)


20
18
16
14
12
-8

1 2 3 4 5
Approximate Time (seconds)
1
2 Figure 4.2.2.1-1 Mobile station TX Power Response to Power Up Function Parameters,
3 Nominal Power
4
5 g. End the call.

6 4.2.2.2 PUF Probes Sent at Maximum Power


7 a. Set values for the Power Up Function Message as shown in Table 4.2.2.2-1
8
9 Table 4.2.2.2-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters, Maximum Power

PUF_INIT_PWR = 20 dB PUF_PWR_STEP = 10 dB
PUF_PULSE_SIZE = 17.5 ms PUF_SETUP_SIZE = 1.25 ms
PUF_INTERVAL = 50 frames (1 second) TOTAL_PUF_PROBES = 6
PUF_FREQ_INCL = 1 MAX_PWR_PUF = 2
PUF_CDMA_FREQ = {Target CDMA PUF_BAND_CLASS = {Serving CDMA band class}
frequency}
10
11 b. Setup a mobile station originated voice call.

12 c. Verify audio in both directions.


13 d. Send from the base station the Power Up Function Message of Table 4.2.2.2-1.
14 e. Note where the mobile transmit power level is before a PUF probe is sent by the
15 mobile station. After each PUF probe, ensure the mobile station returns to the initial
16 power level before the PUF probe was sent.
17 f. Monitor mobile station transmit power transitions to ensure the mobile station uses
18 PUF parameters until reaching its maximum output power. At this point, the mobile
19 station's transmit power for each successive probe will remain constant until the
20 maximum number of probes at maximum power have been sent (Figure 4.2.2.2-1).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-7

Mobile Station Tx Power (dBm)


max

22

12
-8

1 2 3 4 5
1
2 Figure 4.2.2.2-1 Mobile Station TX Power Response to Power-up Function Parameters,
3 Maximum Power
4 g. End call.

5 4.2.2.3 Processing of Power Up Function Completion Message


6 a. Set values in the Power Up Function Message as shown in Table 4.2.2.3-1.
7 b. Setup a mobile station originated voice call.
8 c. Verify audio in both directions.
9 d. Send from the base station the Power Up Function Message of Table 4.2.2.3-1.
10 e. Note where the mobile station transmit power level is before a PUF probe is sent by
11 the mobile station. After each PUF probe, ensure the mobile station returns to the
12 initial power level before the PUF probe was sent.
13 f. Before all of the PUF probes are sent from the mobile station, send from the base
14 station a Power Up Completion Message.
15
16 Table 4.2.2.3-1 Mobile Station Transmit Power Up Function Parameters

PUF_INIT_PWR = 20 dB PUF_PWR_STEP = 2 dB
PUF_PULSE_SIZE = 17.5 ms PUF_SETUP_SIZE = 1.25 ms
PUF_INTERVAL = 50 frames (1 second) TOTAL_PUF_PROBES = 4
PUF_FREQ_INCL = 1 MAX_PWR_PUF = 2
PUF_CDMA_FREQ = {Target CDMA PUF_BAND_CLASS = {Serving CDMA band class}
frequency}
17
18 g. Monitor mobile station transmit power transitions to ensure the mobile station uses
19 PUF parameters until receiving the Power Up Function Completion Message. The
20 mobile station should complete the current PUF probe then should stop
21 transmitting PUF probes.
22 h. End call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-8

1 4.2.3 Minimum Standard

2 4.2.3.1 Power Up Function at Nominal Power


3 The mobile station shall respond on the traffic channel to changes in the Power Up Function
4 Message. The mobile station shall send the maximum number of PUF probes specified in the
5 Power Up Function Message. Refer to Table 4.2.2.1-1

6 4.2.3.2 PUF Probes sent at Maximum Power


7 The mobile station shall respond on the traffic channel to changes in the Power Up Function
8 Message. The mobile station shall send the maximum number of PUF probes at maximum power
9 specified in the Power Up Function Message Refer to Table 4.2.2.2-1.

10 4.2.3.3 Processing Power Up Function Completion Message


11 The mobile station shall respond on the traffic channel to changes in the Power Up Function
12 Message. The mobile station shall finish the current PUF probe upon receiving the Power Up
13 Function Completion Message then shall not send PUF probes. Refer to Table 4.2.2.3-1

14 4.3 Fast Forward Power Control (FFPC)

15 4.3.1 FFPC using different values of FPC_MODE

16 4.3.1.1 Definition
17 The mobile station accomplishes fast forward power control by transmitting the Reverse Power
18 Control Subchannel to the base station on the Reverse Pilot Channel. The mobile station
19 determines the information to be sent to the base station through inner and outer closed loop
20 estimations. In outer loop estimation, the mobile station adjusts the Eb/Nt setpoints to the Eb/Nt
21 value necessary to achieve the target FER on the Forward Traffic Channel. In inner loop
22 estimation, the mobile station compares the received Eb/Nt to the setpoint and determines the
23 value of the power control bit to be sent to the base station. There are 16 Power Control Groups
24 per frame on the Reverse Power Control Subchannel. This test verifies that the mobile station
25 can process the various parameters in the Extended Channel Assignment Message, the Extended
26 Supplemental Channel Assignment Message, and the Service Connect Message.
27 Traceability:
28 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
29 [4] 2.6.6.2.5.1, 3.6.6.2.2.12, 3.7.3.3.2.37 Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
30 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
31 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message
32 Applicability: Forward Link: RC 1 through RC 5; Reverse Link: RC 1 through RC 4

33 4.3.1.2 FPC_MODE Information


34

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-9

1 Table 4.3.1.2-1 Reverse Power Control Subchannel Configurations

Reverse Power Control Subchannel Allocations


(Power Control Group Numbers)
FPC_MODE Primary Reverse Power Control Secondary Reverse Power
Subchannel Control Subchannel
‘000’ 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15 Not supported
‘001’ 0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15
‘010’ 1,5,9,13 0,2,3,4,6,7,8,10,11,12,14,15
2 '

3 4.3.1.3 FPC_MODE ‘000’; F-FCH Only

4 4.3.1.3.1 Method of Measurement


5 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1.

6
7 Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Fast Forward Power Control
8
9 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.3.1-4:
10
11 Table 4.3.1.3.1-4 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10

Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8


12

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-10

1 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 55 (Loopback Service
2 Option) or Service Option 54 (Markov Service Option).

3 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
4 the parameters set as follows:
5
ASSIGN_MODE = '100' GRANTED_MODE = '10'
FOR_RC = '00011' (RC 3) REV_RC = '00011' (RC 3)
CH_IND = '01' FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = '01000000' (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = '00010' (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = '00010000' (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = '10000000' (16 dB)
6
7 e. Ensure the base station sends the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
8 ‘0’.
9 f. Monitor the forward link FER at the mobile station.
10 g. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
11 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
12 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
13 h. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure the power changes corresponding to
14 noise power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power
15 increases and decreases if the noise power decreases.
16 i. Verify that the forward link FER on the FCH is remaining at the target value (i.e.
17 1%).
18 j. End the call at the mobile station.
19 k. Repeat steps a through j above except that FOR_RC is set to RC4 and REV_RC is set
20 to RC3 in step d.
21 l. Repeat steps a through j above except that FOR_RC is set to RC5 and REV_RC is set
22 to RC4 in step d .

23 4.3.1.4 FPC_MODE ‘000’; F-DCCH only

24 4.3.1.4.1 Method of Measurement


25 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1
26 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.4.1-4:
27

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-11

1 Table 4.3.1.4.1-4 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10

Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8


2
3 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
4 Option).
5 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
6 the parameters set as follows:
7
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
8
9 e. Ensure the base station sends the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
10 ‘0’.
11 f. Monitor the forward link FER at the mobile station.
12 g. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
13 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
14 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
15 h. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
16 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
17 decreases if the noise power decreases.
18 i. Verify that the forward link FER on DCCH is remaining in the target value (1%).
19 j. End the call at the mobile station.
20 k. Repeat steps a through i above except for setting FOR_RC to RC4 and REV_RC to
21 RC3 in step d.
22 l. Repeat steps a through i above except for setting FOR_RC to RC5 and REV_RC to
23 RC4 in step d.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-12

1 4.3.1.5 FPC_MODE ‘001’; F-FCH and F-SCH

2 4.3.1.5.1 Method of Measurement

3 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1


4
5
6 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.5.1-5:
7
8 Table 4.3.1.5.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10

Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8


9
10 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
11 Option).
12 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
13 the parameters set as follows:
14
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
15
16 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
17 set as follows:
18
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘001’
19
20 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
21 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
22 Message and set the power control related fields as stated in follows:
23

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-13

FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)


FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘001’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘00100’ (5%)
1
2 g. Monitor the forward link FER on FCH and SCH (during the burst assignment) at the
3 mobile station.
4 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
5 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
6 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
7 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
8 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
9 decreases if the noise power decreases.
10 j. Verify that the forward link FERs on FCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
11 remaining in the target value.
12 k. End the call at the mobile station.
13 l. Repeat steps a through k above except that FOR_RC is set to RC4 and REV_RC is
14 set to RC3 in step d.
15 m. Repeat steps h through k above except that FOR_RC is set to RC5 and REV_RC is
16 set to RC4 in step d.

17 4.3.1.6 FPC_MODE ‘000’ without F-SCH Active and FPC_MODE ‘001’ with F-SCH Active; F-
18 DCCH and F-SCH

19 4.3.1.6.1 Method of Measurement


20 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1.
21 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.6.1-5:
22
23 Table 4.3.1.6.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10

Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8


24
25 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
26 Option).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-14

1 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
2 the parameters set as follows:
3
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
4
5 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
6 ‘0’.
7 f. Instruct the base station to download the SCH configuration and assign a Forward
8 Supplemental Channel using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
9 Message and set the power control related information as follows:
10
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘001’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
11
12 g. Monitor the forward link FER on both F-DCCH and F-SCH (during SCH assignment)
13 at the mobile station.
14 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
15 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
16 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
17 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
18 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
19 decreases if the noise power decreases.

20 j. Verify that the forward link FER on DCCH and SCH (during SCH assignment)
21 remains at the target value.
22 k. End the call at the mobile station.

23 l. Repeat steps a through k above except that FOR_RC is set to RC4 and REV_RC is
24 set to RC3 in step d.
25 m. Repeat steps a through k above except that the FOR_RC is set to RC5 and REV_RC
26 is set to RC4 in step d.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-15

1 4.3.1.7 FPC_MODE ‘000’ without F-SCH Active and FPC_MODE ‘010’ with F-SCH Active; F-
2 FCH and F-SCH

3 4.3.1.7.1 Method of Measurement


4 Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1
5 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.7.1-5:
6
7 Table 4.3.1.7.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10

Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8


8
9 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
10 Option).
11 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
12 the parameters set as follows:
13
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
14
15 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
16 ‘0’.
17 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
18 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
19 Message with power control related parameters set as follows:
20

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-16

FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)


FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘010’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)

1 g. Monitor the forward link FER on both FCH and SCH (during the SCH assignment)
2 at the mobile station.
3 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
4 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
5 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
6 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
7 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
8 decreases if the noise power decreases.
9 j. Verify that the forward link FERs on FCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
10 remaining in the target value.
11 k. End the call at the mobile station.
12 l. Repeat steps a through k above except for step d to set FOR_RC to RC4 and
13 REV_RC to RC3.
14 m. Repeat steps a through k above except for step d to set FOR_RC to RC5 and
15 REV_RC to RC4.

16 4.3.1.8 FPC_MODE ‘010’; F-DCCH and F-SCH

17 4.3.1.8.1 Method of Measurement


18 Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1
19 Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.8.1-5:
20
21 Table 4.3.1.8.1-5 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10
22
23 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
24 Option).
25 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
26 the parameters set as follows.
27

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-17

ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’


FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
1
2 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
3 set as follows:
4
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘1’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘010’
5
6 f. Instruct the base station to send SCH configuration and assign a Forward
7 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
8 Message with power control related parameters set as follows:
9
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘010’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
10
11 g. Monitor forward link FER on both F-DCCH and F-SCH (during SCH burst
12 assignment) at the mobile station.
13 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
14 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
15 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
16 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
17 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
18 decreases if the noise power decreases.
19 j. Verify that the forward link FERs on the DCCH and SCH (during SCH assignment)
20 are remaining in the target value.

21 k. End the call at the mobile station.


22 l. Repeat steps a through k above except for step d to set FOR_RC to RC4 and
23 REV_RC to 3.
24 m. Repeat steps a through k above except for step d to set FOR_RC to RC5 and
25 REV_RC to 4.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-18

1 4.3.1.9 Minimum Standard


2 For all tests, the call shall not drop, the DCCH FER shall remain at 1%±0.5% and the SCH FER
3 shall remain at 5%±2.5%.

4 4.3.2 Outer Loop Report

5 4.3.2.1 Definition
6 This test verifies that the mobile station shall send the Outer Loop Report Message if the Outer
7 Loop Report Request Order is received.
8 Traceability:
9 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
10 [4] 2.6.6.2.5.1, 3.6.6.2.2.12, 3.7.3.3.2.37 Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
11 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
12 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message
13 [4] 2.6.4.1.1, 2.7.2.3.2.223.7.3.3.2.25 Outer Loop Report Message
14 Applicability: Forward Link: RC 1 through RC 5; Reverse Link: RC 1 through RC 4

15 4.3.2.2 Method of Measurement


16 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1
17 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.2.2-1:
18
19 Table 4.3.2.2-1 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Value

Pilot E c dB -7
I or

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75


Ior/Ioc dB 10
Avg. Mobile Transmit Power dB -8
20
21 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
22 Option).
23 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
24 the parameters set as follows:
25

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-19

ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’


FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
1
2 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
3 ‘0’.

4 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
5 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
6 Message with power control related parameters set as follows:
7
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘000’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
8
9 g. Monitor the forward link FER on both FCH and SCH (during the SCH assignment)
10 at the mobile station.
11 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
12 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
13 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
14 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
15 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
16 decreases if the noise power decreases.
17 j. During the F-SCH assignment, instruct the base station to send Outer Loop Report
18 Request Order.

19 k. Verify the mobile station sends the Outer Loop Report Message and this message
20 contains FPC_FCH_CURR_SETPT and FPC_SCH_CURR_SETPT.
21 l. End the call at the mobile station.
22 m. Repeat steps a through m above except for the following steps:
23 n. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
24 the parameters set as follows:
25

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-20

ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’


FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’
(8 dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1% ) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’
(2 dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT =
‘10000000’ (16 dB)
1
2 o. Monitor the forward link FER on both DCCH and SCH (during the SCH assignment
3 at the mobile station.
4 p. Verify the mobile station sends the Outer Loop Report Message and this message
5 contains FPC_DCCH_CURR_SETPT and FPC_SCH_CURR_SETPT.

6 4.3.2.3 Minimum Requirement


7 The mobile station shall send the Outer Loop Report Message if the Outer Loop Report Request
8 Order is received. The FPC current setpoint reported by the mobile station shall be in the range
9 of the minimum setpoint and the maximum setpoint.
10

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-21

1 4.3.3 Fast Forward Power Control (FFPC) in Soft Handoff

2 4.3.3.1 Definition
3 The mobile station accomplishes fast forward power control by transmitting the Reverse Power
4 Control Subchannel to the base station on the Reverse Pilot Channel. The mobile station
5 determines the information to send to the base station through inner and outer closed loop
6 estimations. In outer loop estimation, the mobile station adjusts the Eb/Nt setpoints to the Eb/Nt
7 value necessary to achieve the target FER on the Forward Traffic Channel. In inner loop
8 estimation, the mobile station compares the received Eb/Nt to the setpoint and determines the
9 value of the power control bit to be sent to the base station. This test verifies that the mobile
10 station can perform FFPC while in soft handoff. This test also verifies that the mobile station can
11 process the various parameters in the Extended Channel Assignment Message, the Extended
12 Supplemental Channel Assignment Message, the Universal Handoff Direction Message, and the
13 Service Connect Message.
14 Traceability:
15 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
16 [4] 2.6.6.2.5.1, 3.6.6.2.2.12, 3.7.3.3.2.37 Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
17 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
18 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message
19 Applicability: Forward Link: RC 1 through RC 5; Reverse Link: RC 1 through RC 4

20 4.3.3.2 F-FCH in SHO and F-SCH not in SHO; FPC_MODE = 001

21 4.3.3.2.1 Method of Measurement


22 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 4.3.3.2.1-1.
23 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.3.3.1-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-22

1
2 Figure 4.3.3.2. 1-1 Functional Setup for Testing FFPC in Handoff
3
4 Table 4.3.3.2.1-1 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Base station #1 Base station #2


Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Ior/Ioc dB 10 10

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10.2 -20.2


5
6 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
7 Option) on Base station #1.

8 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
9 the parameters set as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-23

1
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
2
3 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
4 set as follows:
5
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘001’
6
7 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
8 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
9 Message with the power control related parameters set as follows:
10
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘001’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
11
12 g. Raise the level of Base station #2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds
13 after each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength
14 Measurement Message.
15 h. Instruct the base station to send the Universal Handoff Direction Message during F-
16 SCH assignment with the parameters set as follows:
17
CH_IND = ‘101’ (FCH and Continuous NUM_PILOTS = ‘010’
Reverse Pilot)
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #1} PILOT_INCL = ‘1’
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #2} PILOT_INCL = ‘0’
18
19 i. Verify there are no forward supplemental channels transmitting on Base station #2.
20 j. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 without dropping the call.
21

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-24

1 Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 Test Parameters for Fast Forward Power Control

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2


Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7
Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7
Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75
Pilot Ec/Io dB -11.8 -11.8
2
3 k. Monitor the forward link FER on both F-FCH and F-SCH (during F-SCH assignment)
4 at the mobile station.
5 l. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
6 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
7 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
8 m. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
9 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
10 decreases if the noise power decreases.
11 n. Verify that the forward link FERs on FCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
12 remaining in the target value.
13 o. End the call at the mobile station.

14 4.3.3.3 F-FCH in SHO and F-SCH not in SHO; FPC_MODE = ‘010’

15 4.3.3.3.1 Method of Measurement


16 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 4.3.3.2.1-1.
17 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.3.2.1-1.
18 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
19 Option) with 100% frame activity on Base station #1.
20 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
21 the parameters set as follows:
22
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
23
24 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
25 set as follows:
26

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-25

FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’


FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘010’
1
2 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
3 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
4 Message with the power control related parameters set as follows:
5
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘010’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
6
7 g. Raise the level of Base station #2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds
8 after each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength
9 Measurement Message.
10 h. Instruct the base station to send the Universal Handoff Direction Message during F-
11 SCH assignment with parameters set as follows:
12
CH_IND = ‘101’ (FCH and Continuous NUM_PILOTS = ‘010’
Reverse Pilot)
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #1} PILOT_INCL = ‘1’
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #2} PILOT_INCL = ‘0’
13
14 i. Verify there are no forward supplemental channels running on Base station #2.
15 j. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 without dropping the call.
16
17 k. Monitor the forward link FER on both F-FCH and F-SCH (during F-SCH assignment)
18 at the mobile station.
19 l. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
20 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
21 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
22 m. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
23 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
24 decreases if the noise power decreases.
25 n. Verify that the forward link FERs on FCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
26 remaining in the target value.
27 o. End the call at the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-26

1 4.3.3.4 F-DCCH in SHO and F-SCH not in SHO; FPC_MODE = ‘001’

2 4.3.3.4.1 Method of Measurement

3 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 4.3.2.2.1-1.


4 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.2.2.1-1.
5 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
6 Option) with 100% frame activity on Base station #1.
7 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
8 the parameters set as follows:
9
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8
dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1% ) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2
dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’
(16 dB)
10
11 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
12 set as follows:
13
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘1’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘001’
14
15 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
16 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
17 Message with the power control related parameters set as follows:
18
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘001’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
19
20 g. Raise the level of Base Station #2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds
21 after each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength
22 Measurement Message.
23 h. Instruct the base station to send the Universal Handoff Direction Message during F-
24 SCH assignment with parameters set as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-27

1
CH_IND = ‘110’ (DCCH and Continuous NUM_PILOTS = ‘010’
Reverse Pilot)
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #1} PILOT_INCL = ‘1’
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #2} PILOT_INCL = ‘0’
2
3 i. Verify there are no forward supplemental channels running on Base Station #2.
4 j. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 without dropping the call.
5 k. Monitor the forward link FER on both F-FCH and F-SCH (during F-SCH assignment)
6 at the mobile station.
7 l. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
8 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
9 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
10 m. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
11 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
12 decreases if the noise power decreases.
13 n. Verify that the forward link FERs on DCCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
14 remaining in the target value.

15 o. End the call at the mobile station.

16 4.3.3.5 F-DCCH in SHO and F-SCH not in SHO; FPC_MODE = ‘010’

17 4.3.3.5.1 Method of Measurement


18 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 4.3.3.2.1-1.
19 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.3.2.1-1.
20 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
21 Option) with 100% frame activity on Base station #1.
22 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
23 the parameters set as follows:
24
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = 10
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8
dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1% ) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2
dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’
(16 dB)
25

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-28

1 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
2 set as follows:
3
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘010’
4
5 f. Instruct the base station to download SCH configuration and assign a Forward
6 Supplemental Channel by using the Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment
7 Message with the power control related parameters set as follows:
8
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_MODE_SCH = ‘010’ FPC_SCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_SCH_INIT_SETPT_OP = ‘0’ FPC_SCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_SCH_FER = ‘01010’ (5%)
9
10 g. Raise the level of Base Station #2 in steps of 1 dB with a dwell time of 5 seconds
11 after each step until the mobile station has generated the Pilot Strength
12 Measurement Message.
13 h. Instruct the base station to send the Universal Handoff Direction Message during F-
14 SCH assignment with parameters set as follows:
15
CH_IND = ‘110’ (FCH and Continuous NUM_PILOTS = ‘010’
Reverse Pilot)
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #1} PILOT_INCL = ‘1’
For PILOT_PN = {Base station #2} PILOT_INCL = ‘0’
16
17 i. Verify there are no forward supplemental channels running on Base station #2.
18 j. Set the test parameters as specified in Table 4.3.3.2.1-2 without dropping the call.
19 k. Monitor the forward link FER on both F-DCCH and F-SCH (during F-SCH
20 assignment) at the mobile station.
21 l. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 15 dBm/1.23 MHz
22 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
23 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
24 m. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
25 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
26 decreases if the noise power decreases.
27 n. Verify that the forward link FERs on DCCH and SCH (during SCH assignment) are
28 remaining in the target value.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-29

1 o. End the call at the mobile station.

2 4.3.3.6 Minimum Standard


3 For all tests, the call shall not drop and the FER shall remain in the target value.

4 4.3.4 Change FPC_MODE During a Call

5 4.3.4.1 Definition
6 The mobile station accomplishes fast forward power control by transmitting the power control
7 subchannel to the base station on the R-PICH. The mobile station determines the information to
8 send to the base station through inner and outer closed loop estimations. In outer loop estimation,
9 the mobile station adjusts the Eb/Nt setpoints to the Eb/Nt value necessary to achieve the target
10 FER on the Forward Traffic Channel.
11 In inner loop estimation, the mobile station compares the received Eb/Nt to the setpoint and
12 determines the value of the power control bit to be sent to the base station. This test verifies that
13 the mobile station can process a change in FPC_MODE delivered by the Power Control
14 Message.
15 Traceability:
16 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
17 [4] 2.6.4.1.1.3, 3.7.3.3.2.25 Power Control Message
18 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
19 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message
20 Applicability: RC 3 and greater

21 4.3.4.2 Method of Measurement


22 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1
23 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.5.1-5:
24 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
25 Option) with 100% frame activity.
26 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
27 the parameters set as follows:
28
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB)
29
30 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
31 ‘0’.
32 f. Monitor forward link FER at the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-30

1 g. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 5 dBm/1.23 MHz
2 at the AWGN source.

3 h. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power increases corresponding to noise
4 power from the AWGN source.
5 i. Instruct the base station send the Power Control Message with the parameters set
6 as follows:
7
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_MODE = ‘010’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘1’
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00100’ (2%) PWR_CNTL_STEP = ‘’001’ (0.5 dB)
FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB) FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB)
FPC_OLPC_DCCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_DCCH_MIN_SEPT = N/A FPC_DCCH_MAX_SEPT = N/A
FPC_OLPC_SCH_M_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_SCH_M_FER = ‘00010’ (1%)
FPC_MIN_SCH_M_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 FPC_MAX_SCH_M_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16
dB) dB)
NUM_SUP = 0
8
9 j. Monitor forward link FER at the mobile station.
10 k. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 5 dBm/1.23 MHz
11 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
12 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
13 l. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
14 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
15 decreases if the noise power decreases.
16 m. Verify that the forward link FER on FCH is remaining in the target value.
17 n. End the call at the mobile station.

18 4.3.4.3 Minimum Standard


19 The call shall not drop and the FCH FER shall remain at 1%±0.5%.

20 4.3.5 R-PICH in Gated Transmission Mode

21 4.3.5.1 Gating with the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel

22 4.3.5.1.1 Definition
23 The mobile station accomplishes fast forward power control by transmitting the power control
24 subchannel to the base station on the R-PICH. The power control subchannel can either be gated
25 (either at a rate of ½ or ¼) or not gated (a bit is transmitted on every PCG). Gating occurs only
26 when the Forward Dedicated Control Channel and the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel are
27 assigned and when there are no transmissions on the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel. This

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-31

1 test verifies that the mobile station can operate in the various gating transmission modes
2 specified in the Service Connect Message.

3 Figure 4.3.5.1.1-1 Reverse Pilot Gating with no Transmission


4 on the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel [1] 2.1.3.2.3

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-32

1 Figure 4.3.5.1.1-2 Reverse Pilot Gating during


2 Reverse Dedicated Control Channel Transmission [1] 2.1.3.2.3

3 Traceability:
4 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
5 [1] 2.1.3.2 Reverse Pilot Channel
6 [4] 2.6.4.1.1.3, 3.7.3.3.2.25 Power Control Message
7 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
8 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message

9 Applicability: Forward Link: RC 1 through RC 5; Reverse Link: RC 1 through RC 4

10 4.3.5.1.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1.

12 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.2.1-4.


13 c. Setup a mobile station originated data call using Service Option 33.
14 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message has the
15 parameters set as follows:
16
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘10’ FPC_DCCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8
dB)
FPC_DCCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1% ) FPC_DCCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2
dB)
FPC_DCCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’
(16 dB)
17

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-33

1 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message has the parameters
2 set as follows:
3
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_DCCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘000’
GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘1’ PILOT_GATE_RATE = ‘01’ (gating at ½)
4
5 f. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Release Message with CH_IND set to
6 ‘100’.
7 g. Do not have any transmissions on the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel.
8 h. Instruct the base station to send a sufficient number of In-Traffic System Parameters
9 Messages with the same system configurations and without requiring the
10 acknowledgment on the reverse link DCCH so that the mobile station can measure
11 forward FER.
12 i. Monitor forward link FER at the mobile station.
13 j. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 5 dBm/1.23 MHz
14 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
15 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
16 k. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
17 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
18 decreases if the noise power decreases.
19 l. Verify that the reverse Pilot Channel is gated at the specified rate and the forward
20 link FER on DCCH is remaining in the target value
21 m. Instruct the mobile station to send the Data Burst Message on the Reverse
22 Dedicated Control Channel.

23 n. Monitor the forward link FER at mobile station.


24 o. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 5 dBm/1.23 MHz
25 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
26 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
27 p. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
28 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
29 decreases if the noise power decreases.
30 q. Verify that the reverse Pilot Channel is gated at the target rate if no transmissions
31 are on the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel and the reverse Pilot Channel is not
32 gated if there are transmissions on the Reverse Dedicated Control Channel.
33 r. Verify that the forward link FER on DCCH is remaining in the target value.
34 s. End the call at the mobile station. Repeat steps a through s above except for step f
35 to set PILOT_GATE_RATE to ‘10’ (gating at ¼).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-34

1 4.3.5.2 Gating with the Reverse Fundamental Channel

2 4.3.5.2.1 Definition
3 The mobile station accomplishes fast forward power control by transmitting the power control
4 subchannel to the base station on the R-PICH. The power control subchannel can either be gated
5 or not gated. The R-FCH may be gated when no other Reverse Traffic Channel is assigned and
6 the data rate is 1500 bps for RC 3 and RC5 or 1800 bps for RC4. When the R-FCH is operated in
7 the gated mode and is at a data rate of 1500 bps for RC 3 and RC 5 or 1800bps for RC 4, the R-
8 PICH shall have a transmission duty cycle of 50%. The R-PICH shall be transmitted in power
9 control groups 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15, and shall not be transmitted in power control groups
10 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, and 13.
11

12
13 Figure 4.3.5.2.1-1 Gating with the R-FCH
14 Traceability:
15 [1] 2.1.3.1.11 Reverse Power Control Subchannel
16 [1] 2.1.3.2 Reverse Pilot Channel
17 [1] 2.1.3.7.8 Reverse Fundamental Channel
18 [4] 2.6.4.1.1.3, 3.7.3.3.2.25 Power Control Message
19 [4] 2.6.6.2.5.1, 3.6.6.2.2.12, 3.7.3.3.2.37 Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
20 [4] 2.6.2.4, 2.6.3.3, 2.6.3.5, 3.6.3.3, 3.6.3.5, 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message
21 [4] 2.6.4.1.2, 2.6.4.1.2.2, 3.7.3.3.2.20, 3.7.5, 3.7.5.7, 3.7.5.20 Service Connect Message

22 Applicability: RC 3 and greater

23 4.3.5.2.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Connect base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1.
25 b. Set power levels as stated in Table 4.3.1.3.1-4.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-35

1 c. Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 32 (Test Data Service
2 Option) with rate 1500 bps only and set the REV_FCH_GATING_REQ field to ‘1’ in
3 the Origination Message.
4 d. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message has the
5 parameters set as follows and set the REV_PWR_CNTL_DELAY field according to the
6 base station’s implementation.
7
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’ FPC_FCH_INIT_SETPT = ‘01000000’ (8 dB)
FPC_FCH_FER = ‘00010’ (1%) FPC_FCH_MIN_SETPT = ‘00010000’ (2 dB)
FPC_FCH_MAX_SETPT = ‘10000000’ (16 dB) REV_FCH_GATING_MODE = ‘1’
REV_PWR_CNTL_DELAY_INCL = ‘1’
8
9 e. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with FPC_INCL set to
10 ‘0’.
11 f. Ensure the Reverse Fundamental Channel is transmitted at 1/8 rate.
12 g. Monitor forward link FER at the mobile station.
13 h. Increase Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second for a total of 5 dBm/1.23 MHz
14 at the AWGN source and then decrease Ioc in 1 dBm/1.23 MHz steps every second
15 for a total of 20 dBm/1.23 MHz at the AWGN source.
16 i. Monitor traffic channel Ec/Ior and ensure power changes corresponding to noise
17 power from the AWGN source. The power increases if the noise power increases and
18 decreases if the noise power decreases.
19 j. Verify the Reverse Fundamental Channel is in gated mode and the Reverse Pilot
20 Channel has a transmission duty cycle of 50%.
21 k. Verify that the forward link FER on FCH is remaining in the target value.
22 l. End the call at the mobile station.
23 m. Repeat steps a through l except for the step d to set FOR_RC to 4 and REV_RC to 4.

24 4.3.5.3 Minimum Standard


25 For all tests, the call shall not drop and the FCH FER shall remain at 1%±0.5%.

26 4.3.6 Forward Power Control With EIB While Transmitting Frames on the Forward
27 Fundamental Channel

28 4.3.6.1.1 Definition
29 This test shall be performed on the Forward Fundamental Channel with FPC_MODE equal to
30 ‘011’. The mobile station shall set the EIB to ‘0’ in the second transmitted frame following the

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-36

1 detection of a good 20ms frame on the Forward Fundamental Channel. Otherwise the mobile
2 station shall set the EIB to ‘1’ in the second transmitted frame.
3 Traceabilities:
4 [1] 2.1.3.1.10.1 Reverse Power Control Subchannel Structure
5 [1] 2.2.2.2 Erasure Indicator Bit and Quality Indicator Bit
6 [4] 2.6.4.1.1 Forward Traffic Channel Power Control
7 [4] 3.7.2.3.2.21 Extended Channel Assignment Message

8 4.3.6.1.2 Method of Measurement


9 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 4.3.1.3.1-1.
10 b. Set power ratios and levels as specified in Table 4.3.6.1.2-3.
11
12 Table 4.3.6.1.2-3 Test Parameters for EIB test

Parameter Unit Channel 1


Îor/Ioc dB 0

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -55


13
14 c. The Reverse Link attenuation should be set to balance the forward and reverse links
15 (approximately 90 dB).
16 d. Setup a mobile station originated voice call.
17 e. Instruct the base station to send the Extended Channel Assignment Message with
18 the parameters set as follows:
19
ASSIGN_MODE = ‘000’ or ‘100’ GRANTED_MODE = ‘10’
FOR_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3) REV_RC = ‘00011’ (RC 3)
CH_IND = ‘01’
20
21 f. Instruct the base station to send the Service Connect Message with the parameters
22 set as follows:
23
FPC_INCL = ‘1’ FPC_OLPC_FCH_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_PRI_CHAN = ‘0’ GATING_RATE_INCL = ‘0’
FPC_MODE = ‘011’
24
25 g. From the base station, send a sequence of good and bad frames (50 frames or more)
26 to the mobile station on the Forward Fundamental Channel (e.g. alternating good
27 and bad 20ms frames).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-37

1 h. Check the received EIB at the base station against the corresponding frames
2 received at the mobile station.

3 i. End the call.


4 j. Repeat steps a through k except for the step d to set REV_RC to 3 and FOR_RC to 4.
5 k. Repeat steps a through k except for the step d to set REV_RC to 4 and FOR_RC to 5.

6 4.3.6.1.3 Minimum Standard


7 The EIB received at the base station shall follow the frame pattern sent from the base station to
8 the mobile station (i.e. a ‘0’ for a good frame and a ‘1’ for a bad frame).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-1

1
2
3

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 4-2

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-1

1 5 REGISTRATION TESTS
2 Table 5-1 lists registration tests.
3 Table 5-1 Registration Tests

Test No. Title


5.1 Power-up Registration
5.2 Power-down Registration
5.3 Timer-Based Registration
5.4 Distance-Based Registration
5.5 Zone-Based Registration
5.6 Parameter-Change Registration
5.7 Registration Under Various Settings of MOB_TERM

4 Note: Unless otherwise noted, turn off all forms of registration, and set MAX_SLOT_CYCLE to
5 zero prior to beginning any Section 5 test.

6 5.1 Power-Up Registration

7 5.1.1 Definition
8 The mobile station maintains a power-up/initialization timer (T57M) (20 seconds). When the
9 timer is active, registration is not attempted.
10 Traceability: (See [4] );
11 2.6.5.1.1: Power-Up Registration
12 2.6.5.5.1.3: Entering the Mobile Station Idle State
13 2.6.5.5.2.1: Idle Registration Procedures
14 2.7.1.3.2.1: Registration Message
15 3.6.5: Registration
16 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

17 5.1.2 Method of Measurement

18 5.1.2.1 Power-up Registration Disabled


19 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Disable power-up registration (set
20 POWER_UP_REG = 0 in the System Parameters Message).

21 b. Power on the mobile station.


22 c. Verify the mobile station does not attempt power-up registration for at least 1
23 minute after the mobile station enters the Mobile Station Idle State.
24 d. Power down the mobile station.
25

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-2

1
2 Figure 5.1.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Power-up Registration

3 5.1.2.2 Power-up Registration Enabled


4 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Enable
5 power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
6 Message).
7 b. Power on the mobile station.
8 c. Verify the mobile station performs power-up registration no sooner than 20 seconds
9 (T57M) after entering Mobile Station Idle State.

10 d. Setup a mobile station terminated call.


11 e. Verify user data in both directions.
12 e. Power down the mobile station.

13 5.1.3 Minimum Standard

14 5.1.3.1 Power-up Registration Disabled


15 Power-up registration shall not occur.

16 5.1.3.2 Power-up Registration Enabled


17 The mobile station shall perform the registration process when it is powered on and after the
18 power/initialization timer has expired.

19 5.2 Power-Down Registration

20 5.2.1 Definition
21 The mobile station shall not perform power-down registration if it has not previously registered
22 in the system corresponding to its current SIDs and NIDs. Registration can be enabled or
23 disabled.
24 Traceability: (See [4] );
25 2.6.5.1.1 Power-Up Registration
26 2.6.5.1.2: Power-Down Registration

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-3

1 3.6.5: Registration
2 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

3 5.2.2 Method of Measurement

4 5.2.2.1 Power-down Registration Disabled


5 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Enable power-up registration (set
6 POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters Message).
7 b. Disable power-down registration (set POWER_DOWN_REG = 0 in the Systems
8 Parameters Message).
9 c. Power on the mobile station.
10 d. Verify the mobile station performs a power-up registration.
11 e. Power down the mobile station.
12 f. Verify power-down registration does not occur.

13 5.2.2.2 Power-down Registration of a Currently Registered Mobile Station


14 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Enable
15 power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
16 Message).
17 b. Enable power-down registration (set POWER_DOWN_REG = 1 in the Systems
18 Parameters Message).
19 c. Power on the mobile station.
20 d. Verify power-up registration occurs.
21 e. Power down the mobile station.
22 f. Verify power-down registration occurs.

23 5.2.2.3 Power-down Registration of an Unregistered Mobile Station in New


24 System/Network
25 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1
26 b. Power on the mobile station.
27 c. Verify power-up registration occurs.
28 d. Disable all forms of registration.
29 e. Enable power-down registration (set POWER_DOWN_REG = 1 in the Systems
30 Parameters Message).
31 f. Change the SID/NID in the base station to a new SID/NID.
32 g. Verify the mobile station does not register on the new SID/NID.
33 h. Power down the mobile station.
34 i. Verify power-down registration does not occur.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-4

1 5.2.3 Minimum Standard

2 5.2.3.1 Power-down Registration Disabled


3 Power-down registration shall not occur.

4 5.2.3.2 Power-down Registration of a Currently Registered Mobile Station


5 The mobile station shall perform power-down registration in a system/network where it is
6 currently registered.

7 5.2.3.3 Power-down Registration of an Unregistered Mobile Station in a New System/Network


8 Power-down registration shall not occur in a system/network where the mobile station is not
9 currently registered.

10 5.3 Timer-Based Registration

11 5.3.1 Definition
12 Timer-based registration causes the mobile station to register at regular intervals controlled by
13 the base station System Parameters Message REG_PRD field. Registration can be enabled or
14 disabled. The registration interval is computed from the REG_PRD field using the following
15 equation:
 REG _ PRD 

 

 4 
16 Registration interval = REG_COUNT_MAXs x .08 seconds = 2 x .08 seconds
17 Traceability: (See [4] );
18 2.6.5.1.2: Power-Down Registration
19 2.6.5.1.3: Timer-Based Registration
20 3.6.5: Registration
21 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

22 5.3.2 Method of Measurement

23 5.3.2.1 Timer-based Registration Disabled


24 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Disable timer-based registration
25 (set REG_PRD = 0 in the Systems Parameters Message).
26 b. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
27 Message).
28 c. Power on the mobile station.
29 d. Verify power-up registration occurs.
30 e. Verify the mobile station does not perform timer-based registration.
31 f. Power down the mobile station.

32 5.3.2.2 Lowest Timer Value


33 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Disable power-up registration
34 (set POWER_UP_REG = 0 in the Systems Parameters Message).
35 b. Set the value of REG_PRD to 29 (12.16 seconds).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-5

1 c. Power on the mobile station.


2 d. Verify timer-based registration occurs.

3 e. Setup a mobile station terminated call.


4 f. Verify user data in both directions.
5 g. Power down the mobile station.

6 5.3.2.3 Mid-range Timer Value


7 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1. Disable power-up registration
8 (set POWER_UP_REG = 0 in the Systems Parameters Message).

9 b. Set the value of REG_PRD to 38 (57.93 seconds).


10 c. Power on the mobile station.
11 d. Verify timer-based registration occurs.
12 e. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
13 f. Verify user data in both directions.
14 g. Power down the mobile station.

15 5.3.3 Minimum Standard

16 5.3.3.1 Timer-based Registration Disabled


17 Timer-based registration shall not occur.

18 5.3.3.2 Lowest Timer Value


19 The mobile station shall perform timer-based registration at the interval specified by the
20 REG_PRD value.

21 5.3.3.3 Mid-Range Timer Value


22 The mobile station shall perform time-based registration at the interval specified by the
23 REG_PRD value.

24 5.4 Distance-Based Registration

25 5.4.1 Definition
26 Distance-based registration causes a mobile station to register when the distance between the
27 current base station and the base station in which it last registered exceeds a threshold.
28 Registration can be enabled or disabled.
29 Traceability: (See [4] );
30 2.6.5.1.1 Power-Up Registration
31 2.6.5.1.4: Distance-Based Registration
32 3.6.5 Registration
33 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-6

1 5.4.2 Method of measurement

2 5.4.2.1 Distance-Based Registration Disabled

3 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Use the parameters in Table 5.4.2.1-1.
4 Configure base station #1 and base station #2 with different BASE_LAT and
5 BASE_LONG so that ∆ LAT and ∆ LONG are less than two minutes.

6 b. Compute DISTANCE per the following formulas:


(∆lat )2 +(∆long )2
7 DISTANCE =
16
8 ∆lat = BASE_LATS - BASE_LAT_REG S-P
 π BASE_ LAT_ REG S-P 
9 ∆long = (BASE_LONGS - BASE_LONG_REGS-P) • cos 
 

 180 14400 

10 Note: BASE_LAT and BASE_LONG are given in units of 1/4 seconds.


11 BASE_LAT/14400 and BASE_LONG/14400 are given in units of degrees.
12 c. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
13 Message).
14 d. Disable distance-based registration (Set REG_DIST= 0 in the Systems Parameters
15 Message).
16 e. Power on the mobile station on base station #1.
17 f. Verify power-up registration occurs.
18 g. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #2 by reducing
19 base station #2 forward link attenuation, then increasing base station #1 forward
20 link attenuation.
21 h. Verify the mobile station does not perform distance-based registration.
22 i. Power down the mobile station.
23

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-7

1
2 Figure 5.4.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Distance-Based Registration
3
4 Table 5.4.2.1-1 Soft Handoff Test Parameters - T_ADD

Parameter Unit Channel 1 Channel 2

Îor/Ioc dB 0 -10

Pilot Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Traffic Ec/Ior dB -7 -7

Ioc dBm/1.23 MHz -75 -75

Pilot Ec/Io dB -10.2 -20.2


5

6 5.4.2.2 Distance Threshold Not Exceeded


7 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Use the parameters in Table 5.4.2.1-1.
8 Configure base station #1 and base station #2 with different BASE_LAT and
9 BASE_LONG so that ∆ LAT and ∆ LONG are less than two minutes.
10 b. Compute DISTANCE per the formulas shown in test 5.4.2.1, step b.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-8

1 c. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters


2 Message).

3 d. Enable distance-based registration by setting REG_DIST greater than the calculated


4 value of DISTANCE.
5 e. Power on the mobile station.
6 f. Verify power-up registration occurs.
7 g. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #2 by reducing
8 base station #2 forward link attenuation, then increasing base station #1 forward
9 link attenuation.
10 h. Verify the mobile station does not perform distance-based registration.
11 i. Power down the mobile station.

12 5.4.2.3 Distance Threshold Exceeded


13 a. Setup the test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Use the parameters in Table 5.4.2.1-1.
14 Configure base station #1 and base station #2 with different BASE_LAT and
15 BASE_LONG so that ∆ LAT and ∆ LONG are less than two minutes.
16 b. Compute DISTANCE per the formulas shown in test 5.4.2.1, step b.
17 c. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
18 Message).
19 d. Enable distance-based registration by setting REG_DIST less than the calculated
20 value of DISTANCE.
21 e. Power on the mobile station.
22 f. Verify power-up registration occurs.
23 g. Force mobile station to perform idle handoff to base station #2 by reducing base
24 station #2 forward link attenuation, then increasing base station #1 forward link
25 attenuation.
26 h. Verify distance-based registration occurs.
27 i. Power down the mobile station.

28 5.4.3 Minimum Standard

29 5.4.3.1 Distance-based Registration Disabled


30 Distance-based registration shall not occur.

31 5.4.3.2 Distance Threshold Not Exceeded


32 The mobile station shall not perform distance-based registration when distance-based registration
33 enabled (REG_DIST ≠ 0) and calculated value of DISTANCE is less than REG_DIST.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-9

1 5.4.3.3 Distance Threshold Exceeded


2 The mobile station shall perform distance-based registration when distance based registration is
3 enabled (REG_DIST ≠ 0) and the calculated value of DISTANCE is greater than REG_DIST.

4 5.5 Zone-Based Registration

5 5.5.1 Definition
6 This test verifies that zone-based registration can be enabled and disabled, and that, when zone-
7 based registration is enabled, a mobile shall register when it performs an idle handoff into a zone
8 that is not on its internally stored list of visited registration zones.
9 This test verifies that a mobile station shall not register when it performs an idle handoff into a
10 zone that is on its internally stored list of visited zones, and that it properly deletes entries from
11 its internally stored list of visited registration zones.
12 Traceability: (See [4] );
13 2.6.5.1.1 Power-Up Registration
14 2.6.5.1.5: Zone-Based Registration
15 3.6.5: Registration
16 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

17 5.5.1.1 Zone-Based Registration Disabled


18 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Configure base station #2 with REG_ZONE
19 different than that of base station #1.

20 b. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters


21 Message).
22 c. Disable zone-based registration (set TOTAL_ZONES = 0 in the Systems Parameters
23 Message).
24 d. Power on the mobile station on base station #1.
25 e. Force mobile station to perform idle handoff to base station #2 by reducing base
26 station #2 forward link attenuation, then increasing base station #1 forward link
27 attenuation.
28 f. Verify zone-based registration does not occur.

29 g. Power down the mobile station.

30 5.5.1.2 Zone-Based Registration Enabled


31 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Configure base station #2 with REG_ZONE
32 different from that of base station #1.
33 b. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
34 Message).
35 c. Enable zone-based registration with a two-zone ZONE_LISTs (set TOTAL_ZONES = 2
36 in the Systems Parameters Message).
37 d. Power on the mobile station on base station #1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-10

1 e. Verify power-up registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone 1
2 and Zone 1 is the only entry in ZONE_LISTs.

3 f. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #2 by reducing
4 base station #2 forward link attenuation, then increasing base station #1 forward
5 link attenuation.
6 g. Verify zone-based registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone
7 2, Zone 1 and zone 2 are in ZONE_LISTs.

8 h. Before the period of time specified by ZONE_TIMER has elapsed (before the mobile
9 station deletes zone 1 from ZONE_LISTs), force the mobile station to perform an idle
10 handoff to base station #1.
11 i. Verify zone-based registration does not occur (because zone 1 is still in
12 ZONE_LISTs).

13 j. Power down the mobile station.


14 k. Enable zone-based registration with a single-entry ZONE_LISTs by setting
15 TOTAL_ZONES = 1.
16 l. Power on the mobile station on base station #1.
17 m. Verify power-up registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone 1,
18 and zone 1 is the only entry in ZONE_LISTs.

19 n. Before the period of time specified by ZONE_TIMER has elapsed (i.e., before the
20 mobile station deletes zone 1 from ZONE_LISTs due to expiration of the entry timer
21 for zone 1), force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #2.
22 o. Verify zone-based registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone
23 2, and only zone 2 is in ZONE_LISTs because the mobile station was forced to delete
24 zone 1 from ZONE_LISTs to make room for zone 2.

25 p. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #1.
26 q. Verify zone-based registration occurs (zone 1 is not in ZONE_LIST).
27 r. Power down the mobile station.

28 5.5.1.3 Zone-Based Registration Timer


29 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.4.2.1-1. Configure base station #2 with REG_ZONE
30 different than that of base station #1.
31 b. Enable power-up registration (set POWER_UP_REG = 1 in the Systems Parameters
32 Message)
33 c. Enable zone-based registration with a two-zone ZONE_LISTs
34 (set TOTAL_ZONES = 2 in the Systems Parameters Message).
35 d. Power on the mobile station on base station #2.
36 e. Verify power-up registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone 1,
37 and zone 1 is the only entry in ZONE_LISTs.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-11

1 f. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #2.
2 g. Verify zone-based registration occurs. The mobile station is now registered in zone
3 2, and zone 1 and zone 2 are on ZONE_LISTs.

4 h. Wait for the period of time specified by ZONE_TIMER to elapse (after which the
5 mobile station should delete zone 1 from ZONE_LISTs).

6 i. Force the mobile station to perform an idle handoff to base station #1.
7 j. Verify zone-based registration occurs.
8 k. Power down the mobile station.

9 5.5.2 Minimum Standard

10 5.5.2.1 Zone-Based Registration Disabled


11 Zone-based registration shall not occur.

12 5.5.2.2 Zone-Based Registration Enabled


13 The mobile station shall perform zone-based registration after performing an idle handoff into a
14 registration zone that is not currently in its ZONE_LIST (5.5.2.2 steps g, o, and q). The mobile
15 station shall not perform zone-based registration after performing an idle handoff into a
16 registration zone that is currently in its ZONE_LIST (5.5.2.2 step i).

17 5.5.2.3 Zone-Based Registration Timer


18 The mobile station shall perform zone-based registration after performing an idle handoff into a
19 registration zone that has been deleted from its ZONE_LIST due to expiration of the zone entry
20 timer.

21 5.6 Parameter-Change Registration

22 5.6.1 Definition
23 Parameter-change registration causes a mobile station to register when it modifies any of the
24 following stored parameters:
25 • The preferred slot cycle index (SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX)
26 • The station class mark (SCM) (Not applicable to single mode CDMA 1900 mobile stations)
27 • The call termination enabled indicator (MOB_TERM)
28 Parameter-change registration is performed whenever there is no entry in the mobile station’s
29 SID_NID_LISTs matching the base station’s SID and NID.
30 Traceability: (See [4] );
31 2.6.5.1.6: Parameter-Change Registration
32 3.6.5: Registration
33 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-12

1 5.6.2 Method of Measurement

2 5.6.2.1 Parameter-Change Registration Disabled

3 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.


4 b. Disable parameter-change registration (set PARAMETER_REG = 0 in the Systems
5 Parameters Message).

6 c. Power on the mobile station.


7 d. Reset the value of SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX.
8 e. Verify parameter-change registration does not occur.

9 f. Power down the mobile station.

10 5.6.2.2 Parameter-Change Registration Per SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX


11 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.
12 b. Enable parameter-change registration (set PARAMETER_REG = 1 in the Systems
13 Parameters Message).
14 c. Power on the mobile station.
15 d. Reset the value of SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX.
16 e. Verify parameter-change registration occurs.
17 f. Power down the mobile station.

18 5.6.2.3 Parameter-Change Registration Per SCM


19 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.
20 b. Enable parameter-change registration (set PARAMETER_REG = 1 in the Systems
21 Parameters Message).
22 c. Power on the mobile station.
23 d. Reset the value of SCM.
24 e. Verify parameter-change registration occurs.
25 f. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
26 g. Verify user data in both directions.
27 h. Power down mobile station.

28 5.6.2.4 Parameter-Change Registration Per MOB_TERM


29 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.
30 b. Enable parameter-change registration (set PARAMETER_REG = 1 in the Systems
31 Parameters Message).
32 c. Power on the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-13

1 d. Change the value of MOB_TERM_HOMEp.


2 e. Verify parameter-change registration occurs.

3 f. Power down the mobile station.

4 5.6.2.5 Parameter-Based Registration per SID-NID List change


5 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.

6 b. Enable parameter-change registration (set PARAMETER_REG = 1 in the Systems


7 Parameters Message).
8 c. Make an entry in the mobile station SID_NID_LISTs to match the base station
9 SID,NID.
10 d. Set MULT_SIDS = MULT_NIDS= 0 in the System Parameters Message.
11 e. Power on the mobile station.
12 f. Wait for mobile station to acquire CDMA service.
13 g. At the base station, change the SID and NID in the System Parameters Message.
14 h. Verify parameter-change registration occurs.
15 i. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
16 j. Verify user data in both directions.
17 k. Power down the mobile station.

18 5.6.3 Minimum Standard


19 The mobile station shall register when certain stored parameters change or when it enters a new
20 system.
21 5.7 Registration Under Various Settings of MOB_TERM

22 5.7.1 Definition
23 This test verifies that the mobile station correctly performs registration using stored parameters
24 MOB_TERM_FOR_NID, MOB_TERM_FOR_SID, MOB_TERM_HOME and HOME_REG,
25 FOR_NID_REG, and FOR_SID_REG fields of the System Parameters Message.
26 Traceability: (See [4] );
27 2.6.5.1.2 Power-Up Registration
28 2.6.5.1.6: Parameter-Change Registration
29 2.6.5.3: Roaming
30 2.6.5.5.2.1: Idle Registration Procedures
31 3.6.5: Registration
32 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message

33 5.7.2 Method of Measurement

34 5.7.2.1 MOB_TERM Enabled

35 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-14

1 b. Enable Home, (set HOME_REG=1) Foreign SID (set FOR_SID=1) and Foreign NID
2 (set FOR_NID=1) registration at the base station.

3 c. Enable parameter-change (set PARAMETER REG=1) and power-down registration


4 (set POWER-DOWN REG=1) at the base station.
5 d. Set the mobile station SID to match the base station SID.
6 e. Power on the mobile station.
7 f. Set MOB_TERM_HOME to enabled on the mobile station.
8 g. Set MOB_TERM_FOR_NID and MOB_TERM_FOR_SID to disabled at the mobile
9 station.
10 h. Verify the mobile station parameter-change registration occurs.
11 i. Power down the mobile station.
12 j. Verify the mobile station power-down registration occurs.

13 5.7.2.2 MOB_TERM Disabled


14 a. Setup test as shown in Figure 5.1.2.1-1.
15 b. Enable Home, (set HOME_REG=1) Foreign SID (set FOR_SID=1) and Foreign NID
16 (set FOR_NID=1) registration at the base station.
17 c. Enable parameter-change (set PARAMETER REG=1) and power-down registration
18 (set POWER-DOWN_REG=1) at the base station.
19 d. Power on the mobile station.
20 e. Set MOB_TERM_HOME, MOB_TERM_FOR_SID and MOB_TERM_FOR_NID to
21 disabled at the mobile station.
22 f. Verify parameter-change registration occurs.
23 g. Power down the mobile station.

24 h. Verify power-down registration does not occur.

25 5.7.3 Minimum Standard

26 5.7.3.1 MOB_TERM Enabled


27 The mobile station shall perform parameter-change registration after MOB_TERMs is enabled.
28 The mobile station shall perform power-down registration.

29 5.7.3.2 MOB_TERM Disabled


30 The mobile station shall perform parameter-change registration after MOB_TERMs is disabled.
31 The mobile station shall not perform power-down registration.
32

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 5-15

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-1

1 6 AUTHENTICATION TESTS
2 Table 6-1 lists authentication tests.
3 Table 6-1 Authentication Tests

Test No. Title


6.1 Shared Secret Data Initialized to Zero
6.2 Shared Secret Data Update on the Paging/Access Channels
6.3 Shared Secret Data Update on the Forward/ Reverse Traffic Channels
6.4 Mismatched A-Keys
6.5 Activating Voice Privacy
on Call Setup
6.6 Activating Voice Privacy at the Mobile Station When a Call Is Active
6.7 Signaling Message Encryption on Forward Traffic Channel
(Alert with Information Message)
6.8 Signaling Message Encryption on Reverse Traffic Channel
(Burst DTMF Message)
6.9 Hard Handoffs between Base Stations with SME Active.
6.10 Signaling Message Encryption for Mobile Terminated SMS
(Data Burst Message)
6.11 Authentication Upon Originations
6.12 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS with SME Active

4 Note: Unless otherwise noted, AUTH should be set to ‘01’ in the Access Parameters Message.
5 6.1 Shared Secret Data Initialized to Zero

6 6.1.1 Definition
7 This test verifies that when the A-Key is changed at both the base station and mobile station,
8 mobile station Shared Secret Data (SSD) and base station SSD are initialized to zero until an
9 SSD Update is performed. Authentication of mobile station registrations, originations, and
10 terminations should be successful.
11 Traceability: (See [4] );
12 2.3.12.1: (MS) Authentication
13 2.6.5.1.3: Timer-Based Registration
14 3.3.1: (BS) Authentication
15

16 6.1.2 Method of Measurement


17 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
18 b. Power on the mobile station.
19 c. Initialize the A-Key to the same value in the mobile station and base station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-2

1
2 Figure 6.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Authentication Tests
3
4 d. Enable timer-based registration (REG_PRD=29).

5 e. Verify the mobile station sends a Timer-Based Registration Message, which includes
6 AUTHR, RANDC and COUNT.
7 f. At the base station, verify authentication of registration is successful.
8 g. Setup a mobile station originated call.
9 h. Verify user data in both directions.
10 i. End call.
11 j. Make a land party to mobile station call.
12 k. Verify the call completes.
13 l. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Traffic
14 Channel.
15 m. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.
16 n. End call.

17 o. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Paging


18 Channel.
19 p. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.
20 q. Power down the mobile station.

21 6.1.3 Minimum Standard


22 When the A-Key is changed in the mobile station and base station, Shared Secret Data shall be
23 initialized to zero.
24 Authentication of mobile station registrations, originations, and terminations shall be successful.
25 The Unique Challenge-Response Procedure shall be successful.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-3

1 6.2 Shared Secret Data Update on the Paging/Access Channels

2 6.2.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the mobile station and base station can perform a Shared Secret Data update on
4 the paging/access channels.
5 Traceability: (See [4] );
6 2.3.12.1.4: Unique Challenge-Response Procedure
7 2.3.12.1.5: Updating the Shared Secret Data (SSD)
8 2.6.5.1.3: Timer-Based Registration
9 2.7.1.3.2.6: Authentication Challenge Response Message
10 3.7.2.3.2.1: System Parameters Message (f-csch)
11 3.7.2.3.2.10: Authentication Challenge Message (f-csch)

12 6.2.2 Method of Measurement


13 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
14 b. Power on the mobile station.
15 c. Initialize the A-Key to the same value in both the mobile station and base station.
16 d. At the base station, initiate a Shared Secret Data update on the Paging/Access
17 Channels.
18 e. Verify the SSD Update was successful.
19 f. Enable timer-based registration (REG_PRD=29).
20 g. Wait for the mobile station to send the Timer-Based Registration Message.
21 h. Verify the Registration Message includes AUTHR, COUNT and RANDC.
22 i. At the base station, verify authentication of registration is successful.
23 j. Setup a mobile station originated call.
24 k. Verify user data in both directions.
25 l. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Traffic
26 Channel.

27 m. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.


28 n. End call.
29 o. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Paging
30 Channel.
31 p. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.
32 q. Power down the mobile station.

33 6.2.3 Minimum Standard


34 The mobile station and base station shall successfully perform an SSD Update on the
35 Paging/Access Channels.
36 SSD_A_NEW and SSD_B_NEW shall be stored at the mobile station and base station.
37 Authentication of mobile station registrations, originations, and terminations shall be successful.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-4

1 6.3 Shared Secret Data Update on the Forward/Reverse Traffic Channels

2 6.3.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the mobile station and base station can perform a shared secret data update on
4 the forward/reverse traffic channels.
5 Traceability: (See [4] );
6 2.3.12.1.4: Unique Challenge-Response Procedure
7 2.3.12.1.5: Updating the Shared Secret Data (SSD)
8 2.7.2.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Response Message (r-dsch)
9 2.6.5.1.3: Timer-Based Registration
10 3.7.3.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Message (f-dsch)
11 3.7.3.3.2.13: SSD Update Message (f-dsch)
12

13 6.3.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
15 b. Power on the mobile station.
16 c. Initialize the A-Key to the same value in both the mobile station and base station.
17 d. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
18 e. Verify user data in both directions.
19 f. At the base station, initiate a Shared Secret Data update on the Forward/Reverse
20 Traffic Channels.
21 g. Verify the SSD Update was successful.
22 h. End call.
23 i. Enable timer-based registration (REG_PRD=29).
24 j. Wait for the mobile station to send the Timer-Based Registration Message.
25 k. Verify the Registration Message includes AUTHR, COUNT and RANDC.
26 l. At the base station, verify authentication of registration is successful.
27 m. Setup a mobile station originated call.
28 n. Verify user data in both directions.
29 o. End call.
30 p. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
31 q. Verify user data in both directions.
32 r. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Traffic
33 Channel.
34 s. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.

35 t. End call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-5

1 u. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the Paging


2 Channel.

3 v. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure was successful.


4 w. Power down the mobile station.

5 6.3.3 Minimum Standard


6 The mobile station and base station shall successfully perform an SSD Update on the
7 Forward/Reverse Traffic Channels. SSD_A_NEW and SSD_B_NEW shall be stored at both the
8 mobile station and the base station.

9 6.4 Mismatched A-Keys

10 6.4.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that when there is an A_KEY mismatch, authentication of registrations,
12 originations, terminations, and Unique Challenge-Response procedures will fail.
13 Traceability: (See [4] );
14 2.3.12.1.4: Unique Challenge-Response Procedure
15 2.3.12.1.5: Updating the Shared Secret Data (SSD)
16 2.7.1.3.2.6: Authentication Challenge Response Message
17 2.7.2.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Response Message (r-dsch)
18 3.7.2.3.2.10: Authentication Challenge Message (f-csch)
19 3.7.2.3.2.11: SSD Update Message (f-csch)
20 3.7.3.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Message (f-dsch)
21 3.7.3.3.2.13: SSD Update Message (f-dsch)

22 6.4.2 Method of Measurement


23 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
24 b. Power on the mobile station.
25 c. Initialize the A-Key to the same value in the mobile station and base station.
26 d. At the base station, initiate a Shared Secret Data update on the Paging/Access
27 Channels.
28 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.
29 f. Verify user data in both directions.
30 g. End call.
31 h. Change the A-Key in the mobile station.
32 i. Enable timer-based registration (REG_PRD=29)
33 j. Wait for the mobile station to send a Timer-Based Registration Message.

34 k. Verify the Registration Message includes AUTHR, COUNT and RANDC.


35 l. At the base station, verify authentication of registration fails due to an AUTHR
36 mismatch.
37 m. Setup a mobile station originated call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-6

1 n. Verify the mobile station receives an Intercept Order and that the call fails due to an
2 AUTHR mismatch.

3 o. Ensure the intercept tone sounds as alternating 440 Hz and 620 Hz tones, each on
4 for 250 ms. The mobile station should not do any silent re-originations after
5 receiving an intercept order.
6 p. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
7 q. Verify the call fails due to an AUTHR mismatch.
8 r. At the base station, initiate a Shared Secret Data update on the Paging/Access
9 channels.
10 s. Verify the SSD Update fails with an AUTHBS mismatch.
11 t. At the base station, initiate a Unique Challenge-Response Procedure on the
12 Paging/Access channels.
13 u. Verify the Unique Challenge-Response Procedure fails with an AUTHU mismatch.
14 v. Power down the mobile station

15 6.4.3 Minimum Standard


16 When there is an A-Key mismatch between the base station and mobile station, authentication of
17 registrations, originations, terminations, and Unique Challenge-Response procedures shall fail.
18 When the mobile station receives an intercept order it shall play the proper tone and should not
19 silently re-originate.

20 6.5 Activating Voice Privacy on Call Setup

21 6.5.1 Definition
22 This test verifies that Voice Privacy can be activated at call setup by the mobile station
23 subscriber. The Voice Privacy feature can be activated and deactivated by either the mobile
24 station subscriber or the base station.
25 Traceability: (See [4] );
26 2.3.12.3: (MS) Voice Privacy
27 2.6.4.1.6: (MS) Long Code Transition Request Processing
28 2.7.1.3.2.4: Origination Message
29 2.7.1.3.2.5: Page Response Message
30 2.7.3: (MS) Orders
31 3.3.3: (BS) Voice Privacy
32 3.6.4.1.5: (BS) Long Code Transition Request Processing
33 3.6.4.3: Traffic Channel Substate
34 3.6.4.4: Release Substate
35 3.7.4: (BS) Orders

36 6.5.2 Method of Measurement


37 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1
38 b. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
39 c. Power on the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-7

1 d. Enable Voice Privacy in the mobile station and base station.


2 e. Setup a mobile station originated call, and verify in the Origination Message the
3 Voice Privacy Mode Indicator is set to '1'.
4 f. Configure the Base station to send a Long Code Transition Request Order
5 (ORDQ='00000001') on the traffic channel.
6 g. Verify the mobile station responds with a Long Code Transition Response Order
7 (ORDQ='00000011')
8 h. If supported on the user interface, verify the mobile station indicates to the user
9 that Voice Privacy is active.
10 i. Verify user data in both directions.
11 j. End call.
12 k. Setup a mobile station terminated call, and verify in the Page Response Message the
13 voice privacy indicator (PM) is set to 1 then repeat steps d through j.

14 6.5.3 Minimum Standard


15 The mobile station shall respond with a Long Code Transition Response Order
16 (ORDQ='00000011') when activated during call setup.

17 6.6 Activating Voice Privacy at the Mobile Station When a Call Is Active

18 6.6.1 Definition
19 This test verifies that Voice Privacy can be activated at the mobile station when a call is active.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.3.12.3: (MS) Voice Privacy
22 2.6.4.1.6: Long Code Transition Request Processing
23 2.7.1.3.2.4: Origination Message
24 2.7.1.3.2.5: Page Response Message
25 2.7.3: (MS) Orders
26 3.3.3: (BS) Voice Privacy
27 3.6.4.1.5: (BS) Long Code Transition Request Processing
28 3.6.4.3.1: Traffic Channel Substate
29 3.6.4.4: Release Substate
30 3.7.4: (BS) Orders
31

32 6.6.2 Method of Measurement


33 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1
34 b. Enable Voice Privacy in the base station.
35 c. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
36 d. Power on the mobile station.
37 e. Setup a mobile station originated call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-8

1 f. Enable voice privacy at the mobile station. Verify the mobile station sends a Long
2 Code Transition Request Order with ORDQ set to ‘00000001’.

3 g. Verify the base station responds by sending a Long Code Transition Request Order
4 with ORDQ set to ‘00000001’.
5 h. Verify the mobile station responds with a Long Code Transition Response Order
6 (ORDQ='00000011').
7 i. If supported on the user interface, verify the mobile station indicates Voice Privacy
8 is active.
9 j. Verify user data in both directions.
10 k. End call.

11 6.6.3 Minimum Standard


12 Voice Privacy shall function correctly on the mobile station when a call is active.

13 6.7 Signaling Message Encryption on Forward Traffic Channel (Alert with Information
14 Message)

15 6.7.1 Definition
16 This test verifies that Signaling Message Encryption can be applied to certain fields of selected
17 traffic channel messages such as Alert with Information Message.
18 Traceability: (See [4] );
19 2.3.12.2: (MS) Signaling Message Encryption
20 2.7.4.4: (MS) Calling Party Number
21 3.3.2: (BS) Encryption
22 3.7.2.3.2.8: Channel Assignment Message (f-csch)
23 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert With Information Message (f-dsch)
24 3.7.5.3: (BS) Calling Party Number

25 6.7.2 Method of Measurement


26 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
27 b. Activate the Calling Party Number (CPN) feature for the mobile station subscriber.
28 c. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
29 d. Power on the mobile station.
30 e. Enable Signaling Message Encryption on the base station.
31 f. Setup a land to mobile station call, or a mobile station to mobile station call.
32 g. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' in the Channel Assignment Message.
33 h. Verify that the ENCRYPTION field is set to ‘01’ in the Layer 3 messages that should
34 be encrypted.
35 i. Verify the CPN is displayed on the mobile station during the alerting state.

36 j. Verify user data in both directions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-9

1 k. End call.

2 6.7.3 Minimum Standard


3 When Signaling Message Encryption is activated, CPN sensitive data shall be encrypted when
4 sent on the traffic channel.

5 6.8 Signaling Message Encryption on Reverse Traffic Channel (Burst DTMF Message)

6 6.8.1 Definition
7 This test verifies that Signaling Message Encryption can be applied to certain fields of selected
8 traffic channel messages such as Burst DTMF Message.
9 Traceability: (See [4] );
10 2.3.12.2: (MS) Signaling Message Encryption
11 2.7.2.3.2.7: Send Burst DTMF Message
12 3.3.2: (BS) Encryption
13 3.7.2.3.2.8: Channel Assignment Message (f-csch)

14 6.8.2 Method of Measurement


15 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
16 b. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
17 c. Power on the mobile station.
18 d. Configure the mobile station to send a Send Burst DTMF Message.
19 e. Enable Signaling Message Encryption on the base station.
20 f. Setup a mobile station call to a voice mail system or a paging system.
21 g. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' on the Channel Assignment Message.
22 h. Enter the appropriate pin code as burst DTMF tones.
23 i. Verify that either the voice mail system recognizes the DTMF tones and plays the
24 message back, or that the paging system accepts the pin and sends out the page.
25 j. End call.

26 6.8.3 Minimum Standard


27 When Signaling Message Encryption is activated, Send Burst DTMF Message data shall be
28 encrypted when sent on the traffic channel.

29 6.9 Hard Handoffs between Base Stations with SME Active.

30 6.9.1 Definition
31 This test verifies that when Signaling Message Encryption is used, the new base station activates
32 ENCRYPT_MODE.
33 Traceability: (See [4] );
34 2.3.12.2: (MS) Signaling Message Encryption
35 2.6.6.2.8: CDMA-to-CDMA Hard Handoff
36 2.7.4.4: (MS) Calling Party Number.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-10

1 3.3.2: (BS) Encryption


2 3.6.6.2.2.2: Extended Handoff Direction Message (call processing).
3 3.6.6.2.2.10: General Handoff Direction Message (call processing).
4 3.6.6.2.2.11: Universal Handoff Direction Message (call processing).
5 3.7.2.3.2.8: Channel Assignment Message (f-csch)
6 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash With Information Message (f-dsch).
7 3.7.3.3.2.17: Extended Handoff Direction Message (f-dsch).
8 3.7.3.3.2.31: General Handoff Direction Message (f-dsch).
9 3.7.3.3.2.36: Universal Handoff Direction Message (f-dsch).
10 3.7.5.3: (BS) Calling Party Number.

11 6.9.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.9.2-1.
13 b. Activate Call Waiting and Caller ID on Base station #2.
14 c. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
15 d. Power on the mobile station.
16 e. Enable Signaling Message Encryption on both base stations.
17 f. Setup a mobile station originated call.

18 g. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' in the Channel Assignment Message.


19 h. Verify user data in both directions.
20 i. Perform a hard handoff from Base station #1 to Base station #2.
21 j. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' in the Handoff Direction Message.
22 k. Setup another call to the mobile station, and listen for the Call Waiting tone.
23 l. Verify base station #2 sends a Flash with Information Message with
24 ENCRYPTION='01'.
25 m. Verify Calling Party Number (CPN) is displayed on mobile station during alerting
26 state.
27 n. Verify user data in both directions.
28 o. End call.
29

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-11

2 Figure 6.9.2-1 Functional Setup for Hard Handoffs between Base Stations with SME
3 Active

4 6.9.3 Minimum Standard


5 When Signaling Message Encryption is activated, sensitive data is encrypted and sent on the
6 traffic channel. When an active call is handed off from base station #1 to base station #2, or
7 another sector the SME mode is passed on to the base station or sector to which the call has been
8 handed off.

9 6.10 Signaling Message Encryption Mobile Terminated SMS (Data Burst Message)

10 6.10.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that Signaling Message Encryption, can be applied to certain fields of selected
12 traffic channel messages such as Data Burst Messages.
13 Traceability: (See [4] );
14 2.3.12.2: Signaling Message Encryption
15 3.3.2: Encryption
16 3.7.2.3.2.8: Channel Assignment Message (f-csch)
17 (See [13] );
18 2.4.1.1.1.1: Mobile SMS Message Termination
19 2.4.2.1.1: Paging Channel Procedures

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-12

1 6.10.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.

3 b. Activate the Short Message Service (SMS) feature for the mobile station subscriber.
4 c. Delete all outstanding short messages in the network for the mobile station.
5 d. Ensure Authentication is enabled.

6 e. Enable Signaling Message Encryption on the base station.


7 f. Power on the mobile station, and wait until it is in Mobile Station Idle State.
8 g. Store a short message in the Message Center for the mobile station. Ensure the
9 message is big enough so that the message can not be sent on the Paging channel
10 and the message has to be sent on the Traffic channel.
11 h. Verify the base station sends a Data Burst Message with ENCRYPTION='01'.
12 i. Verify the mobile station successfully receives the short message.

13 6.10.3 Minimum Standard


14 The base station shall send a short message over the traffic channel using the Data Burst
15 Message with Signaling Message Encryption activated. The correct and complete short message
16 shall be received by the mobile station.

17 6.11 Authentication Upon Originations

18 6.11.1 Definition
19 This test verifies the mobile station can successfully Authenticate upon originations.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.3.12.1.5: Updating the Shared Secret Data (SSD)
22 2.7.1.3.2.6: Authentication Challenge Response Message
23 2.7.2.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Response Message (r-dsch)
24 3.7.2.3.2.10: Authentication Challenge Message (f-csch)
25 3.7.2.3.2.11: SSD Update Message (f-csch)
26 3.7.3.3.2.2: Authentication Challenge Message (f-dsch)
27 3.7.3.3.2.13: SSD Update Message (f-dsch)

28 6.11.2 Method of Measurement


29 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.1.2-1.
30 b. Power on the mobile station.
31 c. Initialize the A-Key to the same value in both the mobile station and base station.
32 d. At the base station, initiate a Shared Secret Data update on the Paging Channel.
33 e. Verify the SSD Update was successful.
34 f. Setup a mobile station originated call (seven digits).
35 g. Verify user data in both directions and that Authentication is successful.

36 h. End call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-13

1 i. Setup a mobile station originated call (three digits such as *73).


2 j. Verify user data in both directions and Authentication is successful.

3 k. End call.
4 l. Setup a mobile station originated call (four digits such as *123).
5 m. Verify user data in both directions and that Authentication is successful.

6 n. End call and Power down the mobile station.

7 6.11.3 Minimum Standard


8 Authentication of all Mobile Station Originations shall be successful.

9 6.12 Hard Handoff from CDMA to AMPS with SME Active

10 6.12.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that when Signaling Message Encryption is used, the new base station activates
12 Analog Signaling Message Encryption.
13 Traceability: (See [4] );
14 2.3.12.2: (MS) Signaling Message Encryption
15 2.6.6.2.9: CDMA-Analog HO
16 2.7.4.4: (MS) Calling Party Number.
17 3.3.2: (BS) Encryption
18 3.6.4.3: Traffic Channel Substate
19 3.7.2.3.2.8: Channel Assignment Message (f-csch)
20 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message (f-dsch)
21 3.7.3.3.2.6: Analog Handoff Direction Message
22 3.7.5.3: (BS) Calling Party Number.

23 6.12.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Connect the base station and mobile station as shown in Figure 6.9.2-1.
25 b. Activate Call Waiting and Caller ID on Base station #2.
26 c. Ensure Authentication is enabled.
27 d. Power on the mobile station.

28 e. Enable Signaling Message Encryption on both base stations.


29 f. Setup a mobile station originated call.
30 g. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' in the Channel Assignment Message.
31 h. Verify user data in both directions.
32 i. Perform a CDMA to AMPS hard handoff from Base station #1 to Base station #2.
33 j. Verify ENCRYPT_MODE='01' and MEM=’1’ in the Analog Handoff Direction Message.
34 k. Setup another call to the mobile station, and listen for the Call Waiting tone.
35 l. Verify base station #2 sends an encrypted Alert with Information Message (AMPS).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-14

1 m. Verify the Calling Party Number (CPN) is displayed on the mobile station during the
2 alerting state.

3 n. Verify user data in both directions.


4 o. End call.

5 6.12.3 Minimum Standard


6 When Signaling Message Encryption is activated, sensitive data is encrypted and sent on the
7 traffic/voice channels. When an active call is handed off from base station #1 to base station #2,
8 or another sector, the SME mode is passed on to the base station or sector to which the call has
9 been handed off.
10

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 6-15

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-1

1 7 SERVICE REDIRECTION
2 Table 7-1 lists service redirection tests.
3 Table 7-1 Service Redirection Tests

Test No. Title


7.1 Global Service Redirection Tests
7.1.1 Global Service Redirection between Band Classes
7.1.2 Global Service Redirection from CDMA to a Non-CDMA System
7.1.3 Global Service Redirection to a Different Channel in the Same Band Class
7.2. Network Directed System Selection (NDSS) and Service Redirection Tests
7.2.1 NDSS Between Band Classes
7.2.2 NDSS and Normal Service Redirection to a Non-CDMA System
7.2.3 NDSS between Channels in the Same Band Class
7.2.4 NDSS Ignore CDMA
7.2.5 NDSS Return If Fail
7.3 Extended Global Service Redirection Tests
7.3.1 Extended Global Service Redirection between Band Classes
7.3.2 Extended Global Service Redirection from CDMA to a Non-CDMA System
7.3.3 Extended Global Service Redirection to a Different Channel in the Same
Band Class
4
5 When the mobile station receives a Service Redirection Message, Global Service Redirection
6 Message, or an Extended Global Service Redirection the mobile shall attempt to select another
7 system in accordance with the current redirection criteria.

8 7.1 Global Service Redirection Tests


9 7.1.1 Global Service Redirection between Band Classes.

10 7.1.1.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives a Global Service Redirection Message
12 directing it to another band class, the mobile station acquires the appropriate system.
13 Traceabilities (See [4])
14
15 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
16 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
17 2.6.2.2.6 Global Service Redirection Message
18 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
19 3.7.2.3.2.18 Global Service Redirection Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-2

1 7.1.1.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2-1. For
3 this test case, base station #1 and base station #2 are in different band classes.
4

6 Figure 7.1.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Service Redirection Tests


7
8 b. Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station
9 #1.
10 c. Send a Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
11 correct values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN,
12 and CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
13
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘0’
RECORD_TYPE ‘00000010’
14
15 d. Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the mobile
16 station Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-3

1 e. Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.
2 f. End the call.

3 g. Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.
4 h. Power off the mobile station.
5 i. Repeat steps c through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle
6 State on base station #2.
7 j. Repeat steps b and c with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle
8 State on base station #1 with the following modifications to the Global Service
9 Redirection Message:
10
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘1’
11
12 k. If MOB_P_REV is less than six, verify the mobile station enters the System
13 Determination Substate of the Mobile Station Initialization State and acquires the
14 system to which it was redirected. If MOB_P_REV is greater than or equal to six,
15 verify the mobile station ignores the Global Service Redirection Message and remains
16 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.

17 7.1.2 Minimum Standard


18 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
19 call on the new system unless MOB_P_REVp is greater than or equal to six and
20 EXCL_P_REV_MS is equal to ‘1’.

21 7.1.3 Global Service Redirection from CDMA to a Non-CDMA System

22 7.1.3.1 Definition
23 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives a Global Service Redirection Message
24 directing it from CDMA to a Non-CDMA system, the mobile station acquires that system. The
25 mobile station should only be redirected to Non-CDMA systems it supports. An example would
26 be an analog system defined in [21].
27 Traceabilities (see [4])
28 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
29 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
30 2.6.2.2.6 Global Service Redirection Message
31 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
32 3.7.2.3.2.18 Global Service Redirection Message

33 7.1.3.2 Method of Measurement


34 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2-1. For this
35 test case, base station #1 is a CDMA base station and base station #2 is a Non-CDMA
36 base station

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-4

1 b. Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station #1.
2 c. Send a Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
3 correct values of EXPECTED_SID for the new base station along with the following
4 parameters:
5
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘0’
RECORD_TYPE '00000001' [North
American Amps]
'00000011' [TACS]
'00000100' [JTACS]
6
7 Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the Mobile Station
8 Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.
9 Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.
10 End the call.
11 Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.
12 Power off the mobile station.
13 Repeat steps b and c with the following changes to the Global Service Redirection Message:
14
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘1’
15
16 If MOB_P_REV is less than six, verify the mobile station enters the System Determination
17 Substate of the Mobile Station Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was
18 redirected. If MOB_P_REV is greater than or equal to six, verify the mobile station ignores the
19 Global Service Redirection Message and remains in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current
20 system.

21 7.1.3.3 Minimum Standard


22 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
23 call on the new system unless MOB_P_REVp is greater than or equal to six and
24 EXCL_P_REV_MS is equal to ‘1’.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-5

1 7.1.4 Global Service Redirection to a Different Channel in the Same Band Class.

2 7.1.4.1 Definition
3 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives a Global Service Redirection Message
4 directing it to a different channel in the same band class, the mobile station acquires the
5 appropriate system.
6 Traceabilities (see [4])
7 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
8 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
9 2.6.2.2.6 Global Service Redirection Message
10 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
11 3.7.2.3.2.18 Global Service Redirection Message

12 7.1.4.2 Method of Measurement


13 d. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2-1. For this
14 test case, base station #1 and base station #2 are in the same band class with different
15 CDMA channels.
16 e. Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station #1.
17 f. Send a Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
18 correct values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN, and
19 CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
20
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘0’
RECORD_TYPE ‘00000010’
21
22 Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the Mobile Station
23 Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.
24 Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.
25 End the call.
26 Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.
27 Power off the mobile station.
28 Repeat steps c through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on
29 base station #2.
30 Remove the channel for base station #2 from the mobiles stations preferred roaming list and
31 repeat steps b through h.
32 Repeat steps b and c with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base
33 station #1 with the following modifications to the Global Service Redirection Message:
34

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-6

Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
EXCL_P_REV_MS ‘1’
1
2 If MOB_P_REV is less than six, verify the mobile station enters the System Determination
3 Substate of the Mobile Station Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was
4 redirected. If MOB_P_REV is greater than or equal to six, verify the mobile station ignores the
5 Global Service Redirection Message and remains in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current
6 system.

7 7.1.4.3 Minimum Standard


8 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
9 call on the new system unless MOB_P_REVp is greater than or equal to six and
10 EXCL_P_REV_MS is equal to ‘1’.

11 7.2 Network Directed System Selection and Normal Service Redirection Tests
12 When the mobile station receives a Service Redirection Message in response to an origination, or
13 prior to user data being transmitted, the mobile station shall attempt to select another system in
14 accordance with the current redirection criteria and re-originate on the new system.

15 7.2.1 NDSS Between Band Classes

16 7.2.1.1 Definition
17 This test verifies that a mobile station redirects between band classes when the Service
18 Redirection Message is sent on the f-csch, in response to an Origination Message, or on the f-
19 dsch prior to user data being transmitted.
20 Traceability: (See [4] );
21 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
22 2.6.2.4 Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
23 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
24 3.6.2.3 Mobile Station Directed Messages
25 3.7.2.3.2.16 Service Redirection Message {f-csch}
26 3.7.3.3.2.23 Service Redirection Message {f-dsch}

27 7.2.1.2 Method of Measurement


28 a. Connect the mobile station and base stations as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2-1. For this
29 test case base station #1 and base station #2 are CDMA base stations operating in
30 different band classes.
31 b. Ensure the mobile station acquires base station #1.
32 c. Originate a mobile station to land party call.
33 d. Send a Service Redirection Message from the current base station in response to the
34 mobile station origination attempt or prior to user data being transferred with the
35 correct values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN,
36 and CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-7

1
Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '1' [NDSS Redirection]
RECORD_TYPE '00000010'
2
3 e. Verify the mobile station acquires the base station #2.
4 f. Verify the call completes and user traffic is present. (i.e. Audio)
5 g. End the call.

6 7.2.1.3 Minimum Standard


7 The mobile station shall be redirected between band classes when the base station sends a
8 Service Redirection Message in response to a mobile station Origination Message. The mobile
9 station shall establish a call on the new system without any additional user input.

10 7.2.2 NDSS and Normal Service Redirection from CDMA to a Non-CDMA System

11 7.2.2.1 Definition
12 This test verifies that a mobile station is redirected from CDMA to a Non-CDMA system when
13 the Service Redirection Message is sent on the f-csch in response to an origination, or on the f-
14 dsch prior to user data being transmitted.
15 Traceability: (See [4] );
16 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
17 2.6.2.4 Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
18 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
19 3.6.2.3 Mobile Station Directed Messages
20 3.7.2.3.2.16 Service Redirection Message {f-csch}
21 3.7.3.3.2.23 Service Redirection Message {f-dsch}

22 7.2.2.2 Method of measurement


23 a. Connect the mobile station and base stations as shown in figure 7.1.1.2-1. Base
24 station #1 is a CDMA base station and base station #2 is a non-CDMA base station.

25 b. Verify the mobile station acquires the CDMA system.


26 c. Setup a mobile station originated call.
27 d. In response to mobile origination attempt or prior to user data being transferred,
28 force base station #1 to send a Service Redirection Message with the proper
29 parameters (EXPECTED_SID, IGNORE_CDMA, and SYS_ORDERING) to initiate
30 Service Redirection from base station #1 to base station #2 using the following
31 parameters in the Service Redirection Message:
32

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-8

Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '1' [NDSS redirection]
RECORD_TYPE '00000001' [North American Amps]
'00000011' [TACS]
'00000100' [JTACS]
1
2 e. Verify the mobile station acquires base station #2.
3 f. Verify the call completes and user traffic is present. (i.e. Audio)
4 g. End the call.

5 h. Repeat steps b through g making the following change to the Service Redirection
6 Message:
7
Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '0' [Normal Redirection]
8

9 7.2.2.3 Minimum Standard


10 The mobile station shall be redirected between the CDMA base station and the non-CDMA base
11 station when the CDMA base station sends a Service Redirection Message in response to a
12 mobile station Origination Message. The mobile station shall establish a call on the new system
13 without any additional user input.

14 7.2.3 NDSS between Channels in the Same Band Class

15 7.2.3.1 Definition
16 This test verifies that a mobile station redirects between channels in the same band class when
17 the Service Redirection Message is sent on the f-csch, in response to an Origination Message, or
18 on the f-dsch prior to user data being transmitted.
19 Traceability: (see [4]);
20 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
21 2.6.2.4 Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
22 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
23 3.6.2.3 Mobile Station Directed Messages
24 3.7.2.3.2.16 Service Redirection Message {f-csch}
25 3.7.3.3.2.23 Service Redirection Message {r-dsch}

26 7.2.3.2 Method of Measurement


27 a. Connect the mobile station and base stations as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2-1. For this
28 test case base station #1 and base station #2 are CDMA base stations operating in
29 the same band class
30 b. Ensure the mobile station acquires base station #1.
31 c. Originate a mobile station to land party call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-9

1 d. Send a Service Redirection Message from the current base station in response to
2 mobile origination attempt or prior to user data being transferred with the correct
3 values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN, and
4 CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
5
Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '1' [NDSS Redirection]
RECORD_TYPE '00000010'
6
7 e. Verify the mobile station acquires base station #2.

8 f. Verify the call completes and user traffic is present. (i.e. Audio)
9 g. End the call.

10 7.2.3.3 Minimum Standard


11 The mobile station shall be redirected between channels within the same band class when the
12 base station sends a Service Redirection Message in response to a mobile station Origination
13 Message. The mobile station shall establish a call on the new system without any additional user
14 input.

15 7.2.4 NDSS Ignore CDMA

16 7.2.4.1 Definition
17 This test verifies that the mobile station does not respond to the CDMA Capability Message after
18 receiving a Service Redirection Message with IGNORE_CDMA='1'
19 Traceability: (See [4] );
20 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
21 2.6.2.4 Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
22 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
23 3.6.2.3 Mobile Station Directed Messages
24 3.7.2.3.2.16 Service Redirection Message {f-csch}
25 3.7.3.3.2.23 Service Redirection Message {r-dsch}

26 7.2.4.2 Method of measurement


27 a. Connect the mobile station and the base stations as shown in figure 7.1.7.2-1. Base
28 station #1 is a CDMA base station and base station #2 is AMPS.
29 b. Verify the mobile station acquires the CDMA system.
30 c. Setup a mobile station originated call.
31 d. Send a Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the correct
32 values of EXPECTED_SID and SYS_ORDERING for the new base station along with the
33 following parameters:
34

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-10

Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '1'
RECORD_TYPE '00000001'
IGNORE_CDMA '1'
1
2 e. Verify the mobile station acquires base station #2.
3 f. Verify the call completes and user traffic is present. (i.e. Audio).
4 g. End the call.
5 h. Send the CDMA Capability Message indicating CDMA is available from base station
6 #2.
7 i. Verify the mobile station ignores the CDMA Capability Message and remains in the
8 Idle Task on the current system.

9 7.2.4.3 Minimum Standard


10 After receiving the CDMA Capability Message from base station #2, the mobile station shall not
11 attempt to acquire the CDMA system again.

12 7.2.5 NDSS Return If Fail

13 7.2.5.1 Definition
14 This test verifies that when RETURN_IF_FAIL = '1' in the Service Redirection Message, the
15 mobile station will return to the serving system if it fails to acquire the system to which it was
16 directed.
17 Traceability: (See [4] );
18 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
19 2.6.2.4 Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
20 2.6.3.5 Mobile Station Origination Attempt Substate
21 3.6.2.3 Mobile Station Directed Messages
22 3.7.2.3.2.16 Service Redirection Message {f-csch}
23 3.7.3.3.2.23 Service Redirection Message {d-csch}

24 7.2.5.2 Method of measurement


25 a. Connect the mobile station and the base stations as shown in figure 7.1.1.2-1. Base
26 station #1 is a CDMA base station and base station #2 is a CDMA base station
27 b.Verify the mobile station acquires base station #1.
28 c. Ensure the mobile station cannot acquire base station #2
29 d. Setup a mobile station originated call.
30 e. Send a Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the correct
31 values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN, and
32 CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
33

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-11

Field Value
REDIRECT_TYPE '1' [NDSS redirection]
RECORD_TYPE '00000010'
RETURN_IF_FAIL '1'
1
2 f. Verify the mobile station returns to base station #1.

3 7.2.5.3 Minimum Standard


4 The mobile station shall return to the channel it originated on after the failed NDSS attempt. The
5 call may or may not complete depending on the mobile station and infrastructure specific
6 implementations.

7 7.3 Extended Global Service Redirection Tests

8 7.3.1 Extended Global Service Redirection between Band Classes

9 7.3.1.1 Definition
10 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives an Extended Global Service Redirection
11 Message directing it to another band class, the mobile station acquires the appropriate system.
12 Traceabilities: (see [4])
13 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
14 2.6.2.2.11 Extended Global Service Redirection Message
15 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
16 3.7.2.3.2.27 Extended Global Service Redirection Message

17 7.3.1.2 Method of Measurement


18 g. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 7.1.7.2-1. For this
19 test case, base station #1 and base station #2 are in different band classes.
20 Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station #1.
21 Send an Extended Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
22 correct values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN, and
23 CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
24
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 0
RECORD_TYPE ‘00000010’
25
26 Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the Mobile Station
27 Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.
28 Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-12

1 End the call.


2 Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.

3 Power off the mobile station.


4 Repeat steps c through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on
5 base station #2.

6 Repeat steps c through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on
7 base station #1 with the following modifications to the Extended Global Service Redirection
8 Message:
9
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 1
EXCL_P_REV_INCL 0
REDIRECT_P_MIN =< MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX >= MOB_P_REVp
10
11 Repeat step c with the following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection Message:
12
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 1
EXCL_P_REV_INCL 0
REDIRECT_P_MIN < MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX < MOB_P_REVp
13
14 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
15 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.
16 Repeat step c with following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection Message:
17
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 1
EXCL_P_REV_INCL 1
REDIRECT_P_MIN =< MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX >= MOB_P_REVp
18
19 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
20 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-13

2 7.3.1.3 Minimum Standard


3 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
4 call on the new system unless:
5 • MOB_P_REVp is not in the redirection mobile protocol revision range (The mobile station
6 shall then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the
7 Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.), or

8 • MOB_P_REVp is in the excluded mobile protocol revision range. (The mobile station shall
9 then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the Mobile
10 Station Idle State on the current system.).

11 7.3.2 Extended Global Service Redirection from CDMA to a Non-CDMA System

12 7.3.2.1 Definition
13 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives an Extended Global Service Redirection
14 Message directing it from CDMA to Amps, the mobile station acquires the appropriate system.
15 The mobile station should only be redirected to Non-CDMA systems that it supports. An
16 example would be an analog system defined in [21].
17 Traceabilities: (see [4])
18 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
19 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
20 2.6.2.2.11 Extended Global Service Redirection Message
21 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
22 3.7.2.3.2.27 Extended Global Service Redirection Message

23 7.3.2.2 Method of Measurement


24 h. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 7.1.7.2-1. For this
25 test case, base station #1 is a CDMA base station and base station #2 is a non-CDMA
26 base station
27 Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station #1.
28 Send an Extended Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
29 correct value of EXPECTED_SID for the new base station along with the following parameters:
30
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 0
RECORD_TYPE ‘00000001’
31
32 Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the Mobile Station
33 Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.
34 Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-14

1 End the call.


2 Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.

3 Power off mobile station.


4 Repeat steps b through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on
5 base station #1 with the following modifications to the Extended Global Service Redirection
6 Message:
7
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘0’
REDIRECT_P_MIN < MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX >= MOB_P_REVp
8
9 Repeat steps b and c with the following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection
10 Message:
11
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘0’
REDIRECT_P_MIN < MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX < MOB_P_REVp
12
13 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
14 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.
15 Repeat steps b and c with following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection
16 Message:
17
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
REDIRECT_P_MIN =< MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX >= MOB_P_REVp
18
19 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
20 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-15

1 7.3.2.3 Minimum Standard


2 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
3 call on the new system unless:
4 • MOB_P_REVp is not in the redirection mobile protocol revision range (The mobile station
5 shall then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the
6 Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.), or
7 • MOB_P_REVp is in the excluded mobile protocol revision range. (The mobile station shall
8 then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the Mobile
9 Station Idle State on the current system.)

10 7.3.3 Extended Global Service Redirection to a Different Channel in the Same


11 Band Class

12 7.3.3.1 Definition
13 This test verifies that when a mobile station receives an Extended Global Service Redirection
14 Message directing it to a different channel in the same band class, the mobile station acquires the
15 appropriate system.
16 Traceabilities: (see [4])
17 2.6.1.1.2 System Selection Using Current Redirection Criteria
18 2.6.2.2 Response to Overhead Information Operation
19 2.6.2.2.11 Extended Global Service Redirection Message
20 3.7.2.3.2.1 System Parameters Message
21 3.7.2.3.2.27 Extended Global Service Redirection Message

22 7.3.3.2 Method of Measurement


23 i. Connect mobile station to base station as shown in Figure 7.1.7.2-1. For this test case,
24 base station #1 and base station #2 are in the same band class with different CDMA
25 channels.
26 Verify the mobile station is operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on base station #1.
27 Send an Extended Global Service Redirection Message from the current base station with the
28 correct values of BAND_CLASS, EXPECTED_SID, EXPECTED_NID, NUM_CHAN, and
29 CDMA_CHAN for the new base station along with the following parameters:
30
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL 0
RECORD_TYPE ‘00000010’

31 Verify the mobile station enters the System Determination Substate of the Mobile Station
32 Initialization State and acquires the system to which it was redirected.
33 Setup a mobile station originated call. Verify user data in both directions.
34 End the call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-16

1 Verify the mobile station does not acquire the system from which it was redirected.
2 Power off the mobile station.

3 Repeat steps c through h with mobile station operating in Mobile Station Idle State on base
4 station #2.
5 Remove the channel for base station #2 from the mobiles stations preferred roaming list and
6 repeat steps b through h.
7 Repeat steps c through h with the mobile station operating in the Mobile Station Idle State on
8 base station #1 with the following modifications to the Extended Global Service Redirection
9 Message:
10
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘0’
REDIRECT_P_MIN < MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX > MOB_P_REVp
11
12 Repeat step c with the following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection Message:
13
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘0’
REDIRECT_P_MIN < MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX < MOB_P_REVp
14
15 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
16 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.

17 Repeat step c with following changes to the Extended Global Service Redirection Message:
18
Field Value
REDIRECT_ACCOLC ACCOLCp
REDIRECT_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
EXCL_P_REV_INCL ‘1’
REDIRECT_P_MIN =< MOB_P_REVp
REDIRECT_P_MAX >= MOB_P_REVp
19

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-17

1 Verify the mobile station ignores the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remains
2 in the Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.

3 7.3.3.3 Minimum Standard


4 The mobile station shall acquire the system to which it was directed and successfully originate a
5 call on the new system unless:
6 • MOB_P_REVp is not in the redirection mobile protocol revision range (The mobile station
7 shall then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the
8 Mobile Station Idle State on the current system.), or
9 • MOB_P_REVp is in the excluded mobile protocol revision range. (The mobile station shall
10 then ignore the Extended Global Service Redirection Message and remain in the Mobile
11 Station Idle State on the current system.)
12

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 7-18

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-1

1 8 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS)


2 Table 8-1 lists short message service tests.
3 Table 8-1 Short Message Service Tests

Test Title
No.
8.1 Mobile Station Terminated SMS Tests:
8.1.1 Paging Channel SMS Delivery Procedures
8.1.2 SMS Delivery Procedures when Message is Too Large for Paging Channel
8.1.3 Traffic Channel SMS Delivery Procedures
8.1.4 Delivery of Maximum Length Message
8.1.5 SMS Delivery Error - Mobile Station Short Message Buffer Full
8.1.6 Voice Mail Notification
8.2 Mobile Station Originated SMS Tests:
8.2.1 Access Channel SMS Delivery
8.2.2 SMS Delivery when Message is Too Large for Access Channel
8.2.3 Traffic Channel SMS Delivery
8.2.4 Unknown Destination Address
8.2.5 Mobile Station Originated SMS Disabled
8.2.6 SMS Not Supported by Base Station
8.3 Broadcast SMS Tests:
8.3.1 Broadcast SMS Delivery
4
5

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-2

1 A model of an SMS system per TIA/EIA-637-A is shown in Figure 8-1. SMS features are
2 distributed between a CDMA system and the SMS Message Center (MC), which together make
3 up the SMS system.
4
Um Ai W
MS BS PSTN
TE

MC
TE
5

6 Figure 8-1 SMS Reference Model

7 The base station (BS) in this model represents the entire cellular system infrastructure. It
8 contains transceiver equipment, the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and any Inter-Working
9 Function (IWF) required for network connection.
10 The MC element in this model represents a generic SMS message center function. The N
11 reference point represents one or more standardized interfaces between an SMS Message Center
12 and a base station. Terminal Equipment (TE) is voice or data equipment connected either directly
13 or indirectly to the MC. The mobile station (MS) represents the Bearer service end point.
14 Implementation details of an SMS system may vary. The MC may be either separate from or
15 physically integrated into the cellular system. MC interfaces may include features such as audio
16 response prompts and DTMF reception for dial-in access from voice telephones, as well as
17 appropriate menus and message entry protocols for dial in or dedicated data terminal access.
18 Mobile station interfaces may include keyboard and display features to support message entry.

19 8.1 Mobile Station Terminated SMS Tests


20 Unless otherwise noted, the following conditions apply for all tests in this section:
21 • Mobile station is capable of receiving short messages.

22 • The short message feature for the mobile station is activated.


23 • Base station has Power-up registration enabled (that is, POWER_UP_REG field is set to
24 ‘1’ in the System Parameters Message).
25 • Transport Layer messages shall enable the Bearer Reply Option.

26 8.1.1 Paging Channel SMS Delivery Procedures

27 8.1.1.1 Definition
28 This test verifies that a short message can be sent to a mobile station in the Mobile Station Idle
29 State.
30
31

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-3

1 Traceability: (See [13] );


2 2.4.1.1.1.1: Mobile SMS Message Termination
3 2.4.2.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination

4 8.1.1.2 Method of Measurement


5 a. Delete all outstanding short messages in the network for the mobile station.
6 b. Create a short message in the Message Center for the mobile station. Ensure that
7 the short message length is less than the maximum allowed size on the Paging
8 Channel so that it can be sent to the mobile station on the Paging Channel1.
9 c. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
10 d. Instruct the network to send the short message to the mobile station. Verify the
11 base station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station with the following
12 fields set as follows:
13
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
14
15 e. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message at the mobile station, verify the following:
16 • The mobile station alerts the user for the incoming short message and
17 correctly displays the received short message (if applicable).
18 • The mobile station transmits an Access Channel Data Burst Message to
19 acknowledge the short message and indicating no error (i.e. contains a ‘Cause
20 Codes’ parameter having ERROR_CLASS = ‘00’).

21 8.1.1.3 Minimum Standard


22 The base station shall send the short message to the mobile station over the Paging Channel
23 using the Data Burst Message. The correct and complete short message shall be received by the
24 mobile station. The mobile station shall alert the user upon short message reception and send an
25 access channel Data Burst Message.

26 8.1.2 SMS Delivery Procedures when Message Too Large for Paging Channel

27 8.1.2.1 Definition
28 This test verifies that if a short message length exceeds the maximum allowable length for
29 Paging Channel transport, the short message is delivered over the Traffic Channel.

1 This is base station implementation dependent

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-4

1 Traceability: (See [13] );


2 2.4.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
3 2.4.1.1.2.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
4 2.4.2.1.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures

5 8.1.2.2 Method of Measurement


6 a. Delete all outstanding short messages in the network for the mobile station.

7 b. Create a short message in the Message Center for the mobile station. Ensure that
8 the short message length is greater than the maximum length supported on the
9 Paging Channel2.

10 c. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
11 d. Instruct the network to send the short message to the mobile station. Verify the
12 following:
13 • The base station does not send a Data Burst Message to the mobile
14 station on the paging channel.
15 • The base station sends a General Page Message with either service option
16 6 or service option 14.
17 • After the mobile station enters the Conversation Substate, the base
18 station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station with the following fields
19 set as follows:.
20
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
21
22 e. Upon receiving Data Burst Message at the mobile station, verify the following:
23 • The mobile station alerts the user for the incoming short message and
24 correctly displays the received short message (if chosen).
25 • The mobile station transmits a Reverse Traffic Channel Data Burst
26 Message to acknowledge the short message and indicating no error (i.e. contains a
27 Cause Codes parameter having ERROR_CLASS = ‘00’).

28 8.1.2.3 Minimum Standard


29 The base station shall send the short message to the mobile station over the Traffic Channel in
30 the Conversation Substate. The correct and complete short message shall be received by the
31 mobile station. The mobile station shall alert the user upon short message delivery and send a
32 Data Burst Message.

2 This is base station implementation dependent

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-5

1 8.1.3 Traffic Channel SMS Delivery Procedures

2 8.1.3.1 Definition
3 This test verifies a short message can be sent to a mobile station when it is already in the
4 Conversation Substate.
5 Traceability: (See [13] );
6 2.4.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
7 2.4.1.1.2.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
8 2.4.2.1.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures
9 2.4.2.1.2.4: Mobile Station Message Termination in the Conversation Substate

10 8.1.3.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Delete all outstanding short messages in the network for the mobile station.
12 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.
13 c. While the mobile station is in the Conversation Substate, create a short message in
14 the Message Center for the mobile station and instruct the network to send the
15 short message to the mobile station. Verify the base station sends a Data Burst
16 Message to the mobile station, with the following fields set as follows:
17
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
18
19 d. Upon receiving Data Burst Message at the mobile station, verify the following:
20 • The mobile station alerts the user for the incoming short message and
21 correctly displays the received short message (if chosen).
22 • The mobile station transmits a Traffic Channel Data Burst Message to
23 acknowledge the short message and indicating no error (i.e. contains a Cause Codes
24 parameter having ERROR_CLASS = ‘00’).

25 8.1.3.3 Minimum Standard


26 The base station shall send the short message to the mobile station over the Traffic Channel
27 using the Data Burst Message. The correct and complete short message shall be received by the
28 mobile station. The mobile station shall alert the user upon short message delivery and send a
29 Data Burst Message.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-6

1 8.1.4 Delivery of Maximum Length Message

2 8.1.4.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the SMS transport layer capability to send to a mobile station a short message
4 of the maximum size. The test verifies delivery of the maximum length short message on the
5 traffic channel.
6 Traceability: (See [13] );
7 2.4.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
8 2.4.2.1.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures
9 3.4.2.1: SMS Point-to-Point Message
10 3.4.3.5: Bearer Reply Option

11 8.1.4.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Clear or read all short messages from the mobile station.
13 b. Delete all outstanding short messages in the Network for the mobile station.
14 c. Create in the Message Center a maximum size short message for the mobile station.
15 d. Instruct the network to send the short message to the mobile station. Verify the
16 base station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station on the traffic
17 channel, with the following fields set as follows:
18
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
19
20 e. Upon receiving Data Burst Message at the mobile station, verify the following:
21 • The mobile station alerts the user for the incoming short message and
22 correctly displays the received short message (if applicable).
23 • The mobile station transmits a Traffic Channel Data Burst Message to
24 acknowledge the short message and indicating no error (i.e. contains a Cause Codes
25 parameter having ERROR_CLASS = ‘00’).

26 8.1.4.3 Minimum Standard


27 The base station shall send a short message to the mobile station over the Traffic Channel using
28 the Data Burst Message. The correct and complete short message shall be received by the mobile
29 station. The base station shall receive a traffic channel Data Burst Message from the mobile
30 station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-7

1 8.1.5 SMS Delivery Error - Mobile Station Short Message Buffer Full

2 8.1.5.1 Definition
3 This test verifies SMS transport layer acknowledgment capability by sending to the mobile
4 station short messages until the mobile station short message buffer is full.
5 Traceability: (See [13] );
6 2.4.1.1.1.1: Mobile SMS Message Termination
7 2.4.2.1.1: Paging Channel Procedures
8 3.4.2.1: SMS Point-to-Point Message
9 3.4.3.6: Cause Codes

10 8.1.5.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Clear or read all short messages from the mobile station to ensure that the short
12 message buffer is empty.
13 b. Delete all outstanding short messages in the network for the mobile station.
14 c. Create in the Message Center a short message for the mobile station. Instruct the
15 network to send the short message to the mobile station. Verify the base station
16 sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station, with the following fields set as
17 follows:
18
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
19
20 Upon receiving the Data Burst Message, the mobile station transmits a Data Burst
21 Message to acknowledge the short message and indicating no error (i.e. contains a
22 Cause Codes parameter having ERROR_CLASS = ‘00’).
23 d. Repeat step c until the mobile station short message buffer is full.
24 e. Instruct the network to send one additional short message to the mobile station.
25 Verify the base station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station, with the
26 following fields set as follows:
27
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
28

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-8

1 f. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message sent in step e, verify that the mobile station
2 transmits an Access Channel Data Burst Message to acknowledge the short message
3 and indicating temporary error (i.e. contains a Cause Codes parameter having
4 ERROR_CLASS = ‘10’ and CAUSE_CODE=’35’).

5 8.1.5.3 Minimum Standard


6 The base station shall send the short messages to the mobile station. In response, the mobile
7 station shall send, and the base station shall receive the Data Burst Message. When the mobile
8 station short message buffer is full, the Data Burst Message that the mobile station sends to the
9 base station as acknowledgment shall indicate Terminal Resource Shortage (Cause Code set to
10 35).

11 8.1.6 Voice Mail Notification

12 8.1.6.1 Definition
13 Voice Mail Notification (VMN) notifies the subscriber of voice mail messages using the Voice
14 Mail Notification teleservice and Short Message Service protocol. Notification can be a tone,
15 light, or display, and is manufacturer dependent.
16 Traceability: (See [13] );
17 4.3.5: Voice Mail Notification (VMN)
18 4.5.12: Number of Messages

19 8.1.6.2 Method of Measurement


20 a. Configure the system as shown in Figure 8.1.6.2-1.
21

22
23 Figure 8.1.6.2-1 Functional Setup for Voice Mail Notification
24 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
25 c. Instruct the network to send a Voice Mail Notification (corresponds to a SMS Point-
26 to-Point message) to the mobile station. Verify that the base station sends a Data
27 Burst Message, with the BURST_TYPE field set to ‘000011’, with the following
28 parameters of the SMS message set as follows:

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-9

1 1) Teleservice Identifier parameter, IDENTIFIER = Voice Mail Notification (x1003).


2 2) Message Identifier subparameter, MESSAGE_TYPE = Deliver (0x1).
3 3) Number of Messages subparameter, MESSAGE_CT = 99.
4 d. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message, verify that the following:
5 • The mobile station transmits an SMS Acknowledge message via an
6 Access Channel Data Burst Message to acknowledge the short message and
7 indicating no error (i.e. contains a Cause Codes parameter having ERROR_CLASS =
8 ‘00’).
9 • The mobile station indicates to the user the number of voice mail
10 messages available as indicated by the network.
11 e. Repeat step c, setting the MESSAGE_CT = 0.
12 f. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message, verify that the mobile station indicates to
13 the user no voice mail messages are available.

14 8.1.6.3 Minimum Standard


15 The base station shall send Voice Mail Notification to the mobile station. The mobile station
16 shall acknowledge receipt of the Notification. The mobile station shall indicate the number of
17 messages stored at the voice mail system.

18 8.2 Mobile Station Originated SMS Tests

19 8.2.1 Access Channel SMS Delivery

20 8.2.1.1 Definition
21 This test verifies that a short message can be sent to the Message Center (MC) by a mobile
22 station using the access channel. The short message length chosen for this test is such that it
23 doesn’t exceed the maximum message length allowed on the Access Channel.
24 Traceability: (See [13] );
25 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination
26 2.4.2.1.1.1: Mobile SMS Message Origination

27 8.2.1.2 Method of Measurement


28 a. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
29 b. Create a short message at the mobile station, of a length smaller than the maximum
30 message length allowed on the access channel, and instruct the mobile station to
31 send the short message to the network3. Verify the mobile station sends a Data
32 Burst Message to the base station over the access channel, with the following fields
33 set as follows:
34

3 The maximum allowed size is dependent on the maximum access channel capsule size signaled
in the Access Parameters Message and is also implementation dependent.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-10

Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
1
2 c. Verify that the Message Center receives the short message and sends a layer 2
3 acknowledgement to the mobile station.

4 8.2.1.3 Minimum Standard


5 The mobile station shall send the short message to the Message Center over the Access Channel.
6 The Message Center shall receive the correct and complete short message and the mobile station
7 shall receive the layer 2 acknowledgement.

8 8.2.2 SMS Delivery when Message is Too Large for Access Channel

9 8.2.2.1 Definition
10 This test verifies a mobile station in the Mobile Station Idle State can originate a short message
11 of length larger than the maximum length allowed on the access channel and that the message is
12 delivered to the Message Center over the Traffic Channel.
13 Traceability: (See [13] ) ;
14 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination
15 2.4.2.1.2.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures

16 8.2.2.2 Method of Measurement


17 a. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
18 b. Create a short message at the mobile station, of a length larger than the maximum
19 message length allowed on the access channel, and instruct the mobile station to
20 send the short message to the network.
21 c. Verify the following:
22 • The mobile station does not send the Data Burst Message over the access
23 channel
24 • The mobile station sends an Origination Message to originate as SMS call with
25 the SERVICE_OPTION field set to either 6 or 14.
26 • After entering the Conversation Substate, the mobile station sends a Data Burst
27 Message, with the following fields set as follows:
28

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-11

Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
1
2 d. Verify the Message Center receives the short message.
3 e. Verify that upon sending the short message, the mobile station sends a Release
4 Order to release the dedicated channels.

5 8.2.2.3 Minimum Standard


6 The mobile station shall send the short message to the Message Center over the Traffic Channel.
7 The Message Center shall receive the short message. The mobile station shall release the
8 dedicated channels after delivery of short message.

9 8.2.3 Traffic Channel SMS Delivery

10 8.2.3.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that a short message can be sent by the mobile station when it is in the
12 Conversation Substate.
13 Traceability: (See [13] );
14 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination
15 2.4.1.1.2.4: Mobile Station Message Origination in the Conversation Substate
16 2.4.2.1.1.1: Mobile SMS Message Origination
17 2.4.2.1.2.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures

18 8.2.3.2 Method of Measurement

19 a. Setup a mobile station originated call.


20 b. While mobile station is in the Conversation Substate, create a short message and
21 instruct the mobile station to send the short message to the network. Verify the
22 mobile station sends a Data Burst Message, with the following fields set as follows:
23
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
24
25 c. Verify the Message Center receives the short message.
26 d. Verify that upon sending the short message, the mobile station does not attempt to
27 release the dedicated channels.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-12

1 8.2.3.3 Minimum Standard


2 The mobile station shall send the short message to the Message Center while it is in the
3 Conversation Substate.
4 8.2.4 Unknown Destination Address

5 8.2.4.1 Definition
6 This test verifies the base station can process a mobile station originated short message with an
7 unknown destination address and will inform the mobile station regarding an unknown
8 destination address.
9 Traceability: (See [13] );
10 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination
11 2.4.2.1.2.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures
12 3.4.2.1: SMS Point-to-Point Message
13 3.4.3.6: Cause Codes

14 8.2.4.2 Method of Measurement

15 a. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
16 b. Create a short message at the mobile station, but with an unknown address in the
17 destination address field, and instruct the mobile station to send the short message
18 to the base station. Verify the mobile station sends a Data Burst Message, with the
19 following fields set as follows:
20
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0

21 c. Verify the Message Center receives the short message and the base station sends a
22 Data Burst Message to the mobile station indicating ‘an unknown address’

23 8.2.4.3 Minimum Standard


24 The base station shall route the short message to the Message Center. A Data Burst Message
25 shall be sent to the mobile station indicating an unknown address.

26 8.2.5 Mobile Station Originated SMS Disabled

27 8.2.5.1 Definition
28 This test verifies that when mobile station originated SMS is not activated in the network, the
29 base station can process a mobile station originated short message and inform the mobile station
30 that short message origination has been denied.
31 Traceability: (See [13] );
32 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-13

1 2.4.2.1.2.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures


2 3.4.2.1: SMS Point-to-Point Message
3 3.4.3.6: Cause Codes

4 8.2.5.2 Method of Measurement


5 a. Ensure the mobile station originated short message feature for the mobile station is
6 not activated in the network.
7 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
8 c. Create a short message at the mobile station, with the Bearer Reply Option
9 parameter set, and instruct the mobile station to send the short message to the
10 base station. Verify the mobile station sends a Data Burst Message, with the
11 following fields set as follows:
12
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
13
14 d. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message at the base station, verify the following:
15 • The base station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station, with
16 an indication that the short message origination has been denied.
17 • The base station does not route the short message to the Message
18 Center.

19 8.2.5.3 Minimum Standard


20 The base station shall not route the short message to the Message Center and the base station
21 shall send a Data Burst Message to the mobile station indicating the SMS has been denied.

22 8.2.6 SMS Not Supported by Base Station

23 8.2.6.1 Definition
24 This test verifies the base station can process a mobile station originated short message, and
25 inform the mobile station that SMS is not supported by the base station.
26 Traceability: (See [13] );
27 2.4.1.1.1.2: Mobile SMS Message Origination
28 2.4.2.1.2.2: Base Station Traffic Channel Procedures
29 3.4.2.1: SMS Point-to-Point Message
30 3.4.3.6: Cause Codes

31 8.2.6.2 Method of Measurement


32 a. Ensure the base station is not capable of SMS or that SMS has been disabled for
33 this test.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-14

1 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
2 c. Create a short message at the mobile station, with Bearer Reply Option parameter
3 set, and instruct the mobile station to send the short message to the network. Verify
4 the mobile station sends a Data Burst Message, with the following fields set as
5 follows:
6
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
7
8 d. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message at the base station, verify the following:
9 • The base station sends a Data Burst Message to the mobile station, with
10 an indication that SMS is not supported by this base station.
11 • The base station does not route the short message to the Message
12 Center.

13 8.2.6.3 Minimum Standard


14 The base station shall not route the short message to the Message Center and the base station
15 shall send a Data Burst Message to the mobile station indicating that SMS is not supported by
16 the base station.

17 8.3 Broadcast SMS Tests

18 8.3.1 Broadcast SMS Delivery

19 8.3.1.1 Definition
20 This test verifies that mobile stations configured to receive broadcast SMS are able to receive
21 broadcast SMS messages sent by the network.
22 Traceability: (See [13] );
23 2.4.1.2.1: Paging Channel Procedures for Broadcast SMS
24 4.3.1.3: Broadcast Messaging Service

25 8.3.1.2 Method of Measurement


26 a. Connect the base station and mobile stations as shown in Figure 8.3.1.2-1.
27 b. Ensure mobile station #1 is configured to receive broadcast SMS while mobile
28 station #2 is not configured to receive broadcast SMS.
29 c. Power on the mobile stations and wait until they are registered.
30 d. Clear any outstanding broadcast messages in the network.
31

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-15

1
2
3 Figure 8.3.1.2-1 Functional Setup for Broadcast SMS Tests
4
5 e. Create broadcast message #1 shown in Table 8.3.1.2-1 and instruct the network to
6 broadcast it. Verify the base station sends a Data Burst Message, with the following
7 fields set as follows:
8
Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
9
10 Table 8.3.1.2-1 Broadcast Messages and Priority

Broadcast Message Broadcast Message Priority Priority Indicator Value


Message #1 Normal 00
Message #2 Emergency 11
11
12 f. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message, verify that mobile station #1 displays
13 broadcast message #1 (as a Normal message, if such display is supported) and
14 mobile station #2 does not.
15 g. Create broadcast message #2 shown in Table 8.3.1.2-2 and instruct the network to
16 broadcast it. Verify the base station sends a Data Burst Message, with the following
17 fields set as follows:
18

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 8-16

Field Value
MSG_NUMBER 1 (‘00000001’)
BURST_TYPE 3 (‘000011’)
NUM_MSGS 1 (‘00000001’)
NUM_FIELDS Greater than 0
1
2 h. Upon receiving the Data Burst Message, verify both mobile stations display
3 broadcast message #2 (as a Emergency message, if such a display is supported)

4 8.3.1.3 Minimum Standard


5 Both mobile stations shall display broadcast message #2 (Emergency). Mobile station #2 shall
6 not display broadcast message #1 (Normal). All received broadcast messages shall be correct and
7 complete.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-1

1 9 SUBSCRIBER CALLING FEATURES TESTS

2 Note: Interaction between calling features may be infrastructure unique.


3 Table 9-1 lists subscriber calling features tests.
4 Table 9-1 Subscriber Calling Features Tests

Test No. Title


9.1 Call Forwarding
9.2 Three-Way Calling
9.3 Land Party to Mobile Station Caller ID
9.4 Call Waiting
9.5 Message Waiting Indicator
9.6 Land Party to Mobile Station Calling Name Presentation
9.7 Display Records
9.8 TTY/TDD
9.9 Answer Holding
9.10 User Selective Call Holding

5 9.1 Call Forwarding

6 9.1.1 Definition
7 These tests verify that the mobile station can activate and deactivate various Call Forwarding
8 features, including call forwarding to a pre-registered number and call forwarding to voice mail.
9 These features shall be tested for all applicable conditions, including Call Forwarding –
10 Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding - Busy (CFB), Call Forwarding- default (CFD), and Call
11 Forwarding-No-Answer (CFNA.
12 Traceability: (See [4] );
13 3.7.5.5: Signaling Message Encryption
14 Traceability: (See [22] );
15 5.2: Mobile SMS Message Termination
16 5.3: Paging Channel Procedures
17 5.4
18 5.5

19 9.1.2 Method of Measurement

20 9.1.2.1 Call Forwarding, Unconditional

21 CFU permits a called subscriber to send incoming calls addressed to the called
22 subscriber’s Directory Number to another Directory Number (forward-to number) or to
23 the called subscriber’s designated voice mail box. If this feature is active, calls are
24 forwarded regardless of the condition of the termination.

25 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-2

1 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
2 c. Dial the call forwarding unconditional (CFU) feature activation code, followed by the
3 forward-to number, followed by SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the
4 mobile station.
5 d. Setup a call from a land party to the mobile station. Verify call is forwarded and that
6 if the Network directs the mobile station to “Ping Ring” it plays a single burst of 500
7 ms.
8 e. Answer the call on the forward line, and verify the audio path.
9

10
11 Figure 9.1.2.1-1 Functional Setup for Testing Call Forwarding
12
13 f. End call.
14 g. Dial the call forwarding unconditional (CFU) deactivation feature code followed by
15 SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile station.

16 h. Setup a call from the land party to the mobile station.


17 i. Verify the call completes at the mobile station.
18 j. Repeat the test except for at step c, dial the call forwarding unconditional (CFU)
19 activation feature code, followed by 8 (voice-mail), followed by SEND. Verify feature
20 update confirmation at the mobile station.

21 9.1.2.2 Call Forwarding, Busy

22 CFB permits a called subscriber to have the system send incoming calls to another
23 Directory Number (forward-to number) or to the called subscriber’s designated voice
24 mail box, when the subscriber is engaged in a call or service.
25 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
26 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-3

1 c. Dial the call forwarding busy (CFB) activation feature code, followed by the forward-
2 to number, followed by SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile
3 station.
4 d. Place a mobile under test in a voice or data call.
5 e. Setup a call from a land party to the mobile station. Verify the call is forwarded to
6 the forward-to number or voice mail, and that if the Network directs the mobile
7 station to “Ping Ring” it plays a single burst of 500 ms.
8 f. Answer the call on the forward line, and verify the audio path.
9 g. End all calls.
10 h. Dial the call forwarding busy (CFB) deactivation feature code followed by SEND.
11 Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile station.
12 i. Take the mobile under test out of the voice or data call as specified in step d.
13 j. Setup a call from the land party to the mobile station.
14 k. Verify the call completes at the mobile station.
15 l. Repeat the test except that at step c, dial the call forwarding busy (CFB) activation
16 feature code, followed by 8 (voice-mail), followed by SEND. Verify feature update
17 confirmation at the mobile station.

18 9.1.2.3 Call Forwarding, Default

19 CFD permits a called subscriber to have the system send incoming calls to another
20 Directory Number (forward-to number) or to the called subscriber’s designated voice
21 mail box, when the subscriber is engaged in a call, does not respond to paging, does not
22 answer the call within a specified period after being alerted or is otherwise inaccessible.
23 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
24 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
25 c. Dial the call forwarding default (CFD) activation feature code, followed by the
26 forward-to number, followed by SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the
27 mobile station.
28 d. Setup a call from a land party to the mobile station. Verify the call is forwarded and
29 that if the Network directs the mobile station to “Ping Ring” it plays a single burst of
30 500 ms.
31 e. Answer the call on the forward line, and verify the audio path.
32 f. End call.
33 g. Dial the call forwarding default (CFD) deactivation feature code followed by SEND.
34 Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile station.
35 h. Setup a call from the land party to the mobile station.
36 i. Verify the call completes at the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-4

1 j. Repeat the test except that at step c, dial call forwarding default (CFD) activation
2 feature code, followed by 8 (voice-mail), followed by SEND. Verify feature update
3 confirmation at the mobile station.

4 9.1.2.4 Call Forwarding, No Answer


5 CFNA permits a called subscriber to have the system send incoming calls addressed to the
6 called subscriber’s Directory Number to another Directory Number (forward-to number) or
7 to the called subscriber’s designated voice mail box, when the subscriber fails to answer.
8 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.

9 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
10 c. Dial the call forwarding-no answer (CFNA) activation feature code, followed by the
11 forward-to number, followed by SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the
12 mobile station.
13 d. Place a mobile under test in a voice or data call.
14 e. Setup a call from a land party to the mobile station. Verify the call is forwarded to
15 the forward-to number or voice mail, and that if the Network directs the mobile
16 station to “Ping Ring” it plays a single burst of 500 ms.
17 f. Answer the call on the forward line, and verify the audio path.
18 g. End all calls.
19 h. Dial the call forwarding-no answer (CFNA) deactivation feature code followed by
20 SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile station.
21 i. Take the mobile under test out of the voice or data call as specified in step d.
22 j. Setup a call from the land party to the mobile station.
23 k. Verify the call completes at the mobile station.
24 l. Repeat the test except that at step c, dial call forwarding no-answer (CFNA)
25 activation feature code, followed by 8 (voice-mail), followed by SEND. Verify feature
26 update confirmation at the mobile station.

27 9.1.3 Minimum Standard


28 When call forwarding is activated, calls shall be forwarded to the forward-to number or voice-
29 mail as programmed by the user. When call forwarding is deactivated, the calls shall terminate at
30 the mobile station normally.

31 9.2 Three-Way Calling

32 9.2.1 Definition
33 This test will verify that a mobile station authorized for Three-Way Calling can add a third party
34 to an established two-way call.
35 Traceability: IS-2000.5; 2.7.2.3.2.3, IS-664, 5.22
36

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-5

1 9.2.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile stations as shown in Figure 9.2.2-1.
3

4
5 Figure 9.2.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing Three-Way Calling
6
7 b. Setup a call from mobile station #1 to mobile station #2 and verify user data in both
8 directions.
9 c. Instruct mobile station #1 to put mobile station#2 on hold. Verify that mobile
10 station #1 sends a Flash with Information Message to put mobile station #2 on hold.
11 Verify mobile station #2 is put on hold.
12 d. Using mobile station #1, dial a land station. Verify that mobile station #1 sends a
13 Flash with Information Message.
14 e. Wait for the land station to ring. Instruct the land party to connect the call (second
15 leg of the three-way call) and verify user data.

16 f. Instruct mobile station #1 to make the three-way connection. Verify mobile station
17 #1 sends a Flash with Information Message. Verify the three-way connection is
18 established.
19 g. Instruct mobile station #1 to disconnect the third-leg of the three way call. Verify
20 that a Flash with Information Message is sent from mobile station 1. Verify the
21 three-way connection is disconnected and the call is returned to its original two-way
22 state.
23 h. End call from mobile station 1. Verify the connection is released.

24 9.2.3 Minimum Standard


25 Mobile station #1 shall successfully perform the addition and dropping of a third party to a two-
26 way connection. All calls shall be successful.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-6

1 9.3 Land Party to Mobile Station Caller ID

2 9.3.1 Caller ID from Mobile Station Idle State

3 9.3.1.1 Definition
4 This test will verify that a mobile station in the Mobile Station Idle State properly displays the
5 Calling Party Number (CPN).
6 Traceability: (See [4] );
7 2.7.4: Information Records
8 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message
9 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message
10 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash with Information Message
11 3.7.5: Information Records
12 IS-2000-6;
13 3.7.2.2: Calling Number Identification (CNI)

14 9.3.1.2 Method of Measurement


15 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
16 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
17 c. Setup a call to the mobile station using a 10-digit CPN and set the Presentation
18 Indicator (PI) field of the CPN information record to '00' (Presentation Allowed).
19 Verify that the base station sends a Feature Notification Message, Alert With
20 Information Message, or a Flash With Information Message with the CPN information
21 record with the PI field set to ‘00’.
22 d. Verify the mobile station receives and displays the CPN.
23 e. Verify user data in both directions.
24 f. End call.
25 g. Setup a call to the mobile station using a 10-digit CPN and set the Presentation
26 Indicator (PI) field of the CPN information record to '01' (Presentation Restricted).
27 Verify that the base station sends a Feature Notification Message, Alert With
28 Information Message, or a Flash With Information Message with the CPN information
29 record with the PI field set to ‘01’.
30 h. Repeat steps d through f, except in step d, verify the mobile station does not display
31 the CPN and that it indicates the CPN is restricted.
32 i. Setup a call to the mobile station using a 10-digit CPN and set the Presentation
33 Indicator (PI) field of the CPN information record to '10' (Number Not Available).
34 Verify that the base station sends a Feature Notification Message, Alert With
35 Information Message, or a Flash With Information Message with the CPN information
36 record with the PI field set to ‘00’.
37 j. Repeat steps d through f, except in step d, verify the mobile station does not display
38 the CPN and that it indicates the CPN is not available.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-7

1 9.3.1.3 Minimum Standard


2 The mobile station in Mobile Station Idle State shall:
3 • Display the CPN when the PI field of the CPN information record is set to '00'
4 • Not display the CPN but shall indicate the CPN is restricted when the PI field of the CPN
5 information record is set to '01'
6 • Not display the CPN but shall indicate the CPN is not available when the PI field of the
7 CPN information record is set to '10'.

8 9.3.2 Caller ID from Conversation State

9 9.3.2.1 Definition
10 This test will verify the mobile station in conversation state (with call waiting enabled) properly
11 displays the Calling Party Number (CPN).
12 Traceability: (See [4] );
13 2.7.4: Information Records
14 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message
15 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message
16 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash with Information Message
17 3.7.5: Information Records
18 IS-2000-6;
19 3.7.2.2: Calling Number Identification (CNI)

20 9.3.2.2 Method of Measurement


21 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
22 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
23 c. Setup a call to the mobile station using a 10-digit CPN and set the Presentation
24 Indicator (PI) field of the CPN information record to '00' (Presentation Allowed).
25 Verify that the base station sends a Feature Notification Message, Alert With
26 Information Message, or a Flash With Information Message with the CPN information
27 record with the PI field set to ‘00’.
28 d. Verify the mobile station properly receives and displays the CPN (of caller #1).

29 e. Verify user data in both directions.


30 f. Maintain the call and setup another call from caller #2 to the mobile station using a
31 different 10-digit CPN and set the Presentation Indicator (PI) field of the calling party
32 (caller #2) to '00' (Presentation Allowed). Verify that the base station sends an Alert
33 With Information Message or Flash With Information Message with the CPN
34 information record with the PI field set to ‘00’.
35 g. Verify the mobile station properly receives and displays the CPN (of caller #2).
36 h. End both calls.
37 i. If applicable, repeat test with the mobile station in AMPS mode.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-8

1 j. Repeat steps b through i, except in step c and f, set the PI field of the calling parties
2 to '01' (Presentation Restricted). Verify that in step d and g, the mobile station does
3 not display the CPN and that it indicates the CPN is restricted.
4 k. Repeat steps b through i, except in step c and f, set the PI field of the calling parties
5 to '10' (Number Not Available). Verify that in step d and g, the mobile station does
6 not display the CPN, and that it indicates the CPN is not available.

7 9.3.2.3 Minimum Standard


8 The mobile station in Conversation Substate with call waiting enabled shall:
9 • Display the CPN when the PI field of the CPN information record is set to '00'
10 • Not display the CPN but shall indicate the CPN is restricted when the PI field of the CPN
11 information record is set to '01'
12 • Not display the CPN but shall indicate the CPN is not available when the PI field of the
13 CPN information record is set to '10'.

14 9.4 Call Waiting

15 9.4.1 Definition
16 This test verifies that a mobile station in a two-way conversation with call waiting enabled, will
17 receive notification of waiting calls. This test will verify that the mobile station will send a flash
18 request to connect to the waiting call.
19 Traceability: (See [4] );
20 3.7.5.5: Signal, 3.6.7.2: Requirements

21 9.4.2 Method of Measurement


22 a. Connect the mobile station to the base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
23 b. Ensure call waiting is enabled.
24 c. Make a mobile station to land party #1 call. Verify user data in both directions.

25 d. Setup a call from land party #2 to the mobile station. Wait for ringback on land
26 party #2 and the call waiting notification on the mobile station.
27 e. Press SEND on the mobile station. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With
28 Information Message to the base station to switch over to land party #1.
29 f. Verify land party #1 is on hold, and that a voice path is established between the
30 mobile station and land party #2.
31 g. Press SEND on the mobile station to put land party #2 on hold, and reconnect the
32 voice path to land party #1. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information
33 Message to the base station.
34 h. End land party #1 call.
35 i. Press SEND on the mobile station. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With
36 Information Message to the base station to switch over to land party #2.

37 j. Verify user data between the mobile station and land party #2.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-9

1 k. End call.
2 l. Disable call waiting.

3 m. Setup a mobile station originated call.


4 n. Verify user data in both directions.
5 o. Setup a call from land party #2 to the mobile station. Wait for the busy tone on land
6 party 2. Ensure call waiting tone is NOT heard on the mobile station.
7 p. End all calls.

8 9.4.3 Minimum Standard


9 If call waiting is enabled the base station shall send a call waiting tone to the mobile station
10 during a two-way conversation indicating another call is waiting. The mobile station shall send a
11 flash request to connect with land party #2, while land party #1 is put on hold. With call waiting
12 disabled, ensure the mobile station under test detects no call waiting tone.

13 9.5 Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)

14 9.5.1 MWI when the mobile station is in Mobile Station Idle State

15 9.5.1.1 Definition
16 MWI notifies the subscriber of voice mail messages when the mobile station is in Mobile Station
17 Idle State. Notification can be a tone, light or display and is manufacturer dependent.
18 Traceability: (See [4] );
19 3.7.5.6: Message Waiting
20 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message

21 9.5.1.2 Method of Measurement


22 a. Configure the system as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1
23 b. Enable MWI at the base station.
24 c. Power up the mobile station.
25 d. Instruct the base station to send a Feature Notification Message to the mobile
26 station to instruct message waiting, setting the number of messages to a value
27 ranging from 0 to 31.
28 e. Verify the RECORD TYPE field in the Feature Notification Message is set to
29 ‘00000110’ for a Message Waiting information record type.

30 f. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the user interface displays
31 the correct number of messages based on the number of messages indicated in the
32 received messages.
33 g. Repeat steps d through f, setting the number of messages to a different value from
34 that set in step d.
35 h. Power off the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-10

1 9.5.1.3 Minimum Standard


2 The mobile station shall accurately report the number of voice mail messages waiting to be
3 processed in its Voice Mail System following an autonomous registration.

4 9.5.2 MWI when the mobile station is in Conversation State

5 9.5.2.1 Definition
6 MWI notifies the subscriber of voice mail messages when the mobile station is in Conversation
7 Substate. Notification can be a tone, light or display and is manufacturer dependent. While in the
8 conversation state, MWI notifies the subscriber when the number of new and retrieved voice
9 mail messages change.
10 Traceability: (See [4] );
11 3.7.5.6: Message Waiting
12 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message

13 9.5.2.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Configure the system as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
15 b. Enable MWI at the base station.
16 c. Power on the mobile station.
17 d. Setup a mobile station originated call.
18 e. Verify user data in both directions.
19 f. Instruct the base station to send a Flash With Information Message to the mobile
20 station to indicate message waiting, setting the number of messages to a value
21 smaller than the maximum number of messages supported by the mobile station.
22 g. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the user interface displays
23 the correct number of messages based on the number of messages indicated in the
24 received message. If the mobile station does not support the number of messages
25 indicated, it should display the maximum number of messages it supports.
26 h. Repeat steps d through f, setting the number of messages to a value greater than
27 the maximum number of messages supported by the mobile station.
28 i. Power off the mobile station.

29 9.5.2.3 Minimum Standard


30 The mobile station should accurately report the number of voice mail messages waiting to be
31 processed in its voice mail system when the mobile station is in Conversation Substate. If the
32 mobile station does not support the number of messages waiting to be processed in its voice mail
33 system, it should display the maximum number of messages it supports.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-11

1 9.6 Land Party to Mobile Station Calling Name Presentation

2 9.6.1 Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) from Mobile Station Idle State

3 9.6.1.1 Definition
4 This test will verify that a mobile station in the Mobile Station Idle State properly displays the
5 Calling Name Information (CNA).
6 Traceability: (See [4] );
7 3.7.5.3: Calling Party Number

8 9.6.1.2 Method of Measurement

9 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
10 b. Ensure the mobile station has been assigned CNAP Class-of -Service and that the
11 mobile station has not been pre-programmed (phone book) with any calling party
12 name/number information.
13 c. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
14 d. Setup a call to the mobile station from a 10-digit Calling Party Number (CPN).
15 Instruct the base station to indicate CNA with Presentation Allowed. Verify that the
16 base station sends a Feature Notification Message, Alert With Information Message,
17 or a Flash With Information Message with an Extended Display information record
18 and CPN information record with the PI field set to “00” (Presentation Allowed).
19 e. Verify the mobile station receives and displays the CNA and Calling Number
20 Identification (CNI).
21 f. Verify user data in both directions.
22 g. End call.
23 h. Power down the mobile station.
24 i. Change the PI field of the CPN information record to “01” (Presentation Restricted).
25 j. Repeat steps d through i, except step f, verify the mobile station does not display the
26 CNA or CNI and that it indicates the CNA is restricted, during the first alerting
27 cycle.
28 k. Change the PI field of the CPN information record to “10” (Number Not Available).
29 l. Repeat steps d through, except step f, verify the mobile station does not display the
30 CNA or CNI and that it indicates the CNA is not available, during the first alerting
31 cycle.

32 9.6.1.3 Minimum Standard


33 The mobile station in Mobile Station Idle State shall:
34 a. Display the CNA and CNI when the PI field of the CPN information record is set to
35 “00”.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-12

1 b. Not display the CNA or CNI but shall indicate the CNA is restricted when the PI field
2 of the CPN information record is set to “01”.

3 c. Not display the CNA or CNI but shall indicate the CNA is not available when the PI
4 field of the CPN information record is set to "10".

5 9.6.2 Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) from Conversation State

6 9.6.2.1 Definition
7 This test will verify that the mobile station in Conversation Substate (with call waiting enabled)
8 properly displays the Calling Party Name (CNA).
9 Traceability: (See [4] );
10 3.7.5.3: Calling Party Number

11 9.6.2.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
13 b. Ensure mobile station is assigned CNAP Class-of-Service, and that the mobile
14 station has not been pre-programmed (phone book) with calling name/number
15 information.
16 c. Set Presentation Indicator (PI) field of the CPN information record of calling parties 1
17 and 2 to “00” (Presentation Allowed).
18 d. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
19 e. Setup a call from party 1 to the mobile station (from 10-digit CPN 1).
20 f. Verify the mobile station receives and displays the CNA and CNI (of party 1) during
21 the first alerting cycle.
22 g. Verify user data in both directions.
23 h. Maintain the call and setup another call from party 2 to the mobile station (from 10-
24 digit CPN 2). Verify that the base station sends a Alert With Information Message or
25 Flash With Information Message with an Extended Display information record and
26 the PI field set to “00” (Presentation Allowed).

27 i. Verify the mobile station receives and displays the CNA and CNI (of party 2) with
28 delivery of the call waiting indication.
29 j. End both calls, then power down the mobile station.
30 k. Power down the mobile station.
31 l. Change the PI field of the CPN information record of both calling parties (1 and 2) to
32 '01' (Presentation Restricted).
33 m. Repeat steps d through k, except in step f and i, verify the mobile station does not
34 display the CNA and that it indicates the CNA is restricted.
35 n. Change the PI field of the CPN information record of both calling parties (1 and 2) to
36 '10' (Number Not Available).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-13

1 o. Repeat steps d through k, except in step f and i, verify the mobile station does not
2 display the CNA and that it indicates the CNA is not available.

3 9.6.2.3 Minimum Standard


4 The mobile station in conversation state with call waiting enabled shall:
5 a. Display the CNA and CNI when the PI field of the CPN information record is set to
6 '00'.
7 b. Not display the CNA or CNI, but shall indicate the CNA is restricted when the PI
8 field of the CPN information record is set to '01'.

9 c. Not display the CNA or CNI, but shall indicate the CNA is not available when the PI
10 field of the CPN information record is set to ‘10'.

11 9.6.3 Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) with Forwarding

12 9.6.3.1 Definition
13 This test verifies the mobile station receiving a forwarded call from party 2 (redirecting party),
14 properly displays redirection information from calling party 1 (originating party) and party 2.
15 Traceability: (See [4] );
16 3.7.5.3: Calling Party Number

17 9.6.3.2 Method of Measurement


18 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in figure 9.1.2.1-1.
19 b. Ensure the mobile station is assigned the CNAP Class-of-Service and that the
20 mobile station has not been pre-programmed (phone book) with calling
21 name/number information.
22 c. Ensure party 2 has been assigned Call Forwarding Unconditional, programmed to
23 forward calls to the mobile station directory number, and that this service is
24 invoked.
25 d. Set Presentation Indicator field of the CPN information record of calling parties 1
26 and 2 to '00' (Presentation Allowed).
27 e. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
28 f. Setup a call from party 1 to party 2 (from 10-digit CPN 1). Verify that the base
29 station sends an Alert With Information Message or Flash With Information Message
30 with an Extended Display information record and the PI field set to “00”
31 (Presentation Allowed).
32 g. Verify the call is forwarded to the mobile station and that the mobile station
33 properly receives and displays the CNA and CNI of both the original calling party 1
34 and the redirected party 2 during the first alerting cycle.
35 h. Verify user data in both directions for party 1 (originating party), and the mobile
36 station.
37 i. End call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-14

1 j. Power-off the mobile station.


2 k. Change the PI field of the CPN information record of the calling parties (1 and 2) to
3 '01' (Presentation Restricted).
4 l. Repeat steps e through j, except step g,
5 m. Verify the mobile station does not display the CNA or CNI associated with parties
6 1 and 2, and that it indicates the CNA is restricted during the first alerting cycle.
7 n. Change the PI field of the CPN information record of the calling party to '10'
8 (Number Not Available).

9 o. Repeat steps e through j, except step g, verify the mobile station does not display
10 the CNA or CNI associated with parties 1 and 2 and that it indicates the CNA is not
11 available, during the first alerting cycle.

12 9.6.3.3 Minimum Standard


13 The mobile station receiving a redirected call shall:
14 a. Display the CNA and CNI associated with both the originating and redirecting
15 calling parties when the PI field of the CPN information record of both are set to '00'.
16 b. Not display the CNA or CNI associated with both the originating and redirecting
17 calling parties but shall indicate the CNA is restricted when the PI field of both are
18 set to '01'.
19 c. Not display CNA or CNI associated with the originating and redirecting calling
20 parties.
21 d. Indicate the CNA is not available when the PI field of both the originating and
22 redirecting calling parties are set to '10'.

23 9.7 Display Records

24 9.7.1 Display Records sent in the Feature Notification Message.

25 9.7.1.1 Definition
26 This test verifies that the mobile station displays Paging Channel Display Information Records
27 and Extended Display Information Records. This test also verifies that Display Information
28 Records and Extended Display Information Records do not interfere with any other information
29 records or features.
30
31
32 Traceability: (See [4] );
33 2.6.2.4: Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
34 2.6.4.3: Alerting
35 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message
36 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message
37 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash with Information Message

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-15

1 9.7.1.2 Method of Measurement


2 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in figure 9.1.2.1-1.

3 b. Verify the mobile station is in Mobile Station Idle State.


4 c. Instruct the base station to send a display record of at least 15 characters in a
5 Feature Notification Message.

6 d. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the mobile station displays
7 characters as instructed in the display record or extended display record contained
8 in the Feature Notification Message.

9 e. Instruct the base station to send a new display record of at least 15 characters in a
10 Feature Notification Message.
11 f. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the mobile station displays
12 the new characters as instructed in the display record, and performs other
13 information records contained in the Feature Notification Message without user
14 interaction with the mobile station.

15 9.7.1.3 Minimum Standard


16 All information records contained in the Feature Notification Message, if supported by the
17 mobile station, shall be performed without user interaction with the mobile station. When various
18 information records are sent to the mobile station in the same message, the mobile station shall
19 properly perform all information record instructions. If display records are not supported in the
20 mobile station, there shall be no negative impact on information records supported by the mobile
21 station. There shall be no negative impact on any supported feature or on call processing when
22 display records are sent to the mobile station in the same message as other information records.
23 If supported by the mobile station, the most current display record shall be displayed on the
24 mobile station.

25 9.7.2 Display Records Sent in the Flash With Information Message

26 9.7.2.1 Definition
27 This test verifies that the mobile station displays Traffic Channel Display Information Records or
28 Extended Display Information Records. This test also verifies that Display Information Records
29 and Extended Display Information Records do not interfere with other information records or
30 features.
31 Traceability: (See [4] );
32 2.6.2.4: Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation
33 2.6.4.3: Alerting
34 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message
35 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message
36 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash with Information Message

37 9.7.2.2 Method of Measurement


38 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in figure 9.1.2.1-1.
39 b. Setup a mobile station originated call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-16

1 c. Instruct the base station to send a display record of at least 15 characters in a Flash
2 With Information Message.

3 d. Upon receiving the Flash With Information Message, verify the mobile station
4 displays characters as instructed in the display record or extended display
5 information record contained in the Flash with Information Message.
6 e. Perform Test 3.4, Hard Handoff Between Frequencies in the Same Band.
7 f. Immediately after the first hard handoff is completed, send from the base station a
8 new display record of at least 15 characters contained in the Flash with Information
9 Message.
10 g. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the mobile station displays
11 the new characters as instructed in the display record or extended display record
12 contained in the Flash with Information Message without user interaction with the
13 mobile station.
14 h. Cause the base station to initiate another hard handoff, and send from the base
15 station a new display record or extended display record of at least 15 characters
16 contained in the Flash with Information Message.
17 i. Upon receiving the Feature Notification Message, verify the mobile station displays
18 the new characters as instructed in the display record or extended display record
19 contained in the Flash with Information Message without user interaction with the
20 mobile station.
21 j. Verify that multiple handoffs can be performed without dropping the call.

22 9.7.2.3 Minimum Standard


23 All information records contained in the Flash with Information Message, if supported by the
24 mobile station, shall be performed properly without user interaction with the mobile station.
25 When various information records are sent to the mobile station in the same message, the mobile
26 station shall properly perform all information record instructions. If display records are not
27 supported in the mobile station, there shall be no negative impact on any information records
28 supported by the mobile station. There shall be no negative impact on any supported feature or
29 call processing when display records are sent to the mobile station in the same message as other
30 information records.
31 If supported by the mobile station, the most current display record shall be displayed on the
32 mobile station.

33 9.7.3 Display Records Sent in the Alert With Information Message

34 9.7.3.1 Definition
35 This test verifies the mobile station displays Display Information Records and Extended Display
36 Information Records on the traffic channel. This test also verifies that Display Information
37 Records or Extended Display Information Records do not interfere with other information
38 records or features.
39 Traceability: (See [4] );
40 2.6.2.4: Mobile Station Order and Message Processing Operation

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-17

1 2.6.4.3: Alerting
2 3.7.2.3.2.12: Feature Notification Message
3 3.7.3.3.2.3: Alert with Information Message
4 3.7.3.3.2.14: Flash with Information Message

5 9.7.3.2 Method of Measurement


6 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in figure 9.1.2.1-1.
7 b. Setup a mobile station terminated call.
8 c. Instruct the base station to send in an Alert With Information Message, a display
9 record or extended display record of at least 15 characters, and a Calling Party
10 Number Record.
11 d. Upon receiving the Alert With Information Message, verify the mobile station displays
12 the characters as instructed in the display record or extended display record and
13 displays the Calling Party Number in the Alert With Information Message without
14 user interaction with the mobile station.

15 9.7.3.3 Minimum Standard


16 All information records contained in the Alert with Information Message, if supported by the
17 mobile station, shall be performed without user interaction with the mobile station. When various
18 information records are sent to the mobile station in the same message, the mobile station shall
19 perform all information record instructions. If display records are not supported in the mobile
20 station, there shall be no negative impact on information records supported by the mobile station.
21 There shall be no negative impact on any supported feature, or on call processing when display
22 records are sent to the mobile station in the same message as other information records.
23 If supported by the mobile station, the most current display record shall be displayed on the
24 mobile station.

25 9.8 TTY/TDD

26 9.8.1 Definition
27 This test verifies the system ability to transfer TTY/TDD information in the forward and reverse
28 link directions.
29 Traceability: (See [18,19 and 20] )
30
31
32
33
34
35

36 9.8.2 Method of Measurement


37 j. Connect the mobile station as shown in Figure 9.8.2-1.
38

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-18

MS MTO

Um BS/MSC
TE2M Rn MT2

Ai PSTN W TE2L

KEY

Specific Network Entity

Collective (Composite Entity)

X Interface Reference Point

1
2 Figure 9.8.2-1 Functional Setup for Testing TTY/TDD
3
4 The base station (BS) in this model represents the entire system infrastructure. It
5 contains the transceiver equipment and Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
6 Terminal Equipment (TE2) is TTY/TDD equipment connected either directly or
7 indirectly to the Mobile Terminal (MT2) on the mobile side of the connection. TE2 is
8 TTY/TDD equipment connected to the PSTN on the land side. Subscripts "M" and
9 "L" are added as needed to indicate mobile side and land side TE2s, respectively.
10 When combined in a single physical entity, TE2 and MT2 functionality is labeled
11 MT0.
12 Setup a mobile station originated TTY/TDD call.
13 Calibrate the forward link nominal attenuation so the average frame erasure rate is 3% .

14 Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed at TE2L. Verify characters typed at TE2L can be
15 viewed at TE2M. See Annex C for example character text.

16 Note: The following ASCII characters are not supported by the Baudot TTY standard and
17 should not be used to verify conformance: @ # % ^ & * < >
18 Type a character sequence (e.g. “AB ”) repeatedly a minimum of 20 times at TE2M and verify
19 characters are properly viewed at TE2L. Type a character sequence (e.g. “AB”) repeatedly a
20 minimum of 20 times at TE2L and verify characters are properly viewed at TE2M.
21
22
23
24 If TE2M and TE2L support file transfer, perform the following steps:

25 1) Prepare the TTY_text.txt 2K byte ASCII/Baudot file for 45.45 Baudot


26 transfer. (See Annex C).
27 2) Transfer the ASCII/Baudot file from TE2M to TE2L.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-19

1 3) Transfer the ASCII/Baudot file from TE2L to TE2M.


2 End the TTY/TDD call.

3 Setup a mobile station terminated TTY/TDD call.


4 Repeat steps c through g.
5 End the TTY/TDD call.

6 If TE2M and MT2 support VCO/HCO (Voice Carry Over / Hearing Carry Over), perform the
7 following steps:
8 1) Configure TE2M for VCO.

9 2) Setup a mobile station originated TTY/TDD call.


10 3) Verify outgoing messages can be spoken and incoming responses can be
11 viewed. Verify characters typed at TE2L can be viewed at TE2M.
12 4) End the TTY/TDD call.
13 5) Configure TE2M for HCO.
14 6) Setup a mobile station originated TTY/TDD call.
15 7) Verify outgoing messages can be typed and incoming responses can be
16 heard through a TE2M accessory speaker. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be
17 viewed at TE2L.
18 8) End the TTY/TDD call.

19 9.8.3 Minimum Standard


20 Characters typed at TE2M shall be properly viewed at TE2L. Characters typed at TE2L shall be
21 properly viewed at TE2M. Files transferred shall be complete. Character error rate should be less
22 than 1%.

23 9.9 Answer Holding

24 9.9.1 Definition
25 These tests verify that the mobile station that supports Answer Holding feature can perform the
26 following:
27 • Activate answer holding when the incoming call is ringing in the Waiting for Mobile
28 Station Answer Substate or in the Conversation Substate.
29 • Deactivate answer holding in the Conversation Substate.
30

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-20

MS BS

General Page Message


Initiate a call

Page Response Message

Extended Channel Assignment Message

Service Connect Message

Service Connect Completion Message

AWI Message (ringing applied)


Instruct the MS to activiate
Answer Holding
Falsh with Info (Keypad Facility Info Record)

Connect Order

Instruct the MS to deactivate


Answer Holding Falsh with Info (Keypad Facility Info Record)

Conversation

AWI Message (Call Waiting)


Instruct the MS to activiate
Answer Holding Falsh with Info (Keypad Facility Info Record)
Instruct the MS to disconnect
the first call and deactivate
Answer Holding Falsh with Info (Keypad Facility Info Record)

Disconnect the call


Release Order

Release Order
1
2 Figure 9.9.1-1 Reference Call Flow for Answer Holding
3
4 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.3.2, 2.6.4.4, 2.7.4.2, S.R.0008

5 9.9.2 Method of Measurement


6 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
7 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
8 c. Setup a mobile station terminated call from land party #1.
9 d. When the mobile station is ringing and ring back tone is applied to the audio path,
10 instruct the mobile station to answer hold the call.
11 e. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
12 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-21

1 programmed feature code (i.e., Switch Control Code: 18*) which indicates Answer
2 Holding.

3 f. Verify the mobile station sends a Connect Order in assured mode.


4 g. Instruct the mobile station to deactivate the answer holding.
5 h. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
6 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-
7 programmed feature code (i.e., Switch Control Code: 18*) which indicates Answer
8 Holding.
9 i. Verify user data in both directions.
10 j. Setup a call from land party #2 to the mobile station. Wait for ringback on land
11 party #2 and the call waiting notification on the mobile station.
12 k. Instruct the mobile station to hold the incoming call from land party #2.
13 l. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
14 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-
15 programmed feature code (i.e., Switch Control Code: 18*) which indicates Answer
16 Holding.
17 m. Instruct the mobile station to end the call from land party #1.
18 o. Instruct the mobile station to deactivate the answer holding from land party #2.
19 p. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
20 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-
21 programmed feature code (i.e., Switch Control Code: 18*) which indicates Answer
22 Holding.
23 q. Verify user data in both directions.
24 r. End the call from land party #2.

25 9.9.3 Minimum Standard


26 If the mobile station is directed to activate or deactivate answer holding, the mobile station shall
27 send a Flash With Information Message in assured mode with a Keypad Facility information
28 record with the CHARi field set to a pre-programmed feature code which indicates Answer
29 Holding.

30 9.10 User Selective Call Forwarding

31 9.10.1 Definition
32 These tests verify that the mobile station that supports User Selective Call Forwarding can
33 perform the following in both Waiting for Mobile Station Answer Substate and Conversation
34 Substate:
35 • Forwarding incoming call to a pre-registered number.
36 • Forwarding incoming call to a number stored in the mobile station.
37 • Forwarding incoming call to network-based voice mail.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-22

1 Traceability: (See [4] ); 2.6.4.3.2, 2.6.4.4, 2.7.4.2

2 9.10.2 Method of Measurement

3 a. Connect the mobile station and base station as shown in Figure 9.1.2.1-1.
4 b. Power on the mobile station and wait until it reaches Mobile Station Idle State.
5 c. Dial user selective call forwarding feature activation code, followed by the forward-to
6 number, followed by SEND. Verify feature update confirmation at the mobile station.
7 d. Setup a mobile station terminated call from land party.
8 e. When the mobile station is ringing and ring back tone is applied to the audio path,
9 instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to the pre-registered
10 number.
11 f. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
12 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-
13 programmed feature code (i.e., Switch Control Code: 0*) which indicates User
14 Selective Call Forwarding to a pre-registered number.
15 g. Instruct the base station to release the traffic channel.
16 h. Answer the call on the forwarded line, and verify the audio path.
17 i. End call.
18 j. Ensure the mobile station is in Mobile Station Idle State.
19 k. Setup a mobile station terminated call from land party.
20 l. When the mobile station is ringing and ring back tone is applied to the audio path,
21 instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to voice mail.
22 m. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
23 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-
24 programmed feature code (i.e. Switch Control Code: 17*) which indicates User
25 Selective Call Forwarding to voice mail.
26 n. Instruct the base station to release the traffic channel.
27 o. Verify the call is forwarded to voice mail.
28 p. Ensure the mobile station is in Mobile Station Idle State.
29 r. Program a forward-to-number in the mobile station.

30 s. Setup a mobile station terminated call from land party.


31 t. When the mobile station is ringing, and ring back tone is applied to the audio path,
32 instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to the number stored in the
33 mobile station.
34 u. Verify the mobile station sends a Flash With Information Message in assured mode
35 with a Keypad Facility information record with the CHARi field set to a pre-

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-23

1 programmed feature code (i.e. Switch Control Code: 16*) plus the forward-to-
2 number stored in the mobile station.

3 v. Instruct the mobile station to release the traffic channel.


4 w. Answer the call on the forwarded line, and verify the audio path.
5 x. End call.

6 y. Setup a call between mobile station and land party #1 and verify user data in both
7 directions.
8 z. Setup a call from land party #2 to the mobile station. Wait for ringback on land
9 party #2 and the call waiting notification on the mobile station.
10 aa. Instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to the pre-registered
11 number.
12 bb. Repeat steps f, h, and i.
13 cc. Repeat step z.
14 dd. Instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to voice mail.
15 ee. Repeat steps m and o.
16 ff. Repeat step z.
17 gg. Instruct the mobile station to forward the incoming call to the forward-to-number
18 stored in the mobile station.
19 hh. Repeat steps u, w, and x.
20 ii. Verify user data in both directions between the mobile station and land party #1
21 during steps z to hh.
22 jj. End the call between mobile station and land party #1.

23 9.10.3 Minimum Standard


24 If the mobile station is directed by the user to forward the incoming call to a pre-registered
25 number, voice mail, or a stored forward-to-number, the mobile station shall send a Flash With
26 Information Message in assured mode with a Keypad Facility information record with the
27 CHARi field set to a pre-programmed feature code which indicates User Selective Call
28 Forwarding to a pre-registered number, voice mail, or a stored forward-to-number
29 correspondingly.
30

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 9-24

1 No text

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-1

1 10 ASYNCHRONOUS DATA AND FAX SERVICES


2 Table 10-1 Asynchronous Data and Fax Services tests.
3 Table 10-1 Asynchronous Data and Fax Services Tests

Test No. Title


10.1 Send/Receive Fax
10.2 Upload/Download Binary File
10.3 Simultaneous Two-way File Transfer
10.4 Compound AT Command
10.5 Escaping to Command Mode
10.6 Air Interface Data Compression
10.7 RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment
10.8 RLP Abort and TCP Retransmit
10.9 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Requests/Replies
10.10 Reflection of AT Command Parameters

4 Introduction
5 TIA/EIA/IS-707-A defines Service Option 4 (Async Data) and Service Option 5 (Group-3 Fax)
6 for use over IS-2000 traffic channels. The following tests ensure proper data call processing for
7 both Service Options 4 and 5. These same tests should be applicable for future Service Option 12
8 (Rate Set 2 Asynchronous Data) and Service Option 13 (Rate Set 2 Fax).
9 A network reference model of a CDMA data services system per IS-707-A, is shown in Figure
10 10.1-1. The model shows network elements contained within the data/fax network, and interfaces
11 between them.
12

MS
MT0

Um BS/MSC L IWF Pi PP DN
TE2M Rn MT2

Ai PS TN W DCE RV TE 2L

Ke y

Speci fic Network Entity

Collective (Composite Entity)

X Interface Reference Point

13
14 Figure 10-1. Asynchronous Data Services Reference Model

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-2

1 The base station (base station) in this model represents the entire cellular system infrastructure. It
2 contains transceiver equipment, Mobile Switching Center (MSC), and Inter-Working Function
3 (IWF) required for network connection.
4 Terminal Equipment (TE2) is data equipment connected either directly or indirectly to the
5 Mobile Terminal (MT2) on the mobile side of the connection. Alternatively, a TE2 may be
6 connected to Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (DCE) on the land side. Subscripts "M" and
7 "L" are added as needed to indicate mobile side and land side TE2s, respectively. When
8 combined in a single physical entity, TE2 and MT2 functionality is labeled MT0.
9 Test Execution Strategy
10 Unless otherwise stated in the procedure, the following conditions shall be an integral part
11 of the method of measurement in each of the tests listed below. A communications
12 application program used for testing asynchronous data service. When using
13 aforementioned communications application, hardware flow control shall be enabled,
14 and software flow control shall be disabled.
15 • When a transfer time is to be recorded, the transfer timer should be started when the
16 upload command is entered at the sender side, and should be stopped when the receiver
17 has finished receiving the entire file/fax.
18 • Any Class 2.0 fax application program may be used for testing fax services. Data
19 Services Annex A lists examples of fax programs that may be used.
20 • These tests apply to computer-based fax applications only.
21 • At the mobile end, the application program runs on a computer (labeled TE2M in Figure
22 10-1) attached to an async data-capable CDMA phone.
23 • At the fixed end, the application program runs on a computer (labeled TE2L in Figure 10-
24 1) attached to a PSTN modem, connected to a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
25 or a PSTN emulation unit.
26 • For all Service Option 4 and Service Option 12 tests, ensure modem error correction,
27 such as Link Access Protocol - Modem (LAP-M) or Microcom Network Protocol (MNP), is
28 enabled on the PSTN link (see network reference diagram of Figure 10-1). Ensure the
29 PSTN link between the base station and the Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE)
30 is a link known to be of good quality.
31 • Both RV and RM links are running at a speed greater than the maximum expected speed
32 on the UM link.
33 • The application program is started at both TE2M and TE2L, and should be maintained
34 throughout test execution.
35 • Auto Answer is enabled at both TE2M and TE2L.
36 • Unless otherwise noted, each test shall provide a frame error rate of 1% or less.
37 • Prior to each test, the mobile station shall be reset to default state by pressing the END
38 key to assure no call is in progress, then issuing the command ATZ <CR>.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-3

1 10.1 Send/Receive Fax

2 10.1.1 Definition
3 These tests demonstrate cellular system ability to transmit and receive a medium size fax in a
4 timely manner. A fax call is originated by the mobile station, the test is then repeated using land
5 line origination. The mobile station will send and receive a digital and an analog Fax.
6 Traceability:
7 (See [15] )-A.3; 2.2, 2.2.1, 4.0, 4.3, 7.3
8 (See [15] )-A.4; 2.2, 2.5.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3,3, 3,3,1,1, 3.4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2
9 (See [15] )-A.7

10 10.1.2 Method of Measurement

11 10.1.2.1 Send/Receive Digital Fax


12 a. Prepare a file representing three different ITU standard fax pages for fax transfer.
13 Data Services Annex C lists standard fax pages to be used in the test. Ensure fax
14 pages are pre-scanned and pre-encoded.
15 b. Simultaneously start the transfer timer and the digital fax transfer from TE2M to
16 TE2L.

17 c. At TE2L, wait for the fax call to be completed. Stop the transfer timer.
18 d. Record transfer time. Verify transfer time requirements per Data Services Annex C.
19 e. Repeat the test for the same fax sent from TE2L to TE2M. TE2M will receive a digital
20 fax.

21 10.1.2.2 Send/Receive Analog Fax


22 a. Prepare a file representing three different ITU standard fax pages for fax transfer.
23 Data Services Annex C lists standard fax pages to be used in the test. Ensure fax
24 pages are pre-scanned and pre-encoded.
25 b. Attach an Analog Fax Machine to TE2M.

26 c. Simultaneously start the transfer timer and the analog fax transfer from TE2M to
27 TE2L.
28 d. At TE2L, wait for the fax call to be completed. Stop the transfer timer.

29 e. Record transfer time. Verify transfer time requirements per Data Services Annex C.
30 f. Repeat test for the same fax sent from TE2L to TE2M. TE2M will receive an analog
31 fax.

32 10.1.3 Minimum Standard


33 All faxes shall be successfully transferred. The received fax shall be of good quality and
34 complete. This can be verified by qualitative means (visually scanning the received fax) or by
35 quantitative means, for example, using ITU-T Recommendation E.453 (08/94) Facsimile Image
36 Quality as Corrupted by Transmission Induced Scan Line Errors.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-4

1 Each analog fax transfer shall be completed within time denoted in Data Services Annex C.

2 10.2 Upload/Download Binary File

3 10.2.1 Definition
4 This test demonstrates cellular system ability to upload and download an ITU standard fax binary
5 file in a timely manner. The asynchronous data call is originated first by the mobile station. The
6 test is then repeated using land line origination.
7 Traceability:
8 (See [15] )-A.3; 2.2, 2.2.1, 4.0, 4.3, 7.3
9 (See [15] )-A.4; 2.2, 2.5.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3,3, 3,3,1,1, 3.4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2

10 10.2.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Prepare RAND200.BIN 200,000 byte binary file for transfer (Data Services Annex D).
12 b. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.
13 c. Start transferring the binary file from TE2L to TE2M using Z-modem transfer
14 protocol. Start the transfer timer.
15 d. Stop the transfer timer when the confirmation of transfer completion is received
16 from the far end.
17 e. Record the transfer time.

18 Note: Transfer time should exclude call connection delay.


19 f. End the data call.
20 g. Setup a data call from TE2L to TE2M.
21 h. Repeat the test by transferring the file from TE2M to TE2L.

22 10.2.3 Minimum Standard


23 • All files shall be successfully transferred.
24 • There shall be no Z-modem protocol re-transmissions.
25 • Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.
26 • Each file transfer shall be completed within time denoted in Data Services Annex D.
27 • Both the mobile station originated, and land line originated data calls shall be
28 established successfully.

29 10.3 Simultaneous Two-way File Transfer/Carrier Detect

30 10.3.1 Definition
31 This test demonstrates cellular system ability to simultaneously transfer data in the forward and
32 reverse link direction. This test verifies the base station can transmit changes in the status of
33 circuit 109 (Carrier Detect) and reflect its status on the Rm interface (Figure 10.1-1).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-5

1 Note: Carrier Detect can be monitored by means of a hardware lead, or observed on the
2 application interface.
3 Traceability:
4 (See [15] )-A.3; 2.1.1, 2.2, 2.2.1, 4.0, 4.2.1, 4.3, Table 7.1.1-1, 7.3
5 (See [15] )-A.4; 2.2, 2.5.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3,3, 3,3,1,1, 3.4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2

6 10.3.2 Method of Measurement


7 a Prepare the RAND200.ASC 200,000 byte ASCII file for transfer (Data Services Annex
8 D).

9 b. Ensure the Carrier Detect indicator is enabled at TE2M.


10 c. From TE2M, issue the command “AT&C1”, which requests the real-time status of
11 Carrier Detect be maintained on the (Rm) interface.
12 d. Verify the Carrier Detect indicator is OFF.
13 e. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L. Verify that Carrier Detect indicator goes ON,
14 when the base station modem has successfully trained.
15 f. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed at TE2L. Verify characters typed at
16 TE2L can be viewed at TE2M.
17 Note: Once the File Capture is turned on, do not type any more characters on the TE2L or
18 the TE2 M prior to initiating the file transfer (this is to ensure the captured file is not
19 corrupted by user keystrokes).
20 g. Turn on the File Capture at TE2M.
21 h. Turn on the File Capture at TE2L.
22 i. Simultaneously start the reverse link transfer timer and at TE2M send the
23 RAND200.ASC file to TE2L by using Raw ASCII protocol.
24 j. While TE2M is sending the file to TE2L, simultaneously start the forward link
25 transfer timer and instruct TE2L to send the same ASCII file to TE2M using a Raw
26 ASCII protocol.

27 Note: It is critical these transfers shall substantially overlap.


28 k. As each transfer completes, stop corresponding transfer timer and record transfer
29 time.
30 l. After both transfers are complete, turn off the File Capture at both TE2M and TE2L.
31 m. End call.
32 n. At TE2M, verify that Carrier Detect indicator goes OFF when the call is ended.

33 10.3.3 Minimum Standard


34 • The file shall be successfully transferred in each direction.
35 • Log files shall be complete and identical in content to the original files.
36 • Each file transfer shall be completed within time denoted in Data Services Annex D.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-6

1 • The Carrier Detect generated by the base station shall be accurately depicted on the Rm
2 interface.

3 10.4 Compound AT Command, Initialization and Connection Delay

4 10.4.1 Definition
5 This test verifies the base station can properly process a compound command line containing
6 both local and remote commands. This test verifies the mobile station can initialize and connect
7 the service option when the data call is negotiated with the base station, as well as measures
8 connection delay.
9 Traceability:
10 (See [15] )-A.3; 4.2.6, Table4.2.6-1, 4.3.1.2.5, 4.4.1, Table 7.2-1, Table 7.3.1-1

11 10.4.2 Method of Measurement


12 a. Ensure the call is down.
13 b. At TE2M, issue AT command
14 “AT+CXT=1;+FCLASS=2.0;+GMI;+CGMI;+GMM;+CGMM”. This command string
15 requests mobile station manufacturer information, base station modem
16 manufacturer information, mobile station manufacturer model, and base station
17 modem manufacturer model.
18 c. Start the connection delay timer.
19 d. When the result is returned to the mobile station, stop the connection timer.
20 e. Record connection delay time in the test report.

21 10.4.3 Minimum Standard


22 The response shall be correct in that it contains the information requested in the command, and is
23 followed by result code “OK”. Delay should not exceed ten seconds.

24 10.5 Escaping to Command Mode

25 10.5.1 Definition
26 This test verifies:
27 • The MT2 application interface escapes to online command state when the user (or the
28 communications application) issues an escape sequence (such as "+++" with the
29 appropriate guard time).

30 • The base station returns to online state when the user (or the application) issues the
31 command "ATO".
32 Traceability: (See [15] )-A.3; 4.2.4, 4.4.2.1

33 10.5.2 Method of Measurement


34 a. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-7

1 b. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed at TE2L. Verify that characters typed
2 at TE2L can be viewed at TE2M.

3 c. From TE2M issue the escape sequence +++.


4 d. Verify “OK” is returned, signifying that the MT2 is in the online command state.
5 e. At TE2M,issue the command “AT+CGMI" which requests base station manufacturer
6 information. Verify the response is appropriate, with trailing “OK”.
7 f. At TE2M, issue the command “ATO”, which should cause the MT2 to transition from
8 online command state to online state.
9 g. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed TE2L. Verify characters typed at TE2L
10 can be viewed at TE2M.

11 10.5.3 Minimum Standard


12 • The escape sequence shall cause entry into the online command state.
13 • The command “ATO” shall cause return from the online command state to online state.

14 10.6 Air Interface Data Compression

15 10.6.1 Definition
16 This test verifies successful compression option negotiation and the transfer of compressible files
17 and/or faxes between the MT2 and Inter-Working Function (IWF). The aforementioned is verified
18 for both mobile originated and mobile terminated data and fax transmissions.
19 Note: Although the files are compressible, they will be compressed only when both the MT2
20 and IWF support the type of compression in question. Even if the MT2 or IWF do not
21 support a certain type of compression, the test in question still needs to be performed
22 to ensure MT2 and IWF still interoperate correctly when the user requests this type of
23 compression.
24 Traceability:
25 (See [15] )-A.3; Table 7.4.1-1
26 (See [15] )-A.4; 2.2, Table 2.2-2, Table 2.2-3

27 10.6.2 Method of Measurement


28 a. Prepare the data file, COMPFILE.RAW (see Data Services Annex A), or the fax page,
29 FAX 1 (see Data Services Annex C) for transfer.
30 b. Configure the test setup for transfer of a data file or a fax file per Table 10.6.2-1.
31 V.42bis compression for data file transfers is controlled by the +CDS command. The
32 type of compression for fax file transfers is controlled by the +CFC command. When
33 V.42bis is selected for fax transfer, the parameters set in the +CDS command are
34 used.
35 c. Setup a mobile station originated fax or async data call per Table 10.6.2-1.
36 d. Make a file or fax transfer in the direction as stated in Table 10.6.2-1. Time each
37 transfer and record in the test report.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-8

1 e. Repeat for all test cases, 1 through 10.

2 10.6.3 Minimum Standard

3 • All faxes shall be successfully sent and received.


4 • The received fax page shall be complete in content, and each transfer shall be completed
5 within the time stated in Data Services Annex C.

6 • All data files shall be successfully transferred.


7 • The received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file. Each file
8 transfer shall be completed within the time stated in Data Services Annex B.
9
10 Table 10.6.2-1 Compression Test Configurations

Test File/Fax Compression Direction Compression Fax


No. Method of Transfer Enable Compression
Mode
1 Data File none BS to MS +CDS=0 N/A
2 Data File V.42bis BS to MS +CDS=2 N/A
3 Data File V.42bis MS to BS +CDS=1 N/A
4 Data File V.42bis MS to BS +CDS=3 N/A
5 Fax File none BS to MS N/A +CFC=0
6 Fax File V.42bis BS to MS +CDS=2 +CFC=1
7 Fax File V.42bis MS to BS +CDS=1 +CFC=1
8 Fax File V.42bis MS to BS +CDS=3 +CFC=1
9 Fax File MMR BS to MS N/A +CFC=2
10 Fax File MMR MS to BS N/A +CFC=2
11

12 10.7 RLP Operation in a Poor RF Environment

13 10.7.1 Definition
14 This test exercises the Radio Link Protocol (RLP) layer's negative acknowledgments (NAKs), re-
15 transmits, RLP aborts, RLP Resets, and FCSs.
16 Test conditions are intended to impose one or more occurrences of the following.
17 • Single, double, and triple NAK RLP retransmit events.
18 • RLP Abort
19 • RLP Reset
20 This test verifies that RLP recovers erased data frames in various channel conditions.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-9

1 Traceability:
2 (See [15] )-A.2; 3.1, 3.1.1.1, 3.1.2, 3.1.4

3 10.7.2 Method of Measurement


4 a. Setup the mobile station and base station as shown in Figures 10.7.2-1 with an
5 AWGN generator placed in the forward link.
6

7
8 Figure 10.7.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Poor RF
9 Environment Test Parameters
10
11 b. Adjust the level of the AWGN Generator so that the downlink frame error rate is
12 measured to be 3±1%.
13 c. Restore the RF link to a normal operating condition, maintaining the target frame
14 error rate (1 % or less).
15 d. Prepare RAND200.ASC 200,000 byte ASCII file for transfer (Data Services Annex D).
16 e. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.
17 f. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed at TE2L. Verify characters typed at
18 TE2L can be viewed at TE2M.
19 g. Turn File Capture on.
20 h. Simultaneously start the forward link transfer timer and at TE2L send the
21 RAND200.ASC file to TE2M by using Raw ASCII protocol.
22 i. As soon as the file transfer has started (and is still in progress), set the channel
23 conditions as calibrated in step b. These channel conditions shall be maintained for
24 the duration of the file transfer.
25 j. Stop the transfer timer and record the transfer time.
26 k. Turn off the File Capture.

27 l. End call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-10

1 m. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.


2 n. Repeat steps f and g.

3 o. Simultaneously start the reverse link transfer timer and at TE2M send the
4 RAND200.ASC file to TE2L by using Raw ASCII protocol.
5 p. Repeat steps i through l.

6 10.7.3 Minimum Standard


7 • The file shall be successfully transferred.
8 • The log file shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.

9 • The transfer rate shall be no less than 70% of rates measured in test 10.3.

10 10.8 RLP Abort and TCP Retransmit Test

11 10.8.1 Definition
12 This test causes the RLP layer to abort and reset due to extremely severe CDMA channel
13 conditions, and forces the TCP layer to retransmit packets. Channel degradation consists of
14 forcing consecutive frame erasures for periods greater than 2.6 seconds.

15 Note: 2.6 seconds corresponds to 130 consecutive frame erasures, but less than the time
16 that would cause the call to drop (typically 5 seconds).
17 Traceability:
18 (See [15] )-A.2; 3.1, 3.1.1.1, 3.1.2, 3.1.4

19 10.8.2 Method of Measurement


20 a. Setup the mobile station and base station as shown in Figures 10.8.2-1 and 10.8.2-
21 2 for the forward and the reverse link tests respectively, with
22 PWR_THRESH_ENABLE and PWR_PERIOD_ENABLE set to 0. Disable forward link
23 power control at the base station.
24

25
26 Figure 10.8.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Forward Link

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-11

2
3 Figure 10.8.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Reverse Link

4 b. Calibrate the test setup so that:


5 (1) There is sufficient isolation with the switch open, that a call drops if the
6 switch is left open for more than 5 seconds
7 (2) When switch is open, the forward and reverse links are disabled at the
8 receiver.
9 (3) When switch is closed, the forward and reverse links are enabled at the
10 receiver.
11 c. Set the RF link to normal operating condition, which maintains the target frame
12 erasure rate (1% or less).
13 d. Prepare the RAND200.ASC 200,000 byte ASCII file transfer (Data Services Annex D)
14 e. Setup a call from TE2M to TE2L.

15 f. Verify characters typed at TE2M can be viewed at TE2L. Verify that characters typed
16 at TE2L can be viewed at TE2M.

17 g. Turn File Capture on.


18 h. Simultaneously start the forward link transfer timer and at TE2L send the
19 RAND200.ASC file to TE2M by using Raw ASCII protocol.

20 i. Once the file transfer has started (and is still in progress), open and close the switch
21 in an alternating fashion, for periods of T1 and T2 where:
22 (1) T1 is the period when the switch is open (RF link impaired), and it is
23 anywhere between 2.6 and 5.0 seconds.
24 (2) T2 is the period when the switch is closed (RF link restored), and it is a
25 minimum of 10 seconds.
26 j. Repeat opening and closing switch exactly three times while data transfer is
27 occurring.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-12

1 k. Stop the transfer timer and record the transfer time.


2 l. Turn the File Capture off.

3 m. End call.
4 n. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.

5 o. Repeat steps f and g.


6 p. Simultaneously start the reverse link transfer timer and at TE2M send the
7 RAND200.ASC file to TE2L by using Raw ASCII protocol.

8 q. Repeat steps i through l.

9 10.8.3 Minimum Standard


10 • The file shall be successfully transferred in each direction.
11 • Log files shall be complete and identical in content to the original files.
12 • Transfer rates shall be no less than 50% of rates measured in test 10.3.

13 10.9 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Requests/Replies

14 10.9.1 Definition
15 This test verifies the mobile station is able to:
16 • Generate an ICMP Echo Response Message after receiving an Echo Request Message.
17 • Generate an ICMP Info Response Message after receiving an Info Request Message.
18 • Generate an ICMP Time Stamp Response Message after receiving a Time Stamp Request
19 Message.
20 Traceability: RFC 792

21 10.9.2 Method of Measurement


22 a. At TE2M, issue a remote query command such as “AT+CXT=1;+FCLASS=2.0;+FMI?”,
23 requesting base station modem manufacturer information. This will establish a link
24 to the base station.
25 b. From the OA&M interface of the base station, issue the Echo Request Message by
26 any method specific to the base station manufacturer.
27 c. Optionally, step b may be repeated for Info Request/Response, or Time Stamp
28 Request/Response Messages.

29 10.9.3 Minimum Standard


30 • Echo response shall be received by base station as a response to Echo Request Message.
31 • If supported by mobile station, an Info response shall be received by base station as a
32 response to Info Request Message.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-13

1 • If supported by mobile station, a Time stamp response shall be received by base station
2 as a response to Time Stamp Request Message.

3 10.10 Reflection of AT Command Parameters

4 10.10.1 Definition
5 This test verifies a representative set of AT parameters can be setup in an IS-707-A call,
6 transferred to the base station at call origination, changed in the online command state, and have
7 their final values read at the mobile station after call completion. Commands tested are ATS10
8 and AT+CQD.
9 Traceability: IS-707-A; 4.2.4, 7.4.1

10 10.10.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Issue the AT command string: “ATS10=255;+CQD=0”
12 b. Verify response is “OK”
13 c. Setup a data call from TE2M to TE2L.

14 d. After CONNECT is received, issue the escape sequence (such as ”+++”).


15 e. Verify the response is “OK”
16 f. Issue the AT command string: “ATS10?;+CQD?”.
17 g. Verify response is:
18 255
19 +CQD:0
20 OK
21 h. Issue the AT command string: “ATS10=250;+CQD=100”
22 i. Verify the response is “OK”
23 j. Issue the command string: “ATS10?;+CQD?”.
24 k. Verify the response is:
25 250
26 +CQD:100
27 OK

28 l. Terminate the call via the “ATH0” command string.


29 m. Verify the response is “OK” and that the call ends.
30 n. Issue the AT command string: “ATS10?;+CQD?”.
31 o. Verify response is:
32 250
33 +CQD:100
34 OK

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 10-14

1 10.10.3 Minimum Standard


2 The responses shall be as specified in the previous paragraphs. The “ERROR” response shall not
3 be returned.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-1

2 11 PACKET DATA SERVICES TESTS


3 Table 11-1 Packet Data Services tests.
4
5 Table 11-1 Packet Data Services Tests

Test No. Title


11.1 Terminal Session with Remote Host
11.2 File Transfer
11.3 IP Address Negotiation
11.4 V-J Header Compression
11.5 Asynchronous Control Character Mapping (ACCM) Negotiation
11.6 PPP Field Compression
11.7 Maximum Receive Unit (MRU)
11.8 Mobile Station Inactivity Timer
11.9 IWF Inactivity Timer
11.10 Radio Link Protocol (RLP) Operation in Rayleigh Fading
11.11 RLP Abort and Upper Layer Retransmit
11.12 RLP Encryption Negotiation
11.13 Hardware Flow Control
11.14 Re-connect after Hard Handoff
11.15 Zone-Based Registration for Packet Data Mobile Stations

6
7 Introduction
8 TIA/EIA/IS-707-A defines Service Option 7 (Packet Data Service: Internet or ISO Protocol
9 Stack) and Service Option 8 (Packet Data Service: CDPD Protocol Stack) for use over IS-2000
10 traffic channels. The following tests ensure proper data call processing for both Service Options
11 7 and 8. These same tests should be applicable for future Service Options 15 (Rate Set 2 Packet
12 Data Service: Internet or ISO Protocol Stack) and Service Option 16 (Rate Set 2 Packet Data
13 Service: CDPD Protocol Stack).
14 A network reference model of a CDMA packet data services system per IS-707 is shown in
15 Figure 11-1. The model shows network elements contained within the packet data network, and
16 interfaces between them.
17

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-2

MS
MT0

Um BS/MSC L IWF Pi PPDN


TE2 M Rn MT2

Ai PSTN W DCE RV TE2 L

Key

Speci fic Network Entity

Collective (Composite Entity)

X Interface Reference Point

1
2 Figure 11-1 Packet Data Services Reference Model
3
4 The base station (BS) in this model represents the entire cellular system infrastructure, and
5 contains transceiver equipment and Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
6 Terminal Equipment (TE2) is data equipment connected either directly or indirectly to the
7 Mobile Terminal (MT2) on the mobile side of the connection. When combined in a single
8 physical entity, TE2 and MT2 functionality is labeled MT0. The Interworking Function (IWF)
9 provides network access between the Public Packet Data Network (PPDN) and the mobile
10 station.
11 Test Execution Strategy
12 Tests defined herein verify packet data services operation and features in a lab environment.
13 Some application level tests, which can be used to verify interoperability and performance in a
14 field system, are defined for Stage 3 field tests. It is recommended that tests described herein be
15 performed at Stage 2 to verify packet data operation prior to deployment in the field. However,
16 these same tests may be repeated in the field.
17 When an optional feature or function of packet data service is not supported by the mobile
18 station or the base station, the test may be omitted, but that fact shall be duly noted in the test
19 report as not being supported by appropriate element(s) of the system. When an optional feature
20 is implemented by both the mobile station and BS/MSC/IWF, that test shall be performed.
21 Tests may be performed in any order. It is permissible to conduct multiple tests at once by
22 combining procedures not mutually exclusive.
23 Unless otherwise stated in the procedure, the following conditions shall be an integral part of the
24 method of measurement in each of the following tests.
25 • A remote host is a packet node with a known IP address with access privileges for the
26 purpose of interoperability testing.
27 • Whenever a transfer time is to be recorded, the transfer timer should be started right as
28 the upload command is entered at the sender side, and should be stopped when the
29 receiver has finished receiving the entire file.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-3

1 • Examples given in the test procedures assume the remote host is running the Unix
2 operating system. However, this is not a requirement for interoperability testing.

3 • The Rm link (as diagramed in Figure 11-1) runs at a speed of 19.2 Kbps or greater.
4 • The application program is run at the TE2
5 • Unless otherwise noted, each test shall provide a frame error rate of 1% or less on the air
6 link.
7 • After each test, the application shall terminate its current PPP session.
8 • All communication with remote hosts shall take place via the packet data service option.

9 11.1 Terminal Session with Remote Host

10 11.1.1 Definition
11 This test will demonstrate the ability of the mobile station to establish terminal-to-host session
12 with a remote host. Data transfer capability in both directions is tested.
13 Traceability: (See [15] )-A, RFC-854

14 11.1.2 Method of Measurement


15 a. Initiate a Telnet session to the remote host.
16 b. Issue the remote command “ls”.

17 11.1.3 Minimum Standard


18 Response received shall be the listing of the remote directory.

19 11.2 File Transfer

20 11.2.1 Definition
21 This test demonstrates the ability of the mobile station to transfer files to and from a remote host.
22 Data transfer throughput is tested in both directions.
23 Traceability: [see 15]-A 4.1, RFC-959

24 11.2.2 Method of Measurement

25 a. Prepare the RAND200.BIN 200,000 byte test file for file transfer (Data Services
26 Annex D). A copy of the file must reside at the remote host and at the TE2.
27 b. Initiate an FTP session with the remote host.

28 c. While measuring transfer time, transfer the file from the TE2 to the remote host and
29 record transfer time.
30 d. While measuring transfer time, transfer the file from the remote host to the TE2 and
31 record transfer time.

32 11.2.3 Minimum Standard


33 • All files shall be successfully transferred.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-4

1 • Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.
2 • Each file transfer shall be completed within time denoted in Data Services Annex D.

3 11.3 IP Address Negotiation

4 11.3.1 Definition
5 This test will demonstrate the ability of the IWF to assign unique IP address to various mobile
6 stations. This test applies only to mobile stations that do not have a fixed IP address.
7 Traceability: [see 15]-A 3.1, RFC-1332 3.3

8 11.3.2 Method of Measurement


9 a. Setup a Telnet session on mobile #1 with a remote host.
10 b. Setup a Telnet session on mobile #2 with a remote host.
11 c. Determine the IP address assigned to mobile stations #1 and #2 using any method
12 available such as PPP Package, 'ping', "who", etc.

13 11.3.3 Minimum Standard


14 IP addresses assigned to mobile station #1 and mobile station #2 shall be different.

15 11.4 V-J Header Compression

16 11.4.1 Definition
17 This test will demonstrate PPP ability to negotiate V-J header compression. Successful
18 compression is verified by comparing transfer times of groups of packets with V-J header
19 compression ON and OFF. This test requires use of a PPP package that allows the user to
20 configure V-J header compression.
21 Traceability: (See [15] )-A, RFC-1332 3.2, RFC-1332 4, RFC-1144

22 11.4.2 Method of Measurement


23 a. Set the TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) to 536 bytes.

24 b. Prepare RAND200.BIN for transfer (Data Services Annex D)


25 c. Disable V-J header compression.
26 d. Initiate an FTP session from the TE2 to the remote host.
27 e. Transfer the file from the remote host to the TE2 using the [binary] "get"
28 f. Record the bytes/sec reported by FTP at the end of the file transfer.
29 g. Enable V-J header compression
30 h. Repeat steps d through f.

31 11.4.3 Minimum Standard


32 • The file shall be successfully transferred.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-5

1 • The received file shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.
2 • Transfer throughput reported by FTP in bytes/sec with V-J header compression ON shall
3 be greater than the throughput with V-J header compression OFF.

4 11.5 Aynchronous Control Character Mapping (ACCM) Negotiation

5 11.5.1 Definition
6 This test verifies the ability to negotiate and perform ACCM.
7 Traceability: (See [15] )-A, RFC-1662 7.1

8 11.5.2 Method of Measurement


9 a. Turn software flow control on and disable hardware flow control in the TE2.
10 b. Enable software flow control in the MT2.
11 c. Configure the ACCM in the mobile station side PPP package to be 0xFFFFFFFF,
12 which requires escaping of all characters having values of 0x00-0x1F.
13 d. Initiate an FTP session with the remote host.
14 e. Transfer the COMPFILE.RAW file from the TE2 to the remote host using the binary
15 ”put” command.

16 11.5.3 Minimum Standard


17 • The file shall be successfully transferred.
18 • The received file shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.

19 11.6 PPP Field Compression

20 11.6.1 Definition
21 This test demonstrates the ability to activate and de-activate the following PPP options:
22 • Protocol Field Compression
23 • Address and Control Field Compression
24 Traceability: (See [15] )-A, RFC-1661 6.5

25 11.6.2 Method of Measurement

26 a. De-activate both “Protocol Field Compression” and “Address and Control Field
27 Compression” in the mobile station.
28 b. Issue a ''ping'' command to a remote host.
29 c. Activate both “Protocol Field Compression” and “Address and Control Field
30 Compression” in the mobile station.
31 d. Issue a ”ping” command to a remote host.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-6

1 11.6.3 Minimum Standard


2 A proper ”ping” response shall be generated in both cases.

3 11.7 Maximum Receive Unit (MRU)

4 11.7.1 Definition
5 This test demonstrates mobile station ability to negotiate various MRU values.
6 Traceability: (See [15] )-A, RFC-1661 6.1

7 11.7.2 Method of Measurement


8 a. At the TE2, set TCP MSS to 1500.
9 b. At the TE2, set PPP MRU to 1600.
10 c. Initiate an FTP session from the TE2 to the remote host.
11 d. Transfer the COMPFILE.RAW file from the remote host to the TE2 using the binary
12 get command.

13 11.7.3 Minimum Standard


14 • The file shall be successfully transferred.
15 • Received file shall be complete and identical in content to the original file

16 11.8 Mobile Station Inactivity Timer

17 11.8.1 Definition
18 This test is only required for mobile stations that have an Inactivity Timer. This test verifies the
19 mobile station releases the traffic channel after expiration of the Inactivity Timer. The test
20 verifies the dormant link layer connection can be re-activated.
21 Traceability: TIA/EIA/IS-707-A

22 11.8.2 Method of Measurement


23 a. Set the inactivity timer at the MT2 to 15 seconds.
24 b. Ensure the IWF’s inactivity timer is disabled or set to a value of at least 30 seconds.
25 c. Initiate a Telnet session to a remote host.
26 d. Record the IP address assigned to the mobile station.
27 e. Exit the Telnet session.
28 f. Wait for the mobile station inactivity timer to expire. Verify the “in use” indicator on
29 the MT2 goes OFF.
30 g. Initiate a Telnet session to a remote host.

31 h. Record the IP address assigned to the mobile station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-7

1 11.8.3 Minimum Standard


2 • The traffic channel shall be kept up until the mobile station inactivity timer expires. This
3 time should be approximately 15 seconds after termination of the first Telnet session.
4 • The IP addresses of the mobile station recorded in steps d and h shall be identical (this
5 verifies the mobile station remained in dormant mode due to inactivity timer expiration).

6 11.9 IWF Inactivity Timer

7 11.9.1 Definition
8 This test is only required for IWFs that have an inactivity timer. This test verifies the base station
9 releases the traffic channel after expiration of the IWF inactivity timer. The tests verifies the
10 dormant link layer connection can be re-activated.
11 Traceability: (See [15] )-A

12 11.9.2 Method of Measurement


13 a. Set the IWF inactivity timer to 15 seconds.
14 b. Ensure the MT2 inactivity timer is disabled or is set to a value of at least 30
15 seconds.
16 c. Initiate a Telnet session to a remote host.

17 d. Record the IP address assigned to the mobile station.


18 e. Exit the Telnet session.
19 f. Wait for the IWF inactivity timer to expire. Verify the “in use” indicator on the MT2
20 goes OFF.
21 g. Initiate a Telnet session to a remote host.
22 h. Record the IP address assigned to the mobile station.

23 11.9.3 Minimum Standard


24 • The traffic channel shall be kept up until the IWF inactivity timer expires. This time
25 should be approximately 15 seconds after termination of the first Telnet session.
26 • The IP address of the mobile station recorded in steps d and h shall be identical (this
27 verifies the mobile station remained in dormant mode due to inactivity timer expiration).

28 11.10 Radio Link Protocol (RLP) Operation in Rayleigh Fading

29 11.10.1 Definition
30 This test exercises the RLP layer negative acknowledgments (NAKs), re-transmits, RLP aborts,
31 RLP resets, and FCSs. The test conditions are intended to impose one or more occurrences of the
32 following.
33 • Single, double, and triple NAK RLP retransmit events
34 • RLP Abort

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-8

1 • RLP Reset
2 This test verifies that RLP recovers erased data frames in various channel conditions.
3 Traceability: IS-707

4 11.10.2 Method of Measurement


5 a. Setup the mobile station and base station as shown in Figures 11.10.2-1, and
6 11.10.2-2 for the forward and reverse link tests respectively, with the fading
7 simulator placed in the target link. Setup the channel simulators for 3-Ray Rayleigh
8 at 30 km/hr.
9

10
11 Figure 11.10.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading in Forward Link
12

13
14 Figure 11.10.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading in Reverse Link
15
16 b. Calibrate the target link nominal attenuation so the frame erasure rate (FER) is
17 measured to be 3 ±1%
18 c. Restore the RF link to a normal operating condition, which maintains the target
19 FER (1% or less).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-9

1 d. Initiate an FTP session with the remote host.


2 e. On the forward link, issue a binary 'get' command from the TE2 to start receiving
3 the 200,000 byte binary file, RAND200.BIN (Data Services Annex D). For the reverse
4 link test, at TE2 issue a binary 'put' command to start sending the 200,000 byte
5 binary file, RAND200.BIN (Data Services Annex D), to the remote host.
6 f. As soon as the file transfer has started (and is still in progress), set the channel
7 conditions as calibrated in step b. These channel conditions shall be maintained for
8 the duration of the file transfer.
9 g. Repeat the test with file transfer occurring in the opposite direction.

10 11.10.3 Minimum Standard


11 • The file shall be successfully transferred in each direction.
12 • Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original files.
13 • Transfer rates shall be no less than 70% of the rates measured in test 11.2 for the
14 corresponding rate set.

15 11.11 RLP Abort and Upper Layer Retransmit

16 11.11.1 Definition
17 This test causes the RLP layer to abort and reset due to extremely severe CDMA channel
18 conditions, and forces an upper layer to retransmit packets.
19 Channel degradation consists of forcing consecutive frame erasures for periods greater than 2.6
20 seconds (2.6 seconds corresponds to 130 consecutive frame erasures), but less than the time that
21 would cause the call to drop (typically 5 seconds).
22 Traceability: [see 15]

23 11.11.2 Method of Measurement


24 a. Setup the mobile station and base station as shown in Figures 11.11.2-1 and
25 11.11.2-2 for the forward and the reverse link tests respectively, with
26 PWR_THRESH_ENABLE and PWR_PERIOD_ENABLE set to 0. Disable forward link
27 power control at the base station.

28 b. Calibrate the test setup so that:


29 1) There is sufficient isolation with the forward link switch open, so that a
30 call drops if the switch is left open for more than 5 seconds

31 2) When the switch is open, the forward or reverse link is disabled at the
32 receiver
33 3) When the switch is closed, the forward or reverse link is enabled at the
34 receiver
35 c. Set the RF link to the normal operating condition, which maintains the target FER
36 (1% or less).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-10

1 d. Initiate an FTP session with the remote host.


2 e. For the forward link test, issue a binary "get" command from the TE2 to start
3 receiving the 200,000 byte binary file, RAND200.BIN (Data Services Annex D). For
4 reverse link test, at TE2 issue a binary ”put” command to start sending the 200,000
5 byte binary file, RAND200.BIN (Data Services Annex D), to the remote host.
6 f. Once file transfer has started and is in progress, open and close the switch in an
7 alternating fashion, for periods of T1 and T2 where:
8 1) T1 is the period when the switch is open (RF link impaired), and it is
9 anywhere between 2.6 and 5.0 seconds.
10 2) T2 is the period when the switch is closed (RF link restored), and it is a
11 minimum of 10 seconds. Repeat opening and closing the switch exactly three times
12 while data transfer is taking place.
13 g. Repeat the test with the file transfer occurring in the opposite direction.
14 h. If the mobile station and the base station support alternate rate sets, repeat the test
15 using all alternate rate sets.
16

17
18 Figure 11.11.2-1 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Forward Link
19

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-11

1
2 Figure 11.11.2-2 Test Setup for RLP Abort in Reverse Link
3

4 11.11.3 Minimum Standard

5 • The file shall be successfully transferred in each direction.


6 • Log files shall be complete and identical in content to the original files.
7 • Transfer rates shall be no less than 70% of rates measured in test 11.2.2 for the
8 corresponding rate set.

9 11.12 RLP Encryption Negotiation

10 11.12.1 Definition
11 This test will verify interoperability of the mobile station and base station in various RLP
12 encryption configurations. Configurations tested are dependent upon capabilities of the mobile
13 station and the base station. RLP Encryption is controlled by the base station for the purpose of
14 encryption export compliance.
15 Traceability: [see 15]

16 11.12.2 Method of Measurement


17 For each configuration in Table 11.12.2 -1 supported by the mobile station and base station, a
18 test should be performed and the outcome verified per the last column of this table.
19 Table 4.3.2-1 column labels have the following meaning:
20 BS Requirement If ‘Yes’, the base station is currently configured to require RLP
21 Encryption for the connection of this service option.
22 MS Support If ‘Yes’, the mobile station supports RLP Encryption for this service
23 option.
24 Service If ‘Yes’, the packet data service shall be granted.
25

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-12

1 Table 11.12.2 -1 RLP Encryption Configurations

Configuration # Base Station Mobile Station Service


Requirement Support
1 Yes No No
2 Yes Yes Yes
3 No No Yes
4 No Yes Mobile Station
Dependent
2
3 a. For each configuration in Table 11.12.2 -1 supported by the mobile station and base
4 station, make a packet data call by issuing a 'ping' command to the remote host.
5 b. Record outcome.

6 11.12.3 Minimum Standard


7 Configuration 1 Packet Data service shall be denied.
8 Configuration 2 Packet Data service shall be granted.
9 Configuration 3 Packet Data service shall be granted.
10 Configuration 4 If mobile station requires RLP Encryption, Packet Data service shall be
11 denied. Otherwise, Packet Data service shall be granted.

12 11.13 Hardware Flow Control

13 11.13.1 Definition
14 This test verifies Rm interface hardware flow control when Rm throughput exceeds Um
15 throughput.
16 Traceability: TIA/EIA-232-E 4.4.5, TIA/EIA/IS-131, TIA/EIA/IS-70

17 11.13.2 Method of Measurement


18 a. Ensure Rm baud rate is greater than Um data rate (an Rm baud rate of 19.2 kbps will
19 work for both rate sets).
20 b. Enable hardware flow control on the Rm interface.

21 c. Initiate an FTP session with the remote host.


22 d. Transfer the COMPFILE.RAW file from the TE2 to the remote host using the binary
23 'put' command.

24 11.13.3 Minimum Standard


25 • The file shall be successfully transferred.
26 • Received file shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-13

1 11.14 Re-connect after Hard Handoff

2 11.14.1 Definition
3 A mobile station with a dormant packet session does not register with a base station while it is up
4 on a traffic channel. The mobile station must therefore perform a reconnect after it completes
5 hard handoff for the network to know how to route a mobile station destined packet. This test
6 verifies that when the hard handoff re-connect feature is enabled, the mobile station reconnects
7 the packet data service option after it successfully completes a hard handoff. This test is required
8 only for base stations which have the Hard Handoff Re-Connect feature enabled per Section
9 2.2.4.5 of IS-707. This test is required only for mobile and base stations that support
10 simultaneous voice and packet data. This test is required only for mobile stations that support
11 fixed IP addresses (CDPD mobiles).
12 Traceability: (See [15] )-A

13 11.14.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Issue a 'ping' command to the remote host.
15 b. Wait for packet data inactivity timer to expire and the traffic channel to be released.
16 c. Start a call.
17 d. While remaining in the call perform a hard handoff to a base station served by a
18 different IWF.
19 e. While remaining in the call, issue a “ping” command from the remote host to the
20 mobile station.

21 11.14.3 Minimum Standard


22 The remote host shall receive a “ping” response from the mobile station.

23 11.15 Zone-Based Registration for Packet Data Mobile Stations

24 11.15.1 Definition
25 This test verifies the BS/MSC can selectively activate IS-95 zone-based registration for mobile
26 stations with active packet data service. This test is required only for base stations that support
27 the optional packet data zone-based registration feature.
28 Traceability:
29 [see 4] 2.6.5.1.5
30 [see 15]

31 11.15.2 Method of Measurement


32 a. Disable zone-based registration at the base station for voice users.
33 b. Enable zone-based registration at the base station for packet data users.
34 c. Ensure the mobile station is not in an active packed data session.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 11-14

1 d. Ensure zone-based registration does not occur when mobile station moves to a new
2 zone.

3 e. Activate packet data service for the mobile station (“ping” a remote host).
4 f. Wait for the packet data inactivity timer to expire.
5 g. While the packet data service remains active, move the mobile station to a new zone
6 containing the same SID.

7 11.15.3 Minimum Standard


8 • The mobile station shall not perform zone-based registration prior to packet data service
9 activation.
10 • The mobile station shall perform zone-based registration after packet service activation
11 when moved between zones.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-1

2 12 MEDIUM-SPEED PACKET DATA


3 Table 12-1 Medium-Speed Packet Data Services tests for RC1 and RC2.
4
5 Table 12-1 Medium-Speed Packet Data Tests

Test No. Title


12.1 File Transfer with Forward and Supplemental Code Channels
12.2 File Transfer with Variable Supplemental Code Channels
12.3 MSPD Call Setup, No Negotiation
12.4 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to a Different HSPD Service Option
12.5 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to LSPD
12.6 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile station Maximum Multiplex Option Less than Base
Station Maximum Multiplex Option
12.7 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile station Maximum Multiplex Option Greater than Base
Station Maximum Multiplex Option
12.8 Allocation/De-allocation of Supplemental Code Channels
12.9 No Transmission on Supplemental Code Channels
12.10 Soft Handoff with Supplemental Code Channels
12.11 Adding Supplemental Code Channels during Soft Handoff
12.12 Hard Handoff to an MSPD-Capable System
12.13 RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment
12.14 RLP Operation with Severely Degraded Channel
12.15 Bi-Directional File Transfers with Supplemental Code Channels
12.16 Rm Interface Hardware Flow Control
12.17 Dormant Timer
12.18 Packet Zone ID
6
7 Note: For mobile station terminated calls, the mobile station must be in dormancy mode (with
8 assigned IP address) in order for terminated call procedures to work.

9 12.1 Forward File Transfer with Fundamental and Supplemental Code Channels

10 12.1.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that during the MSPD call, the measured forward throughput rate on the
12 Fundamental Code Channel and the Supplemental Code Channels matches the target throughput
13 rate under each of the following conditions:
14 • No Supplemental Code Channels allocated (Test 1).

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-2

1 • One Supplemental Code Channel allocated (Test 2).


2 • N Supplemental Code Channels allocated, where N is the maximum number of
3 Supplemental Code Channels that can be supported by the system (Test 3).
4 Traceability:
5 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;

6 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

7 12.1.2 Method of Measurement


8 a. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.

9 b. Setup an FTP session using Service Option 22 with the remote host. From the base
10 station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental Channel
11 Assignment Message to allocate Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station
12 according to the following conditions:
13 1) For Test 1, the base station shall allocate no Supplemental Code Channel
14 to the mobile station (i.e. MUX Option = 1).
15 2) For Test 2, the base station shall allocate one Supplemental Code
16 Channel to the mobile station (i.e. MUX Option = 3).
17 3) For Test 3, the base station shall allocate N Supplemental Code
18 Channels to the mobile station (i.e. MUX Option = 2N+1).
19 c. Transfer the file from the remote host to the TE2M using the binary “get” command.
20 d. Record the elapsed time on the forward link of the Fundamental Code Channel
21 during the file transfer.
22 e. After the file transfer is completed, end the FTP session
23 f. Repeat steps b through e for Tests 2 and 3.
24 g. Repeat steps b through f for Tests 1, 2, and 3 with Service Option 25.

25 12.1.3 Minimum Standard


26 The file shall be transferred successfully and under ideal channel conditions, the file transfer
27 shall be completed within 8 x M / (0.625 x R x (N + 1)) seconds.
28 where:
29 N = number of allocated Supplemental Code Channels
30 M = size of the file (in bytes)
31 R = RLP payload in bps (8000 bps for Rate Set 1 or 12800 bps for Rate Set 2)
32 0.625 represents the acceptable margin for overhead and channel errors
33 Note that the file transfer time requirement is based on the following assumptions:
34 • N Supplemental Code Channels are allocated for the entire duration of
35 the file transfer.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-3

1 • Supplemental Code Channel utilization is 100%.

2 12.2 Forward File Transfer with Variable Supplemental Code Channels

3 12.2.1 Definition
4 This test verifies the capability to transfer files from a remote host using FTP, with a variable
5 number of Supplemental Code Channels. This test is intended to exercise bursty data transfer
6 with variable peak transfer rates.
7 This test may require the use of an OA&M interface on the base station, or any other method
8 specific to the base station manufacturer, in order to vary the number of allocated Supplemental
9 Code Channels.
10 Traceability:
11 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;
12 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

13 12.2.2 Method of Measurement


14 a. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
15 b. Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to
16 N.
17 c. Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
18 d. Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP
19 session.
20 e. From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message to allocate N
21 Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
22 f. Verify from the mobile station that N Supplemental Code Channels are being used.
23 g. Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
24 h. During through the file transfer, configure the base station to generate a General
25 Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental Channel Assignment Message to
26 reduce the number of Supplemental Code Channels allocated to the mobile station.

27 i. Record time elapsed during file transfer.


28 j. End FTP session.
29 k. Repeat steps d through j with Service Option 25.

30 12.2.3 Minimum Standard


31 The file shall be transferred successfully in each direction, and, under ideal channel conditions,
32 the file transfer shall be completed within:
33 8 x M / (0.625 x R x (S + 1)) seconds where:
34 S = smallest number of Supplemental Code Channels allocated at any point
35 M = size of the file (in bytes)

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-4

1 R = RLP payload in bps (8000 bps for Rate Set 1 or 12800 bps for Rate Set 2)
2 0.625 represents the acceptable margin for overhead and channel errors

3 12.3 MSPD Call Setup, No Negotiation

4 12.3.1 Definition
5 This test verifies that the base station and the mobile station can successfully establish mobile
6 station-originated and mobile station-terminated calls using all combinations of supported
7 Service Option 22 through Service Option 25, using the default multiplex options.
8 Traceability:
9 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

10 12.3.2 Method of Measurement


11 a. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.
12 b. Configure the mobile station’s forward MUX Option to (2N+1) where N is the
13 maximum number of Supplemental Code Channels.
14 c. Configure the base station’s MUX Option to a value equal to (2N+1).
15 d. Setup a mobile station originated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP
16 session with the remote host.
17 e. Verify that N Supplemental Code Channels are being used by the mobile station.
18 f. Transfer the file from remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
19 g. After the file transfer is completed in step f, transfer the file from the TE2M to the
20 remote host using the binary “put” command.
21 h. End FTP session.
22 i. Repeat steps d through h by initiating a mobile station terminated call with Service
23 Option 22.
24 j. Repeat steps b through i for Service Option 25. The base station’s MUX Option
25 should be set to (2N+2).

26 k. Repeat steps d through i for mobile station terminated calls by setting the Service
27 Option to 23 at the base station.
28 l. Repeat steps d through i for mobile station terminated calls by setting the Service
29 Option to 24 at the base station.

30 12.3.3 Minimum Standard


31 • For mobile-originated and mobile terminated calls with Service Option 22, verify the
32 call is completed using Service Option 22.
33 • For mobile-originated and mobile terminated calls with Service Option 25, verify the
34 call is completed using Service Option 25.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-5

1 • For mobile terminated calls with Service Option 23, verify the call is completed
2 using Service Option 23. Note that for mobile stations that do not support Service
3 Option 23 the call should be completed with Service Option 25.
4 • For mobile terminated calls with Service Option 24, Verify the call is completed
5 using Service Option 24. Note that for mobile stations that do not support Service
6 Option 24 the call should be completed with Service Option 25.
7 • In all tests conducted, the files shall be successfully transferred. Received files shall
8 be complete and identical in content to the original file.

9 12.4 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to a Different MSPD Service Option

10 12.4.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that the base station and the mobile station can successfully negotiate from
12 Service Option 22 to Service Option 25, and vice versa.
13 Traceability:

14 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

15 12.4.2 Method of Measurement


16 k. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.

17 Configure the mobile station’s forward MUX Option to the default MUX Option.
18 Configure the base station’s Service Option to 25 and configure the base station’s MUX Option
19 to a value equal to or greater than the mobile station’s MUX Option number.

20 Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session
21 with the remote host.
22 Verify the call is negotiated to Service Option 25.
23 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
24 After the file transfer is completed in step f, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
25 using the binary “put” command.
26 End FTP session.
27 Configure the base station’s Service Option to 22.
28 Setup a mobile station originated call using Service Option 25 and establish an FTP session
29 with the remote host.
30 Verify the call is negotiated to Service Option 22.
31 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.

32 After the file transfer is completed in step l, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
33 using the binary “put” command.
34 End FTP session.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-6

1 12.4.3 Minimum Standard


2 • The call shall be successfully established in each of the following cases:

3 • Mobile station originates with Service Option 22, base station proposes Service
4 Option 25; the call is established using Service Option 25. The file shall be
5 successfully transferred without error.
6 • Mobile station originates with Service Option 25, base station propose Service
7 Option 22; the call is established using Service Option 22. The file shall be
8 successfully transferred without error.

9 12.5 MSPD Call Setup, Negotiation to LSPD

10 12.5.1 Definition
11 This test verifies that the base station and the mobile station can successfully negotiate from
12 MSPD to LSPD service options.
13 Traceability:

14 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5


15

16 12.5.2 Method of Measurement

17 12.5.2.1 MSPD-Capable Mobile station


18 l. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.
19 For Test 1, configure the mobile station to originate a call with Service Option 22. This may be
20 done by issuing the AT command AT+CMUX=3,1.
21 Configure the base station to Service Option 7.
22 Setup a mobile station originated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session
23 with the remote host.
24 Verify from the Origination Message the appropriate Service Option number that is requested
25 by the mobile station.
26 Record the Service Option used to set up the FTP session.
27 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
28 After the file transfer is completed in step g, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
29 using the binary “put” command.
30 End FTP session.
31 For Test 2, configure the base station’s Service Option to 15 and the mobile station’s Service
32 Option to 22 and repeat steps d through i.
33 For Test 3, configure the base station’s Service Option to 15 and the mobile station’s Service
34 Option to 25 (i.e. set AT+CMUX=4,2) and repeat steps d through i.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-7

1 For Test 4, configure the base station’s Service Option to 7 and the mobile station’s Service
2 Option to 25 (i.e. set AT+CMUX=4,2) and repeat steps d through i.

3 12.5.2.2 Non MSPD-Capable Mobile station


4 m. Ensure the mobile station is not MDR capable.
5 Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.

6 For Test 5, configure the mobile station with Service Option 15. This can be accomplished by
7 issuing the AT command AT+CMUX=2,2.
8 Configure the base station to page the mobile station with Service Option 22.

9 Set up a mobile station terminated call and establish an FTP session.


10 Verify from the General Page Message the Service Option number that is requested by the base
11 station.
12 Record the Service Option number used to set up the FTP session.
13 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
14 After the file transfer is completed in step h, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
15 using the binary “put” command.
16 End FTP session.
17 For Test 6, configure base station Service Option to 25 and repeat steps e through j.

18 12.5.3 Minimum Standard


19 In all tests conducted, the files shall be successfully transferred. Received files shall be complete
20 and identical in content to the original file.
21 The call shall be successfully established in each of the following case scenarios:
22 • For Test 1, the mobile station originates with Service Option 22, base station
23 proposes Service Option 7; the call is established using Service Option 7.
24 • For Test 2, the mobile station originates with Service Option 22, base station
25 proposes Service Option 15; the call is established using Service Option 15.
26 • For Test 3, the mobile station originates with Service Option 25, base station
27 proposes Service Option 15; the call is established using Service Option 15.
28 • For Test 4, the mobile station originates with Service Option 25, base station
29 proposes Service Option 7; the call is established using Service Option 7.
30 • For Test 5, the base station pages mobile station with Service Option 22, mobile
31 station proposes Service Option 15; the call is established using Service Option 15.
32 • For Test 6, the base station pages mobile station with Service Option 25, mobile
33 station proposes Service Option 15; the call is established with Service Option 15.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-8

1 12.6 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile Station Maximum Multiplex Option Less than Base Station
2 Maximum Multiplex Option

3 12.6.1 Definition
4 This test verifies that an MSPD call can be successfully established when the maximum
5 multiplex option supported by the mobile station is less than the maximum multiplex option
6 supported by the base station.
7 Traceability:

8 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

9 12.6.2 Method of Measurement


10 n. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.
11 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to (2n+1) where n is equal to N
12 or 6, whichever is smaller, where N is the maximum number of Supplemental Code Channels
13 supported by the mobile station (i.e. set AT+CMUX=2n+1,1)

14 Configure the base station’s MUX Option to a value equal to (2(n+1)+1).


15 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
16 Verify the number of Supplemental Code Channels used to establish FTP session is n.

17 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
18 After the file transfer is completed in step f, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
19 using the binary “put” command.

20 End FTP session.


21 Repeat steps d through h with Service Option 25 by setting the maximum forward MUX Option
22 of the mobile station to (2n+2) and the MUX Option of the base station to (2(n+1)+2).

23 12.6.3 Minimum Standard


24 The mobile station and the base station shall successfully negotiate to the maximum multiplex
25 option set at the mobile station. In all tests conducted, the files shall be successfully transferred.
26 Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.

27 12.7 MSPD Call Setup, Mobile station Maximum Multiplex Option Greater than Base
28 Station Maximum Multiplex Option

29 12.7.1 Definition
30 This test verifies that an MSPD call can be successfully established when the maximum
31 multiplex option supported by the mobile station is greater than the maximum multiplex option
32 supported by the base station.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-9

1 Traceability:
2 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

3 12.7.2 Method of Measurement


4 o. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.
5 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to (2N+1) where N is the
6 maximum number of Supplemental Code Channels supported by the mobile station (i.e. set
7 AT+CMUX=2N+1,1)
8 Configure the base station’s MUX Option to a value equal to (2(N-1)+1).

9 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
10 Verify the number of Supplemental Code Channels used in establishing the FTP session is (N-
11 1).
12 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
13 After the file transfer is completed in step f, transfer the file from the TE2M to the remote host
14 using the binary “put” command.
15 End FTP session.
16 Repeat steps d through h with Service Option 25 by setting the maximum forward MUX Option
17 of the mobile station to (2N+2) and MUX Option of the base station to (2(N-1)+2).

18 12.7.3 Minimum Standard


19 The mobile station and the base station shall successfully negotiate to the maximum multiplex
20 option set at the base station. In all tests conducted, the files shall be successfully transferred.
21 Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file.

22 12.8 Allocation/De-allocation of Supplemental Code Channels

23 12.8.1 Definition
24 This test verifies allocation and de-allocation of up to N Supplemental Code Channels using the
25 General Handoff Direction Message (GHDM), and Supplemental Code Channel Assignment
26 Message (SCAM). N is the maximum number of forward Supplemental Code Channels that can
27 be supported by the system. The first test uses n Supplemental Code Channels, where n is any
28 number greater than zero and less than the maximum N. The second test uses the maximum N
29 Supplemental Code Channels. This test also exercises all supported values of the
30 FOR_SUP_CONFIG and USE_FOR_DURATION fields.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-10

1 Traceability:
2 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;

3 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1

4 12.8.2 Method of Measurement

5 12.8.2.1 Allocation and De-Allocation of n Supplemental Code Channels using GHDM


6 p. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
7 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to (2N+1) where N is the
8 maximum number of Supplemental Code Channels supported by the mobile station (i.e. set
9 AT+CMUX=2N+1,1)
10 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
11 Verify only the forward Fundamental Code Channel is used in establishing the FTP session.
12 Configure the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message with
13 FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3, USE_FOR_DURATION=0 and assign n forward
14 Supplemental Code Channels (where n < N and n > 0) to the mobile station.
15 Verify that n Supplemental Code Channels are being used by the mobile station.
16 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
17 Record time elapsed for the file transfer.
18 Configure the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message with
19 FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3, USE_FOR_DURATION=0 and assign 0 forward
20 Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
21 Verify the number of Supplemental Code Channels used by the mobile station.
22 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
23 Record time elapsed for the file transfer.
24 End FTP session.
25 Repeat steps c through m using Service Option 25.

26 12.8.2.2 Allocation and De-Allocation of N Supplemental Code Channels using SCAM


27 q. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
28 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to (2N+1) where N is the
29 maximum number of Supplemental Code Channels supported by the mobile station (i.e. set
30 AT+CMUX=2N+1,1)
31 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
32 Verify that only the forward Fundamental Code Channel is used in establishing the FTP
33 session.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-11

1 Configure the base station to send a Supplemental Code Channel Assignment Message with
2 FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3, USE_FOR_DURATION=0, USE_FOR_HDM_SEQ=0
3 and assign N forward Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
4 Verify that N Supplemental Code Channels are used by the mobile station.
5 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
6 Record time elapsed for the file transfer.
7 Configure the base station to send a Supplemental Code Channel Assignment Message with
8 FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3, USE_FOR_DURATION=0, USE_FOR_HDM_SEQ=0
9 and assign 0 forward Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
10 Verify the number of Supplemental Code Channels used by the mobile station.
11 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
12 Record time elapsed for the file transfer.
13 End FTP session.
14 Repeat steps c through m using Service Option 25.

15 12.8.3 Minimum Standard

16 12.8.3.1 Allocation and De-Allocation of n Supplemental Code Channels using GHDM


17 In 12.3.3.1.2.1, the Supplemental Code Channels shall be successfully allocated (step e) and de-
18 allocated (step i). The time elapsed for file transfer in step h should be (120/(n+1))% of the
19 elapsed time in step l.

20 12.8.3.2 Allocation and De-Allocation of N Supplemental Code Channels using SCAM


21 In 12.3.3.1.2.2, the Supplemental Code Channels shall be successfully allocated (step e) and de-
22 allocated (step i). The time elapsed for file transfer in step h should be (120/(N+1))% of the
23 elapsed time in step l.

24 12.9 No Transmission on Supplemental Code Channels

25 12.9.1 Definition
26 This test verifies that data transfer is not interrupted if the base station stops transmitting on one
27 or more allocated Supplemental Code Channels. Note that if the base station does not allow a
28 Supplemental Code Channel to remain idle when there is no data to be transmitted on the
29 Supplemental Code Channel, this test may require the use of an OA&M interface on the base
30 station or some other method specific to the base-station manufacturer.
31 Traceability:
32 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;
33 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1

34 12.9.2 Method of Measurement


35 r. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-12

1 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to 5 or greater.


2 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.

3 Configure the base station to send a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental Code
4 Channel Assignment Message with FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3,
5 USE_FOR_DURATION=0, USE_FOR_HDM_SEQ=0 and assign 2 forward Supplemental Code
6 Channels to the mobile station.
7 Verify the MUX Option used in establishing the FTP session.
8 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.

9 Record time elapsed during file transfer.


10 Configure the base station to send data on the Fundamental Code Channel only while the 2
11 Supplemental Code Channels are still active.
12 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
13 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
14 End FTP session.
15 Repeat steps c through k with Service Option 25.
16
17 12.9.3 Minimum Standard
18 Data transfer shall proceed normally after the base station stops transmitting on one or more
19 allocated Supplemental Code Channels. In all tests conducted, the files shall be successfully
20 transferred. Received files shall be complete and identical in content to the original file. The time
21 elapsed recorded in step g should be less than 40% the time elapsed recorded in step j.

22 12.10 Soft Handoff with Supplemental Code Channels

23 12.10.1 Definition
24 This test verifies that the fundamental and Supplemental Code Channels can be put in two-way
25 soft handoff during an MSPD call with N Supplemental Code Channels active, where N is the
26 maximum number of Forward Supplemental Code Channels that can be supported by the system.
27 This test includes the following cases:
28 • Fundamental Code Channel and Supplemental Code Channels in handoff, two cells
29 transmit Supplemental Code Channels.
30 • Fundamental Code Channel in handoff, only one cell transmits Supplemental Code
31 Channels.
32 Traceability:
33 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2.3, 3.6.6.2.2.10, 3.6.6.2.4;
34 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1

35 12.10.2 Method of Measurement


36 s. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-13

1 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward MUX Option to (2N+1) where N is the
2 maximum number of forward Supplemental Code Channels available for the mobile station.

3 Configure each base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.


4 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session
5 with base station #1.
6 Configure the base station to set up N Forward Supplemental Code Channels in traffic state.
7 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
8 While the file is being transferred, adjust the signal strength of base station #2 until both base
9 stations have equal transmit power.
10 Generate a General Handoff Direction Message for two-way soft-handoff with base station #2. In
11 both test cases 1 and 2, generate the GHDM with FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3,
12 NUM_FOR_SUP=N, and USE_FOR_DURATION=0.
13 For Test 1: In the GHDM, set the FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=1 for each pilot to be included in
14 handoff and configure both base stations to send data on all Supplemental Code Channels.
15 For Test 2: In the GHDM, set the FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=1 for base station #1 and
16 FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=0 for base station #2. Configure base station #1 to transmit data on all
17 Supplemental Code Channels. Configure base station #2 to transmit data on the Fundamental
18 Code Channel only.
19 Verify the file transfer continues after the handoff.
20 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
21 End FTP session.
22 Repeat steps d through m with Service Option 25.

23 12.10.3 Minimum Standard


24 In each test, the mobile station shall successfully perform the handoff, and data transfer shall
25 continue after the handoff. Under ideal channel conditions, the measured throughput in each case
26 should be close to the measured throughput with no handoff.

27 12.11 Adding Supplemental Code Channels during Soft Handoff

28 12.11.1 Definition
29 This test verifies that N Supplemental Code Channels can be added in an MSPD call while in
30 two-way soft handoff on the Fundamental Code Channel, where N is the maximum number of
31 Supplemental Code Channels that can be supported by the system. This test includes the
32 following cases:
33 • N Supplemental Code Channels added on all cells.
34 • N Supplemental Code Channels added on one cell only.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-14

1 Traceability:
2 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2.3, 3.6.6.2.2.10, 3.6.6.2.4;

3 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1

4 12.11.2 Method of Measurement


5 t. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.

6 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.


7 Configure each base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
8 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session
9 with base station #1 on the Fundamental Code Channel only.
10 Adjust the signal strength of base station #2 until both base stations have equal transmit
11 power.
12 Verify the mobile station is in two-way handoff.
13 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
14 Generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental Channel Assignment Message
15 with FOR_INCLUDED=1, FOR_SUP_CONFIG=3, NUM_FOR_SUP=N, and
16 USE_FOR_DURATION=0.
17 For Case 1: In the GHDM, set the FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=1 for each pilot to be included in
18 handoff and configure both base stations to send data on all Supplemental Code Channels.
19 For Case 2: In the GHDM, set the FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=1 for base station #1 and
20 FOR_SUP_INCLUDED=0 for base station #2. Configure base station #1 to transmit data on all
21 Supplemental Code Channels. Configure base station #2 to transmit data on the Fundamental
22 Code Channel only.
23 Verify the file transfer continues after Supplemental Code Channel assignment during handoff.
24 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
25 End FTP session.
26 Repeat steps d through m with Service Option 25.

27 12.11.3 Minimum Standard


28 In each case, the mobile station shall successfully perform the handoff, and data transfer shall
29 continue after the handoff. Under ideal channel conditions, the measured throughput in each case
30 should be close to the measured throughput with no handoff.

31 12.12 Hard Handoff to an MSPD-Capable System


32 Note that an MSPD call should be dropped during a hard handoff from a higher P_REV system
33 to a lower P_REV system. Tests that simply drop calls are not to be performed, therefore there is
34 no test for this situation.

35 12.12.1 Definition
36 This test verifies hard handoff to an MSPD-capable system during an MSPD call.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-15

1 Traceability:
2 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2.3, 3.6.6.2.2.10, 3.6.6.2.4;

3 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1

4 12.12.2 Method of Measurement

5 12.12.2.1 Hard Handoff to Same P_REV


6 u. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
7 Make sure the MOB_P_REV=4 or higher.
8 Base station #1 should be configured for P_REV=5 or higher.

9 Base station #2 should be configured for P_REV=5 or higher with a different frequency channel
10 from base station #1.
11 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.
12 Configure both base stations to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
13 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22 and establish an FTP session
14 with base station #1 with N Supplemental Code Channels.
15 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
16 While the file is being transferred, adjust the signal strength of base station #2 until both base
17 stations have equal transmit power.
18 At base station #1, setup a hard handoff to base station #2 using the Extended Handoff
19 Direction Message.
20 Verify at the base station that the hard handoff is successful.
21 Verify base station #2 generates a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
22 Channel Assignment Message to assign N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
23 Verify at the base station that service negotiation is successful and that the mobile station is
24 using Service Option 22 with N Supplemental Code Channels.
25 Verify the file transfer continues after the hard handoff.
26 End FTP session.
27 Repeat steps g through o with Service Option 25.

28 12.12.2.2 Hard Handoff to Higher P_REV


29 v. Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
30 Make sure the MOB_P_REV=4 or higher.
31 Base station #1 should be configured for P_REV=3.
32 Base station #2 should be configured for P_REV=5 or higher with a different frequency channel
33 from base station #1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-16

1 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.


2 Configure base station #2 to support N Supplemental Code Channels.

3 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 7 and establish an FTP session with
4 base station #1 (on the Fundamental Code Channel only).
5 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.

6 While the file is being transferred, adjust the signal strength of base station #2 until both base
7 stations have equal transmit power.
8 At base station #1, setup a hard handoff to base station #2 using the Extended Handoff
9 Direction Message.
10 Verify at the base station that the hard handoff is successful.
11 Verify at the mobile station that Service Option 7 is still in use.
12 Verify the file transfer continues after the hard handoff.
13 End FTP session.
14 Repeat steps g through n with Service Option 15.

15 12.12.3 Minimum Standard

16 12.12.3.1 Hard Handoff to the same P_REV


17 The mobile station shall successfully perform the handoff, and data transfer shall continue on
18 both the fundamental and Supplemental Code Channel after the handoff. The file shall be
19 successfully transferred without error. Note that the Supplemental Code Channels are dropped
20 just before the hard handoff and re-assigned after the hard handoff.

21 12.12.3.2 Hard Handoff to Higher P_REV


22 The mobile station shall successfully perform the handoff, and data transfer shall continue after
23 the hard handoff. The file shall be successfully transferred without error.

24 12.13 RLP Operation in Rayleigh Fading Environment

25 12.13.1.1 Definition
26 This test verifies data transfer under 3 Ray Rayleigh channel conditions at 100km/hr, with
27 Supplemental Code Channels. This test verifies that RLP recovers erased data frames, and is
28 intended to exercise RLP negative acknowledgements (NAKs), retransmissions, and aborts in the
29 forward direction.
30 Traceability:
31 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;
32 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

33 12.13.2 Method of Measurement


34 w. Set up the base station and the mobile station as shown in figure 12.13.2-1.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-17

1
2 Figure 12.13.2-1 Functional setup for testing packet data testing in fading
3 Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.
4 Set the channel simulator using the parameters as specified in Table 12.13.2-1.
5 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
6 Configure the base station to assign one Supplemental Code Channel to the mobile station
7 using the General Handoff Direction Message or the Supplemental Channel Assignment
8 Message.
9 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
10 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
11 End FTP session.
12 Repeat steps d through h with Service Option 25.
13 Table 12.13.2-1 MSPD Test Parameters - 100 km/hr
Parameter Unit Value

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-18

Vehicle Speed km/hr 100


Number of Paths # 3
Path 2 Power dB 0
(Relative to Path 1)
Path 3 Power dB -3
(Relative to Path 1)
Delay from Path 1 to Input µs 0
Delay from Path 2 to Input µs 2
Delay from Path 3 to Input µs 14.5

1 12.13.3 Minimum Standard


2 Data transfer shall be successful, and the data transfer throughput shall be no less than 70% of
3 the throughput measured in section 10.3.1.1 Test 2.

4 12.14 RLP Operation with Severely Degraded Channel

5 12.14.1 Definition
6 This test verifies data transfer under severely degraded channel conditions, with Supplemental
7 Code Channels. This test is intended to exercise RLP resets due to long erasure bursts and TCP
8 retransmissions.
9 Traceability:
10 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;
11 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

12 12.14.2 Method of Measurement


13 x. Set up the base station and the mobile station as shown in figure 12.13.2-1.
14 Prepare the RAND200.BIN byte binary file at the remote host.

15 Set the channel simulator to one Ray 3 km/hr Rayleigh fading on the forward link.
16 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
17 Configure the base station to assign one Supplemental Code Channel to the mobile station
18 using the General Handoff Direction Message or the Supplemental Channel Assignment
19 Message.
20 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
21 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
22 End FTP session.
23 Repeat steps d through h with Service Option 25.

24 12.14.3 Minimum Standard


25 Data transfer shall be successful and the data transfer throughput shall be no less than 70% of the
26 throughput measured in section 10.3.1.1 Test 2.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-19

1 12.15 Bi-Directional File Transfers with Forward Supplemental Code Channels

2 12.15.1 Definition
3 This test verifies the capability to transfer files simultaneously on the Forward and Reverse
4 Traffic Channels between the mobile station and remote host using FTP, with forward
5 Supplemental Code Channels active.
6 Traceability:
7 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;
8 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

9 12.15.2 Method of Measurement


10 y. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at both the remote host and the TE2M.
11 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.
12 Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
13 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22.
14 Establish two FTP sessions with the base station; one for the forward link and one for the
15 reverse link.
16 From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
17 Channel Assignment Message to allocate N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
18 Verify from the mobile station that N forward Supplemental Code Channels are being used. The
19 reverse link should be connected with the Fundamental Code Channel only.

20 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
21 While the file is being transferred on the forward link, begin transferring another file from TE2M
22 to the remote host on the reverse link using the binary “put” command.

23 End two FTP sessions.


24 Repeat steps d through i with Service Option 25.

25 12.15.3 Minimum Standard


26 The simultaneous file transfers shall be completed successfully in each direction without error.

27 12.16 Rм Interface Flow Control

28 12.16.1 Definition
29 This test verifies flow control on the Rm Interface, when the Um interface data rate exceeds the
30 Rm interface baud rate.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-20

1 Traceability:
2 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2, 3.6.6.2.2.9, 3.6.6.2.2.10;

3 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.1;

4 12.16.2 Method of Measurement


5 z. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at the remote host.

6 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.


7 Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
8 Configure the RS-232 baud rate in the Rm interface to 4800 bps.

9 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.
10 From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
11 Channel Assignment Message to allocate N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
12 Verify at the mobile station that N Supplemental Code Channels are in use.
13 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
14 Record time elapsed during file transfer.
15 End FTP session.
16 Repeat steps e through j with Service Option 25.

17 12.16.3 Minimum Standard


18 The file shall be transferred successfully from the remote host to the TE2M without error.

19 12.17 Dormant Timer

20 12.17.1 Definition
21 This test verifies the mobile station correctly processes the Service Option Control Message
22 which controls the Dormant Timer, and that the mobile station delays any attempt to send an
23 Origination Message requesting a MSPD service option until the Dormant Timer expires.
24 Traceability:
25 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2.2.1;
26 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

27 12.17.2 Method of Measurement


28 aa. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at the remote host.
29 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.
30 Configure the mobile station’s inactivity timer to 20 seconds by issuing the AT command
31 AT+CTA=20.
32 Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
33 Setup a mobile station terminated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-21

1 From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
2 Channel Assignment Message to allocate N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.

3 From the base station, send the Service Option Control Message with the Packet Data Dormant
4 Timer set to 20 seconds.
5 Verify from the mobile station that N Supplemental Code Channels is been used.
6 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
7 Wait for the mobile station to enter the Control Hold mode due to data inactivity (i.e. when the
8 inactivity timer in the mobile station expires).

9 Setup a mobile station originated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session as
10 soon as the mobile station is in the Control Hold mode.
11 After the call is re-established, transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary
12 “get” command.
13 End FTP session.
14 Repeat steps e through m with Service Option 25.

15 12.17.3 Minimum Standard


16 The mobile station shall set the Dormant Timer value to 20 seconds as specified in the Service
17 Option Control Message, and shall not send an Origination Message requesting a MSPD service
18 option until the Dormant Timer expires. The file shall be transferred successfully from the
19 remote host to the TE2M without error.

20 Note: The time elapsed between the Release Order and the Origination Message should be
21 approximately 20 seconds.

22 12.18 Packet Zone ID

23 12.18.1 Definition
24 This test verifies the following:
25 1) When the mobile station detects a change in the Packet Zone ID in the Extended System
26 Parameters Message or the In-Traffic System Parameters Message and the new Packet Zone ID
27 is not in the Packet Zone ID List the mobile station shall attempt to reconnect the packet data
28 service option.
29 2) When the mobile station detects a change in the Packet Zone ID in the Extended System
30 Parameters Message or the In-Traffic System Parameters Message and the new Packet
31 Zone ID is already in the Packet Zone ID List, the mobile station shall not attempt to
32 reconnect the packet data service option.
33 3) When the mobile station is in the Dormant Mode, if the Dormant Timer does not expire,
34 the mobile station shall not re-originate a data call.
35

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-22

1 Traceability:
2 [see 4] 3.7.3.3.2.2.1;

3 [see 15]-A9; 2.2.2.1.2.5

4 12.18.2 Method of Measurement

5 12.18.2.1 Mobile Station Idle State


6 bb. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at the remote host.
7 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.
8 Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.

9 Configure the mobile station’s inactivity timer to 20 seconds by issuing an AT command.


10 Setup a mobile station originated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session
11 From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
12 Channel Assignment Message to allocate N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
13 From Instruct the base station to, send the Service Option Control Message to the mobile
14 station to enable the PACKET_ZONE_ID with a valid list of PACKET_ZONE_Idsspecify the
15 number of packet data service identifiers that the mobile station is to retain in its packet data
16 zone identifiers list (the number shall be set to 2 or greater). Also set the Packet Data Dormant
17 Timer to 20 seconds.
18 Verify from the mobile station that N Supplemental Code Channels are being used.
19 Transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
20 Make sure there is no data to transmit for 20 seconds.
21 Verify the mobile station enters Dormant/ Mobile Station Idle State due to data inactivity.
22 Change the PACKET_ZONE_ID of the serving system in the Extended System Parameter
23 Message.
24 Verify the mobile station reconnects to the same Service Option when it detects the new
25 PACKET_ZONE_ID.
26 After the call is re-established, transfer the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary
27 “get” command.
28 End FTP session.
29 Repeat steps j through l.
30 Verify the mobile station does not perform a packet zone registration.
31 Repeat steps e through o with Service Option 25.
32 Repeat steps a through f.
33 Instruct the base station to send the Service Option Control Message to the mobile station to set
34 the Dormant Timer to 60 seconds.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 12-23

1 Repeat steps j through k.


2 Attempt to initiate an ftp session to a server at the mobile station.

3 Verify the MS does not send an Origination Message before the Dormant Timer expires.

4 12.18.2.2 Traffic Channel State


5 cc. Prepare the COMPFILE.RAW byte binary file at the remote host.

6 Configure the mobile station’s maximum forward Supplemental Code Channels to N.


7 Configure the base station to support N Supplemental Code Channels.
8 Setup a mobile station originated call with Service Option 22, and establish an FTP session

9 From the base station, generate a General Handoff Direction Message or a Supplemental
10 Channel Assignment Message to allocate N Supplemental Code Channels to the mobile station.
11 From the base station, send the Service Option Control Message to the mobile station to enable
12 the PACKET_ZONE_ID with a valid list of PACKET_ZONE_IDs.
13 Verify from the mobile station that N Supplemental Code Channels are being used.
14 Begin transferring the file from the remote host to TE2M using the binary “get” command.
15 While the file is being transferred, send the Service Option Control Message to the mobile
16 station with a change in the PACKET_ZONE_ID.
17 Change the PACKET_ZONE_ID of the serving system in the In-Traffic System Parameter
18 Message.
19 Verify the mobile station continues file transfer on the new PACKET_ZONE_ID.
20 End FTP session.
21 Repeat steps d through l with Service Option 25.

22 12.18.3 Minimum Standard


23 The mobile station shall detect the change in the Packet Zone ID and shall reconnect the MSPD
24 service option. The file shall be transferred successfully from the remote host to the TE2M
25 without error.

10/19/2001 C.S0031
TSG-C42 Page 13-1

1 13 HIGH SPEED PACKET DATA


2 Table 13-1 High speed packet data tests verifies operation